Coffee Break Languages

View Details

Have you ever wondered when to use just, yet, or already? These three time phrases are commonly used with the present perfect tense, but they each have specific meanings and uses.

Using time phrases and adverbs with the present perfect helps to communicate more effectively and will make your sentences even clearer when having a conversation with people.

The Coffee Break English Show is a podcast series of informal conversations to help you understand some difficult topics in English. In the latest episode, Nick and Francesca explore how to use the present perfect adverbs just, yet and already, correctly.

If you haven’t listened to the podcast episode yet, why not listen to Nick and Francesca as you read?

So let’s get started and look at just, yet and already!

Time Phrases: The Present Perfect with Just, Yet, and AlreadyThese three present perfect adverbs help us describe when an action happened in relation to now. We often use them with the present perfect tense and they have specific positions in a sentence.

JustJust is used to indicate that something happened a very short time ago.

It comes between have/has and the past participle:

I have just finished my homework.

She has just arrived at the station.

In the USA, you are often likely to hear just used with the past simple, not the present perfect! The meaning is exactly the same, though.

Where’s David? He just went out.

YetYet is used to talk about something that has not happened but we expect to happen. We often use them in negative statements and questions.

Yet goes at the end of a sentence:

I haven’t finished my book yet.

Have you eaten yet?

AlreadyAlready is used to show that something happened sooner than expected or before now.

It normally comes between have/has and the past participle but it can sometimes come at the end when we are speaking to create a strong emphasis:

I have already seen this movie.

Wow! She has completed her assignment already!

Let’s reviewHere’s a summary of the time phrases in this episode:

If you found this useful, then you might find Episode 4 of our 2nd season of Coffee Break English helpful! We look at the time phrases for and since with the present perfect.

It’s your turn!Now let’s practise! Which is the right word? Put yet, just or already in the spaces below. The answers are at the end of the blog post but don’t look until you’ve thought about your answers.

If you found this post interesting, then make sure you listen to the full podcast episode with Nick and Francesca on The Coffee Break English Show. This series looks at useful topics to help English learners improve their language skills, so make sure to subscribe to our podcast feed and our channel on YouTube.

Plus, don’t miss your free worksheet – perfect for extra practice after the lesson! When you sign up, you’ll also receive our short coffee break-sized email lessons, delivered straight to your inbox every week, to help you build your English skills. You’ll even hear from Mark, the founder of Coffee Break Languages, who shares regular tips and motivation for learners of all levels. Have you signed up yet? If not, sign up below!

So, start using these time phrases in your conversations! The more you practice, the more confident you will become.

Happy Coffee Breaking!

Here are the answers to the questions in the practice section above:

You can’t watch TV! You haven’t done your homework yet.
Can we watch a different film? I have already watched this one.
Would you like a coffee? No thanks, I’ve just had one.

Listen to the podcastThe post Time Phrases: How to Use Present Perfect Adverbs in English appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

A common question that comes up when considering the adventure of learning a new language is: “How long does it take to learn a new language?”. We believe that the answer isn’t simple, as it is tied to many factors, such as the complexity of the language, your learning environment, and your unique personal circumstances.

Let’s have a look at these factors together to create a clearer picture of what to expect on your exciting language-learning journey. Keep reading – there’s so much to discover!

1. Language complexity and similaritySo, how long does it take to learn a new language? Well, one of the biggest factors that influence this is how similar it is to your native language. For example, if you are a native English speaker, learning a language like Spanish or German might be quicker because these languages share many similarities with English in terms of vocabulary and grammatical structure.

Moreover, learning Italian, French, or Portuguese can be much quicker if you already speak Spanish. In contrast, languages that are structurally different from English, such as Mandarin Chinese, may take more time to master.

2. Time commitment and consistencyAnother factor that determines how long it takes to learn a new language is time commitment. Remember that the time you invest each week really influences how fast you’ll make progress. Regular practice is essential to your journey!

Research suggests that learners who study regularly, even if it’s just 20 minutes a day, tend to make faster progress than those who study sporadically. That is why microlearning and approaches like the one we have here at Coffee Break Languages – which emphasises short, regular study sessions that fit easily into your daily routine – are ideal for people with busy schedules.

The Coffee Break method allows you to make steady progress without feeling overwhelmed by breaking down the language-learning process into manageable chunks. You can dedicate just fifteen minutes each day to listen to a podcast episode and practise vocabulary, all while enjoying your coffee break.

If you’re looking for some great tips on sticking to a language-learning routine, we recommend checking out the video created by Mark, the founder of Coffee Break Languages.

3. Learning environmentThe environment you learn in can also greatly influence your language journey. Typically, immersive settings, where you are surrounded by native speakers and you have the chance to use the language in everyday situations, can really speed up your learning process.

That is why, if you have the opportunity and are fortunate enough to visit a country where you can practise the language you are learning, you should take advantage! Also, if your learning environment or platform offers classes with native speakers, that can also help you learn faster, as you will be able to understand accents and pronunciation in a much easier way.

At the same time, learning and practising with a non-native speaker of the language you’re learning also has an important role to play. If your teacher or speaking-practice partner has learned the language in the same way you have (rather than having grown up speaking it) they’ll understand the language and its complexities from your point of view.

How to accelerate your language learningNow that you understand that the answer to the question ‘How long does it take to learn a new language?’ can vary, it’s great to know there are some strategies you can use to speed up your learning journey! For starters, think about setting your own language-learning goals. Whether it’s reaching conversational fluency, enjoying movies in a new language or ordering a coffee in a different country, each step will bring you closer to your objectives!

After all, clear goals can help you stay motivated and focused. Plus, as we talked about earlier, language-learning apps and podcasts are great tools to boost your skills. And remember, making mistakes is nothing to worry about; it’s actually one of the best ways to learn a language since it’s just a natural part of the journey.

Well, we hope you now understand a little more about how long it takes to learn a new language and what you can do to accelerate the process. In conclusion, by setting clear goals, maintaining a consistent study routine, and engaging in regular practice, you can accelerate your language-learning journey and enjoy the cultural and personal growth that comes with it.

If you want to learn more about how the Coffee Break method can help you achieve your language-learning goals, check out more about the Coffee Break Academy!

The post How long does it take to learn a new language? appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Welcome to Coffee Break Japanese! Join us for lesson 10 and review of all the content we learned from the previous nine lessons of Japanese.

The post CBJ 1.10 | End-of-unit review appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Using the present perfect tense can be difficult for many English learners. This is because it is used in a variety of ways that do not necessarily translate to similar grammar forms in other languages.

The key is to consider the different contexts where you can use the present perfect, and then look at what message we want to express when using the present perfect or other forms. If you can understand this, then you will be a big step closer to managing conversations fluently in English!

The Coffee Break English Show is a podcast series of informal conversations to help you understand some difficult topics in English. In the latest episode, Nick and Francesca look at how to use the present perfect tense for experiences that you have had in the past, plus we explain the difference between been and gone.

Have you made yourself a coffee? Then let’s get started!

The Present Perfect Tense for ExperiencesThe present perfect tense is used to signify a variety of situations, but today we will look specifically at experiences. When we speak to friends or meet people for the first time, we often talk about our experiences. A common question is ‘Have you ever…?’ And a common response is ‘No, I’ve never’ or ‘Yes, I have’.

This gives us our question form for the present perfect, plus the short positive and negative forms. We can also give extra information. See the below conversation:

Been and GoneIn the example above been is used to express the idea of visiting a place. It is important to remember that we are talking about the experience of visiting Paris.

We can consider been as the past participle of go when describing an experience. The idea that we went to a place and then returned. This is also the case when we use a phrase like go skiing in the present perfect (I have been skiing in the Alps).

We use gone with the present perfect to express the idea of movement, or leaving a place. The idea that we went to a place and we haven’t returned. We can see the difference in the dialogue below:

We can see that the wife has returned home but the husband has not. The wife has been to the supermarket but the husband has gone to pick up the children.

So we can use been when we use present perfect for experiences and gone when we use present perfect for recent actions.

For more on been and gone with the present perfect tense, see our 8th episode of Season 1.

Present Perfect Vs Past SimpleWe use the present perfect tense for talking about experiences with no specific detail and we use the past simple to give further information about the experience. Here’s an example:

We can see that the experience is introduced with the question have you ever? and then the follow up question is in the past simple. When we ask for detail we use the past simple, usually using open questions with question words such as who, what, why, when, etc..

From this point on, we normally use the past simple because we are talking about a finished activity and no longer a general experience.

For more practice with choosing the past simple or the present perfect tense, check out Episode 2 of Season 3 of Coffee Break English.

It’s your turn!Now, let’s practise! Try to decide which of the sentences below is a lie. Read to the bottom to find out which sentence is not true… Don’t check until you have guessed!

Coffee Break Languages founder, Mark Pentleton, has learnt 9 foreign languages.

Coffee Break Languages has been nominated for a Lovie Award for Best Science/Education Podcast.

Coffee Break Languages has created a podcast series for pets.

Practice makes a perfect tense!Remember that the present perfect tense is difficult because we use it in a variety of ways and it doesn’t always have an equivalent form in other languages so be patient with yourself and always try to learn in context. Try using the present perfect tense for experiences in your conversations!

If you found this post interesting, make sure you listen to the full podcast episode with Nick and Francesca on The Coffee Break English Show. We will release more episodes soon, about some other useful topics! Subscribe to our podcast feed and our channel on YouTube to learn when the next episode is available.

So keep practising, deepening your knowledge and understanding, and remaining curious about the language you are learning and you will surely make progress.

Happy Coffee Breaking!

Here are the answers to the quiz:Coffee Break Languages founder, Mark Pentleton, has learnt 10 foreign languages. True!**

It is true, Mark has learnt 9 foreign languages and you can hear him speaking them here!

Coffee Break Languages has been nominated for a Lovie Award for Best Science/Education Podcast. True!

Coffee Break Languages has created a podcast series for pets. False!**

This one is not true but we did pretend to do this in an April Fools’ Joke!

Listen to the podcastThe post Present Perfect Tense for Experiences appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In the final chapter of Scenes, our course for intermediate Spanish learners, Isabel shares more about her Chicos de oro and the wonderful plans they enjoy together. ¡Son como una gran familia!

Join Mark and Pablo in this last episode and take your Spanish to the next level! In Chapter 10, we’ll continue practising and reinforcing key concepts while expanding our vocabulary. For example, Mark and Pablo will explore quedarse followed by an adjective, unirse a, and interesting nouns like velada.

¡No te pierdas este último capítulo sobre el bar de Isabel y sus encantadores clientes!

The post CBS Scenes 1.10 | Una gran familia appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Mark and Thomas return for the final episode of Season 1 of Scenes! A quiet afternoon at the café allows the narrator to enjoy a peaceful moment—until an unexpected visitor arrives. Heinz shows up at an unusual time, surprising not only the narrator but also Charlotte, who has never met him before.

As Charlotte and Heinz strike up a conversation, the narrator reflects on the unique charm of Erna’s café. Every guest, whether a loyal regular or an occasional visitor, contributes to the stories that unfold here. Some are heartwarming, some bittersweet, and others remain unfinished—but each one is part of the café’s rhythm.

Mark and Thomas highlight useful grammar and vocabulary, such as der Schnappschnuss or vorschlagen or how to talk about assumptions or probability.

Lass dir dieses letzte Kapitel der Staffel nicht entgehen – eine wunderbare Möglichkeit, dein Deutsch mit einer besonderen Geschichte abzurunden!

The post CBG Scenes 1.10 | Begegnungen, die den Alltag bereichern appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Join Francesca and Mark for the last Chapter of Scenes from the Coffee Break Italian Café! Summer has finally arrived, and as two high school students return, there’s a noticeable shift in the atmosphere between them. What happens next could very well change everything for them…

The post CBI Scenes 1.10 | L’inizio di un amore appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Have you ever wondered whether to say too much or too many? Or perhaps you’re unsure when to use enough? The good news is that learning these quantifiers in English will help you sound more natural!

The Coffee Break English Show is a podcast series of informal conversations to help you understand some difficult topics in English. In the latest episode, Nick and Anabel explore how to use these common quantifiers in English and when to choose one over the other.

So let’s take a closer look at too much, too many and enough and start putting them into practice! Continue reading to find out more, and why not listen to the podcast as you go?

Countable and Uncountable NounsFirst we need to establish what countable and uncountable nouns are.

When we talk about countable nouns, we mean nouns that can be plural. We can say I have one apple, I have two apples, three apples, etc. We normally show the plural form by adding the letter s (or es for words like leaves, watches, etc.) at the end of words but some countable nouns are irregular (person – people, child – children, woman – women, etc.).

When we talk about uncountable nouns, we mean nouns that are not possible to count by expressing a simple number before them. Liquids are uncountable because it is impossible to put a simple numerical quantity to them (water, oil, coffee, etc.). Many abstract ideas are uncountable too, such as information, news, money and light.

Too Much, Too Many, and EnoughUnderstanding when to use quantifiers is essential for speaking English correctly. These words help us describe quantity, but they have specific rules for their usage.

Too Much vs. Too ManyThese phrases mean “more than necessary” or “more than wanted,” but the difference depends on whether the noun is countable or uncountable.

Too much is used with uncountable nouns:

There is too much sugar in my coffee.
She spends too much time on her phone.

Too many is used with countable nouns:

There are too many cars on the road at 5pm. Traffic is slow!
I bought too many apples at the market. My bag broke on the way home!

We should always remember that when we use too much and too many, we are expressing a negative idea. We are saying that the quantity is a problem. If we just want to say that there is a very large quantity using much and many, we can say so much and so many.

There is so much light in this room.
There are so many castles in Scotland!

If you want more practice with quantifiers in English, check out Episode 5 of Season 1 of Coffee Break English!

EnoughThe word enough means “sufficient” or “the right amount.” It can be used with both countable and uncountable nouns.

Before a noun: We have enough chairs for everyone. * There is enough* food for everyone, help yourself!

After an adjective: She’s strong enough to lift the box. * The oven is hot enough* now, we can put the pie in.

Not EnoughWe use not enough to show that something is “insufficient”. It can be used with both countable and uncountable nouns.

This coffee is not hot enough.
She doesn’t have enough money to buy a new phone.

Common mistakesHere are some common mistakes learners make when using quantifiers in English:

There are too much people in the room.

There are too many people in the room.

I don’t have too many time.

I don’t have too much time.

She didn’t buy enough big shoes.

She didn’t buy big enough shoes.

Let’s ReviewIt’s your turn!Now, let’s practise using quantifiers in English! Here are four situations. Try to make a sentence to describe each one using too much, too many, enough or not enough for each one.

Some possible answers are at the end of this blog post, but don’t look until you’ve thought about your answers!

I need £35 to pay for the dinner and I have £36.
There are 5 students and 3 chairs.
This pasta is extremely salty!
There are 6 people and 5 spaces in the car.

If you found this post interesting, make sure you listen to the full podcast episode with Nick and Anabel on The Coffee Break English Show. In this series, we talk about useful topics for English learners, so make sure to subscribe to our podcast feed and our channel on YouTube.

So, start using quantifiers in English correctly whenever you can! The more you practice, the more natural your English will sound. Why not get a coffee now and test yourself with today’s practice exercises?

Happy Coffee Breaking!

P.s. Here are some possible answers to the prompts given above:

I have enough money.
There are not enough chairs (or there are too many students).
They put too much salt on the pasta.
There are not enough spaces in my car (or there are too many people for my car).

Listen to the podcastThe post ‘Too Much’ or ‘Too Many’: Using Quantifiers in English appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

It’s the big day in this final chapter of Scenes, the village festival has arrived! Chez Nico is at the heart of the action, bringing locals together for a day of fun, food, and festivities.

This episode explores key language points, including se régaler and inoubliable.

Join us for this final chapter of Scenes, a perfect way to celebrate your progress in French!

The post CBF Scenes 1.10 | Une fête inoubliable appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Have you been looking for some German movies to supplement your language learning? The variety within the German movie industry really is astonishing, but we have managed to find some of the most highly-rated films to give you a taste of what’s produced for the silver screen there. They can be enjoyed with or without subtitles.

Before we get started, we have a curiosity to share with you! Do you know what ab Donnerstag im Kino means? The translation is from Thursday in the cinema, and it’s a common phrase associated with films because new films are traditionally released on a Thursday in Germany.

Interessant, right? With that, schnapp’ dir eine Schüssel Popcorn und los geht’s!

1. Good Bye, Lenin! (2003)Set against a time of great change, der Mauerfall and die Wiedervereinigung, “Good bye Lenin!” relays the tale of a young man’s efforts to hide the true events of German history from his mum. He does this with the best of intentions, as she is not to receive any shock that may have a detrimental effect on her health after being in a coma.

Consequently, Alex goes to great lengths to maintain the pretence that everything is as it was, never letting on to his Mum that the Berlin Wall has fallen. How far will Alex go in contriving elaborate schemes in order to shield his mum from the reality of the outer world?

2. Sophie Scholl – Die letzten Tage (2005)Based on the life of anti-Nazi heroine Sophie Scholl, played by Julia Jentsch, this story is set in 1943 in Munich. The plot of this German movie deals with the interrogation process and the last six days of Scholl’s life.

Genuine incarceration records were used to help make the film. She and her brother were members of the student resistance group “The White Rose”. They have been detained after distributing leaflets which criticise the regime. The police inspector, Robert Mohr, played by Alexander Held, is unsuccessful in retrieving the information he needs from Sophie. With her firm, idealist values, Sophie does not budge on her stance for a lighter sentence in return for accomplices’ names.

At its core, the film is a debate over which side is freer: those who bow down to the regime in fear, or those who defy it and remain true to their beliefs. The former may conform to survive, but can anyone truly ‘live’?

3. Die Fälscher (2007)In 2007, this German movie won the best foreign language film at the Oscars. A Jewish prisoner of war has skills that are valuable to the camp commandant. His counterfeiting abilities are used by his captors against the Allies.

Do the prisoners go along with the guards’ plan for their own self-preservation in a desperate situation, or do they try to outsmart the guards and remain loyal to the Allies?

4. Oh Boy! (2012)This black and white German movie is a comedy that introduces the viewer to Niko. He’s unemployed, having dropped out of his Jurastudium 2 years ago, but didn’t let his dad know this important detail about this change in his life. His dad isn’t happy to learn he’s been funding his son’s carefree lifestyle.

Niko begins to learn that his dry wit will only get him so far in life. When he strikes up a romance with a former school friend, he confides in her, Kennst du das, wenn man so das Gefühl hat, dass die Menschen um einen herum irgendwie merkwürdig sind? Und dir wird irgendwie klar, dass vielleicht nicht die Anderen, sondern dass man selbst das Problem ist? Is Niko beginning to look at his choices in life again?

5. Honig im Kopf (2014)Til Schweiger has not only written and directed this German movie but also stars in it, alongside his daughter, who plays his daughter in the film. It makes it clear that family is a core theme of the film, revolving around the grandfather’s Alzheimer’s disease.

As the grandfather’s condition worsens, Niko, his son, decides he cannot keep sidestepping the inevitability of putting his dad in a home. Tilda, the granddaughter, has different ideas and, in a bid to save her grandfather from this fate, sets off with him on an adventure to Venice. It’s a place full of fond memories, as this is where he spent his honeymoon with his wife, who died sometime before. There are laughs to be had at the granddad’s inappropriate remarks, which raise a few eyebrows, and tears, when reliving the past proves to be tough with a fading memory.

6. Das finstere Tal (2014)Next on our list of German movies for learners is Das finstere Tal. This film is a chilling Western-style revenge drama set in a remote mountain village in the Alps.

When a mysterious stranger arrives, claiming to be a photographer, his presence stirs unease among the villagers. As secrets from the past unravel, tensions rise, and the stranger’s true motives come to light.

With stunning landscapes and a dark, atmospheric tone, this film offers a gripping narrative that can captivate viewers from start to finish.

7. Vincent will Meer (2010)In this heartwarming road German movie, Vincent, a young man with Tourette’s syndrome, embarks on an unplanned journey to fulfill his late mother’s dream: to scatter her ashes at the Italian seaside.

Along for the ride are two unlikely companions – Marie, a spirited woman with anorexia, and Alexander, a control-freak patient with obsessive-compulsive disorder. Their adventure takes them through breathtaking landscapes and humorous, touching moments as they learn to accept themselves and each other.

8. Der Vorname (2018)In this German film, a seemingly ordinary dinner party takes a sharp turn when a provocative question is raised: What if someone named their child “Adolf”? As friends and family debate the appropriateness of the name, tensions boil over, exposing hidden grudges, long-held secrets, and unresolved conflicts.

Der Vorname is a sharp, witty comedy that mixes humour with social commentary, providing an entertaining yet thought-provoking experience.

We hope you’ve enjoyed exploring this selection of German movies for learners. Each of these films offers a unique window into German culture, providing entertainment and an opportunity to immerse yourself in authentic language usage. So, grab a bowl of popcorn, press play on one of these pictures and let your language learning journey begin.

Want to watch even more foreign-language films? Check out our film recommendations for French, Italian and Spanish learners too!

The post 8 German movies for learners appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In Chapter 9 of Scenes, our course for intermediate Spanish learners, we return to Isabel’s café, where she welcomes a group of customers from a place that holds special meaning for her. ¿Te imaginas de dónde vienen?

Join Mark and Pablo as they guide you through useful vocabulary and grammar while also introducing some of Spain’s most popular tapas. Along the way, you’ll continue expanding your knowledge and reinforcing key phrases in a fun and engaging way.

Don’t miss this chance to improve your Spanish while discovering more about Spanish culture!

The post CBS Scenes 1.09 | Una visita de recuerdos appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Welcome to another lesson of Coffee Break Japanese! In lesson 9 we continue from the previous lesson and learn some useful phrases and verbs to use in Japan. Ready? Let’s get started!

The post CBJ 1.09 | Talking about language appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Mark and Thomas return with a touching new episode of Scenes! At lunchtime, the café is lively as guests enjoy coffee and fresh pastries. But at a small table by the window, a young woman is lost in thought—until a phone call brings her to tears.

While Erna is busy with a broken cash register, the narrator decides to step in, offering a simple act of kindness: the last piece of redcurrant cake. Sometimes, words aren’t needed.

Mark and Thomas discuss useful grammar and vocabulary, such as aufmuntern, vergraben or expressions like etwas zum Guten wenden.

Lass dich von dieser rührenden Szene berühren und verbessere dabei dein Deutsch!

The post CBG Scenes 1.09 | Kleine Gesten und wenig Worte appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Join Francesca and Mark for this Chapter of Scenes from the Coffee Break Italian Café! A high school student stops at a café before class, clearly troubled and reluctant to face the day ahead. As he confides in Lorenzo, we learn he’s ready to give up, but a gentle conversation may shift his course…

The post CBI Scenes 1.09 | In bocca al lupo per la verifica appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Making th sounds in English is a common problem that many English language learners face – but did you know that many native speakers also find th pronunciation difficult?

It really is a tricky sound to make! But many words contain th sounds in English and mastering this sound will ensure you communicate clearly and effectively.

The Coffee Break English Show is a podcast series of informal conversations to help you understand some difficult topics in English. In the latest episode, Nick and Francesca look at the difference between f and th pronunciation as well as voiced and unvoiced th sounds.

Because this episode focuses on pronunciation, it’s best to watch the video or listen to the podcast episode while you read this article, to hear Nick and Francesca making the sounds.

So let’s get started and look at th sounds in English!

‘Th’ Pronunciation in EnglishFor many language learners, the pronunciation of th is a big challenge because this sound doesn’t exist in their language, or at least not in the same way. Today we want to demystify th pronunciation so that you feel more confident in future.

‘Th’ Vs ‘f’The first challenge between f and th sounds is understanding how to make them.

The big difference is the position of the tongue!

F sounds are made by putting the top teeth on the bottom lip and blowing air through the gap. The tongue stays in the mouth.

Th sounds are made by putting the tongue between the top and bottom teeth and blowing air around the tongue. You should be able to see the tongue if you look in a mirror!

Another good way to practise this sound is to put a pencil, or your finger, in front of your lips and make sure you touch the pencil with your tongue when you make the th sounds. You will find some fun sentences to do this at the end of this blog!

Spelling RulesNow let’s look at when to use each one. If you are looking at a dictionary post of a word, you will see the spelling and the phonemic transcription. Understanding phonemic symbols can help you with your pronunciation because written English does not always help you understand how to say words in English.

The good news is, for the difference between /f/ and /θ/, we can trust the spelling!

f = /f/

/f/ is almost always spelt with one or two f’s. It is never spelt th. This spelling rule really helps to know when to make each sound. We sometimes see /f/ spelt with gh (laugh, enough, etc.) or ph (photo, phone, physics, etc.)

th = /θ/

/θ/ is always spelt with th. There are no exceptions to this rule!

TH – voiced or unvoiced?Now we come to a small problem with th pronunciation. There are two ways to pronounce th in English. One is voiced and the other is unvoiced .

We can see a clear difference between voiced and unvoiced sounds with the letters f and v. To make an f sound, you put your top teeth on your bottom lip and blow air. To make a v sound, you do the same, but you vibrate your voice box. You can feel this happening if you put your finger on the front of your throat and make the v sound. For this, try making the sound of a Formula One car!

We can apply the same rule between /f/ and /v/ to th sounds. For the voiced th sound, the tongue remains between the teeth, but now we are vibrating the voice box. The symbol for this sound is /ð/.

Th = /θ/ (unvoiced) e.g. theatre, bath, truth

Th = /ð/ (voiced) e.g the, then, breathe

If you would like more practice with th pronunciation, check out how to pronounce ‘Tuesday’ and ‘Thursday’ in episode 9 from the first season of the Coffee Break Show!

Spelling RulesThe difference between f and th is quite easy to see in spelling. Unfortunately, it is not so easy with the difference between the th sounds /θ/ and /ð/. There are some general rules we can follow but we have to be careful for exceptions.

Both /θ/ and /ð/ can appear at the beginning of words but /ð/ is more common.

Many determiners begin with a /ð/ sound: the, this, that, these, those.

The numbers three, thirteen, thirty and thousand all have a /θ/ sound.

Generally, when th is at the end of the word, we say /θ/ (unvoiced).

When th is in the middle of the word we normally say /ð/ (voiced). But there are many exceptions to this rule so be careful! The best thing to do is learn the patterns where these rules do apply.

Let’s have a look at some examples:

Let’s review So the fundamental difference between f and th in English is that /f/ needs the top lip on the bottom teeth, and /θ/ needs the tongue between the teeth, and /ð/ is the same but has a vibrating quality. As always, the best way to perfect these rules is to practise using the words and learning when to follow each rule. Now try saying the words in the visual below out loud!

It’s your turn! Try saying these tongue twisters out loud to practise pronouncing these sounds correctly! Try this in front of a mirror and check you can see your tongue when making those th sounds. If you want, you can listen to Nick and Francesca saying them in the video, and repeat them after them.

There are Thirty-three thick silk threads.

Three thousand thick feathers float down the river.

I thought a thought, but the thought I thought wasn’t the thought that I’d thought that I’d thought.

If you found this post interesting, make sure you listen to the full podcast episode with Nick and Francesca on The Coffee Break English Show. In this series, we talk about useful topics for English learners, so make sure to subscribe to our podcast feed and our channel on YouTube.

Try to practise the th sounds often at home! The more you practice, the more confident you will become. We recommend you make a list of the words with these sounds that you find difficult and practise saying them until you feel more confident making th sounds.

Remember that it’s ok not to sound exactly like a native speaker! The important thing is that you feel confident and comfortable when speaking and people can understand you.

Happy Coffee Breaking!

Listen to the podcastThe post ‘TH’ Sounds in English: How to Pronounce ‘TH’ Correctly appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In chapter 9 of Scenes, Jérôme considers a big career change, but he’s not sure if he’s up for the challenge. With help from friends, he prepares to apply for a new job, but will he go through with it?

Mark and Hélène discuss useful vocabulary such as lettre de motivation, stressé, and postuler.

Ne manquez pas ce nouvel épisode passionnant de Scenes !

The post CBF Scenes 1.09 | Un avenir à construire appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In Chapter 8 of Scenes, our course for intermediate Spanish learners, we return to Isabel’s café, where she witnesses an emotional and unexpected moment between a couple. No obstante, cuando se cierra una puerta, se abre una ventana.

As always, Mark and Pablo will guide us through any challenging grammar and vocabulary in the text, helping to deepen our understanding of the language. This chapter introduces useful verbs like disculparse, abandonar, and quedarse helado/a.

The post CBS Scenes 1.08 | Sin vuelta atrás appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Mark and Thomas return with another engaging episode of Scenes! As the late shift winds down, Felix insists on staying longer, keeping busy while the narrator locks up. But when asked why he’s avoiding going home, he finally confesses—he’s dropped out of university but hasn’t told his parents yet.

Felix knows they’ll be disappointed, and as an only child, the pressure feels even greater. But as the narrator reminds him, hiding it will only make things worse in the long run. Will he find the courage to tell them the truth?

Mark and Thomas highlight useful grammar and vocabulary, such as pronominal adverbs and knowing when to use reflexive pronouns in the dative or the accusative.

Hör rein und finde heraus, ob Felix den Mut findet, die Wahrheit zu sagen!

The post CBG Scenes 1.08 | Ein Feierabendgespräch mit Felix appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Join Francesca and Mark for this Chapter of Scenes from the Coffee Break Italian Café! In this episode, a familiar face comes to the bar with an unusually cheerful spirit! He shares his new idea: renting out his city apartment as a charming summer B&B. It sounds like a great deal could be worked out with the bar.

The post CBI Scenes 1.08 | Che affare! appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Do you know the different ways to talk about future plans in English? Talking about your plans can be a little confusing as we don’t always use future tenses in English like we do in the present and past. Instead, we have different phrases we use to express specific ideas.

In this episode, Nick and Anabel look at will, be going to and the present continuous to see how we can express different ideas about our future plans in English.

The Coffee Break English Show is a podcast series of informal conversations to help you understand some difficult topics in English. In the latest episode, we discuss different ways to use future tenses in English to express future plans.

Continue reading to find out more and why not listen to the podcast as you go?

Let’s get started with will!

Future Tense Verbs – WillLet’s look at will first. One of the most common meanings of will is to express spontaneous decisions. We can consider a spontaneous decision as the birth of our plan, it has just been decided and is still new. To create this form, we use will, plus the bare infinitive (without to).

If we are hungry, we might say “I’ll go and buy a sandwich”. If it is cold we might say “I will put on a jumper”. It is something I decide to do in the moment.

Examples in positive, negatives and question form:

I will buy a new phone.

I won’t buy a new phone.

Will you buy a new phone?

Remember the contraction of will involves the subject and the last two letters of the verb will, with an apostrophe (‘ll). You may even hear this contraction with a noun but this is almost always only when we speak.

I’ll

you’ll

he’ll

she’ll

it’ll

we’ll

they’ll

Nick’ll

Anabel’ll (ok, this one is very difficult to pronounce!)

Future Tense Verbs – Be going toWe use be going to to describe the next stage of our plan. This is a decision which we have made in the past and we are now thinking about. We are now planning the details and it is our personal intention. We use the bare infinitive after be going to.

If I am talking about the weekend, I can say “I’m going to see my friends.” This means that the plan is being organised but maybe some details are not finalised.

Examples in positive, negatives and question form:

I am going to buy a new phone.

I am not going to buy a new phone.

Are you going to you buy a new phone?

Future Tense Verbs – Present ContinuousWhen we have finalised the important details and our plan is complete, we can use the present continuous. This shows that our plan is fixed and the details are confirmed. We use present continuous for fixed plans.

Examples in positive, negatives and question form:

I am buying a new phone.

I am not buying a new phone.

Are you buying a new phone?

Let’s review the future tenses in EnglishSo let’s go over the different ways to use future tenses in English to express future plans.

First, we start with will to express a new plan. We make a spontaneous decision.

Then we use be going to when we have already made the decision and we now have a personal intention.

And finally we used present continuous to show we have finalised the details and we have a fixed plan.

Remember! The present continuous and be going to are very similar and express slightly different ideas but can often be used in the same context with little difference in meaning. Don’t worry if sometimes you’re not sure which one to use, it probably means you can use both! If you feel you need more practice with future tenses in English, we take a look at other ways to use be going to and will in Episode 5 of Season 3.

It’s your turn!Now, let’s practise using the future tenses in English to talk about future plans! Look at the prompts and think about which future form would be best to use. The answers are at the end of the blog post but don’t look until you’ve thought about your answers!

It’s cold! (put on my jumper) …
I am busy tonight. (meet my friends in town) …
I’m on my summer holiday! Tomorrow (swim in the sea and sunbathe) …

If you found this post interesting, make sure you listen to the full podcast episode with Nick and Anabel on The Coffee Break English Show. We will release more episodes soon, about some more useful topics! Subscribe to our podcast feed and our channel on YouTube to learn when the next episode is available.

So, start trying to use different future tenses in English to be specific about your future plans when you can! Remember that when you learn new grammar, it will help you to express yourself as well as improving your understanding when listening to others. It’s all part of the language-learning journey. Are you going to try using these three future forms in your speech? Good luck!

Happy Coffee Breaking!

Here are some possible answers to the questions given above:

It’s cold! I’ll put on my jumper.
I am busy tonight. I’m meeting my friends in town.
I’m on my summer holiday! Tomorrow I’m going to swim in the sea and sunbathe.

Listen to the podcastThe post Future Tenses in English: Making Future Plans appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In chapter 8 of Scenes, a surprise visit brings exciting news to the café as a familiar face shares their latest achievement. Meanwhile, Nico takes a moment to appreciate the unique encounters his café brings.

In this episode, you’ll learn key expressions like se rendre compte, un rôle (dans un film), and radieuse.

Continuez à améliorer votre français avec ce nouveau chapitre de Scenes !

The post CBF Scenes 1.08 | Une visite surprise appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Welcome to another lesson of Coffee Break Japanese! This time, we expand on previous lessons by discussing how to talk about locations in town. We also learn how to ask for directions to places and how to say ‘here’ and ‘there’.

The post CBJ 1.08 | Talking about places in the town appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In Chapter 7 of Scenes, our course for intermediate Spanish learners, we return to Isabel’s café and catch up with Miguel—someone we’ve met before. ¿Te acuerdas de él? Join Mark and Pablo as the story continues!

As always, Mark and Pablo will guide you through key grammar points and vocabulary. In this chapter, you’ll discover the meanings of ajetreado, mono, and celestina, as well as look into ojalá, a useful subjunctive trigger.

Don’t miss the latest episode of Scenes—keep improving your Spanish in a fun and engaging way!

The post CBS Scenes 1.07 | Gracias por la suerte appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Mark and Thomas return with another Chapter of Scenes! Every day at exactly three o’clock, Charlotte arrives at the café for coffee, cake, and conversation. Today, she shares the latest neighbourhood gossip—though Erna is, as always, far more discreet with such things.

Meanwhile, another customer is quietly adjusting to a big change—her youngest son has moved out, and for the first time in years, she has her home all to herself. Before long, Charlotte introduces another topic—her new reading group. They meet right here in the café, and today’s book is Kabale und Liebe by Schiller. The narrator is tempted to join… and Charlotte doesn’t take no for an answer!

Mark and Thomas highlight useful grammar and vocabulary, such as using the subordinate clause to express hopes and wishes or using adjectives as nouns.

Mach es dir gemütlich, schnapp dir einen Kaffee und genieße eine weitere Szene aus Ernas Café!

The post CBG Scenes 1.07 | Kaffee, Klatsch und eine neue Lesegruppe appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Conversations at the bar typically revolve around work, even during coffee breaks. However, tonight, with the arrival of three men carrying their laptops and big plans, something unusual could be about to happen… Join Francesca and Mark for this exciting Chapter of Scenes from the Coffee Break Italian Café!

The post CBI Scenes 1.07 | Un caffè fortunato appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Do you ever get confused with must and have to? These two verbs can be used in similar ways but we have to be careful when we use them in the negative as the meaning changes completely. This is particularly difficult for some language learners as there may only be one word in their language for both must and have to.

The Coffee Break English Show is a podcast series of informal conversations to help you understand some difficult topics in English! In the latest episode, Nick and Francesca look at how we can use must and have to in the positive and negative forms and provide four simple rules to show their differences in meaning.

So, let’s get started and look at the rules for must and have to. Why not get a cup of coffee or tea to enjoy while you read and listen to the podcast episode?

1. MustWe use must to talk about obligations. They can be external rules or laws but they can also express an obligation or strong advice. Let’s look at some examples:

You must wear a seatbelt when you are driving.

We use must to show we are obligated to do this.

You must keep your dog on a lead in this park.

This is a rule. You are obligated to do this when you are in the park.

You must be careful when carrying a knife.

This is strong advice based on what we believe to be a good idea.

2. Mustn’tWe use mustn’t to talk about prohibition. We are saying that it is not possible or permitted to do something.

Let’s look at some examples:

You mustn’t drive on the right side of the road in the UK.

This is a law. We use mustn’t to show you are prohibited from doing this.

You mustn’t look at your phone during the exam.

This is a rule. You are prohibited from doing this when you are in the exam.

You mustn’t touch the oven, it is hot.

This is strong advice based on what we believe to be a bad idea.

3. Have toWe use have to to talk about necessity. Have to can often be used to talk about obligations as there is a strong similarity here with must, but the idea is that we need to do something.

You have to wear a helmet when you cycle on the road.

This is a law. We use have to to show that it is necessary to do this action in this context.

You have to pay attention during the safety explanation on an airplane.

This is a rule. Have to demonstrates that this is something we need to do.

You have to wear warm clothes in the winter in Sweden.

This is advice that shows something is necessary in order to avoid something happening (being cold), or to make something happen (being warm).

4. Don’t/doesn’t have toWhen using must and have to, we need to be careful with the negative forms. Because we are considering the meaning of have to as something that is necessary, it is now easy to understand that the negative form means something that is not necessary. It can show that there is no obligation in this situation.

Let’s look at some examples:

You don’t have to wear a seatbelt when the car is parked.

This shows the absence of a law. We use don’t have to to show that it is not necessary to do the action.

He doesn’t have to wear a shirt and tie in the office. They have a casual dress code.

This shows the absence of a rule. It demonstrates that this is something we do not need to do in this context.

You don’t have to take a medical kit when you go on a walk but it could be a good idea in case someone gets injured.

This shows that there is no obligation to take the item. You have a choice.

Choosing between must and have toBecause there is such a similarity in meaning between must and have to, it can be difficult to know which one you should use in different contexts. But it is important to remember that you can normally use both without really changing the meaning.

Must is generally stronger than have to, so when you are choosing which one to use, think about how important the information is and if it is urgent, it is best to use must. If you are only communicating something general that doesn’t need urgency or to be convincing, have to might be better.

If you want more practice with have to, check out Coffee Break English episode 4: season 4!

Here’s a visual summary of ‘must’ and ‘have to’If you found this lesson helpful, make sure to watch the full episode of The Coffee Break English Show with Nick and Francesca, where we dive even deeper into must vs. have to! We release new episodes regularly, covering essential grammar topics to help you improve your English so make sure you subscribe to our YouTube channel so you never miss a lesson!

So, start practicing must and have to whenever you can! Remember, small daily steps lead to big improvements. It’s all part of your language-learning journey.

Happy Coffee Breaking!

Listen to the podcastThe post ‘Must’ and ‘have to’ grammar: four simple rules appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Love is in the air Chez Nico in chapter 7 of Scenes! A chance encounter on the café terrace leads to an unexpected romance, while Nico reflects on preparing for the busy summer ahead.

Mark and Hélène highlight useful language points, including un clin d’œil and se douter de.

Rejoignez-nous et écoutez cet épisode captivant de Scenes !

The post CBF Scenes 1.07 | L’amour au café ? appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In Chapter 6 of Scenes, our course for intermediate Spanish learners, we return to Isabel’s café and catch up with Elena, the new teacher we met in Chapter 3. ¿Cómo le va en su nuevo trabajo? ¿Ha encontrado ya piso?

Join Mark and Pablo as they explore key phrases like cerquita, hoy en día, and cuesta arriba. Alongside these, you’ll continue expanding your vocabulary and reinforcing essential grammar in a natural, engaging way.

Don’t miss this chance to improve your Spanish while following another chapter of Scenes!

The post CBS Scenes 1.06 | La inquilina appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Mark and Thomas return with an emotional new episode of Scenes! It’s late in the evening, and Johanna is still sitting at her table, lost in thought. She’s usually happy to chat with Erna, but today, something is different.

After some gentle encouragement, Johanna finally admits what’s been bothering her—her close university friend Nadine is leaving for a year abroad, and it’s not just friendship that she’s worried about. As Johanna struggles to find the right words, Erna reminds her that some things are best said before it’s too late.

Mark and Thomas highlight useful grammar and vocabulary, such as verbs that always require a dative object or the multiple meanings of machen.

Begleite Johanna auf ihrem Weg – die ideale Gelegenheit, Deutsch mit einer bewegenden Geschichte zu lernen!

The post CBG Scenes 1.06 | Mit schwerem Herzen im Café appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Join Francesca and Mark for the sixth Chapter of Scenes from the Coffee Break Italian Café!

In this episode, the local festival season has begun and the festivities seem to attract quite a crowd. A particularly elegant couple catches everyone’s attention, and their presence hints at a special evening ahead…

The post CBI Scenes 1.06 | Si balla alla sagra del cocomero appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Are you able to use comparative adjectives in English? Do you know the grammar rules?

One thing that can be tricky in English is when you want to make the comparative stronger or weaker. There are different ways we can do this and we just need to practise them to get them right!

The Coffee Break English Show is a podcast series of informal conversations to help you understand some difficult topics in English. In the latest episode, Nick and Mark look at how to use modifiers to strengthen (and weaken) comparative sentences.

Continue reading to find out more and why not listen to the podcast as you go?

So, let’s get started and look at comparative sentences!

A review of comparative adjectives in EnglishHere is a quick review of the grammar rules for comparative adjectives in English. If you would like more practice with comparative adjectives, check out Episode 1 of Season 3 of Coffee Break English!

One-syllable adjectivesclean >> cleaner than

big >> bigger than

small >> smaller than

Two-syllable adjectives with -yhappy >> happier than

funny >> funnier than

Adjectives with two or more syllablesexpensive >> more expensive than

comfortable >> more comfortable than

Exceptionsfun >> more fun than

good >> better than

bad >> worse than

far >> further than

Modifying comparative sentencesWe use modifiers to make comparative adjectives stronger or weaker. A modifier is a word that changes the meaning of a sentence, in this case making the sentence stronger or weaker. If you want to make your comparisons stronger you can use intensifiers. Common examples of English adverbs that intensify an idea are much, a lot and way. We can also use far and significantly in more formal situations.

But maybe you want to make your comparison less strong. In that case, you should use weakeners. Some common examples of English adverbs that weaken ideas are a bit, a little and slightly.

Sounding natural when making comparisonsWhen we use modifiers with comparative adjectives, we often change our intonation to emphasise what we want to say. This means that we often stress the modifier more than the adjective.

When we are making the meaning of the sentence stronger, we can stress the word in a loud and deep way. For example:

My dog is way bigger than yours.

When we want to say that the difference is small, we can still stress the modifier, but the intonation is different. We often make the sound of the word softer and our intonation goes up. Here’s an example:

I’m feeling a little better today.

It’s your turn!Now, let’s practise! Write down sentences comparing the ideas below and try to modify the comparative adjectives to show big and small differences. You can find some examples at the end of this blog post.

Always try to give as much detail as you can when you use a foreign language. The easy option is to stay in your comfort zone but the best way to learn is to try to be as descriptive as possible which will definitely help you increase your speaking (or writing) level. Be ambitious!

If you found this post interesting, make sure you listen to the full podcast episode with Nick and Mark on The Coffee Break English Show. We will release more episodes soon about some more useful topics! Subscribe to our podcast feed and our channel on YouTube to learn when the next episode is available.

Try modifying your comparative sentences whenever you can. By trying to be as precise and detailed as possible when communicating, you are improving your control of the language. Don’t worry if you make mistakes – it’s about regular and consistent practice and not just taking the easiest way to achieving your communicative goal, but challenging yourself to improve with every practice opportunity.

Happy Coffee Breaking!

P.s. Here are some possible answers to the prompts given above:

The mountains are much more interesting than the beach.
Summer is way more fun than winter.
Dogs are a bit nicer than cats.
Monday is a lot more difficult than Friday!

Listen to the podcastThe post Mastering comparative adjectives in English appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

As the summer heat rises in Chapter six of Scenes, an elderly customer suddenly feels unwell Chez Nico. While the regulars rush to help, a familiar face returns, sparking curiosity about her mysterious habits.

This episode explores useful grammar and vocabulary, including se précipiter and se calmer.

Ne manquez pas ce nouveau chapitre captivant de Scenes !

The post CBF Scenes 1.06 | Une cliente mystérieuse appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Welcome to another lesson of Coffee Break Japanese!

In this lesson, we will build upon what we learned in the previous lessons by exploring a wider range of numbers and their uses in everyday conversations. We’ll also learn vocabulary related to family, helping you to describe relationships and express your connections to others.

The post CBJ 1.07 | More on numbers and family appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In Chapter 5 of Scenes, our series for intermediate Spanish learners, we return to Isabel’s café, where a variety of interesting customers bring their stories to life.

This time, we meet a group of lively ladies enjoying their time together. One of them has some exciting news to share — ¿te imaginas qué puede ser?

As always, Mark and Pablo will guide you through useful grammar and vocabulary from the story. In this chapter, they’ll focus on the structure lo + adjective and explore intriguing uses of the subjunctive.

Don’t miss the chance to improve your Spanish while enjoying another engaging chapter of Scenes!

The post CBS Scenes 1.05 | ¡Menudo sorpresón! appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Mark and Thomas return with another lively episode of Scenes! This time, the gentlemen’s weekly Canasta match takes centre stage — especially as Heinz keeps winning, much to Siegfried’s frustration!

While the game unfolds, the café is quieter than usual, giving the narrator time to clean the clogged coffee machine. But just as it’s taken apart, two teenagers arrive, hoping for a coffee. With no other option, they settle for hot chocolate and enjoy their conversation by the window.

Mark and Thomas discuss useful grammar and expressions, such as participle constructions with either the present or the past participle.

Schalte ein und finde heraus, wie das Spiel endet – eine unterhaltsame Möglichkeit, dein Deutsch zu trainieren!

The post CBG Scenes 1.05 | Siegfried, Heinz und das große Canasta-Duell appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Join Francesca and Mark for the fifth Chapter of Scenes from the Coffee Break Italian Café! In this episode, a young woman enters the café with a latte order and a sketchpad. As she leaves, something unexpected is left behind…

The post CBI Scenes 1.05 | Un ritratto speciale appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In Chapter 5 of Scenes, the café is packed for its first karaoke night. Even the regulars take to the stage, some with more success than others! Meanwhile, a surprise reunion leads to an exciting announcement.

This chapter introduces useful expressions like s’assurer que, marquer le coup, and the agreement of past participles with avoir.

Ne ratez pas ça, écoutez dès maintenant ce dernier épisode de Scenes !

The post CBF Scenes 1.05 | Une soirée mémorable appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Join Mark and Pablo for the next chapter of Scenes, our course for intermediate Spanish learners! In this chapter, a nervous man steps into Isabel’s café, dressed smartly in a suit and carrying a briefcase. ¿Adónde irá?

Mark and Pablo will guide you through the vocabulary and grammar featured in the story. For example, you’ll learn how to use the verb merecer, explore demonstrative pronouns in Spanish, and understand the word ojalá.

The post CBS Scenes 1.04 | El café de la suerte appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Welcome to another lesson of Coffee Break Japanese! This time, we’re continuing from the previous lesson and we’re learning how to talk about work and numbers from zero to ten.

The post CBJ 1.06 | Jobs and counting appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Mark and Thomas return with another engaging episode of Scenes! In this Chapter, the café is busier than usual for a weekday, and among the customers, something special is happening.

At the large family table, a young woman seems anxious while her boyfriend reassures her. Her elegantly dressed parents sit across from them, clearly unimpressed. But as soon as the young woman speaks, everything changes – her father chokes in shock, and her mother is left speechless. She’s just announced her pregnancy! Will her parents accept the news?

Mark and Thomas discuss useful grammar and expressions, like verbs with prepositional objects or the difference between temporal adverbs and conjunctions.

Verpasse nicht dieses bewegende Kapitel – eine wunderbare Gelegenheit, deine Sprachkenntnisse mit authentischen Dialogen zu erweitern!

The post CBG Scenes 1.04 | Ein Café-Moment, den man nicht vergisst appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Join Francesca and Mark for the fourth Chapter of Scenes from the Coffee Break Italian Café! In this episode, we visit the café on a Sunday. The atmosphere is usually lively, but this Sunday, something in the air feels different as a playful question catches Angelica off guard…

As it turns out, the day might hold more than just the usual routine!

The post CBI Scenes 1.04 | Una domenica al bar appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In Chapter 4 of Scenes, we meet two of Chez Nico’s regulars, whose lively debate about a village event brings energy to the café. Will they ever se mettre d’accord ?

Alongside the story, Mark and Hélène highlight key language points with interesting verbs like se chamailler.

Continuez à améliorer votre français avec ce nouvel épisode captivant de Scenes !

The post CBF Scenes 1.04 | Deux larrons en foire appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Join Mark and Pablo for another chapter in the captivating Scenes series! In Chapter 3 of our course for intermediate Spanish learners, we meet Elena, a new substitute teacher settling into the neighbourhood and searching for a flat.

This chapter introduces practical verbs like alquilar and cubrir una baja, while giving us a closer look at the customers of Isabel’s café.

Don’t miss this opportunity to improve your Spanish with an engaging story. ¡No te pierdas este capítulo!

The post CBS Scenes 1.03 | Sustituta busca piso appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Mark and Thomas are back with another episode of Scenes! In this chapter, the café is busier than ever, as customers fill the space on a sunny Sunday. Regulars enjoy their routines, new visitors discover Erna’s charm, and the rhubarb cake disappears faster than ever.

While Erna thrives on the lively atmosphere, chatting and sharing her wisdom, Felix helps keep things moving behind the counter. Meanwhile, requests for iced coffee keep coming in, even though it’s technically only a summer drink. Could it be time to extend the season?

Mark and Thomas break down useful grammar and expressions, including causal subordinate sentences, different tenses and useful verbs.

Hör rein und erlebe das lebhafte Treiben in Ernas Café – eine unterhaltsame Möglichkeit, dein Deutsch zu verbessern!

The post CBG Scenes 1.03 | Volles Haus und extra Hilfe appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Join Francesca and Mark for the third Chapter of Scenes from the Coffee Break Italian Café! In this episode, Angelica has just begun helping at the café, but it seems she’s already catching the eye of Mattia, the boy from the nearby tobacconist.

However, when his boss finds out, things take an unexpected turn. As for Angelica, does she feel the same way about him?

In this chapter, we will explore interesting aspects of vocabulary and grammar alongside the story, helping you take your language skills to the next level!

The post CBI Scenes 1.03 | Angelica e Mattia appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Join Mark and Hélène as the story continues in Chapter 3 of Scenes! Bad weather causes trouble for Jérôme and his bar de plage, but his laid-back attitude keeps things under control. Meanwhile, the café fills up with weekend customers looking for shelter.

This episode introduces useful grammar and vocabulary including débarquer, and prendre l’eau.

Allez écouter ce nouveau chapitre de Scenes, it’s a great way to boost your French!

The post CBF Scenes 1.03 | Un vendredi sous la pluie appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Welcome to Lesson 5 of Coffee Break Japanese! This time, we’re learning how to talk about more family members, such as partners and children.

The post CBJ 1.05 | Talking about your family – Kochira wa dare desu ka？こちらは、誰ですか？ appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In Chapter 2 of Scenes, our series for intermediate Spanish learners, we return to Isabel’s café, where we meet the charming group of older gentlemen she affectionately calls sus Chicos de oro. This time, there’s a new, younger addition to the mix. ¿Quieres saber más? Join Mark and Pablo in this exciting new chapter!

As the story continues, Mark and Pablo will draw your attention to useful grammar points and vocabulary in the text. For example, in this chapter, they’ll learn the meanings of a gusto, parar de hacer algo, and saltar a la vista.

¡No te pierdas el nuevo capítulo de Scenes y continúa mejorando tu español!

The post CBS Scenes 1.02 | El nuevo miembro appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Mark and Thomas return with the next chapter of Scenes! As heavy rain pours down, Johanna rushes into the café, drenched and frustrated. A dedicated law student, she usually enjoys studying here, but today, her soaked textbooks and looming deadlines leave her feeling overwhelmed.

Erna, always quick to notice when someone needs support, offers comforting words and a little extra whipped cream on Johanna’s favourite rhubarb cake. Will that – and a warm conversation – help lift her spirits?

Alongside the story, Mark and Thomas discuss complex relative clauses, the use of past participles as adjectives, and useful expressions like etwas wiedergutmachen and jemanden aufmuntern.

Finde heraus, was in Kapitel 2 passiert – eine perfekte Gelegenheit, dein Deutsch in einer entspannten Atmosphäre zu verbessern!

The post CBG Scenes 1.02 | Ein Extrahäubchen Schlagsahne appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Join us for the second episode of Scenes from the Coffee Break Italian Café! In this episode, the curious barista who owns Caffè di Tulli overhears a conversation between two worried students and offers a simple suggestion that changes everything.

Alongside the story, Francesca and Mark discuss interesting aspects of the vocabulary and grammar which appear in this chapter, helping you take your language skills to the next level.

The post CBI Scenes 1.02 | Chi trova un amico, trova un cornetto alla Nutella appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Join Mark and Hélène for the second Chapter in the engaging Scenes series! In this episode, the lively atmosphere at Chez Nico takes an exciting turn when Ségolène shares some big family news. Meanwhile, a customer faces a tricky language challenge with visiting tourists.

This chapter introduces useful vocabulary like maternité, renverser, and se débrouiller, all within a natural and immersive story.

Ne manquez pas ce nouveau chapitre de Scenes – it’s a perfect way to improve your French!

The post CBF Scenes 1.02 | Une bonne nouvelle appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Join Mark and Pablo at the start of an engaging new story! In Chapter 1 of Scenes, our latest course for intermediate learners, we’re introduced to Isabel, her café, and its colourful array of customers. Each chapter unveils a scene from this charming café, giving us the chance to learn more about the people who walk through its doors.

In this first chapter, we meet three nurses – Carmen, Míriam, and Pilar – who are unwinding at the café after their night shift at a nearby hospital. Míriam seems troubled by something, but Isabel steps in to help her feel better.

Alongside the story, you’ll discover useful grammar and vocabulary, including phrases like un mal trago, echar una buena bronca, and quitar un disgusto.

If this sounds like the perfect way to boost your language learning journey, ¡no te pierdas el primer capítlo de Scenes!

The post CBS Scenes 1.01 | ¡Qué mal trago! appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Join Mark and Thomas at the start of an exciting new story! In this first chapter of Scenes, our latest course for intermediate German learners, we visit Erna’s cosy café by the park, where regular customers and unexpected surprises make each morning unique.

We meet Heinz, a long-time patron known for his punctuality and unwavering routine. Every day, he arrives at exactly 8am for his usual coffee. But today, something is different – Heinz is late, and when he finally walks in, he’s not alone. To Erna’s amazement, he’s brought along a lively Spaniel puppy, a new companion he decided to adopt overnight. As Heinz shares his story, we get a glimpse into his life and the small but meaningful decisions that bring change.

Alongside the story, Mark and Thomas will highlight useful grammar and vocabulary, such as expressions with (sich) besorgen, the use of the present participle, or expressions like von einem Tag auf den nächsten. Their explanations, examples and discussions are perfect for intermediate German learners. If you’re looking for a fun and engaging way to improve your German, don’t miss this first chapter of Scenes!

The post CBG Scenes 1.01 | Kaffee, Kuchen und eine Überraschung appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Welcome to Scenes from the Coffee Break Café! In this first episode, we introduce you to Caffè di Tulli and to Lorenzo, the café’s enthusiastic new owner. As he settles into his role, we’re introduced to some fascinating regulars, come la signora Rachele.

Pour yourself a coffee and join us for the start of this journey, where every visit to the café reveals a new tale. This episode is just the beginning of what’s sure to be a rich and flavourful series!

Alongside the story, Mark and Francesca will highlight useful grammar and vocabulary, helping you take your language skills to the next level. Their explanations, examples and discussions are perfect for intermediate Italian learners. If you’re looking for a fun and engaging way to improve your Italian, don’t miss this first chapter of Scenes!

The post CBI Scenes 1.01 | Se vuoi un buon caffè, devi aspettare appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Join Mark and Hélène at the start of an engaging new story! In this first chapter of Scenes, our course for intermediate French learners, we are introduced to Chez Nico, a lively village café where locals and visitors cross paths.

We meet Nico, the new owner, who has just taken over the café where he grew up. As he navigates his first busy weekend, we also get to know Romain, a taxi driver and football enthusiast who stops by for his daily coffee. Between tourists on the terrace and local shopkeepers dropping in for lunch, Nico is off to a great start, but will Chez Nico be a success?

Alongside the story, Mark and Hélène will highlight useful grammar and vocabulary, such as the difference between the passé composé and imparfait and expressions like croiser les doigts.

If you’re looking for a fun and immersive way to improve your French, ne manquez pas ce premier chapitre de Scenes !

The post CBF Scenes 1.01 | Un début prometteur appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Welcome back to another episode of Coffee Break Japanese! In lesson four we’re moving on from the previous lesson and we’ll be learning how to talk about family and different family members.

The post CBJ 1.04 | Family members – Kochira wa watashi no kazoku desu. マークさん、こちらは、私の家族です。 appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Welcome back to another episode of Coffee Break Japanese! We’re moving on from the previous lesson and learning how to talk about nationalities and where you are from in Japan.

The post CBJ 1.03 | Nationalities – Watashi wa Nihon-jin desu. 私は、日本人です。 appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In lesson two, we’re moving on from the previous lesson and learning how to greet people at different times of the day. We’ll also learn how to introduce ourselves and ask other people “what is your name?”

The post CBJ 1.02 | Introducing yourself – Hajimemashite はじめまして appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Coffee Break Japanese e yōkoso – welcome to Coffee Break Japanese! This series will introduce you to the Japanese language, starting from the basics. By the end of this series you’ll be able to use the language in many situations and understand what native speakers say to you.

In this first lesson you’ll learn how to introduce yourself and say how you are feeling. You’ll also learn about Japanese pronunciation along the way.

The post CBJ 1.01 | Greetings – Konnichiwa! こんにちは！ appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Are you thinking about learning Japanese but feeling a bit unsure if it’s the right fit for you? Don’t worry, you are not alone! In this blog post, we will answer the question ‘why learn Japanese?’ outlining a couple of great reasons that might inspire you to pursue this goal and turn your dream into reality.

After all, learning a language can be an incredibly rewarding experience, opening doors to incredible cultural experiences and personal growth. So, grab your coffee (or matcha!), settle in, and let’s investigate why Japanese should be on your to-learn list.

1. Japan’s rich and unique cultureJapan’s culture is a tapestry of traditions, art and also innovation. Learning Japanese allows you to experience it in a way that goes beyond the surface level. From participating in a tea ceremony to understanding the symbolism in Kabuki theatre or savouring sushi at a traditional omakase, speaking Japanese lets you connect deeply with the culture.

But it’s not just about the traditional customs — Japan’s pop culture scene is equally mesmerising. Whether you’re an anime and manga enthusiast, a J-pop fan or a gamer who loves titles like The Legend of Zelda, knowing Japanese helps you appreciate these art forms in their original language.

Why learn Japanese? Just think about how great it would be to watch your favourite shows without losing any meaning in translation or singing your favourite songs with the right pronunciation!

2. To make the most of your travel experienceReason two to ‘why learn Japanese’: to transform your travel experience! Picture this: you’re wandering through the serene temples of Kyoto, or exploring the bustling streets of Osaka. Knowing more than just a few basic Japanese phrases like sumimasen excuse me or arigatou gozaimasu thank you) can turn a simple trip into an extraordinary adventure.

The locals truly appreciate when visitors try to speak their language and you’ll find that a little effort can go a long way. You’ll be able to ask for recommendations, easily navigate public transport, and even discover some hidden gems that the guidebooks might miss!

3. Japan’s delicious food Why learn Japanese? If you are a foodie who loves ramen, sushi, tempura or okonomiyaki, here is one reason for you! Indulging in authentic Japanese cuisine can be even more exciting if you know the language, as it allows you to navigate menus, understand regional specialities, and even ask for recommendations!

Instead of sticking to tourist-friendly restaurants, you can explore hidden gems or try daily specials. And let’s not forget food markets! From Osaka’s Kuromon Ichiba Market to Sapporo’s seafood stalls, understanding Japanese ensures you don’t miss out on the flavours that make Japanese cuisine unforgettable.

In Japan, food is more than just food — it’s an art form, a communal experience, and a window into the culture.

4. To challenge yourself We can’t lie… with three types of characters — hiragana and katakana are phonetic characters, each representing a single syllable; kanji consists of ideograms, each representing a specific meaning — and unique grammar structures, mastering Japanese can seem daunting.

But that brings us to reason number four to ‘why learn Japanese’: challenging yourself! With the support of experienced tutors by your side, you’ll understand that it is like solving a puzzle and you’ll be making steady progress in no time. Each little milestone, whether it’s writing your first kanji or having a conversation in Japanese, will give you a boost of confidence and remind you just how capable you are!

5. Widen your career prospects Japan boasts one of the world’s largest and most advanced economies, making it a significant player worldwide. For example, corporations such as Sony, Toyota, and Nintendo are leaders in innovation and technology, shaping industries and influencing global trends.

So, being able to speak and understand Japanese can provide a substantial competitive edge, particularly in sectors like technology, business, education, and entertainment, where communication and cultural understanding are crucial. Being bilingual in Japanese and English is increasingly valued, especially in international business.

After all, learning Japanese enhances your ability to navigate complex negotiations, build strong relationships with Japanese partners, and understand the nuances of the market. So why learn Japanese? It will set you apart from other candidates, making you an attractive prospect for multinational companies looking to expand or strengthen their presence in Japan.

6. To make new friendsAccording to the 2021 Survey on Japanese-Language Education Abroad by the Japan Foundation, approximately 3.79 million people study Japanese. That’s a massive global community, not even counting the over 123 million people who speak Japanese as their first language.

Reason six to ‘why learn Japanese’ is the fact that learning the language will allow you to form connections with native speakers and fellow learners. What’s more, Japanese culture values politeness and respect in communication, which makes forming relationships even more enriching.

Even if you’re learning Japanese for professional purposes, networking in the language can help you develop meaningful business relationships and collaborations. Understanding cultural etiquette and speaking the language fluently will make you stand out and foster trust.

So, whether you’re diving into a new friendship over a bowl of ramen or chatting with a fellow learner about the best language resources, learning Japanese enriches your social world in ways you never imagined.

7. Keeping your brain sharpWhen considering the question of ‘why learn Japanese’, we cannot leave behind the benefits of the learning process for your brain. Research has shown that studying a new language from scratch, especially one as distinct from English as Japanese, can improve cognitive functions like:

memory;
focus;
and problem-solving skills.

The process of memorising the characters and understanding their meanings is akin to solving a puzzle, keeping your mind active and sharp. Additionally, bilingual individuals tend to be much better at multitasking. So, by learning Japanese, you’re not just gaining a new skill — you’re investing in your long-term brain health.

Start learning Japanese today!So, why learn Japanese? We hope these reasons have helped you decide whether to start your language-learning journey. As you can see, learning Japanese is more than just studying something; it’s about opening your mind to new experiences, connecting with people, and growing as a person.

Whether you’re captivated by anime inspired by Japan’s technological advances or eager to explore its traditions, the Japanese language offers endless opportunities. And the best part? You don’t have to do it alone.

With Coffee Break Japanese, you can learn at your own pace, wherever and whenever it suits you. Our engaging podcasts and online course are designed to guide you through the language step-by-step, making the process enjoyable and accessible. From essential vocabulary to cultural insights, we’ll help you unlock the beauty of the Japanese language one lesson at a time. What are you waiting for? Head over to our Coffee Break Japanese page to begin your journey!

The post Why learn Japanese? 8 great reasons to start today! appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Coffee Break Japanese Lesson 1 launches on 6th February. Here’s a trailer to let you know what you can expect from the series.

The post CBJ 1.00 | Coffee Break Japanese Trailer appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Whether your adventure of learning a new language has already started or you are thinking about taking the first steps, one question you might have is “What is the best way to learn a language?”

Several factors contribute to language learning and being aware of these helps make the most of your experience.

Whether you’re studying for family reasons, travel, personal growth, career advancement, or any other reason, in this article, you will find the best strategies to help you achieve your language-learning goals effectively.

Check out these six golden rules on what the best way to learn a language is:

1. Being consistentIt can be hard to know where to begin when learning a language from scratch and if you are wondering what is the best way to learn a language, one key element to remember is consistency. By dedicating time to it regularly, you will see constant progress, whereas if you only work on your language skills every now and again, it will take much longer to reach your language-learning goals.

We believe that you can make language learning something regular and enjoyable that fits in with your everyday life, just like having your daily coffee break. And in this way, you’ll form a language-learning habit that sticks.

Pretty much common sense, isn’t it?

To help with your consistency, our top tip for you is to build a regular study routine and commit to daily or weekly practice sessions. Remember: little and often is more beneficial and easier to stick to than planning to study for two hours every fortnight.

In addition to that, be sure to have realistic goals – don’t expect to be able to understand everything that is being said in a dialogue after one month of learning.

An achievable goal would look more like “feeling confident to order a coffee abroad after a month of learning” or even “being able to answer basic questions about yourself after two months”. And be proud of yourself when you achieve these!

If you’re looking for some great tips on what the best way to learn a language is, by sticking to a routine and staying consistent, be sure to check out the video below featuring Mark, the founder of Coffee Break, as he shares his valuable insights as both a language teacher and learner.

2. Taking good notes and reviewing the content Ok, so what is the best way to learn a language? Another technique that may be useful to you is to take good notes and review the content you learn whenever you have a spare moment.

With effective note-taking, you can better memorise:

key vocabulary;
grammar rules;
natural phrases and idioms;
and cultural aspects.

Writing explanations or definitions in your own words is very useful for consolidation and helps you to remember them.

Don’t forget to organise your notes in a structured manner – maybe with some colour coding or by incorporating visual elements. This way you can create a great resource to refer back to whenever you need clarification.

Make sure to regularly review your notes to help reinforce your memory and deepen your understanding. This doesn’t have to be a long or boring task – instead, we’d encourage you to carry your language-learning notebook with you and simply review a couple of pages while you’re waiting for the bus, on the train, or during your next coffee break. This will improve the long-term retention of the newfound knowledge.

3. Engaging with the cultureAnother great way to learn a language is to actively engage with the culture or cultures associated with it. After all, language and culture are deeply connected.

Immersing yourself in cultural aspects of the new language can be helpful to improve your understanding and proficiency. You can try books (to suit your level), movies in a different language (maybe watch something with subtitles to begin with) and music, for example!

It may seem obvious, but what many people forget when looking for resources to help their language learning is to look for something they enjoy! Think about it – if you’d never normally choose to watch a historical movie, instead of making yourself watch one in the language you’re learning, look for albums of your favourite genre of music to help you practise instead. Similarly, if you don’t enjoy reading crime novels even in English, perhaps a better choice for you is watching an action movie.

By making your learning enjoyable, you will form habits you want to stick to, and will make better progress.

If you’re lucky enough to be able to travel to a country where the language you’re learning is spoken, you can also use your travel plans to encourage yourself to interact with native speakers and with the culture around you.

4. Choosing the right method for youIf you are wondering what the best way to learn a language is, remember that the ideal technique for other people might not be the same technique that suits you best. However, with so many resources online, choosing the right one for you can feel challenging.

Therefore, go for a method that matches your schedule. For example, maybe you have a busy schedule and are looking for a method that allows you to learn at your own pace – here at Coffee Break Languages, we provide resources to allow you to do exactly that.

We offer bite-sized lessons in 10 different languages, which is ideal if you feel you need flexibility and relevant content, where you’ll learn with experienced teachers and native speakers. In addition, instead of overwhelming you with complex grammar rules or ignoring grammar altogether, for us, it’s important to present language and concepts in an easy-to-understand way, as if you were sitting down for a coffee with a friend who speaks the language you’re learning.

5. Immersing yourself as much as you can Another aspect of what is the best way to learn a language is immersing yourself in the language as much as possible. This can help accelerate your understanding of new vocabulary, and it is essential for developing listening skills and good pronunciation. This way, we also soon start to hear things like terms that don’t translate 100% to your native language.

You can do this by listening to podcasts, watching movies or TV shows, reading books or articles, and engaging with the language whenever you can. Fit these things into your day, during your moments of downtime or while you’re doing other things.

Our top tip: bring language learning into your everyday life wherever and whenever you can. If you’re out on a walk, look around you and see if you know the words to describe what you see. Or, if you’re waiting to pay for your shopping, take a moment to think about what you would say to the cashier if you were in a country where the language you’re learning is spoken.

6. Understanding that language learning is a journeyAfter reading these tips about the best way to learn a language, there is one more you should add to the list: understanding that learning a new language is a journey.

This journey should be taken with patience, perseverance, but also enjoyment. Of course, there will be moments when you will feel you’re not getting the pronunciation right, or you are not progressing as much as you should, and other frustrations.

However, the thing to keep in mind here is that this journey is worth it and that you are more than capable of doing it. So, don’t forget to celebrate your progress, no matter how small, and stay focused on your goals.

So, in summary, what is the best way to learn a language? There isn’t one, but if you take into account these tips and always remember to keep going and use the method (or methods) that feel best for you, that will make your learning journey better.

In order to have the best results possible, the support and guidance of a great language platform, like Coffee Break Languages, can make that journey so much easier. We offer easy access to learning resources at any time, so you can adapt to the language-learning method that suits you.

Visit Coffee Break Languages and find out more about the Coffee Break method and languages!

The post What is the best way to learn a language? appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

When learning a new language, any technique or method that makes your learning experience easier and more enjoyable is something to keep an eye out for, right? With that in mind, microlearning has gained popularity in recent years as an effective method for acquiring new skills and knowledge.

Let’s explore the concept and benefits of microlearning and how focus apps can complement it by providing an engaging approach to your language learning.

What is microlearning and what are the benefits of microlearning? Microlearning involves breaking down learning materials into small, manageable units. Typically, the content is delivered in bite-sized lessons. This approach contrasts with traditional forms of learning, as it offers learners the flexibility to engage with content in brief, focused sessions.

The method is exactly the one used here at Coffee Break Languages – a language platform that helps you learn a new language one coffee break at a time, focusing on specific topics to help you improve.

But what about the benefits of microlearning? There are several advantages to this method, but the four main ones are:

It helps improve knowledge retention, as it offers concise pieces of information. Microlearning will therefore help you absorb information more effectively
It helps people learn faster because it offers condensed knowledge so learners cover a wide range of topics in a shorter period. This accelerated learning pace is perfect for people with busy schedules, allowing learners to make steady progress over time.
It is perfect for individual learning, especially because microlearning can be tailored to personal goals as it allows for a flexible approach;
It is great if you need flexibility, as you can easily have a quick session on your way to work, during your coffee break, or even when relaxing at home.

What are focus apps and how can they help with microlearning and learning a new language?Now that you are aware of what microlearning is and the main benefits of microlearning, it is time to understand what focus apps are and how they help with learning languages using this method.

Focus apps are applications created to enhance concentration and productivity. Alongside taking good notes and other techniques for learning a language efficiently, these apps can help you learn a new language faster as they help minimise distractions and promote focused work sessions.

They are platforms that use various techniques, such as time-management strategies and gamification, to help people maintain their attention. These apps relate to microlearning because they offer a structured approach to studying that helps people learn faster.

Using them to learn a new language means integrating one of them into your study routine. You can start by setting specific goals and allocating time slots for study sessions using the app, for example.

5 focus apps you might want to try!There are several apps available, but the Coffee Break team selected five that we think are worth a try to help you focus when reviewing your language notes, dedicating time to language lessons, or any other language-learning task.

If you are part of the Coffee Break Community, you will already be familiar with the benefits of microlearning, but you will also be likely to know how easy it is to get distracted or lose sight of your goals – that is where these focus apps can become invaluable.

Check out these five apps to see if they work for you:

1. Focus to-doThis app helps you organise your study time using the Pomodoro technique for studying – breaking study sessions into short intervals (typically 25 minutes) separated by brief breaks. It goes hand in hand with microlearning benefits, right?

With this application, you can create reminders, synchronise them with all your devices, and make cloud backups.

2. ForestForest is a very popular focus app that offers the benefits of microlearning by encouraging people to stay focused by planting virtual trees. You can decide to stop using your phone to focus for specific periods, and your trees will grow. At the end of your task, you can see a visual representation of your productivity as you gradually create a forest.

The time frames on the app are also based on the Pomodoro technique for studying.

3. Focus DogFocus Dog combines reminders and challenges to keep you on track with your tasks. With its playful interface, this app adds an element of fun to the learning process, motivating you to stay engaged. Again, this application uses the Pomodoro technique for studying.

4. Focus Plant Similar to Forest, Focus Plant helps you have focused work sessions by rewarding you with virtual plants. We love it because you can cultivate your digital garden as you progress through your tasks.

5. Habitica Habitica gamifies task management by allowing you to create an avatar, set your own goals, and complete tasks to earn rewards. This app is particularly good for learners who thrive on competition and enjoy a sense of accomplishment, which also relates to some of the benefits of microlearning.

This app is also available for wearable tech, and allows collaboration – if you feel like competing with other language learners from your family or friends.

6. Keep your streak with Coffee Break TVOur Coffee Break TV app and web platform is an on-demand library of video lessons, to allow you to practise your language skills in short, focused sessions of just 5, 10 or 15 minutes.

Use the Calendar feature to schedule your learning for the day or the week ahead, or simply browse the library, keep up your streak and work towards gaining badges for consecutive days of microlearning.

Learn a new language with the Coffee Break microlearning method!At Coffee Break Languages, we focus on the microlearning method, offering bite-sized lessons in 10 different languages. With this technique and the focus apps mentioned before, you can easily start your learning journey and make advancements in no time.

After all, instead of overwhelming you with long lessons and complex grammar rules, we break down your language of interest into manageable chunks, allowing learners to engage with the material in short, focused sessions.

Coffee Break Languages delivers over 1.9 million lessons every month to learners all over the world, who regularly enjoy the benefits of microlearning in our episodes. Check out what James, one of our Italian learners, had to say:

“I just discovered Coffee Break Italian and I want to compliment the team for such a fantastic way for me to improve my study of the Italian language. I have used many study aids over the years and it is only Coffee Break Italian that is giving me exactly what I need. Thank you!”

With Coffee Break Languages, you can learn a language at any time, so whether you’re commuting to work, taking a coffee break, or relaxing at home, you can easily squeeze in a quick session.

Start your language-learning journey today! Visit the Coffee Break Academy, and find out more about the languages and levels taught.

The post Benefits of microlearning: how to use a focus app to learn a new language appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

To make the most of your language-learning journey, learning and practising new vocabulary is essential. A good strategy to remember new words is to write them down after each lesson or learning session, but did you know there are techniques for taking notes effectively?

In this article, you will find our top five tips to enhance your learning experience and make the most of each time you grab a coffee and try to learn some vocabulary.

5 tips for taking notes on a new language Taking effective notes is a crucial aspect of language learning, helping you to organise information, reinforce concepts, and track your progress.

Moreover, the act of physically writing down information can aid memory retention.

Let’s explore five top tips for taking notes efficiently to help you maximise your efforts when learning a new language.

1. Use a dedicated notebook for language learningThe first of our tips for taking notes might seem like the most obvious one: have a notebook dedicated to the language you are learning. This is especially important if you are learning a language from scratch.

Having a designated place to put down vocabulary, grammar rules, and expressions that you learn will help you stay organised and focused. Another advantage of this method is that it gives you motivation. Why? Well, it gives you motivation because you can see how far you’ve advanced in your language-learning process.

2. Develop a consistent notation systemAnother tip for taking notes is to create a consistent notation system. But what does that mean?

You want to be able to identify new words, expressions, regular and irregular verbs just by looking at your notes. If you are wondering how to do this, believe us: it is easier than it seems.

You can choose a colour-coding system where blue represents new words, green is for regular verbs, lilac for irregular verbs, and pink represents new expressions, for example. You can also choose colours for specific themes.

Another idea is to use symbols or abbreviations. For example, if you’re learning German or any language that features noun gender, we’d suggest adding (m), (f) or (n) after any nouns you list, so that you remember whether a noun’s grammatical gender is masculine, feminine or neuter.

In the end, it is up to you. Find a system that works best for you and stick to it!

3. Incorporate visual elementsThe next suggestion in our top tips for taking notes on a new language is to incorporate visual elements into your learning experience. Many people retain information better if it is displayed on diagrams, mind maps, or charts.

This could be anything from creating your own verb conjugation tables, constructing a chart that shows how adjective endings change depending on a noun, or if drawing is your strong point, even adding your own illustrations to accompany new vocabulary!

Usually, these visual aids help provide more context and reinforce new vocabulary more engagingly and memorably.

4. Practise active note-takingThe fourth tip for taking notes in a new language is to practise active note-taking. What does that mean?

Well, instead of just passively transcribing or copying down information, the idea of this activity is that you – as the student – are actually looking in-depth into each word or phrase and how to use it. This active engagement with the learning materials promotes better comprehension and retention, ensuring that you will be able to remember new words with more ease.

Let’s say you’re learning Spanish, and you come across the phrase tener hambre in your lesson, which means to be hungry. Instead of simply writing down the phrase and its translation, you can:

note that tener means to have and hambre means hunger, so you understand that the literal translation is to have hunger
write down a few example sentences using tener hambre in context, such as:
- Yo tengo hambre. I am hungry
- Él siempre tiene hambre después del entrenamiento. He is always hungry after the workout.
make a note to pay attention to any related expressions or variations, such as tener sed to be thirsty or tener sueño to be sleepy, as they help you see similar language patterns.

5. Embrace technologyTo make your note-taking process even more convenient, you can embrace technology. Sometimes we don’t have any paper handy when we come across a new piece of vocabulary. Therefore, you can use the notes on your phone or tablet to quickly type down what you learn.

This flexibility ensures that your language-learning materials are always close to you! You can even upload the vocabulary into a digital flashcard app like Brainscape or Quizlet to help you test your knowledge.

6. An extra tip! Regularly update your notesA bonus suggestion on our list of tips for taking notes is to regularly update your notes. This is important because when doing that, you are also reviewing content.

So, set aside some time to look through your notes and add information on usage or synonyms that you might have learnt since you originally took the notes.

How to learn a new language quickly and easily?Now that you know how to take notes, you can use this to make the most of your language learning!

Using our tips for note-taking will enhance your learning and make language retention smoother – however, if you feel like you could be learning a new language more quickly and more easily, then that is where we can help you.

Why? At Coffee Break Languages, we believe that language learning should be accessible to everybody, no matter your age, location, experience, or even how busy you are. We offer lessons and practical tips to help you – our learners – integrate your language learning into your everyday life, ‘one coffee break at a time’.

To do that, we offer a range of resources, from podcasts and online courses to interactive materials and an on-demand video app, designed to fit every learner’s learning process. So, get started with our top tips for taking notes – and with our range of bite-sized lessons, you will master any new language in no time!

Learn more about Coffee Break Languages, familiarise yourself with the languages we offer and choose the right one for you now!

The post 5 top tips for taking notes on a new language effectively appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Phrasal verbs are difficult for many English learners, there are so many to remember and not enough time! So, today, let’s learn some examples of phrasal verbs in the time it takes to have a coffee!

In this episode of Coffee Break English Nick talks to Anabel about what is important to him during the festive period. He uses a lot of examples of phrasal verbs and Nick and Anabel will go through each phrasal verb and explain their meaning.

The Coffee Break English Show is a podcast series of bite-sized, friendly conversations in which we demystify tricky English language topics. In the latest video, Nick and Anabel dive into the holiday season and explore a phrasal verb list.

Continue reading to find out more and why not listen to the podcast as you go?

Plus, don’t miss our free worksheet at the end to practise what you learn!

The textHoliday phrasal verbs in EnglishPhrasal verbs really allow us to be very specific when we are describing or explaining something to someone. They are particularly useful when talking to friends as they may be informal but they are normally much more descriptive than the more formal synonyms in English.

Here are the 6 examples of phrasal verbs from the text with their definitions.

1. Dream ofthink about something that you really want

Dream of is a phrasal verb which means to imagine or think about something you desire strongly. It is usually transitive which means we need an object after it.

e.g.

When he was younger he used to dream of becoming a footballer.
I have dreamt of my wedding day since I was a child.

2. Light upsuddenly look happy or surprised (face or eyes)

become bright or illuminated

The next word in our examples of phrasal verbs list is light up. It has a literal and a metaphorical meaning. When we talk about a person lighting up, we can imagine their eyes or face becoming happy, usually because they have received good news.

When we use light up in a literal sense, we imagine the illumination of an entire object, often in a dramatic way.

e.g.

Her face lit up when I gave her the present.
They lit up the Christmas tree in the town centre on Saturday.

3. Set offstart a journey

trigger / make (something) start working

Next in our examples of phrasal verbs is set off, which has two very different meanings. The first refers to the start of a journey or trip, a synonym of this example is depart. The secondary meaning is to trigger something, if we set something off, we make it go off (a bonus phrasal verb!).

e.g.

We need to set off at 7.00 if we want to arrive by 8.00.
I burnt my toast and set off the smoke alarm.

4. Leave behindnot bring / leave in a place

go away permanently from something or someone

The next phrasal verb in the list is leave behind. It can mean to not take something with you when you leave, or leave a person, group or place permanently.

e.g.

I accidentally left my phone behind when I went to work this morning
She left her family and friends behind when she moved abroad

5. Cut outseparate something from what surrounds it using scissors or a knife

not publish or broadcast part of a text or video

remove from a situation

The fifth word in our list of examples of phrasal verbs is a 3 in 1! There are three different meanings of cut out and they go from literal to metaphorical.

The first means to cut something out with scissors or a knife. A shape from paper, for example.

The second meaning refers to editing a video or document. You can cut out part of an article in a newspaper or a scene from a film.

The final meaning is the one in today’s episode. Here we mean to stop using or consuming something.

e.g.

My son’s picture was in the local newspaper, so I cut it out to save it.
She appeared in the background of the movie, but they cut that scene out!
The supermarket are trying to cut out plastic from their packaging.

6. Look forward towant something to happen because you think you will enjoy it

expect something positive or useful to happen

And so, let’s have a look at the final verb in our list of examples of phrasal verbs! This is my favourite as it is very common but you need to be careful with the verb form after this phrasal verb. The “to” in look forward to is a preposition and is part of the phrase. This means we need to use a noun or gerund after this phrasal verb like in the examples below.

I’m looking forward to going to my friend’s birthday party on Friday!
I’m looking forward to the weather warming up in spring.

Phrasal Verb RulesHere are some examples of phrasal verbs from the episode, organised into different types. Here you will find some examples but if you want to know more about these rules, make sure you sign up for the Coffee Break English Quest!

Example of phrasal verbs with no objectset off

We set off at 8am.

Examples of separable phrasal verbs with an objectleave behind

I left behind my jacket. / I left my jacket behind.

cut out

We cut out shapes. / We cut shapes out.

Example of inseparable phrasal verbs with an objectdream of

I have been dreaming of this moment for a long time.
~~I have been dreaming this moment of~~ ~~for a long time~~.

Object pronouns with phrasal verbs Where is your jacket? Oh no, I left it behind! * ~~Where is your jacket? Oh no, I left behind* it!~~

A visual summary of today’s examples of phrasal verbsNow you’re ready for the holidays!If you found these examples of phrasal verbs interesting, make sure you join us for the Coffee Break English Quest where you can learn many more phrasal verbs in English and improve your language skills.

For a little extra practice, download the free worksheet below, and see how much you’ve learned with this phrasal verb list.

Plus! To get regular free English lessons in your inbox, you can sign up for our short (coffee-break-sized) email lessons that will help you improve your English. You will also hear from Mark, the founder of Coffee Break Languages, giving advice for language learners at any level. Sign up for the newsletter!

Happy holidays and happy Coffee Breaking!

Listen to the podcastThe post 6 examples of phrasal verbs to celebrate the holidays appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Welcome to the final lesson from Level 1 of Coffee Break Gaelic! We learn some new phrases, more specifically language related to the seasons and we also review some key language points.

The post CBGa 1.40 | Stornoway appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Welcome to the final episode of our beginners’ course in Portuguese. Join teacher Rafael and learner Ava to listen to the final dialogue recorded on location in Portugal, during Ava’s trip to practise her Portuguese. Then, back in the studio, Rafael will help you understand all the language used in the conversation. Vamos lá!

If this is the first time you’ve come to the Coffee Break Portuguese podcast feed, scroll back in the feed for lesson 1, to learn Portuguese right from the start.

The post CBP 1.40 | An end-of-trip party appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

When you decide to learn a new language, we know that it can be frustrating when trying to remember new words. That is perfectly natural and normal. However, you can incorporate some language-learning techniques to make this process easier.

In this beginner’s guide, you will discover seven easy ways to improve your language-learning experience and make the most of each time you grab a coffee and try to learn some vocabulary. Keep reading!

How does memory work? Before looking into the language-learning techniques, it’s helpful to understand how memory works. Memory is a very complex system involving multiple processes that work together to encode, store, and retrieve information.

The process of memorising begins with the conversion of information into a form that the brain can process and store. Once the information is encoded, it is moved to ‘storage’ where it is held for later retrieval. But if it is that simple, why can’t you remember all the information you ever received?

Science says that memory has several types, including sensory memory, short-term memory, and long-term memory. So, if you want to remember new words, you need them to transition from short-term to long-term.

This process is called consolidation and is influenced by factors such as repetition, emotional significance and – believe it or not – sleep!

To set something straight: here, at Coffee Break Languages, we believe that you can learn a language at any age and if you have trouble remembering new vocabulary, having some language-learning techniques is incredibly beneficial.

7 language-learning techniques to remember new wordsLearning a language from scratch is a process that needs dedication because it requires repetition and time, but aren’t all things that are worthwhile? You can achieve this more easily by using certain language-learning techniques.

Let’s check out seven of these techniques:

1. Create your own list of wordsOne effective way to remember new words is by creating your own personalised vocabulary list. Keep a notebook or digital document where you can put down words you encounter during your language-learning journey.

Our top tip: with each new word you note down, include any other key information that you need to know. For example, if you’re learning Spanish or any language that features noun gender, you could write una casa instead of simply casa, so that you remember that house in Spanish is a feminine noun. Or, maybe you’d write down partire (aux. essere) if you were learning Italian and needed to remember that the verb to leave in Italian takes essere as the auxiliary verb in the perfect tense.

You could also organise the list by categories or themes to make it easier to review and practise regularly.

2. Create mnemonicsAnother good language-learning technique is creating mnemonics – associations between new words and familiar concepts. This type of memory aid helps you associate new information with existing knowledge.

One idea is to create a sentence to help you with terms you recently learned, making them easier to recall later. You can group them by topics.

For example, if you’re learning French, you may have come across the useful mnemonic DR and MRS VANDERTRAMP. This is a popular one to use to help you remember the verbs that use être as an auxiliary verb in the perfect tense:

D (devenir) R (rester) M (monter) R (rentrer) S (sortir) V (venir) A (aller) N (naître) D (descendre) E (entrer) R (revenir) T (tomber) R (retourner) A (arriver) M (mourir) P (partir)

3. Repeat, repeat, and repeat Repetition is key to solidifying new vocabulary in your memory. So, one good language-learning technique is to try to remember new words within a timeframe. For example, you can try to remember new vocabulary after:

one hour;
a day;
and a week.

For example, you can think of five of your new words while brushing your teeth, walking to the shops or going for your train. Then you can try to write them down the next day when you have five mins spare and so on!

4. Use flashcardsFlashcards are one of the classic language-learning techniques to memorise vocabulary. You can write the new words you learn in one of your lessons on one side and their translation or definition on the other side.

You can ask someone to ‘test’ your knowledge of the meaning of each word. You can also use digital flashcard apps like Brainscape or Quizlet for convenience.

5. Name objects around youAnother effective technique is to create an environment where you are constantly seeing the new vocabulary you are learning. By exposing yourself to the language in various contexts, you’ll naturally reinforce your understanding of new words.

For example, if you are learning new kitchen vocabulary, you can add sticky notes around the room to name the fridge, sink, cupboards, stove, and so on in the language you are learning.

Another great habit to get into is to use your surroundings as a prompt for recalling vocabulary, so that you can practise whenever and wherever you are. Watch the video below for our top tips for doing this.

6. Try the stacking methodThe stacking method involves grouping similar words to help you remember them more effectively. Create word clusters based on common themes or sounds and practise recalling them as a group.

The stacking method differs from simply organising your vocabulary list into themes because it emphasises active recall and association-building. Rather than passively reviewing words grouped by theme, you actively engage with them as interconnected clusters, which enhances memory consolidation and retrieval.

Whether you choose to do this mentally or with a notepad depends on your personal preference and learning style. Some learners may find it helpful to physically write them down for reinforcement.

For example, you can identify travel-related words in French, such as avion plane, hôtel hotel and valise suitcase. After that, the clusters you can create based on associations can be related to holidays. Then you can visualise each cluster: you are in an airport, boarding an avion, arriving at your hôtel and unpacking your valise.

So, the stacking method helps you organise and remember vocabulary more effectively by grouping related words and practising recall in a structured way.

7. ‘Teach’ othersOf all the language-learning techniques, teaching others is amongst the most powerful ones. Why? Well, because in order to teach someone you need to actually understand what you are talking about.

If you can, try to share your language-learning journey with friends or family by explaining the meanings of words or teaching them simple phrases. Teaching others not only helps you retain information better but also helps you feel accomplished and confident in your language skills.

Word memorisation techniques boost your language learning!Now you know how to remember new words, right? After all, by incorporating these language-learning techniques into your study routine, you can improve your retention of new vocabulary.

Moreover, remember to take breaks and rest – sleep is very important to build memory. Learning a new language takes time, patience, and consistent effort, so don’t be discouraged by occasional forgetfulness.

Keep practising, experimenting with different methods, and celebrating your progress – however large or small it may be.

If you want to make the most of your language learning and have some regular lessons, in the language of your choice, to help reinforce your language learning, check out our free mini-email lessons. Subscribe now!

The post Language-learning techniques: retaining new vocabulary appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Welcome to the second last lesson of this series of Coffee Break Gaelic! This time we are exploring the Isle of Lewis.

The post CBGa 1.39 | The Isle of Lewis appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

We have something special in today’s episode! In the penultimate lesson of this season, we’re going to listen to two dialogues recorded on location in Lisbon, Portugal, and hear what happened when Ava and Catarina met up for um verdadeiro cafezinho! This was not just any cafezinho, but a very special coffee break at the Pastéis de Belém bakery – famous for its delicious pastéis de nata. Listen to practise your listening comprehension, while learning the fascinating history of the bakery.

The post CBP 1.39 | A special coffee break in Belém, Lisbon – Tasting Pastéis de Belém appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

This week we’re following Iona as she visits the Isle of Harris. We learn some new vocabulary and also review some more familiar grammar rules and phrases from earlier in the course.

The post CBGa 1.38 | The Isle of Harris appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Lesson 38 of our Portuguese course is a chance to review and practise the essential words and phrases that you typically use when you meet someone for the first time. We’ll listen to another conversation recorded on location in Portugal, then, back in the studio, teacher Rafael and learner Ava will talk through all the language used.

The post CBP 1.38 | Making friends in Portuguese – Vocabulary for meeting new people appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Welcome to another episode of Coffee Break Gaelic! In this episode, we continue our journey through Scotland, this time landing in North Uist and Berneray. We introduce some new words and phrases and take a look at plurals in Gaelic.

The post CBGa 1.37 | North Uist & Berneray appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In this newest episode of Coffee Break Portuguese, we’ll be reviewing useful language for buying travel tickets! You’ll get the opportunity to practise your listening comprehension through a dialogue that took place during learner Ava’s time in Porto, then teacher Rafael will help you understand everything that was said.

The post CBP 1.37 | Buying a train ticket to Lisbon – Portuguese transport vocabulary appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In Lesson 36 of Coffee Break Gaelic, Iona is continuing her travels in Scotland and exploring the Isle of Skye.

The post CBGa 1.36 | The Isle of Skye appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Join Rafael and Ava in this latest episode to continue learning Portuguese on your coffee break. The topic of our lesson today is how to ask for help at the pharmacy. You’ll practise your listening comprehension by hearing a dialogue that took place during learner Ava’s visit to the pharmacy, then teacher Rafael will help you understand everything that was said.

The post CBP 1.36 | Asking for help at the pharmacy – Asking for medical advice in Portuguese appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In this lesson, we take a trip to Iona and Staffa. We learn some new words and phrases and introduce the past tense of “to go”.

The post CBGa 1.35 | Iona & Staffa appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In the latest episode of Coffee Break Portuguese we’ll hear two dialogues to help you practise your listening skills in Portuguese. These conversations were recorded on location in Porto, Portugal, when Ava and her friend Mariana were out souvenir shopping, then visiting the well-known Mercado do Bolhão. Back in the studio, Rafael and Ava talk through all of the useful words and phrases in the two conversations, to help you understand everything.

The post CBP 1.35 | Shopping and lunch at the Mercado do Bolhão – Portuguese shopping vocabulary appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In this lesson of Coffee Break Gaelic, we join Iona in Mull and look at both familiar and new vocabulary, specifically focusing on food words!

The post CBGa 1.34 | The Isle of Mull appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Welcome to lesson 34 of Coffee Break Portuguese! In this lesson we’ll be hearing multiple voices and accents in Portuguese. We’ll be listening to two conversations that took place while Ava was having breakfast in the hotel in Porto during her trip. Listen to the episode to practise your listening comprehension and to join Rafael and Ava as they talk through all of the language used in the conversations.

The post CBP 1.34 | Breakfast in the hotel – Ordering food and drinks in Portuguese appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In this lesson, we continue on our virtual journey. We follow Iona and her cousins on their travels in Scotland and encounter both some familiar phrases and some completely new ones.

The post CBGa 1.33 | Oban appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Join teacher Rafael and learner Ava in the latest episode of Coffee Break Portuguese to review useful words and phrases for checking into a hotel. We’ll hear a conversation recorded on location in Portugal between Ava and the hotel receptionist, which will help you expand your vocabulary on this topic and practise your listening skills. Vamos lá!

The post CBP 1.33 | At hotel check-in – Checking into a hotel in Portuguese appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In this lesson of Coffee Break Gaelic, we continue our adventures in Scotland and hear about Iona’s visit to Loch Lomond.

The post CBGa 1.32 | Loch Lomond appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In this lesson we’ll be listening to the second recorded conversation that Ava had on her trip to Portugal. This time, she was practising her Portuguese by asking for travel information at the airport. The conversation contained many useful words and phrases, which Rafael and Ava then discussed back in the studio

The post CBP 32 | Asking for travel information – Asking for tourist information in Portuguese appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

We are back after a short break and over the course of the next ten lessons we will be taking our Gaelic to the next level and really putting what we have learned into practice. We will follow Iona and her cousins Cailean and Sìne as they take a virtual island hopping trip. In Lesson 31, we start at the very beginning of the trip – in Glasgow.

The post CBGa 1.31 | Glasgow appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Welcome to a new episode… on location in Portugal! It’s time to put everything we’ve learned in our course so far into practice in real-life situations. Over the next 10 episodes, we’re going to be following Ava’s trip to Portugal. Back in the studio, Rafael and her will listen to the conversations recorded while she was there and discuss the interesting language, words and phrases used by all of the speakers we hear in a variety of contexts. Vamos lá!

The post CBP 31 | At the airport – Planning a trip to Portugal appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Knowing how to react in a Spanish conversation can significantly enhance your fluency and make you sound more like a native speaker. Therefore, using Spanish filler words to react in a conversation is key.

That’s why we didn’t want to finish this season of The Coffee Break Spanish Show without bringing you some tips on how to perform better in your speaking in Spanish. In this article, we’ll explore common reactions and filler words in Spanish that will help you sound natural and confident in your conversations. ¡Qué ganas!

The Coffee Break Spanish Show is a series of short, informal podcast episodes, in which we discuss tricky but useful topics for Spanish learners. In the latest episode, Anabel and Concha introduce some of the main Spanish filler words, teaching you how to properly use them in a real conversation and sound more like a native speaker.

Listen along to the audio episode, or watch the video version, while you read this article. Once you reach the end, don’t miss your free worksheet which you can download to put what you’ve learned to the test. ¡Empecemos!

Common Spanish filler words to react in a conversationNow we are going to look at some of the main Spanish filler words, which will help us navigate any conversation in the language like a native speaker! We have included filler words in Spanish more focused on how to react to news and also some other phrases or Spanish filler words that will show you are engaged in the conversation. ¡Empezamos!

¿En serio?This phrase is perfect for expressing surprise, whether it’s after hearing good or bad news. It’s similar to the English “really?”. An example of this use in a conversation is:

A: Me voy dos meses a Tailandia.
A: I’m going to Thailand for two months.
B: ¿En serio? ¡Qué bien!
B: Really? That’s great!

¡Qué rollo!Use this phrase to show that you find something boring or bothersome. It is similar to the English “how boring!” and “what a pain!”. In this phrase, we can find the word rollo, which means “roll” or, in slang, “boring’.

Let’s see how to use this one taking the same example about a trip to Thailand. This time, let’s imagine that speaker A doesn’t like travelling.

A: Me voy dos meses a Tailandia.
A: I’m going to Thailand for two months.
B: ¿En serio? ¡Qué rollo!
B: Really? What a pain!

Now we can also see how ¿en serio? can be used to react to negative news. Listen to the audio episode or watch the video to notice the difference in intonation when using this reaction filler after good and bad news. The difference is subtle, so you may want to listen to it several times.

¡Qué pena!Another one of our Spanish filler words (another phrase in this case) is ¡qué pena!. Similar to English, this phrase expresses condolences about a situation – it’s like saying “what a shame!”. Also, in the following example you can see it’s possible to use multiple filler words in the same sentence to convey more nuanced reactions.

A: No podemos ir de vacaciones.
A: We can’t go on holiday.
B: ¡Oh, no! ¿En serio? ¡Qué pena!
B: Oh, no! Really? What a shame!

¡Qué me dices!This phrase is used to show surprise, whether good or bad, and can be interchangeable with ¿en serio?, or you use one after the other to emphasise your surprised reaction.

It’s important to differentiate it from ¿qué me dices? (“what are you telling me?”), which is an actual question where the speaker wants you to repeat what you said. In a conversation, the intonation shows the difference between them. It may be good to listen to or watch the episode to get a better grasp of this.

A: Mis amigos me prepararon un viaje sorpresa y nos fuimos una semana a Francia.
A: My friends organised a surprise trip for me and we went to France for a week.
B: ¡Qué me dices! ¡Qué guay!
B: Really? How cool!

¡No me digas!Similar to ¡qué me dices! and ¿en serio?, we have ¡no me digas!. It literally means “don’t tell me”, but in some contexts it’s simply used to express surprise. For example:

A: Me voy a casar el mes que viene.
A: I’m going to get married next month.
B: ¡No me digas! ¿En serio? ¡Qué bien!
B: No way! Really? So cool!

¡Qué lío!Use this to express that a situation is complex or a mess. For instance:

A: Pensaba que tenía que hacer una presentación el lunes, pero me dijo mi jefe que era el martes. Llega el lunes y me dicen que tenía que hacerla ese día. ¡Y no me había preparado nada!
A: I thought I had to do a presentation on Monday, but my boss told me that it was on Tuesday. Monday arrived and I was told that I had to do it that very same day. And I didn’t have anything ready!
B: ¡Qué me dices! ¿En serio?
B: Really? Are you joking?
A: Sí, sí. Y resulta que el tema de la presentación era otro del que me habían dicho.
A: Yes. And it seems that the topic of the presentation was different from what I was told.
B: ¡No me digas! ¡Qué lío!
B: No way! What a mess!

Ya / síOne of the most versatile filler words in Spanish is ya. It is incredibly useful to show that you are following the conversation. It’s simple but effective. Instead of ya, or along with it, we can also use sí or ajá. These three filler words in Spanish will show you are engaged in the conversation.

A continuación, we have transcribed the conversation between Anabel and Concha from this episode of The Coffee Break Spanish Show, but we’d recommend listening to it in the video or audio episode, too, to hear how it sounds in a real conversation.

Anabel: ¿Qué vas a hacer este fin de semana?
Anabel: What are you going to do this weekend?
Concha: Este fin de semana, Anabel, me voy a París.
Concha: Anabel, this weekend I’m going to Paris.
Anabel: Ah, ¡qué bien!
Anabel: Ah, how cool!
Concha: Sí, voy a París para ver a mi amiga, que vive allí.
Concha: Yes, I’m going to Paris to see my friend, who lives there.
Anabel: Ajá, sí.
Anabel: (simply showing attention to the conversation)
Concha: Y vamos a visitar muchos museos.
Concha: And we are going to visit many museums.
Anabel: Ay, ¡qué bien!
Anabel: Oh, how cool!
Concha: Sí, pero creo que va a llover.
Concha: Yes, but I think it’s going to rain.
Anabel: Ah, ¡qué mal!
Anabel: Oh, no. How bad!
Concha: Sí… no, no. Espero que no llueva.
Concha: Yes, I know… I hope it won’t rain.
Anabel: Oh, lo siento.
Anabel: Aw, I’m sorry.

Summary of some common Spanish filler words to react in a conversationLearning how to react like a native speaker in a Spanish conversation involves mastering various Spanish filler words. By using expressions like ¿En serio?, ¡Qué rollo!, ¡Qué pena!, ¡Qué me dices!, ¡Qué lío!, and the versatile ya, you’ll not only sound more natural but you will also enhance your conversational skills. So, practise these reactions and see how they transform your Spanish interactions!

If sounding more natural and more like a native speaker is one of your main goals, then make sure you check out another episode of The Coffee Break Spanish Show, which is all about how to sound more natural in Spanish in restaurants and shops. Or, if you’d like to find out how to ask for the bill like a native speaker, you can find a video all about this here. ¡No te lo pierdas!

¡Eso es todo por este episodio! We hope that you have enjoyed this episode about Spanish filler words and how to use them to react in a conversation, and we also hope you enjoyed this season of The Coffee Break Spanish Show. If you found this article useful, why not listen to the full episode with Anabel and Concha on The Coffee Break Spanish Show? For more episodes for Spanish learners, make sure to subscribe to our podcast feed and our channel on YouTube.

As well as this, you can sign up to receive regular, free email lessons to help you improve your Spanish. You will also receive language-learning tips and tricks from Mark, the founder of Coffee Break Languages. Just look out for the sign-up box!

Muchísimo ánimo, and, as always,

Happy Coffee Breaking!

Listen to the podcastThe post How to react like a native speaker: Spanish filler words appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Today, we are looking at a single German word that many learners come across early in their studies: ziehen. You might have seen it on doors, where it means “to pull.”

However, this verb is one of those versatile ones in German and it has multiple meanings depending on the context. Let’s explore some of these diverse uses.

The Coffee Break German Show is a video and audio podcast series of short discussions, in which we explore interesting German language topics. Join Mark and Thomas in our latest episode for a thorough look at this interesting German verb.

Keep reading to find out more, and we’d recommend listening to the podcast episode as you read. Plus, don’t miss our free worksheet at the end to practise what you learn!

What does the verb ‘ziehen’ mean?We may be familiar with ziehen meaning “to pull”. However, as you’ll see below, it has many different meanings in addition to this.

The core meaning: “to pull”At its core, it often means “to pull”. This is a straightforward translation that appears in many everyday situations. For example:

Der Hund zieht an der Leine.The dog pulls on the leash.

Bitte zieh nicht an mir.Please don’t pull (on) me.

This second example uses the imperative in German and both sentences here show use of the preposition an with the verb ziehen.

Another meaning: “to draw”A closely-related meaning of this verb is “to draw”, as in drawing a card or drawing conclusions:

Zieh eine Karte.Draw a card.

Er hat die richtigen Schlüsse gezogen.He has drawn the right conclusions.

Sometimes, it implies a figurative pull or attraction:

Im Sommer zieht es uns ans Meer.
In summer, we are drawn to the sea.

Es hat keinen Sinn, wir müssen hier einen Schlussstrich ziehen.It makes no sense, we need to draw a line here.

Further meanings: moving and moreZiehen also means “to move” in the context of changing residences. For instance:

Wir werden nächstes Jahr nach Japan ziehen.We will move to Japan next year.

Another common use relates to draughts or wind:

Es zieht, bitte mach das Fenster zu.There’s a draught, please close the window.

When making tea, the verb also describes the steeping process:

Der Tee muss 5 Minuten ziehen.The tea needs to steep for 5 minutes.

In a gardening context, it refers to growing plants:

Er zieht die Gurken in seinem Treibhaus.He grows cucumbers in his greenhouse.

Lastly, let’s see the verb in a practical, everyday situation:

Er zieht den Koffer in das Haus.He pulls the suitcase into the house.

Time to practise!Now, it’s time to put everything you’ve learned to the test. Try translating the following sentences into German. You can find the answers at the end of this blog article.

He pulls his suit out of the wardrobe.
We are moving to Spain next year.

If you found this interesting, make sure to watch or listen to the full episode with Thomas and Mark on The Coffee Break German Show. To keep up to date with new Coffee Break German episodes and lessons, subscribe to our YouTube channel or our podcast feed, wherever you get your podcasts.

What’s more, you can sign up to receive regular, free German lessons straight to your inbox. Look out for the sign-up box and we hope that you enjoy your first mini lesson.

The verb ziehen is a fantastic example of how German verbs can be incredibly flexible. From pulling and drawing to moving and growing, the verb covers a wide range of actions and scenarios. Understanding its various uses can significantly enhance your comprehension and fluency in German. Keep an eye out for this versatile verb in your reading and listening, and you’ll soon master its many contexts.

In the meantime, happy Coffee Breaking!

PS. Here are the answers to the translation challenge:

Er zieht seinen Anzug aus dem Kleiderschrank.
Nächstes Jahr ziehen wir nach Spanien. / Wir ziehen nächstes Jahr nach Spanien.

Listen to the podcastThe post The many uses of the German verb ‘ziehen’ appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Panini, al fresco, latte, bolognese… There are many borrowed Italian words used in English. However, we don’t always pronounce them correctly and use them according to their original Italian meaning.

As learners of Italian, it’s fascinating to see how Italian words used in English often get misinterpreted, mispronounced, or completely transformed. This blending of languages is a natural part of linguistic evolution, but it can sometimes lead to funny or confusing situations.

Keep reading to learn about the most common Italian words used in English and how to pronounce them correctly, as well as about how Italians sometimes get creative with English words.

The Coffee Break Italian Show is the podcast series in which we discuss interesting topics for Italian learners. In this episode, Francesca and Maurizio talk about the most commonly used Italian words in English and explain how their meaning or usage changes when transferred from Italian to English. They also explain how to pronounce Italian words that are commonly used in English, such as gnocchi and bruschetta.

We’d recommend watching the video episode as you read this article, in order to get the most out of it. And don’t forget to look out for your free worksheet download at the end, which will allow you to put your knowledge of Italian words used in English to the test.

Iniziamo!

Italian words used in EnglishAs an Italian learner, we’re sure you’ve noticed that, sometimes, Italian words used in English don’t match their original Italian counterpart.

Let’s start by looking at some of the most common Italian words used in English – incorrectly, in some sense or another.

LatteUsed in English to refer to: a milky coffee
Actual meaning in Italian: “milk”
Italian equivalent: “a latte” = un caffellatte / un caffè latte

The first word in our list of Italian words used in English is a very common mistake that English speakers make when they travel to Italy and want to order a coffee in a café, or bar.

As Maurizio explains in the episode, if you order a latte in an Italian bar, you will be served a glass of milk!

Instead, if you want to drink a “latte”, as in a coffee with milk, you should ask for un caffellatte.

EspressoUsed in English to refer to: a short, single shot of coffee
Actual meaning in Italian: “quick”
Italian equivalent: “an espresso” = un caffè

Sticking with the theme of coffee, in Italy people don’t tend to order un espresso in un bar.

Instead, you can simply ask for un caffè, per favore, and it is implied that you mean an espresso.

Al frescoUsed in English to refer to: eating in an outdoor area
Actual meaning in Italian: “in a cool place”
Italian equivalent: “eat al fresco” = mangiare all’aperto or mangiare fuori

In Italian, al fresco simply means “in a cool place”, one that isn’t too warm. It doesn’t necessarily mean that the place is outside – for instance, it could be a room indoors which is cooler than the others.

For example, you may find the phrase on a food label, saying conservare al fresco. This means that it is to be stored in a cool, dry place.

In this episode of The Coffee Break Italian Show, Francesca teaches Maurizio a new phrase from her region of Italy, Piemonte, which is used to refer to an al fresco eating area. Watch the video lesson to learn the phrase, too.

BiscottiUsed in English to refer to: a specific type of crunchy, almond biscuit, usually accompanying a coffee
Actual meaning in Italian: a general word for “biscuits” or “cookies”
Italian equivalent: “a biscotti” = un cantuccio or un cantuccino

There are two ways that the word “biscotti” is used differently in English, compared to its original usage in Italian.

First of all, note that biscotti is simply the general word for any “biscuits” or “cookies”, rather than the specific type that we tend to associate with the word in English. In fact, what we think of as “biscotti” in English are actually called cantucci or cantuccini (which are smaller) in Italian.

Secondly, note that biscotti is the plural form of biscotto. So, while we may say “a biscotti” in English, this isn’t grammatically correct, as in Italian the singular form is un biscotto (“a biscuit / cookie”), and the plural form is dei biscotti (“some biscuits / cookies”).

PaniniUsed in English to refer to: a specific type of sandwich
Actual meaning in Italian: “sandwiches”
Italian equivalent: “a panini” = un panino (but this could refer to any type of sandwich)

Another case where a plural Italian noun is incorrectly used in English is panini.

Panini is the plural form in Italian, meaning “sandwiches.” The singular form is panino. For example, you could say:

Vado a comprare un panino.
I am going to buy a sandwich.

Io e Francesca mangiamo dei panini.
Francesca and I eat (some) sandwiches.

So, attenzione! If you just want one sandwich, make sure to use the word panino, instead of panini.

Also note that the word panino in Italian doesn’t refer to any specific type of sandwich, but is instead the general word for “sandwich”.

LasagnaUsed in English to refer to: a layered pasta dish
Actual meaning in Italian: an individual sheet of pasta
Italian equivalent: “lasagna” = le lasagne

The next one of Italian words used in English often incorrectly is lasagna.

So, while in English we use the word “lasagna” to refer to the full dish, in Italian the dish is thought of as a plural noun, le lasagne – referring to the multiple sheets of pasta. For example:

Mia nonna cucina le lasagne la domenica a pranzo.
My grandmother cooks lasagna for lunch on Sundays.

Also watch out for the pronunciation of the gn sound, as it can be tricky to know how to pronounce Italian words such as lasagna, when they are commonly used in English.

BologneseUsed in English to refer to: a sauce made with tomato and minced meat
Actual meaning in Italian: of or from Bologna
Italian equivalent: “spaghetti bolognese” or “spagbol” = spaghetti al ragù

In Italy, to order what we know as “spaghetti bolognese”, you should ask for spaghetti al ragù. The word bolognese would only be included if the sauce were specifically Bologna-style, in which case it would be ragù alla bolognese (“Bologna-style ragù”).

PeperoniUsed in English to refer to: a type of spicy salami used on pizza (“pepperoni”)
Actual meaning in Italian: “peppers” or “bell peppers”
Italian equivalent: “pepperoni” = salame piccante

The next of our food-related Italian words used in English is “pepperoni”. Note that pepperoni with the double consonant doesn’t exist in Italian, and the correct spelling is with a single p: peperoni.

So, if you want to order a pepperoni pizza in Italy (that is to say a pizza with spicy sausage on it), you should order una pizza con salame piccante.

However, una pizza con peperoni in Italy would be “a pizza with peppers”.

How to pronounce Italian words used in EnglishLet’s now have a look at some other Italian words used in English, but which are often pronounced differently from their original, correct pronunciation in Italian.

GnocchiWhen used in English, the word gnocchi is often pronounced differently to the original Italian word.

Gnocchi is a plural noun (the singular form is uno gnoccho) and in Italian it refers to the small potato dumplings that are eaten with a sauce.

So, when you’re using the word “gnocchi” to refer to this dish, watch out for the pronunciation of the gn and ch sound in Italian.

BruschettaSimilarly, do you know how the word bruschetta should be pronounced in Italian?

Bruschetta is another word that is frequently used in English, and it refers to a small dish that consists of toasted bread with tomatoes, olive oil and often other ingredients.

However, while it is often pronounced with a “sh” sound, when it is used in English, the correct Italian pronunciation actually contains a hard C sound – something like “broo-sket-tah”.

TagliatelleTagliatelle is another of our Italian words used in English in the context of food, and it refers to the type of pasta in long, flat strands.

However, the correct Italian pronunciation doesn’t contain a hard G sound. Instead, make sure to pay attention to the gli sound in Italian when pronouncing this word.

English words used in ItalianJust as there are many Italian words used in English that change their meaning as they are transferred from one language to the next, there are also many words in Italian that are based on English words and that change their original English meaning significantly in the process.

Let’s take a look at some of the most common ones, along with some example phrases and sentences.

Smart workinglo smart working
remote working

lavorare in smart working, lavorare in smart
to work remotely

Misteril mister
the (sports team) coach

Campingun camping
a campsite

C’è un camping in questa zona?
Is there a campsite in this area?

Footingil footing
jogging

Smokinguno smoking
a tuxedo, a dinner jacket

We hope this has helped you see how understanding the correct usage and pronunciation of Italian words used in English can be important in order to avoid confusion and to communicate more effectively, but also be interesting and entertaining!

For more information about all of these Italian words used in English and, in particular, to hear how to pronounce Italian words that are borrowed into English, make sure to watch the video episode, or listen to the podcast version, with Francesca and Maurizio on The Coffee Break Italian Show. You can also subscribe to our podcast feed or our YouTube channel while you’re there, so that you know new episodes from Coffee Break Italian are available.

Looking for more ways to improve your Italian? We send out regular, free email lessons to all of our Coffee Break Italian community who are subscribed to our email list. Look out for the sign-up box and we hope that you enjoy your mini lessons.

In the meantime, we hope that you now feel you know more about common Italian words used in English, and how to use and pronounce them correctly.

Happy Coffee Breaking!

Listen to the podcastThe post Italian words used in English: panini, lasagna, bruschetta and more appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

When learning French, one of the essential skills is knowing how to express agreement or disagreement with positive and negative statements. In this episode of The Coffee Break French Show, we’ll dive into the nuances of using moi si, pas moi / moi non, moi non plus and moi aussi in French.

Understanding these expressions will significantly enhance your ability to communicate effectively in French conversations. So, let’s explore how to say “yes” in French in various contexts.

To get the most out of this article, we’d suggest watching the video or listening to the podcast episode as you read. And don’t forget to look out for your free worksheet download at the end, to help you practise everything you learn. C’est parti !

Positive statement: agreement and disagreementWhen you want to agree with a positive statement, you use moi aussi in French. Or, if you want to disagree, you use pas moi or moi non.

Here are some examples:

– J’habite en Écosse.
– Moi aussi.
– I live in Scotland.
– Me too.

– Je suis français.
– Pas moi. / Moi non.
– I am French.
– Not me. / I’m not.

Negative statement: agreement and disagreementWhen responding to a negative statement, the expressions change. To agree with a negative statement, you use moi non plus. To disagree, you use moi si.

Let’s see some examples:

– Je ne suis pas japonais.
– Moi non plus.
– I am not Japanese.
– Me neither.

– Je ne parle pas allemand.
– Moi si.
– I don’t speak German.
– I do.

You will know oui to translate “yes”, but when you want to say “yes” after a negative sentence, the only option is si.

Understanding positive and negative statementsIt’s important to distinguish between positive and negative statements in terms of grammar. For instance, “I hate broccoli” is grammatically a positive statement, despite its negative connotation.

The key is to focus on the grammatical structure. This means that while “I hate broccoli” is grammatically a positive statement, “I don’t hate broccoli” is grammatically a negative statement, because the verb “hate” is negated.

Practical examplesLet’s test your understanding with a few more examples. Try to identify whether the statements are positive or negative and pay attention to the appropriate response.

– Je n’ai pas de sœur.
– Moi si.
– I don’t have a sister.
– I do.

– Je joue au volley.
– Moi non. / Pas moi.
– I play volleyball.
– I don’t.

– Je ne suis jamais allé en Jamaïque.
– Moi non plus.
– I have never been to Jamaica.
– Me neither.

– T’es jamais allé en Irlande ?
– Si.
– You’ve never been to Ireland?
– I have.

– T’es déjà allé en Irlande ?
– Oui.
– Have you ever been to Ireland?
– Yes.

Here, from the last two examples, we can see that the presence of a negative word in the sentence changes everything. You can say oui if the question does not contain a negation, but you have to say si if there is a negation – here, jamais.

Below is an example using a different negation, ne … plus, which means “not any more”, “no more” or “no longer”.

– Tu n’as plus de café ?
– Si.– Do you not have any more coffee?
– I do.

This pattern of using si following a negative statement works with all other negative constructions, such as:

ne … jamais
never

ne … personne
nobody, no one

ne … rien
nothing

ne … nulle part
nowhere

ne … pas
not

ne … pas encore
not yet

This list is not exhaustive, but these are some of the most common negative words in French.

Extending beyond ‘moi’While we’ve been focusing on moi non plus, moi si, pas moi and moi aussi in French, it is important to notice that these structures work with other pronouns as well. For example, toi, lui, elle, nous, vous, eux and elles follow the same pattern. And these expressions can be used with nouns, too.

Examples with pronounsLet’s look at this in more detail with some examples:

Moi, je ne suis jamais allé à Chypre, mais toi si.
I’ve never been to Cyprus, but you have.

Il aime les croissants – elle aussi.
He likes croissants – she does too.

Elle ne parle pas espagnol – vous si.
She doesn’t speak Spanish – you do.

Examples with nounsNow, here are some examples using nouns instead of pronouns.

J’adore les croissants et j’adore le chocolat aussi.
I love croissants and I love chocolate, too.

Je n’aime pas les oignons et (je n’aime pas) les concombres non plus. I don’t like onions and I don’t like cucumbers either.

Je n’aime ni les oignons ni les concombres.
I like neither onions nor cucumbers.

Note that this final example uses a different construction – ni … ni – which you may know as an alternative way of expressing ne … pas … non plus.

Responding to multiple statementsWhen dealing with multiple statements, it’s essential to react to the last statement, not the original. This ensures clarity and correctness in your responses.

Think about the following situation. Imagine you are eating with three friends at a restaurant and the waiter asks if you want coffee. The first person can reply by saying either oui or non. If the first person to answer says non, it means that the second person now has to react to a negative statement, and the only two options would be moi non plus (if they don’t want a coffee either), or moi si (if they do want a coffee). If the second person does want a coffee and says moi si, it means we are back to a positive statement and person 3 will have to say moi aussi in French if they do want a coffee, or pas moi / moi non if they do not want a coffee.

Let’s look at an example sequence of statements, which will help to make this clearer. Pay attention to which response is used in each statement, depending on whether the previous one was positive or negative.

La France est en Europe.
France is in Europe.

L’Italie aussi.
Italy too.

Pas le Brésil. / Le Brésil, non.
Brazil isn’t.

Le Japon non plus.
Japan isn’t either.

La Belgique si !
Belgium is!

L’Espagne aussi.
Spain too.

La Chine, non. / Pas la Chine.
China isn’t.

L’Australie non plus.
Australia isn’t either.

Le Chili non plus.
Chile either.

Le Portugal si.
Portugal is.

In this article, we have also seen many examples of the names of countries, languages and nationalities. Did you notice which ones are capitalised in French and which are not? For more help with French capitalisation rules, you can find another episode of The Coffee Break French Show here.

Mastering how to say “yes” in French, especially using expressions like moi aussi, pas moi / moi non, moi non plus and moi si, is crucial for effective communication. These expressions help you agree or disagree appropriately with positive and negative statements, enhancing your fluency and confidence in French conversations. Additionally, knowing the difference between moi aussi in French and si in French helps you navigate through agreements and disagreements seamlessly.

However, these expressions can be tricky to get your head around, so for more detailed explanations make sure to watch the video episode with Max and Mark on The Coffee Break French Show, or you can find the podcast version below, or wherever you get your podcasts. And for more lessons from Coffee Break French, you can subscribe to our podcast feed and our YouTube channel.

Additionally, you can sign up for our email lessons to receive regular updates and free learning materials directly to your inbox. Just look out for the sign-up box.

For now, keep practising these responses, and in doing so, you’ll become more adept at how to say non plus, si, pas or aussi in French more naturally and handle various conversational contexts with ease.

Happy Coffee Breaking!

Listen to the podcastThe post ‘Oui’ vs. ‘si’, ‘aussi’ vs. ‘non plus’: what’s the difference? appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Saying “to become” in Spanish can be a tricky task, because there are several verbs that express this concept. Today, we’ll explore the main translations and learn how to use them correctly. If you’re curious about how to say “to become” in Spanish or need tips on how to use these verbs properly, read on!

The Coffee Break Spanish Show is a series of short, informal podcast episodes, in which we discuss tricky but useful topics for Spanish learners. In the latest episode, Anabel and Concha talk through the four main verbs that are used in Spanish to express “to become”.

Listen along to the audio episode, or watch the video version while you read this article. Once you reach the end, don’t miss your free worksheet which you can download to put what you’ve learned to the test. ¡Vamos allá!

‘Convertirse en’The first possible translation of “to become” in Spanish is convertirse en. This reflexive verb, which also requires a preposition, indicates a radical or complete change, similar to “turn into” in English. Por ejemplo:

Joaquín se ha convertido en una estrella mundial.
Joaquín has become an international star.

We can also use a variation of this structure to discuss religious beliefs. For that, we change the preposition and say convertirse a.

Nos convertimos al cristianismo.
We converted to Christianity.

Convertir is an irregular verb, which means that convertirse en/a is irregular, too. If you’d like to brush up the conjugation of radical changing verbs in Spanish, you may want to listen to our podcast episode about irregular verbs in the present tense.

‘Llegar a ser’Another way to express “to become” is by using llegar a ser. The first thing that we have to mention about this verb is that we only conjugate the first verb (llegar). For instance, the present tense of llegar a ser is:

(yo) llego a ser
(tú) llegas a ser
(él/ella/usted) llega a ser
(nosotros/nosotras) llegamos a ser
(vosotros/vosotras) llegáis a ser
(ellos/ellas/ustedes) llegan a ser

Meaning-wise, llegar a ser is similar to convertirse en, but it emphasises that the change happened after significant effort.

Having said that, llegar a ser and convertirse en can sometimes be interchangeable. However, don’t forget that llegar a ser has that subtle meaning added.

Let’s see an example:

Después de mucho trabajo, Rosa llegó a ser la presidenta del país.
After a lot of work, Rosa became the president of the country.

‘Hacerse’Hacerse is a reflexive verb used to talk about changes in age, profession, wealth, or ideology. In the following example we can see a combination of some of these uses.

Me hago mayor, pero también me hago más rico.
I’m becoming older, but also richer.

This verb can also be used to describe external changes. For example:

Se hace tarde.
It’s getting late.

‘Ponerse’Ponerse is used for changes in mood, state of mind, or physical state that are often uncontrollable. It’s commonly used with emotions.

Nos pusimos muy tristes después de la película.
We became very sad after the film.

It can also describe uncontrollable physical changes, like in the following example:

Lucía se pone pálida cuando se pone enferma.
Lucía becomes pale when she gets sick.

Visual summary of how to say “to become” in SpanishUnderstanding these nuances will help you master how to say “to become” in Spanish and use the right translation in different contexts. Keep practising these structures, and soon you’ll feel more confident in your Spanish conversations.

¡Eso es todo por ahora! We hope that now you feel more comfortable and start using these different verbs to express “to become” in Spanish. If you found this article useful, why not listen to the full episode with Anabel and Concha on The Coffee Break Spanish Show? For more episodes for Spanish learners, make sure to subscribe to our podcast feed and our channel on YouTube.

Mucha suerte and, as always, happy Coffee Breaking!

Listen to podcastThe post 4 ways to translate ‘to become’ in Spanish appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In this article, we’re not just learning the colours in German. You might pick up a few new words, but we’re focusing on how to use them as adjectives, what to keep in mind regarding spelling, and some key questions surrounding them.

The Coffee Break German Show is a video and audio podcast series in which we talk about interesting topics for German learners. In this episode, Mark and Thomas explain everything you need to know about colours in German.

To get the most out of this article, listen to the podcast as you read along. Once you reach the end, make sure to download your free worksheet to practise what you’ve learned.

So, let’s start!

Some well-known and lesser-known colours in GermanBefore we move on and look at some important grammatical rules surrounding colours, let’s have a quick look at some example colours that you might already be familiar with, but also at some potentially new ones.

schwarz
black

rosa
pink

weiß
white

silber
silver

rot
red

lila
purple

blau
blue

blaugrau
cyan

grün
green

beige
beige

gelb
yellow

kastanienbraunmaroon

Basic colours in German as adjectivesBasic colours follow the same rules as other adjectives, changing their endings depending on number, gender and case. For example:

die blaue Wandthe blue wall

ein blauer Hunda blue dog

Bitte mach den schwarzen Fleck weg.
Please remove the black spot.

These sentences show how colours are used in different contexts.

Exotic coloursWhen it comes to “exotic” colours like purple, pink, orange, and turquoise, the rules are a bit different. They do not always change their endings:

Ich liebe diesen lila Schal.I love this purple scarf.

Ein rosa Kleid ist mir am liebsten.A pink dress is my favourite choice.

These sentences sound fine and are grammatically correct.

However, while it works to use lila and rosa without adding or adjusting the ending based on the case and gender, it does not only sound strange, but is also incorrect for other colours.

Let’s take the example colour “orange” and look at the different options for its use in a sentence:

~~Ich habe einen orange Stift.~~I have an orange pen.

This sentence is not correct and doesn’t sound natural in German.

The following sentence, however, is acceptable in spoken, colloquial German:

Ich habe einen orangen Stift.I have an orange pen.

The next option is the grammatically correct solution:

Ich habe einen orangefarbigen / orangefarbenen Stift.
I have an orange-coloured pen.

As seen in the earlier examples, colours like lila and rosa didn’t used to have an ending that changes. However, language is evolving and moving towards having adjustable endings for all colours. For example:

Ich liebe diesen lilanen Schal.
I love this purple scarf.

This evolution of language applies to German colours as well as colours that have come into German from other languages, such as beige from French. Previously, they would not have followed the same rules on agreements, but now they do, especially in spoken German.

Colours in German derived from nounsColours in German can also be derived from nouns, such as:

lachsfarben
salmon-coloured

rostfarben
rust-coloured

For example:

ein lachsfarbener Pullia salmon-coloured jumper / sweater

Spelling of shades of colours in GermanShades of colours are always written as one word. For instance:

hellblau
light blue

dunkelrot
dark red

olivgrün
olive green

goldgelb
golden yellow

If something were described as being of two colours, e.g. “a red and blue jumper”, it is written with a hyphen. For example:

blau-rot
blue-red

Colours as nounsWhen used in combination with an article or certain prepositions, colours can be used as nouns and need to be capitalised.

das Blau des Himmelsthe blue of the sky

Gibt es diesen Rock auch in Türkis?Is this skirt also available in turquoise?

Idioms with coloursTo finish off with today’s topic, let’s look at two interesting German idioms involving colours.

ins Blaue fahrento go without a specific plan (literally, “to go into the blue”)

For example:

Wir haben noch keinen genauen Plan, wir fahren einfach ins Blaue.
We don’t have an exact plan yet, we’re just going with it / going with the flow.

Here’s another nice idiom involving a colour in German:

der rote Fadenthe central theme, the consistent element (literally, “the red thread”)

For example:

Dieser Geschichte fehlt der rote Faden.This story lacks a central theme.

In conclusion, colours in the German language have a whole range of rules to keep in mind. Some are set: such as when to use a hyphen or a capital letter. Others, like the adjective endings, are still evolving and changing. Traditionally, “exotic colours”, when used as an adjective, did not have an adjustable ending like “standard” colours, and had to use a workaround using -farbigen/-farben. However, German has changed and is moving towards using the same rules for all colours, meaning an added ending that changes depending on case, number and gender.

To get the most out of this article, watch or listen to the full episode with Thomas and Mark on The Coffee Break German Show. We regularly release new episodes for German learners, so make sure to subscribe to our YouTube channel and our podcast feed so that you are notified when the next one is available.

Looking for more help with your German? You should know that we regularly send out free, mini German lessons to our Coffee Break German community. Look out for the sign-up box, and we hope that you enjoy your first lesson.

In the meantime, happy Coffee Breaking!

Listen to the podcastThe post Using colours in German: when to adjust endings, hyphenate or use capitals appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

When you first started learning Italian, you probably learned that, unlike in English, adjectives come after the noun they describe. However, there is more to Italian adjective placement than meets the eye.

In fact, there are various adjectives in Italian that can either be placed after or before the noun, and which change their meaning depending on their position.

Italian adjective placement is a topic that many of our Coffee Break Italian learners ask us about, which is why we’ve made it the focus of our latest podcast episode. The Coffee Break Italian Show is an audio and video podcast series, in which we take an in-depth look at interesting Italian topics. In this episode, Francesca and Mark discuss Italian adjective placement and, in particular, the specific adjectives in Italian that can go before or after the noun.

We recommend listening to the podcast episode while you read for further explanation and to hear all of the examples read aloud. And don’t forget to download your free worksheet, so that you can practise what you learn in this article.

Italian adjective placement: the basic ruleThe general rule is that adjectives in Italian come after the noun they describe. This might seem straightforward, but it’s different from English, where adjectives typically precede the noun. Here are a couple of examples:

Ho comprato un cappotto verde.
I bought a green coat.

Bolzano è una città italiana.
Bolzano is an Italian city.

These sentences illustrate the standard rule of Italian adjective placement. However, as with many rules, there are exceptions and subtleties. Let’s move onto these now.

Adjectives in Italian that can come before or after the nounThere are some adjectives in Italian that can either precede or follow the noun, but their meaning changes depending on their position.

Let’s explore some common examples.

‘alto’ = tall / highThe basic meaning of the adjective alto or alta is “tall”. For example:

un funzionario alto
a tall official

This phrase tells us that this person is not short (basso).

However, alto/a can also be placed before the noun it describes. Let’s see what happens when this is the case:

Luigi è un alto funzionario.
Luigi is a high-ranking official.

This time, alto is used to describe Luigi’s importance or rank, rather than a physical attribute.

As a general rule, when it comes to Italian adjective placement, if an adjective comes after the noun (as we would usually expect from adjectives in Italian), it carries its basic, more literal meaning. If an adjective comes before the noun, it often carries an alternative, secondary or more figurative meaning.

‘grande’ = big / greatWhen the adjective grande comes after a noun, it refers to a person’s physical size. For example:

un poeta grande
a large poet

If grande comes before a noun, however, it refers to a person’s significance:

un grande poeta
a great poet

Here, we know that this is an important poet – one who is very good and writes wonderful poetry. For example:

Dante fu un grande poeta.
Dante was a great poet.

Did you notice the interesting verb fu in this example that Francesca used in the episode? Fu comes from essere in the past historic or passato remoto.

‘vecchio’ = old / long-timeWhen vecchio or vecchia comes after a noun, it refers to a person’s age. For instance:

un’amica vecchia
an old / elderly friend

Just as we saw earlier with alto/a, when it comes to Italian adjective placement, an adjective usually carries its basic, literal meaning when it comes after the noun.

However, when vecchio or vecchia comes before a noun, it carries a slightly different meaning:

Monica è una mia vecchia amica.
Monica is an old friend of mine.

Here, vecchia tells us that Monica is a friend this person has known for a long time, but she could be very young!

‘bello’ = beautiful / goodThe next of our adjectives in Italian for this article is bello or bella.

When it comes after a noun, bello/a refers to physical appearance. For example:

una persona bella
a beautiful person

When it comes before a noun, however, it describes a more internal beauty. For example, here it could mean that this person is morally good, generous or has a big heart.

una bella persona
a good person

Remember that the adjective bello/a undergoes spelling changes when it comes before a noun, depending on what comes after it. In fact, it follows the same pattern as the definite articles in Italian.

Note that you may hear bello/a coming before the noun, but still referring to physical beauty. In the episode, Francesca explains that it is very instinctive to put bello/a before the noun, because of the similarities in sound with the definite article.

For example, you may hear:

una bella ragazza
a beautiful girl

un bel ragazzo
a beautiful boy

Here, in everyday conversation, the adjective could still be carrying the basic meaning of “beautiful”, as opposed to “good”, but bello/a is often used in this way, particularly for extra emphasis.

‘buono’ = kind / skilledOur next adjective is interesting to investigate in terms of Italian adjective placement. When the adjective buono or buona comes after the noun, it refers to goodness in someone’s personal qualities. For example:

un professore buono
a kind teacher

When buono/a comes before a noun, however, it refers to ability, skill or competency:

un buon professore
a good / skilled teacher

Remember that, like bello/a, the adjective buono/a undergoes spelling changes depending on what comes after it.

‘nuovo’ = brand-new / additionalNuovo/a is also an interesting and commonly used example in the context of Italian adjective placement.

When nuovo/a is placed after a noun, it refers to something that is “new”, as in newly made, or brand-new. For example:

Ho comprato un maglione nuovo.
I bought a new jumper / sweater.

However, in the next example, the jumper could be second-hand:

Hai comprato un nuovo maglione?
Have you bought a new jumper / sweater?

When nuovo/a comes before the noun, it simply means that it is new to the person or owner, and it is often translated as “another”.

That’s it for today’s look at Italian adjective placement and, in particular, the specific adjectives in Italian that change their meaning depending on their position.

Understanding these nuances can seem daunting at first, but don’t let it discourage you. As you read and listen to Italian, notice how native speakers use Italian adjective placement, and try to guess the subtle meanings as a result of this. With time and practice, it will start to feel more intuitive.

For a more detailed explanation of Italian adjective placement, you can watch or listen to the podcast episode with Francesca and Mark on The Coffee Break Italian Show. And by subscribing to our podcast feed or our YouTube channel while you’re there, you’ll be notified when we release our next episode.

In the meantime, for more help with your Italian, you can sign up for our free email lessons, which we send out to Italian learners on a regular basis. Look out for the sign-up box and we hope that you enjoy them.

So, next time you meet someone new or describe something in Italian, think about your Italian adjective placement. Is it un amico vecchio or un vecchio amico? The difference is subtle, but sometimes important!

Happy Coffee Breaking!

Listen to the podcastThe post ‘Un amico vecchio’ or ‘un vecchio amico’? Understanding Italian adjective placement appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Superlatives in French are essential for expressing the highest or lowest degree of a quality. Whether you are comparing adjectives, adverbs, verbs, or nouns, understanding the rules and exceptions will considerably help you sound more natural.

In this episode of The Coffee Break French Show, Max and Pierre-Benoît take a closer look into the world of superlatives in French. We’ll explore various structures and uses, providing clear examples and highlighting key exceptions and specific rules. The Coffee Break French Show is a podcast series designed to break down complex French language topics into engaging, bite-sized conversations.

Continue reading to enhance your understanding of superlatives in French, and listen along to the podcast episode to hear the pronunciation and usage in context. Don’t forget to check out the free worksheet at the end to practise what you learn!

The basicsLet’s start with the basics:

le plusthe most

le moinsthe least

With adjectivesTo say that something is “the most” something, you need the definite article (le, la or les), followed by the word plus and the adjective. For example:

le plus cherthe most expensive (masculine)

la plus chère
the most expensive (feminine)

les plus chers / chères
the most expensive (plural, masculine / feminine)

The structure is very similar to say “the least” something. We use le, la or les, followed by moins and the adjective.

le moins cher
the least expensive (masculine)

la moins chère
the least expensive (feminine)

les moins chers / chères
the least expensive (plural, masculine / feminine)

Further examples:

le plus beau / le plus sérieux
the most handsome / the most serious (m)

la plus belle / la plus sérieuse
the most beautiful / the most serious (f)

les plus beaux / les plus sérieux
the most handsome / the most serious (plural, m)

les plus belles / les plus sérieuses
the most beautiful / the most serious (plural, f)

When it comes to the pronunciation of plus and moins, the final –s is normally kept silent, although you may occasionally find people from specific regions who choose to pronounce the final –s.

However, if the adjective starts with a vowel, you then have to make a z sound liaison between plus / moins and the adjective.

With ‘bon’ & ‘mauvais’The superlative forms of the adjectives bon / bonne (“good”) and mauvais / mauvaise (“bad”) are irregular.

le meilleur / la meilleure / les meilleurs / les meilleuresthe best (m singular / f singular / m plural / f plural)

le pire / la pire / les piresthe worst (m singular / f singular / m & f plural)

With ‘petit’Petit / petite is an interesting word. It means “small” and it can be in the sense of size, but also in the sense of significance. And the way to form the superlative of petit is different depending on its meaning.

Size or measurement:

le / la / les plus petit(e/s)the smallest, the shortest

Value or importance:

le moindre problème / soucithe slightest problem / worry

As you can see with the examples, le plus petit, la plus petite, les plus petits and les plus petites are the correct ways to translate “the smallest” or “the shortest” when referring to size or measurement. When petit is about importance / significance, then you have to use le moindre, la moindre, les moindres.

With adverbsIt is also possible to use superlatives in French with adverbs. The structure is very similar and all you need is le followed by plus or moins.

le plus / moins sérieusement
the most / least seriously

le plus rapidement / vite
the fastest, the quickest

le plus tôt / tardthe earliest / latest

Remember, adverbs are not gendered. This means that even if the subject is feminine, there is no agreement. For example:

C’est elle qui court le plus rapidement.
It is she who runs the fastest.

With ‘bien’ & ‘mal’We saw earlier that “good” and “bad” (bon and mauvais) follow a different rule than other adjectives when using superlatives in French. Similarly, the adverb bien (“well”) also follows a different rule.

C’est moi qui chante le mieux. I’m the one who sings best.

C’est elle qui chante le plus mal.
She is the one who sings the worst.

As you can see from the examples, the superlative of bien is le mieux. The superlative of mal is le plus mal. Again, there is no feminine or plural version.

With verbsSuperlatives in French with verbs follow the same structure. Consider these examples:

parler le plusto speak the most

travailler le moinsto work the least

Interestingly, the final –s in plus is normally pronounced. Regarding moins, the final –s is usually not pronounced. However, it is pronounced in some regions of France, so don’t be alarmed if you hear different pronunciations!

With nounsHaving looked at adjectives, adverbs and verbs, let’s now look at examples of superlatives in French with nouns:

le jour où il y a le plus / le moins de monde
the day when there are the most / least people

le jour où il y a le plus de soleil
the day with the most sun

Remember, when de is followed by a noun starting with a vowel, it becomes d’.

le plus d’énergie / d’argent
the most energy / money

le moins d’énergie / d’argent
the least energy / money

Other things to considerIf the superlative is placed after the noun, the article needs to be repeated, which is quite different from English. Regardons ces exemples :

le plus beau village de France
the most beautiful village in France

le village le plus beau de France
the village that is the most beautiful in France

la plus belle ville de Francethe most beautiful city in France

la ville la plus belle de Francethe city that is the most beautiful in France

la plus chère voiture électrique
the most expensive electric car

la voiture électrique la plus chèrethe electric car that is the most expensive

Testing examplesNow, let’s put your newfound knowledge to the test! Here are three sentences in English; your challenge is to translate them into French. Remember to try to identify whether the superlatives involve an adjective, a verb, an adverb or a noun! You can find the answers at the end of this article.

It’s Mary who is the tallest.
It’s John who has the most energy.
She sings the best and she is the best singer.

Understanding superlatives in French, including their structure and usage with different parts of speech, is crucial for expressing extremes and comparisons effectively. Practising these superlatives in various contexts will help you become more fluent and accurate in your French communication. Additionally, knowing the difference between mieux vs. meilleur is key to mastering comparatives and superlatives in French.

Don’t forget to listen to our podcast episode on superlatives in French with Max and Pierre-Benoît on The Coffee Break French Show. And make sure to subscribe to our podcast feed and our YouTube channel to stay updated with new lessons and episodes.

Additionally, you can sign up for our email lessons to receive regular updates and learning materials directly to your inbox. Look out for the sign-up box to start receiving more insights and practice materials.

Happy Coffee Breaking!

PS. Here are the answers to the translation challenge:

C’est Mary qui est la plus grande.
C’est John qui a le plus d’énergie.
Elle chante le mieux et elle est la meilleure chanteuse.

Listen to the podcastThe post How to form and use superlatives in French appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Learning Spanish can be both exciting and challenging, especially when you encounter the subjunctive mood. If you’re wondering, “what is the subjunctive in Spanish?” or “when to use subjunctive in Spanish?”, you’re in the right place.

This article will guide you through understanding and using the subjunctive in Spanish, focusing on present subjunctive conjugation and common triggers.

The Coffee Break Spanish Show is a series of short, informal podcast episodes, in which we discuss tricky but useful topics for Spanish learners. In the latest episode, Anabel and Mark introduce the present subjunctive, showing how the regular verbs are conjugated and some common triggers.

What is the subjunctive in Spanish?The subjunctive is a mood in Spanish.

Unlike tenses, which tell us when something happens, a mood shows how the speaker feels about the action.

The important thing with the subjunctive in Spanish is not what we are saying but how we are saying it.

This mood is used to express wishes, probabilities, possibilities, prohibitions, orders, or doubts.

How to conjugate the present subjunctive in SpanishTo form the present subjunctive, you’ll need to follow these steps:

Conjugate the present indicative first person singular (yo form) of the verb.
Take away the -o.
Add the endings according to whether it is an –AR, –ER or –IR type of verb.

Now, let’s look at the specific endings, along with an example.

-AR verbsThe present subjunctive endings for the –AR verbs are:

-e
-es
-e
-emos
-éis
-en

Now, let’s use the verb hablar (“to talk”) to illustrate this.

Present indicative of the yo form: hablo.
Remove the -o: habl-.
Add the subjunctive endings: hable, hables, hable, hablemos, habléis, hablen.

-ER & -IR verbsThe present subjunctive endings for the –ER and -IR verbs are the same and are as follows:

-a
-as
-a
-amos
-áis
-an

Let’s take an irregular verb in the present indicative like salir (“to leave”) to see how it is conjugated in the subjunctive mood.

Conjugate the present indicative of the yo form: salgo.
Remove the -o: salg-.
Add the subjunctive endings: salga, salgas, salga, salgamos, salgáis, salgan.

If you’d like further explanation and more practice of the conjugation of the present subjunctive in Spanish, you can listen to this episode of Coffee Break Spanish. La práctica hace al maestro (“practice makes perfect!”).

A summary of how to conjugate present subjunctiveAs you can see, the endings of the subjunctive are very similar to the present indicative. Actually, what we have done is swap the vowels, so we use E in the –AR verbs and A in the -ER and -IR verbs. Mira:

comer (indicative): como, comes, come, comemos, coméis, comen
comer (subjunctive): coma, comas, coma, comamos, comáis, coman

When to use subjunctive in SpanishThe subjunctive in Spanish needs to be triggered by specific expressions or contexts. For today’s lesson, we’ll focus on expressions that trigger the subjunctive. These expressions often convey wishes, doubts, or uncertainty.

Common triggers for the subjunctiveHere are some common expressions that trigger the subjunctive:

OjaláOjalá is a very useful adverb that can be translated as “I hope”. It is used to express a wish, and as Mark says in the episode, it’s the idea of “fingers crossed”, when hoping that something happens. For example:

¡Ojalá mañana salga el sol!
I hope the sun comes out tomorrow!

QuizásQuizás means “perhaps” or “maybe” and it is used to express possibility or probability. An interesting point to note is that this word can be used as quizás and quizá – they are interchangeable! Let’s see now how it works in an example:

Quizás mañana hable con mi madre.
Maybe tomorrow I will speak to my mum.

Another thing that we must keep in mind is that quizá/quizás triggers the indicative and the subjunctive. Using one or the other changes the meaning subtly. Note this difference in probability in the following sentences.

Quizás vaya.
Maybe I will go (but this is unlikely to happen).

Quizás voy.
Maybe I will go (and it is likely to happen, so count me in).

Practice makes perfectLet’s put this into practice with some translation exercises. Try translating these sentences from English into Spanish. Remember that we are trying to use the triggers covered in the episode. You’ll find the suggested translations at the end of this article. ¡Mucha suerte!

I hope I can go on holiday this summer.
Perhaps they will arrive a bit late.

Remember, the key to mastering the subjunctive in Spanish is practice. Keep using these expressions and conjugations in your sentences, and soon it will become second nature.

¡Y hasta aquí esta introducción al subjuntivo en español! We hope you now feel more comfortable knowing how to form the subjunctive in Spanish and how to use some of its triggers, like ojalá and quizás.

If you found this article useful, why not listen to the full episode with Anabel and Mark on The Coffee Break Spanish Show? For more episodes for Spanish learners, make sure to subscribe to our podcast feed and our channel on YouTube.

Understanding the subjunctive in Spanish is a crucial step in your language-learning journey. By recognising triggers and practising the conjugation, you’ll soon feel more confident in using this mood. If you’d like to include more subjunctive in your daily conversation, you may find this video interesting, in which Mark and Marina explain how to use quisiera in Spanish.

Whether you’re expressing wishes, doubts, or possibilities, knowing how to make a subjunctive sentence in Spanish will enhance your communication skills and deepen your understanding of the language. Mucho ánimo usando el subjuntivo, and, as always,

Happy Coffee Breaking!

PS. Here are the answers to the translation challenge:

Ojalá pueda ir de vacaciones este verano.
Quizás lleguen un poco tarde.

Listen to the podcastThe post The subjunctive in Spanish: all you need to know to start using it appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In this article, we’ll explore key verbs and their imperative forms, distinguishing between when you’re addressing one person or multiple people, and depending on whether or not you’re part of the group.

The Coffee Break German Show is a podcast series in which we discuss useful and tricky topics for anyone learning German. In the most recent episode, Mark and Thomas explain how to construct the imperative forms of verbs in order to make suggestions and give commands in German.

We recommend listening to the podcast as you read this article, and make sure to download your free worksheet at the end to put your knowledge to the test.

So, are you ready to learn more about the imperative in German?

Then, keep reading this post!

Using ‘lassen’ in the imperative for suggestionsThe verb lassen is commonly used when you’re part of the group. It’s perfect for making inclusive suggestions.

If referring to yourself + one more person, the imperative informal singular form of lassen (lass) is used. If you are making a suggestion for you + two or more people, the imperative informal plural form of lassen (lasst) is used. You will find out how to create these verb forms in just a second.

Here are some examples:

Lass uns anfangen.Let’s get started.

Lass uns spazieren gehen.
Let’s go for a walk.

Lass uns einen Kaffee trinken gehen.
Let’s go have a coffee.

Lasst uns eine Pause machen.
Let’s (all) take a break.

The imperative formsWhen giving commands and you are not part of the group, you’ll use the imperative. The German imperative form can vary based on the formality and number of people you’re addressing. There are three imperative forms:

informal singular
informal plural
formal

Informal singular: ‘du’For the informal singular imperative in German, you drop the -st ending from the second person singular form – the du form of the verb. Let’s see some examples of verbs in the du form of the present tense, followed by an imperative example, in order to compare.

sagen (“to say”):

du sagstyou say

Sag bitte etwas.Please say something.

helfen (“to help”):

du hilfst
you help

Hilf mir!Help me!

Note the vowel change in both of these forms of the verb.

schlafen (“to sleep”):

du schläfstyou sleep

Schlaf gut.Sleep well.

Note that there is an umlaut in the present tense form of the verb, but not in the imperative form.

warten (“to wait”):

du wartestyou wait

Note that there is an -e- added before the -st, because the stem ends in -d or -t.

Warte auf mich!Wait for me!

Warte nicht auf mich!Don’t wait for me!

Informal plural: ‘ihr’For the informal plural imperative in German, we simply use the ihr form without the pronoun (ihr). Here are some examples:

Stellt die Kisten in die Garage.
Put the boxes in the garage.

To make commands more polite, add bitte (“please”), which can be placed anywhere in the sentence.

Stellt bitte die Kisten in die Garage.
Please put the boxes in the garage.

Formal: ‘Sie’For formal commands in the imperative in German, use the infinitive form followed by Sie:

Warten Sie bitte einen Moment.Please wait a moment.

Nehmen Sie bitte Platz.Please take a seat.

Using the “we” form of the imperative in GermanWhen you are part of the group and addressing one or more people, we have seen that we can use lassen (in the imperative) plus the main verb. However, another option is to use the “we” form of the imperative of the main verb.

For example:

Fangen wir an!Let’s start!

Gehen wir spazieren.Let’s go for a walk.

Gehen wir schwimmen.Let’s go swimming.

Practising German commandsTo practise what you’ve learned, try translating these sentences using the German imperative form. You can check your answers at the end of the blog post.

Let’s go to the beach.
Answer my question. (plural)
Please do not touch the picture. (formal)
Let’s watch a movie.

For more practice like this, look out for the button to download your free worksheet.

If you found this interesting, make sure to listen to the full episode with Thomas and Mark on The Coffee Break German Show. We will regularly be uploading more episodes for German learners, so make sure to subscribe to our podcast feed and our channel on YouTube to find out when the next episode is available.

Plus! To get regular, free German lessons in your inbox, you can sign up for our short (coffee-break-sized) email lessons that will help you improve your German. You will also hear from Mark, the founder of Coffee Break Languages, giving advice for language learners at any level. Sign up below!

Getting to grips with the imperative form will help you make suggestions and give commands effectively in German. Practise using these examples and soon it will become second nature.

Happy Coffee Breaking!

PS. Here are the answers to the translation challenge:

Lass uns an den Strand fahren. / Fahren wir an den Strand.
Beantwortet meine Frage.
Bitte berühren Sie das Bild nicht. / Berühren Sie das Bild bitte nicht.
Lass uns einen Film anschauen. / Schauen wir einen Film an.

Listen to the podcastThe post The imperative in German: how to make suggestions and give commands appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Do you know when to use un’, with the apostrophe, and when to use un, without the apostrophe? Un’ and un are both indefinite articles in Italian, and they’re easy to get mixed up if you’re a learner of the language.

This is why it’s the topic of our latest episode of The Coffee Break Italian Show, which is a podcast series in which we discuss and explain interesting and tricky topics for Italian learners. Join Francesca and Maurizio in this episode to learn the difference between un’ and un in Italian.

We recommend listening to the podcast episode while you read, and don’t forget to download your free worksheet at the end, to help you practise what you learn.

Iniziamo!

Understanding indefinite articles in ItalianBefore we get into the difference between un’ and un, let’s start with a quick reminder of what we mean by indefinite articles in Italian.

Indefinite articles are used to refer to unspecified, or non-specific nouns.

In English, the indefinite articles are “a” and “an”. In Italian, there are different indefinite articles, depending on the gender and number of the noun they refer to.

In this article, we are focusing on two of the indefinite articles in Italian: un’ and un.

What’s the difference between UN’ and UN in Italian?Un’ and un are easily mixed up by Italian learners in writing because the pronunciation is identical.

If you find the difference between un’ and un tricky to understand, don’t worry, as native speakers also mix them up from time to time. But this article will help you to understand the difference.

When to use UNUn is the indefinite article that is used with most masculine singular nouns in Italian. For example:

un fratello
a brother

un problema
a problem

The noun problema is an interesting one. As it ends in -a, you may think that it would be a feminine noun, but it is actually a masculine noun.

The indefinite article un is also used with masculine singular nouns that start with a vowel. For example:

un amico
a (male) friend

However, remember that un is not the only masculine Italian indefinite article. We also have uno, which is used with masculine singular nouns that begin with certain consonants or combinations of sounds, specifically: s+consonant, z, x, y, gn, ps, pn. For instance:

uno studente
a student

uno zaino
a backpack

These are the nouns that are used with lo, when it comes to definite articles in Italian (the words for “the”).

Remember: un is never used with feminine nouns.

When to use UN’Un’ is used before some feminine singular nouns in Italian.

The indefinite article that is used before most feminine singular nouns is una. For example:

una casa
a house

una ragazza
a girl

una mela
an apple

However, when a feminine singular noun starts with a vowel, the apostrophe replaces the -a in una to give us un’ and therefore make the pronunciation smoother. Here are some examples:

un’amica
a (female) friend

un’ape
a bee

un’emozione
an emotion

un’isola
an island

un’ombra
a shadow

un’unghia
a (finger/toe)nail

So, we drop the -a from the end of una, and add the apostrophe to remind us that it would be there.

In the episode, Maurizio and Francesca mention their interesting way of remembering why the apostrophe is there. Make sure to watch the video or listen to the podcast episode to hear why they like to think of the apostrophe as a teardrop!

A common mistake for Italian learners: UN’ or UN?When it comes to indefinite articles in Italian, one mistake that is commonly made by both Italian learners and native speakers is using un’ with masculine nouns that start with a vowel, which is never correct. Masculine nouns starting with vowels still use un. For example:

un amico a (male) friend

un uomo
a man

Remember: un’ is never used with masculine nouns.

Practising indefinite articles in Italian: UN’ vs. UNIt’s time to consolidate what you’ve learned about indefinite articles in Italian – in particular, un’ and un. Choose the correct indefinite article for each noun listed below. When you’re ready, you will find the answers at the end of this article.

__ azione (“action”)
__ attore (“actor”)
__ uovo (“egg”)
__ oca (“goose”)
__ arancia (“orange”)
__ arancio (“orange tree”)

We hope you’ve enjoyed learning about the difference between un’ and un – two of the indefinite articles in Italian.

Remember: by paying attention to the gender of the noun and the letter it begins with, you’ll be able to choose the correct indefinite article in Italian more confidently.

To get the most out of this article, watch the video lesson with Francesca and Maurizio on The Coffee Break Italian Show, or you can listen to the podcast version wherever you get your podcasts. While you’re there, don’t forget to subscribe to our podcast feed or our YouTube channel so that you are notified whenever there is something new from Coffee Break Italian.

And for more help with your language skills, you can sign up for regular, free email lessons, which we send out to our Coffee Break community of Italian learners. Look out for the sign-up box below.

In the meantime, happy Coffee Breaking!

PS. Here are the answers to the fill-in-the-gap challenge:

un’azione (feminine noun starting with a vowel)
un attore (masculine noun)
un uovo (masculine noun)
un’oca (feminine noun starting with a vowel)
un’arancia (feminine noun starting with a vowel)
un arancio (masculine noun)

Listen to the podcastThe post UN’ or UN? Indefinite articles in Italian appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Liaisons in French are essential for fluent and natural speech. However, some liaisons are forbidden and sound particularly unnatural to native speakers. In this article, we’ll take a closer look at French liaison rules – in particular, identifying when liaisons should not be made.

What is a liaison? The word “liaison” refers to the linking of the final consonant of one word to the initial vowel of the next.

When not to make the liaison can be a tricky topic for French learners, which is why it is the focus of our latest episode of The Coffee Break French Show – a podcast series in which we explore and explain interesting French language topics. Join Max and Mark in this episode, who will help you avoid common mistakes and sound more natural in your French conversations by following proper French liaison rules.

Listen along to the podcast episode as you read this article, so that you can hear all of the words and phrases spoken out loud. And once you reach the end, look out for your free worksheet download, which will allow you to put your knowledge to the test.

C’est parti !

H-words: ‘h aspiré’ vs. ‘h muet’When it comes to French liaison rules, some words beginning with h- block liaisons, while others do not. This depends on whether the h- is aspiré (aspirated) or muet (silent).

H aspiré: no liaison occursFor words that start with h aspiré, the h- acts like a consonant. Here are some examples:

un hibou
an owl
no liaison

un hérisson
a hedgehogno liaison

H muet: liaison is compulsoryFor words that start with h muet, the h- is silent and treated as if the word starts with a vowel. For example:

deux hommes
two menliaison occurs, pronounced as deux (z)hommes

No liaison after ‘et’One of the crucial French liaison rules (and also an easy one to apply) is that there is never a liaison after the conjunction et (“and”). Let’s look at an example.

Vincent et Anne vont au cinéma. Vincent and Anne are going to the cinema.

In this sentence, making the liaison between et and Anne (et (t)Anne) is incorrect and would sound unnatural to a native French speaker.

Subject (if not a pronoun) + verbWhen the subject is not a pronoun, no liaison occurs between the subject and the verb. Let’s see some examples.

Le chien aboie.
The dog barks.

Here, there should be no liaison between chien and aboie (chien (n)aboie).

Quelqu’un a du café ?
Does someone have coffee?

Similarly, a liaison between quelqu’un and a (quelqu’un (n)a) would be incorrect and sound unnatural here.

After ‘combien’ and ‘comment’Another one of our French liaison rules is that there is no liaison after the adverbs combien (“how much”) and comment (“how”).

Comment a-t-il pris la nouvelle ?
How did he take the news?

In this example, there should be no liaison between comment and a (comment (t)a).

Combien avons-nous de livres ?
How many books do we have?

Likewise, a liaison between combien and avons (combien (n)avons) should also be avoided here.

After long adverbs ending in ‘-t’Long adverbs ending in –t do not link to the following word with a liaison. For example:

Il est immédiatement intervenu.
He immediately spoke out.

Il est vraiment intelligent.
He is very smart.

After the verbWhen it comes to French liaison rules, no liaison occurs after the verb when followed by a noun or pronoun. Let’s look at some more examples.

Il apprend une leçon.
He is learning a lesson.

There should be no liaison between apprend and une (apprend (t)une) in this sentence.

Mark boit un café.
Mark is drinking a coffee.

Similarly, boit (t)un, with the liaison between boit and un would not be correct.

Elle part en vacances.
She is going on holiday.

In this sentence, too, a liaison between part and en (part (t)en) would be incorrect.

After a first nameNo liaison occurs after a first name. For example:

Pierre-Benoît est en France.
Pierre-Benoît is in France.

Vincent a une belle voiture.
Vincent has a beautiful car.

Optional liaisonsIn most other cases, liaisons are optional and depend on the formality of the situation or personal speaking style. You can learn more about when to make the liaison in French in another episode of The Coffee Break French Show.

Recap of forbidden liaisons in FrenchUnderstanding forbidden liaisons is crucial for mastering French liaison rules. Let’s summarise with our example sentences:

Le chien aboie.
The dog barks.
Incorrect: Le chien (n)aboie.

Quelqu’un a du café ?
Does someone have coffee?
Incorrect: Quelqu’un (n)a du café ?

Comment a-t-il pris la nouvelle ?
How did he take the news?
Incorrect: Comment (t)a-t-il pris la nouvelle ?

Combien avons-nous de livres ?
How many books do we have?
Incorrect: Combien (n)avons-nous de livres ?

Il apprend une leçon.
He is learning a lesson.
Incorrect: Il apprend (t)une leçon.

Elle boit un thé.
She is drinking tea.
Incorrect: Elle boit (t)un thé.

Elle part en vacances.
She is going on holiday.
Incorrect: Elle part (t)en vacances.

Vincent et Anne vont au cinéma.
Vincent and Anne are going to the cinema.
Incorrect: Vincent et (t)Anne vont au cinéma.

Pierre-Benoît est en France.
Pierre-Benoît is in France.
Incorrect: Pierre-Benoît (t)est en France.

Vincent a une belle voiture.
Vincent has a beautiful car.
Incorrect: Vincent (t)a une belle voiture.

Practising French liaison rulesNow, it’s time to put your understanding of the French liaison rules to the test! How would you pronounce these sentences? You can find the answers at the end of the article.

Les enfants aiment jouer. (“The children like to play.”)
Les élèves étudient sérieusement. (“The pupils study seriously.”)
Vincent et Anne vont au cinéma. (“Vincent and Anne are going to the cinema.”)
C’est dans un mois qu’ils arrivent ? (“Is it in a month that they’re arriving?”)
Vous êtes impatients ? (“Are you impatient?”)
Un grand état indépendant. (“A large independent state.”)

Mastering French liaison rules, including knowing when not to make liaisons, is key to speaking French naturally and fluently. Avoiding forbidden liaisons will help you sound more like a native speaker and avoid common mistakes that can disrupt the flow of your speech.

Don’t forget to listen to our video and podcast episode on forbidden liaisons for more examples and practice with Max and Mark on The Coffee Break French Show. And for more content from Coffee Break French, subscribe to our podcast feed and YouTube channel.

Additionally, you can sign up for our email lessons to receive regular updates and learning materials directly to your inbox. Just look out for the sign-up box.

Happy Coffee Breaking!

PS. Here are the answers to the challenge:

Les (z)enfants aiment jouer. – There should be a liaison made between les and enfants. There should be no liaison between enfantsand aiment.
Les (z)élèves étudient sérieusement. – There should be a liaison made between les and élèves. There should be no liaison between élèvesand étudient.
Vincent et Anne vont (t/X)au cinéma. – The liaison between vont and au is optional. There should be no liaison between Vincent and et, and no liaison between et and Anne.
C’est dans (z)un mois qu’ils (z)arrivent ? – There should be a liaison made between dansand un, and between ils and arrivent.
Vous (z)êtes impatients ?– There should be a liaison made between vous and êtes. There should be no liaison between êtesand impatients.
Un grand (t)état indépendant.– There should be a liaison made between grandand état. There should be no liaison between étatand indépendant.

Listen to the podcastThe post French liaison rules: when not to make the liaison appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Learning how to order a coffee in Spanish is an essential skill for anyone visiting or living in a Spanish-speaking country. Not only does it help you get your daily caffeine fix, but it also opens up opportunities to practise your Spanish and interact with locals!

In this blog post, we’ll cover how to order a coffee in Spanish, along with useful phrases and tips for interacting in shops and cafés to sound like a native speaker.

The Coffee Break Spanish Show is a series of video and audio podcast episodes, in which we discuss tricky but useful topics for Spanish learners. In this episode, Anabel and Concha talk about the most natural phrases to use to order food and drinks like a native Spanish speaker.

To get the most out of this article, we’d recommend listening to the podcast episode as you read. Once you reach the end, look out for your free worksheet download to put your new knowledge to the test. ¡Vamos allá!

How to order a coffee in Spanish in a café or in a shopLet’s look at the basic, but most natural ways to deal with common interactions in a café and a shop.

In a caféWhen you’re in a café and ready to order, there are a few key phrases that will come in handy. Let’s start with the most straightforward way to order a coffee in Spanish.

Can I have a latte, please?

Informal:
Ponme un café con leche, por favor.

Polite:
Póngame un café con leche, por favor.

Using ponme or póngame puts your request in the imperative form, which is commonly used in everyday Spanish to make requests. The imperative can sound a bit direct, but adding por favor (“please”) makes it polite. If you’re not too familiar with the conjugation and the uses of the imperative, we have another episode of The Coffee Break Spanish Show on the imperative in Spanish, which will help you expand your knowledge on this topic.

Once you’ve got your coffee sorted, you might need something else, like sugar or the bill:

Can you bring me some sugar?

Informal:
Tráeme un poco de azúcar, por favor.

Polite:
Tráigame un poco de azúcar, por favor.

The bill, please.

La cuenta, por favor.

In the shopCan I have a bag, please?

Informal:
Dame una bolsa, por favor.

Polite:
Deme una bolsa, por favor.

Alternatives:
Una bolsa, por favor.
¿Me puedes dar una bolsa, por favor?

Example conversations: how to order a coffee in SpanishLet’s put these new phrases into context by looking at some example conversations. Remember that you can watch the video episode, or listen to the podcast version, to hear them spoken out loud by Anabel and Concha.

We’ll start with two examples of how a typical conversation might go in a café.

Conversation 1Server: Buenas, ¿qué te pongo por aquí?
You: Pues mira, a mí ponme un zumo de naranja, por favor. Y tráeme un vasito de agua también cuando puedas.

Ponme un zumo de naranja.
Can I have an orange juice?

Tráeme un vasito de agua.
Can you bring me a little glass of water?

Conversation 2You: Cuando pueda.
Server: Hola, ¿qué va a tomar?
You: Un café con leche, por favor, y a mi hijo póngale una leche con cacao.

Póngale una leche con cacao.
Could you bring him some chocolate milk?

Conversation 3Here’s one more example of how a typical conversation might go in a shop.

Cashier: Son 35,50€.
You: Vale, con tarjeta, y dame una bolsa también, por favor.
Cashier: Aquí tiene.
You: Gracias.

Dame una bolsa.
Can I have a bag?

Other expressions you can hear when ordering foodFinally, let’s see some other useful expressions that you may hear in a café or shop, which appeared in our short dialogues above.

What can I get you?

Informal:
¿Qué te pongo por aquí?

Polite:
¿Qué le pongo por aquí?

Informal:
¿Qué vas a tomar? (singular) /¿Qué vais a tomar? (plural)

Polite:
¿Qué va a tomar? (singular) /¿Qué van a tomar? (plural)

Whenever you have a moment.

Informal:
Cuando puedas.

Polite:
Cuando pueda.

Here you go. / Here you are.

Informal:
Aquí tienes.

Polite:
Aquí tiene.

To truly master how to order a coffee, how to order food, ask for a bag or catch your server’s attention, practise these phrases! Try them out in different scenarios, whether in a café, a restaurant, or a shop. The more you use them, the more natural they will become.

If you found this post interesting, make sure to listen to the full episode with Anabel and Concha on The Coffee Break Spanish Show. This is the series in which we look at a range of topics for Spanish learners, so make sure to subscribe to our podcast feed and our channel on YouTube to find out when the next episode is available.

Looking for more help with your Spanish? To get regular, free Spanish lessons straight to your inbox, you can sign up for our short (coffee-break-sized) email lessons which will help you improve your Spanish. Look out for the sign-up box, and we hope that you enjoy your first free Spanish lesson.

Interacting with native speakers in the same way that they interact with one another is a practical skill that also shows respect for the local language and culture. So, next time you find yourself in a Spanish café, you’ll know exactly how to order a coffee in Spanish like a native speaker.

Buena suerte, and happy Coffee Breaking!

Listen to the podcastThe post How to order a coffee in Spanish: the basics appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

You’ve probably heard all about those German compound nouns. But did you know there’s a whole world of fantastic compound adjectives in German waiting to be discovered?

These adjective combinations aren’t only fun to use, they can also add something to your German. Sure, you can always use adverbs like sehr or total, but creating a brand new adjective takes things to a whole new level.

The Coffee Break German Show is a video and audio podcast series in which we talk about interesting topics for German learners. In our latest episode, Mark and Thomas discuss compound adjectives and how you can use them to elevate your vocabulary in German.

Keep reading to find out more, and we’d suggest listening to the podcast episode as you read. Once you reach the end, don’t forget to download your free worksheet, which will help you practise what you learn.

Compound adjectives in German: more than intensifiersCompound adjectives in German can both add extra emphasis to an adjective, and soften it. While adverbs like besonders (“especially”) work, there’s something more satisfying about a brand new word!

Think of compound words in German as a mini-comparisonMany of these compound adjectives in German work like a comparison with a noun, or a simile in English.

Take kerzengerade, meaning “as straight as a candle”. Just as English has such phrases as “as sweet as sugar” or “pitch black”, German can join an adjective to a noun to form a compound adjective to paint a vivid picture. Kerzen + gerade = kerzengerade. It’s a more concise way of expressing things in German!

Let’s create some compound adjectives in German!From the building block of a noun, which adjective could you add to form a new compound adjective in German? Here are a few to start with:

Staub < staubtrocken
dust > dust-dry, as dry as dust

Butter < butterweich
butter < butter-soft, as soft as butter

Aal < aalglatt
eel < eel-smooth, as slippery as an eel

Blitz < blitzschnell
lightning < lightning-fast, as quick as lightning

Blitz < blitzsauber
lightning < lightning-clean

Sau < saukaltpig < pig cold

Sau < saugutpig < pig good

Mixing and matchingNow, we’ll look at adjective + adjective to construct more compound adjectives. These can either strengthen or weaken the original adjective. Can you think of any words that often appear in compound adjectives?

Here are a few examples:

hochhighly

For example, as in:

hochzufrieden
highly content

hochverdient
highly deserved

Die Auszeichnung war hochverdient.
The award was well deserved.

Another word that commonly appears in compound adjectives is:

hellbright

For example, as in:

hellwach
wide awake (bright awake)

Finally, we also commonly see:

schwerheavy

For example, as in:

schwerreichheavy rich

Verb + adjectiveNow, let’s look at some compound adjectives that are made up of a verb and an adjective.

tropfnassdripping wet

This is from the verb tropfen which means “to drip”. Note that the -en is taken off the infinitive to leave the stem and the adjective is added.

quietschvergnügt
squeakingly happy

This is from the verb quietschen, “to squeak”.

jammerschade
moan shame

This is from the verb jammern (“to moan”) and is used to describe when something is a real, terrible shame.

waschecht
washingly true

This adjective comes from waschen, “to wash”. It might be used to describe someone as being “through and through Bavarian”, for example.

The sky’s the limit for compound words in GermanThe world of compound adjectives in German is vast! There are as many as there are nouns, verbs and adjectives that can be combined. We’ve looked at:

noun + adjective
adjective + adjective
verb + adjective

There are many out there waiting to be discovered, and we hope this introduction has inspired you to get creative and invent your own. To take your knowledge of this topic further, you can learn all about compound nouns in another episode of The Coffee Break German Show with Olivera and Thomas.

So, next time you’re speaking, perhaps you’ll be able to include one or two compound adjectives in German. It’ll not only make your German sound more natural, but it’s also a lot of fun!

Bis zum nächsten Mal, and happy Coffee Breaking!

Listen to the podcastThe post Creating compound adjectives in German to elevate your vocabulary appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

How confident are you with giving instructions, commands and advice in Italian? All of these require what is known as the imperative. The Italian imperative is essential to know for many everyday situations you may find yourself in.

If you already know how to form the affirmative (positive) imperative (i.e. how to tell or advise someone to do something), then this article will help you take your knowledge of the Italian imperative further. We’re going to look at how to form the negative imperative – that is to say, how to tell or advise someone not to do something.

The Coffee Break Italian Show is a podcast series of useful episodes, in which we talk about interesting and tricky topics for anyone learning Italian. In this episode, Francesca and Maurizio explain how to use the negative imperative in Italian, and clarify the differences between the affirmative and the negative imperative forms.

Read on to learn more, and why not listen to the podcast episode as you go? Once you reach the end, look out for your free worksheet download, so that you can practise everything you learn.

The Italian imperative – a quick recapIf you haven’t already, we recommend watching our episode all about the positive imperative forms in Italian.

For now, however, we’ll start with a quick recap of when we use the imperative in Italian.

In Italian, we use the imperative to give advice, orders, instructions and directions.

The negative imperative in ItalianWhile the affirmative imperative is used to tell someone to do something, the negative imperative is used to tell someone not to do something.

How do you form the negative imperative in Italian?In Italian, forming the negative imperative is fairly straightforward, once you know the affirmative imperative. Let’s look at its formation for each of the three “you” forms.

The ‘tu’ form of the negative imperativeThe Italian imperative takes on a very different form in the negative tu form, compared to its positive form.

For the negative tu form, we use non followed by the infinitive of the verb. Remember that the infinitive is the base form of a verb that you find in a dictionary.

The combination of non and an infinitive conveys an imperative nuance.

Let’s see some examples of this, by transforming affirmative imperative statements into the negative Italian imperative. We’ll see one example each of an -are, -ere and -ire verb.

Entra!
Come in! / Enter!

Non entrare!
Don’t come in! / Don’t enter!

Rispondi!
Answer! / Reply!

Non rispondere!
Don’t answer! / Don’t reply!

Dormi!
Sleep!

Non dormire!
Don’t sleep!

The ‘voi’ form of the negative imperativeThe negative voi form in the Italian imperative works differently. For the voi form, we use non followed by the conjugated verb in the voi form (in the present tense, or the affirmative imperative, since they are the same).

Let’s see some more examples, starting with the positive imperative in the voi form, followed by the negative:

Entrate!
Come in! / Enter!

Non entrate!
Don’t come in! / Don’t enter!

Rispondete!
Answer! / Reply!

Non rispondete!
Don’t answer! / Don’t reply!

Dormite!
Sleep!

Non dormite!
Don’t sleep!

The ‘Lei’ form of the negative imperativeRemember that Lei is the formal way to address a person in Italian.

The negative Lei form of the Italian imperative works similarly to the voi form. For the Lei form, we use non followed by the verb conjugated in the affirmative imperative Lei form, which is the same as the present subjunctive form.

Let’s see some examples of affirmative and negative Lei forms side by side, in order to compare.

Entri!
Come in! / Enter!

Non entri!
Don’t come in! / Don’t enter!

Risponda!
Answer! / Reply!

Non risponda!
Don’t answer! / Don’t reply!

Dorma!
Sleep!

Non dorma!
Don’t sleep!

Examples of everyday negative imperativesThe Italian imperative – either affirmative or negative – is used in many everyday situations.

One context in which you’re likely to see examples of the non + infinitive form of the imperative (the negative tu form) is on signs and notices which are giving an order to an unspecificed person.

Here are some examples:

Non sostare / parcheggiare qui.
Don’t park here.

Non camminare sull’erba.
Don’t walk on the grass.

Practising the negative forms of the Italian imperativeTime to put this knowledge into practice!

We’re now going to give you three scenarios and your task is to choose an appropriate negative imperative phrase for each one. Forza!

It’s raining outside and your grandmother is unwell, but she still wants to go out to buy some milk and you want to advise her not to.
Your friends have bad teeth, but they keep eating sweets. How would you advise them not to?
A customer at your hotel wants to go to a certain pizzeria for dinner, but you want to suggest that it’s better not to go there. Instead, you recommend that they go to the restaurant on the corner. Have a go at coming up with this double imperative answer – one negative and one affirmative!

The negative imperative in Italian is a powerful tool for clear and effective communication. By mastering the Italian imperative, both in its affirmative and negative forms, you can confidently navigate many everyday situations.

For more help with this topic, make sure to watch or listen to the podcast episode with Francesca and Maurizio on The Coffee Break Italian Show. We regularly release new episodes for Italian learners, so subscribe to our YouTube channel and our podcast feed so that you know when a new episode is available.

In the meantime, for more help with your Italian, you should know that we send out regular, free email lessons to our Coffee Break community of language learners. Look out for the sign-up box, and we hope that you enjoy your next free Italian lesson.

Happy Coffee Breaking!

PS. Here are the answers to the challenge:

Non uscire! (“Don’t go out!”) / Non andare fuori! (“Don’t go outside!”)
Non mangiate le caramelle! (“Don’t eat sweets / candies!”) / Non mangiate i dolci! (“Don’t eat desserts / sweets!”)
Non vada in quella pizzeria! Vada, invece, al ristorante all’angolo. (“Don’t go to that pizzeria! Go instead to the restaurant on the corner!”)

Listen to the podcastThe post Mastering the negative Italian imperative appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Liaisons in French, the linking of the final consonant of one word to the initial vowel of the next, play a key role in fluent and natural-sounding speech. However, it can be a tricky concept to master for learners, and one of the questions we are frequently asked by our Coffee Break French community is: what is a liaison in French and how do you use it?

In this episode of The Coffee Break French Show, Max and Mark explain some of the nuances of compulsory liaisons in French, making this difficult topic more approachable. The Coffee Break French Show is a podcast series featuring bite-sized, friendly conversations, which simplify complex French language topics.

Continue reading to learn how to use liaisons to improve your French pronunciation, and don’t forget to listen to the podcast as you go. Plus, stay tuned for our free worksheet at the end to practise what you learn!

What is a liaison in French?To start, let’s clarify what a liaison is. A liaison occurs when the final consonant sound of one word is linked to the initial vowel sound of the following word. This linking creates a smooth and continuous flow in speech. There are three types of liaisons in French: compulsory, forbidden, and optional. In this episode, we will focus on the compulsory liaisons.

Compulsory liaisons in FrenchCompulsory liaisons are essential in certain grammatical contexts, ensuring clarity and fluidity in spoken French. Let’s explore these contexts and see some examples.

After pronouns followed by a verb starting with a vowelOne of the most straightforward situations involves pronouns like on, nous, vous, ils, and elles, when they are followed by a verb that begins with a vowel. For instance, consider the following conjugations of the verb avoir in the present tense:

on a
nous avons
vous avez
ils ont
elles ont

From these examples, we can identify two types of liaisons: z and n. When a liaison is needed and the first word ends with –s, –z, or –x, it produces a z sound. When the first word ends with –n, it produces an n sound, as if the second word started with an n-. An easy example is un + noun, for example un oiseau.

In a nominal groupThese liaisons are also compulsory in a nominal group, such as after short words like articles or possessive pronouns. Examples include un, des, les, mes, and all the numbers. Let’s take the word ami, because it starts with a vowel:

un amia friend, one friend

des amissome friends

mes amismy friends

deux amistwo friends

mon ami
my friend

trois amisthree friends

After -t and -dThere is a third type of liaison, which produces a t sound, found after words ending in –t and -d. Examples include:

un petit amia small friend, a boyfriend

un petit oiseaua small bird

tout à faitabsolutely, exactly

You will also find this liaison after quand, when followed by est-ce que or il, elle, on, ils, or elles. For example:

Quand est-ce que tu viens ce soir ?When are you coming this evening?

Quand il arrivera …When he arrives …

ExceptionsSome exceptions will be covered in the next episode of The Coffee Break French Show. For instance, there is never a liaison with comment except for in the question comment allez-vous ?

Common words triggering liaisonsTo finish, let’s look at some words that typically trigger a liaison when the next word starts with a vowel:

en:en avrilin April

sans:sans aucun doutewithout any doubt

plus:plus important / plus intelligentmore important / more intelligent

bien:bien entenduof course

dans:dans un an / dans un appartementin a year / in an apartment

chez:chez une amie / chez elleat a friend’s house / at her house

Recap of liaison soundsLet’s review the various types of compulsory liaisons in French, complete with examples.

Liaison types and sounds1. z liaison:
When a word ends with –s, -z, or -x and the next word starts with a vowel, the final consonant is pronounced as a z sound.
Examples: nous (z)avons, deux (z)amis, chez (z)eux 2. n liaison:
When a word ends with –n and the next word starts with a vowel, the final consonant is pronounced as an n sound.
Examples: un (n)ami, un bon (n)endroit, en (n)été 3. t liaison:
When a word ends with –t or -d and the next word starts with a vowel, the final consonant is pronounced as a t sound.
Examples: petit (t)oiseau, quand (t)il arrive, tout (t)est prêt

Understanding liaisons in French is key to mastering the language and sounding more fluent. Compulsory liaisons ensure clarity and a natural flow in speech. By focusing on these essential connections, you will significantly improve your spoken French.

Don’t forget to listen to the full episode about liaisons in French with Max and Mark on The Coffee Break French Show. In our next episode, we’ll be taking this topic further and turning our attention to forbidden liaisons, so make sure to subscribe to our podcast feed and our channel on YouTube to find out when the episode is available.

Additionally, we regularly send out free email lessons that will help you improve your French. Sign up below to receive the next free lesson straight to your inbox.

Happy Coffee Breaking!

The post A guide to liaisons in French appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Knowing how to give commands in Spanish is key to many everyday situations. If you’re a learner of the language, it’s therefore important to know how to form the imperative in Spanish, which is used to give commands, instructions, advice and to ask someone to do something for you.

The Coffee Break Spanish Show is a series of short, informal podcast episodes, in which we discuss tricky but useful topics for Spanish learners. In this episode, Concha and Mark discuss how to give commands in Spanish.

Listen along to the podcast episode as you read this article, and don’t forget to download your free worksheet at the end, which will help you practise everything you learn.

¡Vamos a empezar!

How to give commands in Spanish: forming the imperativeThe best and most natural way to give commands in Spanish is to use the imperative. The imperative in Spanish is a grammatical mood used to issue commands, make requests, or offer advice.

It’s the mood you use when you want someone to do something directly. Examples include:

¡Ven aquí!Come here!

¡Canta para mí!Sing for me!

To effectively use the imperative in Spanish, it’s important to understand how to conjugate verbs correctly. Spanish commands vary depending on who you’re addressing. Notably, the affirmative imperative has unique forms for tú (informal singular) and vosotros (informal plural), while we use the subjunctive for usted (formal singular), ustedes (formal plural), and the negative imperative forms.

Don’t worry if you are not familiar with the subjunctive – we have another episode coming up in which we will discuss the subjunctive conjugations and its uses. Our main focus today will be the imperative form for tú, but we will also touch on the vosotros form, as it is also very commonly used.

Command forms for ‘tú’For the tú form, we use the third person singular form of the present tense. Here are a few examples:

Habla español.Speak Spanish.

Bebe más agua.
Drink more water.

Pide una hamburguesa, por favor.Order a hamburger, please.

Some verbs have irregular imperative formsHere are the verbs that are irregular in their imperative tú form, followed by some examples of each.

decir > di

For example:

Di eso.
Say that.

Dime.Tell me.

Dile.
Tell him / her.

hacer > haz

Haz los deberes.
Do your homework.

Hazlo.
Do it.

ir > ve

¡Vete!Go away!

poner > pon

Pon la mesa.
Set the table.

Ponlo aquí.
Put it here.

Tengo un vídeo gracioso para mostrarte. – Vale, ponlo.I have a funny video to show you. – OK, put it on.

salir > sal

¡Sal de aquí!Get out of here!

ser > sé

Sé amable.
Be kind.

tener > ten

¡Ten paciencia!
Be patient!*

venir > ven

¡Ven aquí!Come here!

Ven aquí y haz los deberes.Come here and do your homework.

Note that tener paciencia is one of the common tener* expressions in Spanish, which would often be translated using the verb “to be” in English.

Command forms for ‘vosotros’For the vosotros form, take the infinitive and replace the final -r with -d.

For instance, venir (“to come”) becomes venid (“come”, plural). Similarly, hacer (“to do” or “to make”) becomes haced (“do” / “make”, plural) in the vosotros form of the imperative. For example:

Venid aquí y haced los deberes.
Come here and do your homework.

Using pronouns with imperativesWhen adding pronouns to imperatives, attach them to the end of the verb. This often requires an accent mark to maintain the correct stress. Let’s see how this works with some examples:

Compra una camisa. > Cómprala.Buy a shirt. > Buy it.

Compra una camisa para Jorge. > Cómprasela.
Buy a shirt for Jorge. > Buy it for him.

For more information about how to use accents in Spanish, don’t forget to check out another episode of The Coffee Break Spanish Show.

We hope that you found this article useful. Make sure to listen to the full episode with Mark and Concha on The Coffee Break Spanish Show. This is the series in which we look at a range of topics for Spanish learners, so make sure to subscribe to our podcast feed and our channel on YouTube.

Looking for more help with your Spanish? To get regular, free Spanish lessons in your inbox, you can sign up for our short (coffee-break-sized) email lessons. Look out for the sign-up box, and we hope you enjoy your first mini email lesson.

So, whether you’re asking someone to help you, offering advice, or simply giving directions, knowing how to give commands in Spanish using the imperative is the best way to do so. Remember the different forms for tú and vosotros, the irregular verbs, and how to properly attach pronouns.

With practice, giving commands in Spanish will become second nature. Mucho ánimo con el imperativo y recuerda: ¡estudia!

Happy Coffee Breaking!

Listen to the podcastThe post How to give commands in Spanish: learn once and for all how to use the imperative appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In this article about pronunciation, we’re looking at German vowels, particularly double letter sounds. We’ve already explored umlauts and letter combinations in another episode of The Coffee Break German Show. Today, our focus shifts to the short and long pronunciations of vowels, which significantly impact the meaning and clarity of words in German.

The Coffee Break German Show is a video and audio podcast series in which we discuss interesting topics for German learners. In the most recent episode, Mark and Thomas talk about German vowel sounds, and how to know when a vowel has a long or a short sound in German.

To get the most out of this article, listen to the podcast as you read along, or watch the video, and make sure to download your free worksheet at the end to practise what you’ve learned.

Pronunciation of vowels: short vs. long vowel sounds and the role of double consonantsWhen it comes to the pronunciation of vowels in German, double consonants indicate that it is a short vowel sound directly before them. Here are some examples:

Short vowel sound:
Tasse
cup

Long vowel sound: Tatcase, deed

Short vowel sound:
Fell
fur

Long vowel sound: Federfeather

Short vowel sound:
wissen
to know

Long vowel sound: Milchmilk

Short vowel sound:
Sommer
summer

Long vowel sound: rotred

Short vowel sound:
Suppesoup

Long vowel sound: supersuper

In each pair, the word with the double consonant (Sommer, Tasse, Fell, wissen, Suppe) has a shorter vowel sound compared to the word below it. There is also a change in pronunciation in the vowel sounds with i and o in these examples.

The effect of double consonantsTasse – The double s shortens the a sound.

Fell – The double l shortens the e sound.

wissen – The double s shortens the i sound.

Sommer – The double m shortens the o sound.

Suppe – The double p shortens the u sound.

In addition to these, we have:

Short vowel sound: hackento chop

Long vowel sound:
Hakenhook

The ck in hacken shortens the preceding a.

Short vowel sound:
Witz
joke

The tz combination shortens the i sound.

Exceptions to the ruleThere are a few exceptions in German pronunciation, particularly with foreign words that have been adopted into German. For example:

Pizzapizza

Brokkolibroccoli

These words retain their original spelling and pronunciation rules.

Double consonants in compound words and pluralsDouble consonants also appear in compound words and in certain plural forms, but don’t affect the pronunciation of the vowel before them. Let’s look at some examples:

Schifffahrt
boat trip

Note the triple f here, a unique feature in compound words.

annehmen
to accept

The double consonant is made up from the n in an and the start of nehmen. It does not change the a sound at the start of the verb.

The same applies to plural forms of nouns. There is no change in pronunciation of the vowel before the double consonant because of the spelling of the plural:

Lehrerinnen
(female) teachers

The i is pronounced in the same way as in the singular Lehrerin, which is a short vowel sound.

Busse
buses

The u is pronounced in the same way as in the singular Bus, which is a short vowel sound.

Pronunciation of German vowels: extra-long vowel soundsDouble vowels in German, such as aa, ee, and oo, indicate an extra-long vowel sound. For example:

Klee
clover

Boot
boat

Haar
hair

Beere
berry

Another case which results in a long vowel sound is when there is an h after the vowel and before a consonant:

Uhr
clock

Zahl
number

Pronunciation guide: length of vowelsAs we’ve seen, the length of pronunciation of vowel sounds in German can vary significantly. For example, we’ve seen:

Sommer – short o

rot – long o

Boot – long oo

Sohn – long o with an h

To hear how all of the words in this article are pronounced, you can watch or listen to the full episode with Thomas and Mark on The Coffee Break German Show. We’ll be releasing the next episode in the series soon, so make sure to subscribe to our podcast feed and our channel on YouTube to find out when it is available.

Looking for more help with your German? We regularly send out free, mini email lessons to our Coffee Break German community, to help you improve your German little and often. Look out for the sign-up box, and we hope that you enjoy your first mini lesson.

Understanding these nuances in vowel length and double consonant usage is crucial for mastering German pronunciation, and we hope that the rules explained in this episode will help you speak more accurately and confidently.

Bis zum nächsten Mal, and happy Coffee Breaking!

Listen to the podcastThe post Pronunciation of vowels: the intricacies of double letter sounds appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In everyday conversations, one important aspect of communication is knowing how to give commands, instructions, and suggestions. This is done using what is known as the imperative in Italian.

If you’re new to the imperative, don’t worry, as we’re going to talk through what it is, when you use it, and how to form it.

The Coffee Break Italian Show is a podcast series of short, informal discussions, in which we cover interesting topics for Italian learners. In our latest episode, Francesca and Maurizio are here to help you understand everything you need to know about the affirmative (positive) imperative form in Italian.

We recommend listening to the podcast episode as you read this article. Plus, make sure to download your free worksheet at the end, so that you can practise what you learn.

What is the imperative in Italian?The imperative is what is known grammatically as a “mood”. It is a specific form of verbs that is used to give commands, orders, suggestions, instructions or advice, i.e. to tell someone to do something, or indeed to tell someone not to do something.

The imperative is useful for many everyday situations and we’ll be seeing lots of examples of where you may see the imperative in everyday, spoken Italian. In a written context, you will often see the imperative being used in recipes, just like in English, where we would see phrases such as “chop the vegetables” or “add the flour”.

In this article, we are going to focus on the affirmative imperative – that is to say imperative constructions that are used to tell someone to do something, as opposed to telling someone not to do something. In next week’s episode, however, we’ll be focusing on the negative imperative, so stay tuned.

How do you form the imperative in Italian?The imperative forms of most verbs are relatively easy to learn, because they are very similar to the forms of the simple present tense, just with a few small changes.

One key feature of the imperative mood in Italian is that there is usually no subject pronoun included. This is just like in English, where we would say simply “chop”, rather than “you chop” in an instruction.

So, let’s go through each of the forms of the imperative in Italian for regular verbs. Since the imperative is used to address other people directly, the main forms we’re going to look at are the various “you” forms.

The ‘tu’ form of the imperative in ItalianTo give a command or an instruction to one person informally, we will use the tu form of the imperative.

The verb endings for the imperative of regular verbs are the same as the simple present tense endings, with the exception of -are verbs.

-ARE verbsFor regular -are verbs in the tu form of the imperative, our verb ending is -a. For example:

Entra!
Come in! / Enter!

Asocolta!
Listen!

Note that this is a different ending to the simple present tense ending of -are verbs, which is -i:

(Tu) entri.
You come in. / You enter.

(Tu) ascolti.
You listen.

-ERE & -IRE verbsFor regular -ere & -ire verbs in the tu form of the imperative, our verb ending is -i. For example:

Rispondi!
Answer!

Corri!
Run!

Dormi!
Sleep!

Apri!
Open!

This is nice and straightforward, as it is the same ending as the one we are used to seeing in the present tense:

(Tu) rispondi.
You answer.

(Tu) dormi.
You sleep.

-ISC- verbsFor verbs that add -isc- in the present tense, their imperative tu form also features these letters. For example:

Finisci i compiti!
Finish your homework!

Pulisci!
Clean!

The ‘voi’ form of the imperative in ItalianTo give a command or an instruction to multiple people, we will use the voi form of the imperative.

-ARE, -ERE & -IRE verbsThe good news is that the verb endings for this form for regular verbs are all the same as the simple present tense endings.

Let’s see some examples:

Entrate!
Come in! / Enter!

Ascoltate!
Listen!

Rispondete!
Answer!

Dormite!
Sleep!

The ‘Lei’ form of the imperative in ItalianTo give a command or an instruction to one person who you are addressing formally, you will use the Lei form of the imperative in Italian.

The verb endings for this form for regular verbs are a little more complicated than the tu and voi imperative.

-ARE, -ERE & -IRE verbsIf you are familiar with the subjunctive (il congiuntivo), you will recognise that the Lei imperative form uses the present subjunctive endings.

Alternatively, you can think of the imperative endings as the same as the simple present tense endings, but swapped round – that is to say that the -are ending and the -ere/-ire ending are swapped round to form the Lei imperative form. For example:

Entri!
Come in! / Enter!

Ascolti!
Listen!

Risponda!
Answer!

Corra!
Run!

Apra!
Open!

-ISC- verbsAs before, verbs that add –isc- in the present tense maintain these additional letters in the imperative. For example:

Finisca!
Finish!

Pulisca!
Clean!

For a reminder of when to use Lei, the formal “you” form, as opposed to tu, the informal “you” form, we have another episode of The Coffee Break Italian Show to help you.

An imperative in Italian you probably already knowThere is one very common imperative structure that you’ve probably used many times, even if you don’t realise that it’s an imperative! This is when you are saying “sorry” or “excuse me”:

Scusa!
Excuse me! (addressing someone as tu)

Scusi!
Excuse me! (addressing someone as Lei)

Since you are literally telling someone to excuse you in this phrase, it is therefore an imperative. And note that the -a ending corresponds to the tu, informal form, while the -i ending corresponds to the Lei, formal form.

The plural formal form of the imperative in ItalianNow, what if you want to address a group of people formally using a verb in the imperative?

While the formal plural form Loro exists, it’s rarely used in modern Italian. Instead, we tend to use the voi form both in informal and formal situations.

Very occasionally (for example, in a fancy hotel) you may come across the Loro imperative. For example:

Entrino pure, signori!
Please, do come in, gentlemen!

However, this would usually be expressed simply using the voi imperative form:

Entrate pure, signori!
Please, do come in, gentlemen!

Irregular verbs in the imperative in ItalianThere are many irregular verbs in the imperative form in Italian, but for now, let’s focus on the most common ones.

essere (“to be”) – imperative formsSii buono!
Be good! (tu form)

Siate buoni!
Be good! (voi form)

Sia buono!
Be good! (Lei form)

avere (“to have”) – imperative formsAbbi pazienza!
Be patient! / Have patience! (tu form)

Abbiate pazienza!
Be patient! (voi form)

Abbia pazienza!
Be patient! (Lei form)

Note that avere pazienza is one of the common avere expressions in Italian, which would be translated using the verb “to be” in English.

andare (“to go”) – imperative formsFor the tu form, there are two possible options:

Vai! / Va’!
Go! (tu form)

Andate!
Go! (voi form)

Vada!
Go! (Lei form)

fare (“to do”, “to make”) – imperative formsAgain, for the tu form, there are two possible options:

Fai / Fa’ una bella figura!
Make a good impression! (tu form)

Fate una bella figura!
Make a good impression! (voi form)

Faccia una bella figura!
Make a good impression! (Lei form)

Fare una bella figura is a lovely Italian idiom, which we discussed in another episode of The Coffee Break Italian Show, which was all about useful expressions with fare in Italian.

Other irregulars in the imperative in ItalianThe verb stare (“to stay” or “to be”) also features two options for the tu form:

Stai / Sta’ calmo!
Stay calm! (tu form)

State calmi!
Stay calm! (voi form)

Stia calmo!
Stay calm! (Lei form)

Another verb that features two alternatives for the tu form of the imperative is dare (“to give”):

Dai / Da’ qua!
Give here! (tu form)

Date qua!
Give here! (voi form)

Dia qua!
Give here! (Lei form)

One last irregular verb in the imperative is dire (“to say” or “to tell”):

Di’ la verità!
Tell the truth! (tu form)

Dite la verità!
Tell the truth! (voi form)

Dica la verità!
Tell the truth! (Lei form)

The ‘noi’ form of the imperative in ItalianThe noi form of the imperative in Italian is the equivalent to “let’s …” in English. To build the noi form of the imperative, we simply use the same form as the present indicative.

For example:

Entriamo!
Let’s go in! / Let’s enter!

Corriamo!
Let’s run!

Apriamo la porta!
Let’s open the door!

Practising the imperative in ItalianLet’s put the imperative form in Italian into practice with some scenarios. Try to think of the imperative phrase you would use in each of these scenarios, working out which form (tu, voi or Lei) to use, according to the context.

Your friend is really hungry and you have made a lot of food. Your friend is hesitant, but you want them to help themself to the food.
Signora Bianchi is hesitant to come into your office for a meeting.
Your children are not paying attention, but you want them to listen.

That’s it for the affirmative imperative in Italian. We hope that you now feel more confident giving commands, instructions, suggestions or orders to a person or a group of people, either informally or formally.

To get the most out of this lesson, watch or listen to the podcast episode with Francesca and Maurizio on The Coffee Break Italian Show. And don’t forget to subscribe to our YouTube channel and our podcast feed, so that you know when a new episode is available. In our next episode, we’ll be covering the negative imperative form in Italian, so stay tuned!

In the meantime, if you’d like more help with your Italian, you can sign up to receive free email lessons straight to your inbox. Look out for the sign-up box, and we hope that you enjoy your next mini lesson.

Happy Coffee Breaking!

PS. Here are the answers to the challenge:

Mangia! / Mangia, mangia! (“Eat!”)
In the episode, Francesca and Maurizio explain that it is very common to repeat the verb in the imperative form in Italian.
Entri (pure)! / Venga (pure)! (“Please, come in!”)
Ascoltate! (“Listen!”)

Listen to the podcastThe post How to give commands, instructions and suggestions: the imperative in Italian appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Using capital letters in French correctly is essential for writing accurately. While there are similarities between English and French when it comes to capitalisation rules, there are also key differences that every French learner should be aware of.

In this article, we’ll guide you through the rules of using capital letters in French, ensuring that your writing is not only correct, but also polished and professional.

The Coffee Break French Show is a podcast series that breaks down challenging French language topics into manageable, engaging conversations. In the latest episode, Pierre-Benoît and Max discuss the interesting aspects of French capitalisation rules, highlighting when to use capital letters and when to avoid them.

So, let’s get started, and we’d recommend listening to the audio episode as you read.

Capitalising places, names and eventsJust like in English, capital letters in French are used for specific categories such as places, names, brands, and events.

PlacesWhen writing about specific places, such as cities and countries, you should always capitalise the first letter. Here are some examples:

Paris / la ville de ParisParis / the city of Paris

le PortugalPortugal

la FranceFrance

In these examples, Paris, Portugal and France are capitalised because they are proper nouns referring to specific geographical locations.

NamesPersonal names in French also require capitalisation, just as they do in English. Whether you’re introducing yourself or mentioning someone else, the first letter of each name should be capitalised. For example:

Je m’appelle Max.I’m called Max.

Je m’appelle Pierre-Benoît.I’m called Pierre-Benoît.

Notice that both Max and Pierre-Benoît have their first letters capitalised, as they are proper nouns.

EventsSpecial events, holidays, and significant occurrences also require the use of capital letters in French. This helps to emphasise their importance and distinguish them from everyday terms. Here are some examples:

la Saint-ValentinValentine’s Day

NoëlChristmas

Pâques
Easter

When not to use capital letters in FrenchWhile the use of some capital letters in French mirror those in English, there are notable differences, particularly regarding days of the week, months of the year, languages, and the pronoun je.

Days of the week and months of the yearThe days of the week in French are not capitalised. The same goes for months of the year. This is a significant difference from English and an important rule to remember. For example:

tous les lundisevery Monday

le 8 juinthe 8th of June

In these instances, lundis and juin are not capitalised. The same rule obviously applies to all days of the week and months of the year in French:

lundi, mardi, mercredi, jeudi, vendredi, samedi, dimanche

janvier, février, mars, avril, mai, juin, juillet, août, septembre, octobre, novembre, décembre

LanguagesWhen writing in French, the names of languages do not take a capital letter. This rule is different from in English, where language names are always capitalised:

Je parle français.
I speak French.

Tu parles anglais. You speak English.

In both examples, français and anglais are written all in lowercase.

The pronoun ‘je’The pronoun je (“I”) is never capitalised in French, except at the beginning of a sentence. This contrasts sharply with English, where “I” is always capitalised. Let’s see some examples:

Je pense, donc je suis.I think, therefore I am.

Il sait comment je m’appelle.He knows what I’m called.

As you can see, je remains all lowercase, unless it is the first word of the sentence.

Special cases and common pitfallsUnderstanding the general French capitalisation rules is crucial, but being aware of some special cases can also help you avoid common mistakes.

NationalitiesWhen referring to nationalities in French, capitalise the noun but not the adjective:

Les Français aiment le fromage.
French people like cheese.

Mon voisin est français.
My neighbour is French.

This rule applies to all nationalities. Here are some others: anglais, anglaise, américain, américaine, brésilien, brésilienne, chinois, chinoise, australien, australienne, égyptien, égyptienne, japonais, japonaise, allemand, allemande, espagnol, espagnole etc.

Administrative documents or announcementsIn the following examples, note that the nouns ville and gouvernement are written with a capital letter only when they are used to refer to a specific institution.

Paris est une ville.
Paris is a city.

La Ville de Paris a déclaré que tous les musées seraient fermés.
The City of Paris / The Administration of Paris announced that all museums would be closed.

Le Gouvernement du Québec va faire une annonce demain.
The Government of Quebec will be making an announcement tomorrow.

Il y a un nouveau gouvernement au Québec.
There is a new government in Quebec.

A recap of using capital letters in FrenchTo summarise, here are the key points to remember about using capital letters in French:

Use capitals for places, names, brands, and events.
Do not use capitals for days of the week, months, languages, and the pronoun je.
Pay attention to special cases, such as nationalities.

Practising French capitalisation rulesNow, let’s put your knowledge to the test! Below are three sentences in English; your task is to translate them into French. Remember to pay close attention to capital letters, using French capitalisation rules.

I love French and I love French food.
I love the French.
I leave on Christmas day. It is a Thursday.

For further explanation on this topic, don’t forget to listen to the podcast version of this lesson with Pierre-Benoît and Max on The Coffee Break French Show. We’ll be releasing more episodes soon, so make sure to subscribe to our podcast feed and our channel on YouTube for more help with your French.

What’s more, if you’d like to receive regular, free email lessons to help you improve your French, you can sign up below. Your next French lesson will arrive straight to your inbox very soon.

Happy Coffee Breaking!

PS. Here are the answers to the translation challenge:

J’adore le français et j’adore la nourriture française / la cuisine française.
J’adore les Français.
Je pars le jour de Noël. C’est un jeudi.

Listen to the podcastThe post Capital letters in French: when to use them appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Being confident with the nuances of pronunciation makes a big difference in your language-learning journey. One of the trickier Spanish sounds for English speakers is the letter J. This article will teach you how to pronounce the letter J in Spanish, provide tips for practice, and explain some regional variations.

The Coffee Break Spanish Show is a series of short, informal podcast episodes, in which we discuss tricky but useful topics for Spanish learners. In the latest episode, Concha and Mark discuss the pronunciation of the letter J in Spanish and give you tips to overcome the challenge of this tricky sound.

Understanding the sound of the letter J in SpanishThe letter J in Spanish is quite different from the English J. In Spanish, it is pronounced like a strong, guttural sound that comes from the back of your throat.

If you’ve ever heard someone pronounce the Scottish word “loch”, you have a good reference point for how to pronounce the letter J in Spanish. And if you’re not familiar with the word “loch”, make sure to find this point in the podcast episode, to hear how Mark pronounces it.

How to make the soundTo make the sound of the J in Spanish, we have three main tips. They are:

Visualise a cartoon character laughing
Imagine a cartoon character laughing with a “hee hee” sound, but coming from deep in your throat and pushing your tongue towards the roof of your mouth. This exaggerated laugh can help you find the right placement for the sound.
Use the Scottish word “loch”
Think of how you would pronounce the word “loch” in Scottish English. That rough, throaty sound is similar to the Spanish J. If English is not your first language, try to find a sound that is similar, and use it to make that J sound in Spanish.
Start with a K sound
Begin with the sound K and then add more breath to it, pushing the sound further back in your throat.

Of course, Spanish is spoken in many countries, and there are some regional variations in the pronunciation of the letter J in Spanish. In Latin America, the Canary Islands, and the south of Spain, you might hear a softer J, similar to the English H in “hello”. However, the strong, guttural J remains the most standard and widely recognised pronunciation.

Practice makes perfectTo master how to pronounce the letter J in Spanish, practice is essential. Start with these words:

ajo
garlic

jamón
ham

bajo
under

majo
nice

Names are also a great way to practise the J sound. Try these common Spanish names:

José

Juan

María José

Repeat these words several times, focusing on making the J sound strong and clear. Notice how the J sound remains consistent. On the other hand, names borrowed from English, such as Jennifer, or words like jaguar and DJ retain the English J sound.

ExceptionsWhile learning how to pronounce the letter J in Spanish, you might come across some exceptions.

For example, there are a small number of situations where the letter X takes on the sound of the J in Spanish. This happens in the place names México and Texas, where the X has the same pronunciation as the Spanish J. These spelling exceptions are due to historical and regional influences.

A fun tongue-twister to practise the letter J in SpanishHere’s a fun tongue-twister to help you practise how to say J in Spanish:

Juan y Juanita juegan a juntar juncos junto a la zanja del jardín, bebiendo jugo de jojoba y comiendo jamón de Gijón.

Notice that the last word, Gijón, has a different spelling, though it has the same sound! We will be looking at this in a future episode. For now, give this trabalenguas a try! It’s a playful way to get comfortable with the pronunciation.

¡Y hasta aquí la pronunciación de la letra J en español!

Mastering how to pronounce the letter J in Spanish is a key step in improving your Spanish pronunciation, and we hope that you found this article helpful.

To get a better understanding of this sound, make sure to listen to the podcast version of this lesson, or watch the video version, with Concha and Mark on The Coffee Break Spanish Show. And to keep up to date with our future episodes, subscribe to our channel on YouTube and to our podcast feed wherever you get your podcasts.

If you’re looking to improve your pronunciation even more, we also have a podcast episode and article all about how to pronounce the letter R in Spanish.

And if you’d like to receive regular, free Spanish lessons, you should know that we send out free, mini email lessons to our Coffee Break Spanish community to help you improve your Spanish little and often. Look out for the sign-up box.

Until next time, happy Coffee Breaking!

Listen to the podcastThe post How to pronounce the letter J in Spanish appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In the world of language learning, getting your head around temporal expressions can sometimes feel like a bigger task than it really is. For English speakers wanting to understand how to translate “when” in German, the trio of wann, als, and wenn can initially appear as interchangeable equivalents. However, knowing the rules for when to use each of them is an important topic when learning German.

The Coffee Break German Show is a podcast series of short, friendly conversations in which we discuss tricky German language topics. Join Mark and Thomas in the latest episode to learn how to use wann, als, and wenn with clarity and confidence.

Keep reading to find out more, and we’d recommend listening to the podcast episode as you read. Plus, don’t miss our free worksheet at the end to practise what you learn!

‘Wann’ – the question wordWann serves as the go-to question word for inquiries regarding time. So, this is the one to use if you want to ask “when?” in either a direct or an indirect question, as wann is used to pinpoint moments, durations, or specific time frames.

As a question word:
Wann filmen wir die nächste Episode?
When are we filming the next episode?

Temporal reference:
Seit wann lebst du in Schottland?Since when have you been living in Scotland?

Indirect questions:
Ich weiß noch nicht, wann ich morgen Zeit habe.
I don’t know yet when I’ll have time tomorrow.

‘Als’ – the past markerAls can have various meanings in German. However, when it is translated as “when”, it serves as a temporal marker, particularly signalling events or situations that occurred in the past. It is always within subordinate clauses, giving information about the past. A subordinate clause is part of a sentence which cannot exist on its own. There will always be a main clause with it.

Let’s see some examples of als being used to introduce past events:

Als wir im Restaurant ankamen, hatte es schon geschlossen. / Das Restaurant hatte schon geschlossen, als wir ankamen.
When we arrived at the restaurant, it had already closed.

Als mein Bruder in Dresden lebte, haben wir ihn oft besucht. / Wir haben meinen Bruder oft besucht, als er in Dresden lebte.
When my brother lived in Dresden, we visited him often.

‘Wenn’ – the conditional connectorWenn takes on the role of a conditional connector, joining subordinate clauses that denote conditions or hypothetical scenarios. It’s another way of saying “when” in German. Wenn is also similar to “if” in English in conditional contexts.

Conditional statements:
Wenn es morgen nicht regnet, gehen wir wandern.If it is not raining tomorrow, we will go hiking.

Hypothetical scenarios:
Wenn meine Familie zu Besuch kommt, kochen wir zusammen.
When my family comes to visit, we cook together.

Falls can also be used instead of wenn. However, falls implies more doubt and uncertainty than wenn.

Clarifying the distinctionsUnderstanding the distinctions between wann, als, and wenn will allow you to use these German time words with confidence.

We hope you now feel more confident knowing how to translate “when” into German, depending on the context.

If you found this interesting, make sure to listen to the full episode with Thomas and Mark on The Coffee Break German Show. We regularly upload new episodes for German learners, so make sure to subscribe to our podcast feed and our channel on YouTube so that you never miss a lesson.

Bis zum nächsten Mal, and happy Coffee Breaking!

Listen to the podcastThe post ‘When’ in German: how to translate this word using ‘wann’, ‘als’ and ‘wenn’ appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

The verb fare in Italian is incredibly versatile and frequently used. As you’ll know, its basic meaning is “to do” or “to make”. However, there are many set expressions using fare, which you should know to help you expand your range of expression in Italian.

The Coffee Break Italian Show is a series of short, friendly podcast episodes, to help you get to grips with some tricky topics in Italian. In our latest episode, Francesca and Maurizio discuss 15 useful, everyday expressions using fare in Italian.

Keep reading to find out more, and we’d recommend listening to the podcast episode as you go.

Also, don’t miss your free worksheet download at the end of this article, which will help you put into practice what you learn. Iniziamo!

What does ‘fare’ mean in Italian?The basic meaning of fare in Italian is “to do” or “to make”. However, we’re going to take this verb further and see it used in some set expressions.

Fare is a very versatile verb that can have multiple meanings, and as you’re about to see, it doesn’t always translate into English as “to do” or “to make”.

Expressions with ‘fare’ in ItalianLet’s get started looking at some of the most common fare expressions.

‘fare una passeggiata’ & ‘fare un giro’Two very common expressions using fare in Italian are:

fare una passeggiata
to go for a walk / stroll

fare un giro
to go for a stroll / wander

For instance:

fare un giro in bici
to go for a bike ride

fare un giro in centro
to go for a wander in the city centre

‘fare la spesa’ & ‘fare la coda’Another two everyday expressions with fare in Italian are:

fare la spesa
to go grocery shopping

fare la coda
to queue, to stand in line

For example:

Non mi piace fare la coda quando faccio la spesa.
I don’t like queuing when I’m doing the grocery shopping.

‘fare un viaggio’ & ‘fare una vacanza’Now, let’s look at two travel-related expressions using fare in Italian.

fare un viaggio
to go on a trip, to travel

fare una vacanza
to go on holiday

For example:

Vorrei fare un viaggio / una vacanza in Marocco.
I would like to go on a trip / on holiday to Morocco.

‘fare le pulizie’Our next fare expression translates more literally into English:

fare le pulizie
to do the cleaning

Of course, we can also use the verb pulire to talk about cleaning. For example:

Oggi pulisco il mio appartamento.
Today I’m cleaning my flat / apartment.

However, fare le pulizie is a very natural expression to use to talk about cleaning in general.

‘fare una domanda’When talking about asking a question, you can use another expression with fare in Italian:

fare una domanda
to ask a question

Attenzione! In Italian, we therefore don’t use the verb chiedere (“to ask”) with the noun domanda; instead, we literally say “to make a question”.

For example:

Posso farti una domanda?
Can I ask you a question?

Posso chiederti qualcosa?
Can I ask you something?

You may also come across this expression in a different context:

fare domanda per un lavoro
to apply for a job

We can therefore use the expression fare domanda to talk about applying for a job. Note that we don’t use the verb applicare in this context in Italian.

‘fare storie’The next fare expression on our list is a lovely Italian idiom.

fare storie
to complain

Of course, literally, this means “to make stories”, but it is an idiomatic way to talk about someone complaining or making a fuss. For example:

Non fare storie!
Don’t complain! / Don’t make a fuss!

‘fare presto’ & ‘fare tardi’Let’s take a look at our next pair of expressions that use fare in Italian:

fare presto
to be early

fare tardi
to be late

Note that these differ from their English equivalents, where we would use the verb “to be” instead of “to do” or “to make”.

‘fare le ore piccole’Speaking of time, if you’ve stayed up late, you can use another nice Italian idiom using fare:

fare le ore piccole
to stay up late, to be up until the small hours

Literally, this means “to do the small hours”. For example:

Hai fatto le ore piccole ieri?
Did you stay up late yesterday?

This expression often also suggests that the late night involved being out somewhere, doing something fun.

‘fare alla romana’If you’ve been out with your friends, the next fare expression may also come in handy:

fare alla romana
to split the bill

Note that you can also say pagare alla romana.

You can use this expression if you’re eating out with friends and are talking about splitting the bill between you. For example:

Va bene se facciamo alla romana?
Is it OK if we split the bill?

Now, if you’re wondering about the origin of the expression fare alla romana, there are several theories. The most common belief is that the practice of splitting the cost of a meal among people originated in some trattorie in Rome. For convenience, these establishments would have pilgrims visiting St Peter’s Basilica share the cost of food and drinks by dividing the total bill among everyone at the table.

‘fare una bella figura’ & ‘fare una brutta figura’Our final expressions using fare in Italian relate to a concept that is very important in Italian culture.

fare una bella figura
to make a good impression

fare una brutta figura
to make a bad impression

As Francesca and Maurizio explain in the podcast episode, this idea can be applied to various situations – for example, in the context of a job interview or meeting your friend’s parents.

Fare una bella / brutta figura conveys the idea of putting across a good / bad impression of yourself or having a good / bad image.

Here is an example:

Dobbiamo fare una bella figura.
We have to make a good impression.

As a bonus fare expression, here’s an alternative to fare una brutta figura:

fare una figuraccia
to make a bad impression

For example:

Mi raccomando, non fare una figuraccia.
I recommend that you don’t make a bad impression.

Practising expressions using ‘fare’ in ItalianNow, it’s over to you! To practise what you’ve learned in this article, consider the following scenarios and decide which of the fare expressions could be used in each situation.

Io sono al mio corso di italiano e l’insegnante sta spiegando il congiuntivo. Sono un po’ confusa e ho bisogno di chiarimenti.
Il mio amico Antonio non è mai contento. Si lamenta sempre. Non gli piace niente. È sempre insoddisfatto e critica ogni mia decisione o proposta. Come posso descrivere Antonio?
Siamo in pizzeria. Ho appena ricevuto il conto per la cena che abbiamo condiviso tra noi sei amici. E quindi prendo la mia calcolatrice per vedere quanto devi pagare tu, quanto deve pagare Antonio e quanto devono pagare gli altri. Che cosa mi dici in questo caso?

In this article we’ve seen that the question “what does fare mean in Italian?” can have a long answer! Indeed, the verb fare in Italian can carry many meanings and be used in many contexts.

If you enjoyed learning more about the verb fare in Italian, you should know that we have another article and podcast episode all about the verb avere, and the most common expressions that use this verb.

To get the most out of this article, make sure to listen to the full podcast episode with Francesca and Maurizio on The Coffee Break Italian Show, or watch the video version. And by subscribing to our YouTube channel or our podcast feed, you’ll be notified when the next episode is available.

Looking for more help with your Italian? You should know that we send out regular, free email lessons to our Coffee Break Italian community, to help you improve your language skills little and often. Look out for the sign-up box.

Until next time, happy Coffee Breaking!

PS. Here are some statements that would be relevant to each situation described in the challenge.

Posso fare una domanda? / Posso fare delle domande? (“Can I ask a question?” / “Can I ask some questions?”)
Antonio fa storie. / Antonio fa molte / sempre storie. (“Antonio complains.” / “Antonio complains a lot / always complains”.)
Facciamo alla romana! (“Let’s split the bill!”)

Listen to the podcastThe post 15 essential expressions with ‘fare’ in Italian appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Are you ready to learn how to choose between the imparfait and the passé composé in French? These two tenses are essential for telling stories in the past, but it can sometimes be tricky to decide which one to use. In this article, we will help you identify what triggers the use of each tense and how to apply them correctly in your sentences.

The Coffee Break French Show is a podcast series in which we break down complex French language topics into bite-sized, friendly conversations. In our latest episode, Max and Pierre-Benoît discuss the perfect tense and the imperfect tense in French, providing clear explanations and practical examples.

Continue reading to find out more, and why not listen to the podcast as you go? Plus, don’t miss our free worksheet at the end to practise what you learn!

Past tenses: imparfait and passé composé in FrenchBefore diving into the specifics, it’s important to understand that both the passé composé in French and the imparfait are past tenses used to express actions that happened in the past. While they might seem similar at first glance, they each serve a unique purpose in narrative and descriptive contexts. Knowing the difference between them can significantly improve your storytelling and general communication in French.

Passé composé: the perfect tense in FrenchThe passé composé in French, often referred to as the perfect tense in English, is predominantly used to describe actions that have been completed in the past. These actions are usually specific events that occurred at a particular time. The perfect tense in French is instrumental in advancing the narrative, making it clear that something happened and was completed. Let’s consider these examples:

J’ai mangé une banane.
I ate a banana.

Je suis allé(e) au cinéma.
I went to the cinema.

These sentences indicate actions that are finished and have clear endpoints, which is the hallmark of the perfect tense in French.

Imparfait: the imperfect tense in FrenchOn the other hand, the imparfait is used to set the scene and describe ongoing or repeated past actions. This tense is perfect for providing background information or describing situations that were continuous over a period of time. Let’s look at some examples:

L’hôtel était grand.
The hotel was big.

This sentence gives us a description of the hotel, rather than telling us about a specific event.

Il y avait une piscine.
There was a swimming pool.

Similarly, this sentence is describing a feature of the hotel, not narrating a specific occurrence.

When talking about habitual actions, the imparfait is also the tense to use. For example:

Quand j’étais jeune, j’allais chez mon grand-père le samedi.
When I was young, I used to go to my grandfather’s every Saturday.

This sentence highlights a repeated action that took place regularly in the past.

French past tenses: triggers for the perfect and imperfect tensesUnderstanding when to use the passé composé in French versus the imparfait can be challenging for learners. However, certain triggers and context clues can help you determine which tense is appropriate.

Passé composé in French: triggers and contextThe passé composé in French is triggered by events that have a definite start and end point. It is used for actions that occurred once or were completed in a specific time frame. Words and phrases such as hier (“yesterday”), une fois (“once”), soudain (“suddenly”), and tout à coup (“all of a sudden”) often indicate that the passé composé should be used.

For instance, in the following sentence, the word hier specifies that the action happened at a particular time and was completed.

Hier, j’ai mangé une banane.Yesterday, I ate a banana.

Imparfait: triggers and contextThe imparfait is often used when describing the context, setting the scene, or talking about habitual actions in the past. Key words that typically signal the use of the imparfait include toujours (“always”), souvent (“often”), d’habitude (“usually”), and chaque jour (“every day”). For example:

Quand j’étais jeune, j’allais chez mon grand-père le samedi.
When I was young, I used to go to my grandfather’s every Saturday.

The phrase quand j’étais jeune sets up a continuous, habitual action that happened regularly.

Imparfait and passé composé in French: combining both tensesIn storytelling, it’s common to use both tenses within the same sentence to convey different aspects of the narrative. Typically, the imparfait sets the scene, providing background information, while the passé composé in French interrupts with specific actions that move the story forward.

For example:

Je regardais la télé quand tu es arrivé(e).
I was watching TV when you arrived.

In this sentence, je regardais la télé (“I was watching TV”) uses the imparfait to describe what was happening at that moment, setting the scene. Then, quand tu es arrivé(e) (“when you arrived”) uses the passé composé to introduce the specific event that occurred, interrupting the ongoing action.

Let’s look at another example:

Je dormais quand il m’a appelé(e).I was sleeping when he called me.

In this example, je dormais (“I was sleeping”) is in the imparfait, indicating an ongoing action in the past, while quand il m’a appelé(e) (“when he called me”) is in the passé composé, highlighting the specific action that interrupted the sleep.

If you’re wondering why the past participle appelé(e) could be either in its masculine or feminine singular form in this sentence, find out everything you need to know about past participle agreement in French here.

Interesting casesThere are certain interesting cases where the choice between the passé composé in French and the imparfait can convey subtle differences in meaning. One such case is talking about your age in the past.

Talking about age in the pastWhen describing an age range or a period of life, the imparfait is used. For example:

quand j’avais six ans
when I was six

This refers to the entire year when you were six, implying a continuous state.

However, when marking a specific event such as a birthday, the passé composé is used:

quand j’ai eu six ans
when I turned six

This refers specifically to the day you turned six.

Weather descriptionsAnother interesting area is weather descriptions. Depending on the context, both tenses can be appropriate:

Il faisait beau.
The weather was nice.

In this sentence, we are using the imparfait to describe the weather in general or over a period of time.

Il a fait beau.
The weather was nice.

This time, we are using the passé composé to describe the weather during a specific time or event.

For more help with understanding the difference between these two sentences, make sure to watch the video version of this lesson. And as Pierre-Benoît and Max say in the episode, in contexts like this, the difference between the two tenses is subtle, and people will understand what you mean whichever you use.

Summary of imparfait vs. passé composéMastering the use of the passé composé in French and the imparfait is a crucial step in becoming proficient in French. These tenses serve distinct purposes, with the passé composé being used for specific, completed actions and the imparfait for descriptions and habitual actions. Recognising the triggers and contexts for each tense will help you tell stories and describe past events more effectively in French.

Remember, the passé composé propels the narrative by stating completed events, while the imparfait paints a picture of ongoing states or repeated actions.

For a deeper understanding of this topic, be sure to listen to the podcast version of this lesson with Pierre-Benoît and Max on The Coffee Break French Show. We’ll be releasing additional episodes soon, so subscribe to our podcast feed and our YouTube channel for more French language assistance.

Additionally, if you’re interested in receiving regular, free email lessons to enhance your French skills, you can sign up below. Your next French lesson will be delivered straight to your inbox shortly.

Happy Coffee Breaking!

Listen to the podcastThe post Imparfait vs. passé composé: French past tenses explained appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

The English word “for” can be tricky to translate into Spanish. This is because there are two words that are normally associated with “for”: por and para. When to use por vs para in Spanish is something that many of our Coffee Break learners ask us about.

The Coffee Break Spanish Show is a series of short, informal podcast episodes, in which we discuss tricky but useful topics for Spanish learners. In the latest episode, Concha and Mark discuss the uses of por and para, and how to translate “for” into Spanish.

Listen along to the audio episode, or watch the video version while you read this article. Once you reach the end, don’t miss your free worksheet, which you can download to put what you’ve learned to the test. ¡Vamos allá!

‘Por’ vs ‘para’ in SpanishLet’s start with a quick exercise. Try to translate these sentences into Spanish. Think about how to translate “for” in each one. Then, once we’ve gone through the uses of por and para, we’ll reveal the answers at the end.

I am going to change my phone for a new one.
This bus is for Medellín.
Sofía cooked for me yesterday.

Uses of ‘por’ and ‘para’In each of those translation sentences, you will have been choosing between the prepositions por and para to translate “for”. Don’t worry if you weren’t sure which to choose each time, as it’s now time to get into when to use por vs para in Spanish.

Uses of ‘para’The preposition para has two main uses.

“for” the recipient of an action or objectPara is used when we are talking about the recipient or receiver of an action or an object. For example:

Compraré esta camiseta para ti.
I will buy this T-shirt for you.

In this sentence, “you” are the recipient of the T-shirt, which is why “for you” is translated as para ti.

Here’s another example:

Escribí este poema para mi madre.
I wrote this poem for my mum.

Even though it is not a physical object, we use para here, too, because “my mum” is the person for whom the poem is being written.

“for” a destinationPara is also used to convey a sense of direction towards a destination. For example:

Voy para el gimnasio.
I am headed for the gym.

The gym is the destination, which is why we translate “for” as para.

Wondering what the difference is between this sentence and voy al gimnasio? In the podcast episode, Mark and Concha explain this subtle difference, so make sure to find that point in the episode.

Pronunciation point: watch out for the pronunciation of the single R sound in para, which is different to the stronger R sound in parra (meaning “vine”).

Uses of ‘por’The preposition por is a little more complicated than para, because it doesn’t always mean “for”. However, today, we’re focusing on the situations where por can be translated as “for” in English.

Like para, por has two main uses.

“for” a reasonPor is used when we are talking about the reason for something.

Think of the question ¿por qué?, which we use to ask “why?” in Spanish. This literally means “for what (reason)?”

Let’s see an example of por:

No trabajo por el dinero; lo hago porque me gusta.
I don’t work for the money; I do it because I like it.

Here, por is used to introduce the reason for working.

In a similar sense, por is also used to talk about doing an action “for” someone, in the sense of “on behalf of” them. For example:

Mi hermana lava los platos. Hoy yo lo hago por ella.
My sister washes the dishes. Today I’m doing it for her.

Exchanging something “for” something elseAnother use of por is to talk about exchanges. For example:

Compré este coche por 15.000 euros.
I bought this car for 15,000 euros.

Here, por is used to express the exchange of money for the car.

Time to test what you’ve learned about ‘por’ vs ‘para’ in SpanishNow, keeping in mind everything we’ve learned about when to use por vs para in Spanish, have another look at your translations from the beginning and see if you’d make any changes.

When you’re ready, keep reading as we reveal the answers.

AnswersI am going to change my phone for a new one.
Voy a cambiar mi teléfono por uno nuevo.

Here, “for” indicates an exchange – your old phone for a new one.

This bus is for Medellín.
Este autobús es para Medellín.

The bus is headed towards Medellín, making it a destination, which is therefore introduced by para.

Sofía cooked for me yesterday.
Sofía cocinó por mí ayer.
Sofía cocinó para mí ayer.

Both por and para are possible here, depending on the context.

If you usually do the cooking, but Sofía is doing you a favour and making you dinner so that you don’t have to cook, we use por in this sentence.

However, ¡ojo! If Sofía is simply treating you to a nice meal she’s cooked, you are the recipient of Sofía’s cooking, and so, we use para instead.

A visual summary of ‘por’ vs ‘para’ in SpanishFor further explanation of por vs para in Spanish, join Concha and Mark in the podcast episode associated with this article. And to keep up to date with the latest episodes of The Coffee Break Spanish Show, you can subscribe to our channel on YouTube and to our podcast feed.

Plus, for more Coffee Break learning, you can sign up to receive regular, free email lessons which will help you improve your Spanish directly from your inbox. Look out for the sign-up box below, and we hope that you enjoy your lessons.

We hope that you now feel more confident knowing the difference between por vs para in Spanish. Until next time, happy Coffee Breaking!

Listen to the podcastThe post ‘Por’ vs ‘para’ in Spanish: how to translate ‘for’ appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

We’ve reached Lesson 30 of our Coffee Break Gaelic course for beginners! This means that it’s time to put our learning into practice with a Gaelic dialogue. Join Susanna and Mark in this lesson and revise key vocabulary from the last 29 lessons.

The post CBGa 1.30 | End-of-unit review – The basics in Gaelic from Lessons 1-29 appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

If you’ve ever found yourself scratching your head over why a verb suddenly splits in half, fear not! Because today we’re looking at German separable verbs, and we’re here to shed some light on this special category of verbs that can be confusing for learners.

The Coffee Break German Show is a podcast series of short discussions in which we chat about interesting topics for German learners. In the latest episode, Mark and Thomas talk about separable verbs, and about which prefixes are separable, inseparable, or can be either!

Watch the video version of this episode, or listen to the podcast as you read along, and look out for your free worksheet download at the bottom of this article, which will allow you to practise what you learn.

German separable verbsSo, what exactly are separable verbs? Well, put simply, they’re verbs where the prefix, often a preposition, is split from the main verb and placed at the end of the sentence when used as the main verb. Let’s take a look at some examples to make things clearer.

Martin macht jedes Mal, sobald er vom Fußballtraining heimkommt, erstmal alle Fenster im ganzen Haus auf/zu.
Every time, as soon as he comes home from football training, Martin opens/closes all the windows in the whole house.

In the example above, auf or zu is separated from the main part of the verb macht and placed at the end of the sentence. The infinitive form of the verb is aufmachen/zumachen.

The power of the prefixNow, let’s break down some key points about German separable verbs.

Some prefixes always form separable verbs, such as ab, an, auf, aus, ein, mit, nach, vor, and zu. Each of these prefixes has a different meaning and each can change the meaning of a verb when added to it. Let’s see some examples:

Meine Freunde kommen morgen früh an.
My friends are arriving early tomorrow.

Sie denkt oft über die Zukunft nach.
She often thinks about the future.

Wir haben das Paket abgegeben.
We delivered the package.

Note with this last example in the perfect tense in German, the prefix is separated from the rest of the past participle by the -ge- in the middle: abgeben > ab + ge + geben.

Separable verbs in um…zu constructionsWith infinitive constructions, such as um…zu, meaning “in order to”, note how zu comes between the prefix and the main part of the verb. For example:

Wir warten, um uns einen besseren Plan auszudenken.
We are waiting in order to come up with a better plan.

Prefixes that don’t separateConversely, some prefixes never form German separable verbs, including be, emp, ent, er, ver, and zer. For example:

Er hat uns ein gutes Restaurant empfohlen.
He recommended a very good restaurant to us.

Dieses Gefühl ist nicht leicht zu beschreiben.
This feeling is hard to describe.

Prefixes that sometimes separate, and sometimes don’tAnd then, there are prefixes that can form both separable and inseparable verbs, such as durch, über, um, unter, and wieder.   The meaning of verbs can change depending on whether these prefixes separate or not. Hopefully, some examples will make this clearer:

Das findest du nie wieder.You will never find that again.

This is the verb wiederfinden meaning “to find again”.

Yet, in other contexts, the prefix changes the meaning of the verb, as can be seen in the next example:

Der Moderator wiederholt sich die ganze Zeit.
The presenter is repeating himself all the time.

It’s the same prefix, wieder, but as part of the verb wiederholen and it doesn’t separate.

Let’s look at another:

Ich übersetze sehr gerne alte Kinderlieder.
I really enjoy translating old children’s songs.

Note that it’s not a separable verb in that example. But here, the prefix über does separate from the main verb and has a different meaning:

Das Boot kippte über.
The boat tipped over.

Stress that prefixWhen the prefix is separable you can hear the difference in the infinitive.

The prefix is stressed when it is spoken. If there is no stress on the prefix, then we know it is not separable.

A visual summary of German separable verbsGerman separable verbs are incredibly common, and understanding them helps getting to grips with the language. Recognising them and knowing how to use them will undoubtedly help you improve your German.

Plus! To get regular, free German lessons in your inbox, you can sign up for our short (coffee-break-sized) email lessons which will help you improve your German. You will also hear from Mark, the founder of Coffee Break Languages, giving advice for language learners at any level. Sign up below!

Bis bald, and happy Coffee Breaking!

Listen to the podcastThe post Making sense of German separable verbs: a guide for learners appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

We’ve reached lesson 30 of Coffee Break Portuguese! In this episode we’re reviewing everything we’ve learned in our beginner’s course so far. We’ll be doing this by listening to and studying two short dialogues, which contain words and phrases on many of the topics we’ve covered. After this episode, we will be taking a break and will be back with episode 31 in a few weeks, so stay tuned!

The post CBP 1.30 | End-of-unit review – The basics in Portuguese from Lessons 1–29 appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Have you ever wondered why the plural of uovo (“egg”) is uova (“eggs”) in Italian? Or why “one man” is un uomo, but two men is due uomini? While plurals in Italian often follow regular patterns, there are a number of irregular plurals to watch out for. But don’t worry, as we’re here to guide you through some of the most common Italian irregular plurals.

The Coffee Break Italian Show is a podcast series of short but informative episodes, in which we discuss tricky Italian language topics. In the latest episode, Francesca and Maurizio are here to explain how irregular plural nouns work in Italian.

Continue reading to find out more, and why not listen to the podcast as you go?

Plus, don’t miss our free worksheet at the end to practise what you learn!

How to make nouns plural in ItalianBefore we get into the Italian irregular plurals, let’s quickly review the regular patterns for forming plural nouns in Italian.

Regular patterns for plurals in ItalianThe following patterns are likely to be very familiar to you already.

o > iSingular words ending in -o change to -i in the plural. For example:

un italiano
one Italian (man)

due italiani
two Italians

un ragazzo
one boy

due ragazzi
two boys

a > eWords ending in -a change to -e in the plural. For instance:

la matita
the pencil

le matite
the pencils

una ragazza
one girl

due ragazze
two girls

e > iWords ending in -e change to -i in the plural. Our first example is with a masculine noun ending in -e:

lo studente
the student

gli studenti
the students

Now let’s see an example with a feminine noun ending in -e:

l’indicazione
the indication

le indicazioni
the indications

Italian irregular pluralsNow, here’s where it gets interesting: irregular plurals. These are plural nouns that don’t conform to the rules above, so it’s essential to keep an eye out for them.

As Francesca mentions in the episode, there are many irregular plural nouns in Italian, so for now, we’re just going to focus on some of the most common ones to help you get used to looking out for and recognising irregularities.

Francesca’s top tip: check your dictionary if you’re unsure if a noun has an irregular plural form.

We can categorise the most common irregular plurals into three categories: words that change spelling or don’t follow the usual rules; words that change grammatical gender; and words that have a double plural – one of each gender.

Let’s start with the first category.

Irregular plurals that change spellingSome nouns change their spelling entirely in the plural form. For instance:

l’uomo
the man

gli uomini
the men

This is a clear irregularity, as an extra syllable is added in the plural form.

il dio
the god

gli dei / dèi
the gods

Again, the singular noun dio changes quite drastically in its plural form.

l’ala
the wing

le ali
the wings

If ala was regular in its plural form, we would expect it to have an -e on the end, since it is a feminine noun, but instead it ends in -i.

Irregular plurals that change genderSome irregular plurals in Italian have a different grammatical gender in their singular form than they do in their plural form. More specifically, they are masculine nouns when they are singular, but feminine nouns when they are plural. Let’s take a look at some examples:

l’uovo (masculine singular)
the egg

le uova (feminine plural)
the eggs

il paio (masculine singular)
the pair

le paia (feminine plural)
the pairs

Here, you can see that the feminine plural definite article is used with each of these nouns when they are in their plural form. However, the nouns themselves don’t have the usual feminine plural ending, -e, which we would expect.

Irregular nouns with double pluralsTaking this a stage further, let’s now turn our attention to the group of Italian nouns that have two possible options for their plural form. However, attenzione! This doesn’t mean that the two options are interchangeable – rather, the masculine plural version and the feminine plural version carry different meanings.

Let’s take a common example: il braccio (“the arm”). One of its plural forms follows the pattern we have just seen, giving us le braccia (“the arms”), but this is used exclusively to refer to your arms attached to your body.

We also have the masculine plural noun i bracci, which is not used to refer to human arms, but is instead a more technical term. I bracci is used to refer to the arms of an inanimate object, such as those of a set of scales, the boom of a crane, or the boom that a microphone would be attached to.

il braccio (masculine singular)
the arm

le braccia (feminine plural)
the arms (of your body)

i bracci (masculine plural)
the arms (of an inanimate object), the booms

Another example that concerns a part of the body is the noun il dito (“the finger”), which uses its feminine plural form to refer to all of your fingers as a collective (le dita).

il dito (masculine singular)
the finger

le dita (feminine plural)
the fingers (of your hand)

However, if we talk about i diti, in the masculine plural form, we are describing more than one individual finger, rather than all of the fingers of a hand.

For example:

i diti indici
the index fingers

i diti mignoli
the little fingers, the pinkies

i diti pollici
the thumbs

One last irregular plural noun in Italian that we’re going to look at concerns the word il muro (“the wall”). In its masculine plural form, i muri (“the walls”) refers to the structural walls of a house or any other building.

However, le mura also exists, which is a feminine plural noun. Here, we are talking about le mura domestiche. Le mura still refers to the concept of a house, but carries a connotation of home and emotional connection, perhaps evoking the family, friends and memories contained within the walls of the house. It’s a little like the difference between the words “house” and “home” in English.

Le mura has a second meaning, too. For example, if you have ever visited the beautiful Italian city of Lucca, you may have seen le mura, which are the old protective walls of a city.

il muro (masculine singular)
the wall

i muri (masculine plural)
the walls (structural)

le mura (domestiche) (feminine plural)
the home

le mura (feminine plural)
the city walls

Time to practise Italian irregular pluralsNow, let’s put your newfound knowledge of Italian irregular plurals to the test with a translation task. Translate the following sentences into Italian, then check your answers at the bottom of this article.

The walls of this house are very thick.
I would like two fried eggs for breakfast.

That’s everything for today’s topic. We hope that you now feel more confident recognising and using some of the most common irregular plurals in Italian.

If you’re looking for ways to further improve your Italian little and often, you can sign up for our short, regular, free email lessons. We also send out tips and tricks for language learners. Sign up below!

And for the full Coffee Break Italian experience, make sure to watch the full episode with Francesca and Maurizio on The Coffee Break Italian Show. You can also subscribe to our podcast feed and our channel on YouTube to be notified when our next episode is available.

Keep your eye out for other irregular plural nouns as you read and listen to Italian and, as always, happy Coffee Breaking!

PS. Here are the answers to the translation challenge:

I muri di questa casa sono molto spessi.
Vorrei due uova fritte per colazione.

Listen to the podcastThe post A guide to irregular plurals in Italian appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

The agreement of past participles in French is a key aspect of the perfect tense (or le passé composé). It’s a big topic for French learners and can seem confusing at times, which is why we’ve chosen it as the topic of our latest episode of The Coffee Break French Show.

The Coffee Break French Show is a video and audio podcast series, in which we help you improve your French with each episode. Join Pierre-Benoît and Mark in the latest one to find out everything you need to know about past participles in French.

We’ll clarify what is a past participle in French, then walk through the rules of past participle agreement, including what happens when you have a preceding direct object in French.

So, let’s get started, and we’d recommend listening along to the episode as you read. C’est parti !

What is a past participle in French?First things first, let’s clarify exactly what we mean by past participles in French. The past participle is a specific form of a verb, which is used to create compound tenses, such as the passé composé in French, or the present perfect in English.

For example, in the following sentence, in both English and French, we see the subject pronoun (je / “I”), followed by the auxiliary verb (ai / “have”), and finally the past participle (parlé / “spoken”).

J’ai parlé.
I have spoken (or I spoke).

Regular past participles in FrenchAs we’ve just seen with parlé, the past participle form of all regular -er verbs (such as parler) ends in -é.

For regular -ir verbs (such as finir), the ending is -i. For example:

J’ai fini.
I have finished (or I finished).

And, finally, for regular -re verbs (such as vendre), the past participle ending is -u. For instance:

J’ai vendu.
I have sold (or I sold).

When is there no past participle agreement?In all of the examples we’ve seen so far, avoir is the auxiliary verb. Remember that to form the perfect tense in French, the auxiliary verb required is either avoir (“to have”) or être (“to be”), and the decision depends on the verb, as well as the nature of it in the particular context.

When constructing sentences in the perfect tense with the auxiliary verb avoir, the general rule is that the past participle does not agree in gender or number with the subject. There is one significant exception to this general rule, which we will come to further on in this article, so stay tuned!

When is there agreement of past participles in French?However, when the auxiliary verb being used to form the perfect tense of a verb is être, the general rule is that the past participle agrees in gender and number with the subject (that is to say the person or thing carrying out the action of the verb). For example:

Pierre-Benoît est allé au supermarché.
Pierre-Benoît went / has gone to the supermarket.

Aller (“to go”) is a verb that takes the auxiliary être in the perfect tense, and the basic form of its past participle is allé. When the subject of the verb is masculine (in this case, a male person), the past participle does not change its form, because the default form is the same as the masculine singular form.

Hélène est allée au supermarché.
Hélène went / has gone to the supermarket.

Here, however, since the subject of the verb is feminine (in this case, a female person), we add an extra -e to the past participle allé so that it agrees: allée.

Verbs that take ‘être’ in the perfect tenseBut which verbs use the auxiliary être in the passé composé?

There is a group of verbs in French that are known as verbs of movement or state. All of these verbs usually take être as their auxiliary verb. Again, there are some exceptions to this, which we’ll cover later on.

Here is the list of verbs of movement in French:

entrer (“to enter”) & rentrer (“to return”, “to come back in”)
sortir (“to leave”)
aller (“to go”)
venir (“to come”) & revenir (“to come back”)
arriver (“to arrive”)
partir (“to leave”)
monter (“to go up”)
descendre (“to go down”)
tomber (“to fall”)
rester (“to stay”)
mourir (“to die”)
naître (“to be born”)
devenir (“to become”)
retourner (“to return”, “to go back”)

Let’s see some examples using one of these verbs. Pay attention to how the past participle agrees in gender and number with the subject of the verb each time.

L’avion est arrivé.
The plane arrived / has arrived.

L’ambulance est arrivée.
The ambulance arrived / has arrived.

Les avions sont arrivés.
The planes arrived / have arrived.

Les ambulances sont arrivées.
The ambulances arrived / have arrived.

Reflexive verbs in the perfect tenseAll reflexive verbs also take être as their auxiliary verb in the perfect tense. Let’s look at some examples, paying attention again to the agreement of the past participles in French.

Christophe s’est réveillé.
Christophe woke up / has woken up.

Lucie s’est réveillée.
Lucie woke up / has woken up.

Lucie et Christophe se sont réveillés.
Lucie and Christophe woke up / have woken up.

Lucie et Hélène se sont réveillées.
Lucie and Hélène woke up / have woken up.

What is the preceding direct object rule in French?We saw earlier that, in general, when avoir is the auxiliary verb used, there is no agreement of the past participle.

However, there are certain situations where there is past participle agreement when the auxiliary verb is avoir. This is where there is a preceding direct object in French, and where this is the case, the past participle agrees in gender and number with the direct object. Let’s see how it works.

The following sentence is a straightforward sentence in the perfect tense with the auxiliary verb avoir.

J’ai mangé un biscuit.
I ate a biscuit.

Next, let’s switch things around.

le biscuit que j’ai mangé
the biscuit that I ate

This time, the direct object of the verb manger (i.e. what has been eaten – le biscuit) is coming before the whole verbal construction j’ai mangé. Here, the past participle mangé has to agree in gender and number with the direct object. However, because biscuit is a masculine singular noun, mangé remains in its default form.

What about if what has been eaten is a feminine noun? First of all, a straightforward construction:

J’ai mangé une pomme.
I ate an apple.

This time, when the direct object comes before the verbal construction, we see that the past participle becomes mangée, with an extra -e added. This is because the past participle is now agreeing with a feminine singular noun, pomme.

la pomme que j’ai mangée
the apple that I ate

Let’s try this with some plural nouns. See if you can follow the pattern.

J’ai mangé deux biscuits.
I ate two biscuits.

les deux biscuits que j’ai mangés
the two biscuits that I ate

J’ai mangé deux pommes.
I ate two apples.

les deux pommes que j’ai mangées
the two apples that I ate

In all of these examples, where there is a preceding direct object in French, the past participle agrees with it in gender and number, even though the auxiliary verb being used is avoir.

Typically ‘être’ verbs that sometimes take ‘avoir’There is one more aspect of the agreement of past participles in French to cover. Did you know that some verbs from our list of verbs that take être as their auxiliary can also take avoir? For example, it can be surprising when you first come across phrases such as j’ai monté or j’ai sorti, when we are used to thinking of these as être verbs.

This is because some verbs can use either avoir or être as the auxiliary verb in compound tenses, depending on the context. Let’s see how this works with some examples:

Je suis monté(e) dans le bus.
I got on the bus.

J’ai monté les cartons dans la chambre.
I took the boxes up to the room.

Je suis descendu(e) dans la cave.
I went down to the cellar.

J’ai descendu les cartons.
I took the boxes down.

In these examples, when monter and descendre are used with the auxiliary verb avoir, this is because they involve a direct object – there is an object that is being brought up or down – and so follow the rule of no agreement of the past participle (unless there’s a preceding direct object). When used with être as the auxiliary, monter and descendre indicate movement of the subject itself and so require agreement with the subject.

Practising the agreement of past participles in FrenchNow, it’s over to you! Put your knowledge of past participles in French to the test by translating the following sentences. The answers are at the end of this article.

Her little sister came down but did not want to eat.
The story which I have told you is not true.

For more practice of the agreement of past participles in French, don’t forget to download your free worksheet, which you can find below.

We hope that this has helped with your understanding of past participles in French when forming the perfect tense, as well as what happens when you have a preceding direct object in French.

For more explanations and to get the most out of this article, join Pierre-Benoît and Mark on The Coffee Break French Show. We have more episodes coming soon, so don’t forget to subscribe to the podcast feed wherever you get your podcasts, or to our channel on YouTube, so that you know when new episodes are available.

Finally, if you’d like more, regular, free help with your French, you should know that we send out mini email lessons. Find out how to sign up below.

Happy Coffee Breaking!

PS. Here are the answers to the translation challenge:

Sa petite sœur est descendue mais n’a pas voulu manger.
L’histoire que je t’ai racontée n’est pas vraie.

Listen to the podcastThe post Everything you need to know about the agreement of past participles in French appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Knowing how to appropriately express obligation in Spanish is a useful aspect to get to grips with if you’re a learner of the language. In Spanish, there are three main phrases used to convey that someone must or has to do something: deber, tener que and hay que.

Understanding these expressions is useful for many everyday situations, but it’s also a topic that our Coffee Break community asks us about a lot, as it can be difficult to know when and how to use each expression.

The Coffee Break Spanish Show is a series of podcast episodes, in which we tackle tricky topics for Spanish learners. In this episode, join Anabel and Concha to learn how to express obligation in Spanish using these 3 main expressions.

So, let’s get started with looking at deber, tener que and hay que in Spanish, and we’d suggest you listen along to the podcast episode as you read.

Also, don’t forget to download your free worksheet at the end of this article so that you can test your knowledge. ¡Vamos allá!

‘deber’ + infinitiveThe verb deber in Spanish is used to express a strong sense of obligation and it is the equivalent of the English word “must”.

Let’s start by reviewing the conjugation of deber. The good news is that it is a regular verb in the present tense.

deber conjugation – present tense
(yo) debo
(tú) debes
(él/ella/usted) debe
(nosotros/nosotras) debemos
(vosotros/vosotras) debéis
(ellos/ellas/ustedes) deben

To say that someone must do something, we conjugate deber according to the person, then add the second verb in its infinitive form. Let’s see some examples:

Debemos hacer los deberes.
We must do our homework.

Debes aprender idiomas.
You must learn languages (addressing one person, a specific “you”).

Pay attention to the next example, which is slightly different.

Se debe reciclar.
You / one / everyone must recycle (addressing a general “you”).

While deber + infinitive can be used to say what an individual person or group of people must do, the construction se debe + infinitive expresses a more general obligation in Spanish – something that everyone, or people in general must do.

‘tener que’ + infinitiveThe phrase tener que in Spanish conveys a slightly less strong sense of obligation compared to deber. It translates as “to have to” in English and is commonly used in everyday situations.

The verb tener was the focus of the previous episode of The Coffee Break Spanish Show, in which we learned 10 other everyday phrases that use tener. So, in this episode we’re adding an 11th common, everyday tener expression: tener que.

Tener is an irregular verb in the present tense, so let’s start by reviewing its conjugation:

tener conjugation – present tense
(yo) tengo
(tú) tienes
(él/ella/usted) tiene
(nosotros/nosotras) tenemos
(vosotros/vosotras) tenéis
(ellos/ellas/ustedes) tienen

To say that someone has to do something, we conjugate tener according to the person, then add que, followed by the second verb in its infinitive form. Let’s see some examples:

Tengo que repasar los verbos irregulares.
I have to review / go over the irregular verbs.

Tenéis que llamar a mamá.
You (plural) have to call mum.

As we just saw with deber, tener que also has an alternative construction using se. Like se debe + infinitive, se tiene que + infinitive is used to express a wider obligation in Spanish – addressing people in general, rather than one specific person or group of people. For example:

Se tiene que cuidar el planeta.
You / one / everyone has to take care of the planet (addressing a general “you”).

In many contexts, tener que and deber are roughly interchangeable, so don’t worry too much about using one over the other to express obligation in Spanish. Just remember that tener que uses que after the conjugated verb, while deber does not.

‘hay que’The third expression we’re going to look at for expressing obligation in Spanish is hay que. Hay que + infinitive is only used to indicate a general obligation, just like se debe or se tiene que, and it conveys a similar idea to “one must” or “it is necessary to” in English.

And the good news with hay que is that we don’t have to think about conjugating the verb – it is a set expression that is simply followed by the infinitive. Let’s see some examples:

Hay que limpiar la casa.
One has to clean the house. / You (general) have to clean the house. / The house has to be cleaned.

Hay que ser puntual.
One has to be punctual. / You (general) have to be punctual.

Using hay que in Spanish is particularly useful when you want to express an obligation without targeting anyone specifically, by turning a direct suggestion into a more general statement.

In the podcast episode, Anabel gives us a great example: imagine you’ve been the one cleaning the house every time for the last while, and you think it’s time others helped out. In this situation, you might say hay que limpiar la casa to make the statement more general and less direct than if you were to say debes limpiar la casa or tienes que limpiar la casa.

A visual summary of expressions of obligation in SpanishThat’s it for our 3 expressions of obligation in Spanish: deber, tener que and hay que. We hope that you’ll now feel confident saying what someone must or has to do clearly and appropriately in various contexts.

To get the most out of this lesson, watch the video or listen to the audio podcast episode with Anabel and Concha on The Coffee Break Spanish Show. We regularly publish new episodes to help our Coffee Break community improve their Spanish, so make sure to subscribe to our YouTube channel and podcast feed so that you never miss an episode.

Looking for more help with your Spanish? You should also know that we send out regular, free mini email lessons. To sign up, look out for the box below, and we hope that you enjoy the first lesson that arrives in your inbox.

Happy Coffee Breaking!

Listen to the podcastThe post 3 ways to express obligation in Spanish: ‘deber’, ‘tener que’ and ‘hay que’ appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

When talking about events in the past in German, we often have to make the choice between using the perfect tense and the imperfect tense, also known as the preterite (Präteritum).

While both tenses are grammatically correct in most situations, there’s a clear favourite in spoken German: the perfect tense. However, there are some verbs that German speakers tend to use almost exclusively in the imperfect tense, even in casual conversation.

The Coffee Break German Show is a podcast series of bite-sized, friendly conversations in which we chat through interesting German language topics. In the latest episode, Mark and Thomas talk about how to sound more like a native speaker by using particular past tenses when speaking in German. Join them as they go through a list of verbs that are usually used in the imperfect (rather than the perfect) when talking about the past in German.

Continue reading to find out more and why not listen to the podcast as you go? Plus, don’t miss our free worksheet at the end to practise what you learn!

‘sein’ (to be) in the imperfect tenseFirst up, we have sein (“to be”), which becomes ich war in the ich form. Let’s see an example of sein in the imperfect tense.

Gestern war sie im Museum und hat sich die neue Ausstellung angeschaut.
Yesterday she was at the museum and checked out the new exhibition.

Here, war, the imperfect tense, is used in the first part, while the perfect tense, hat … angeschaut, is used in the second part. This mixture of tenses is very common in German since the choice often depends more on the verb than on the context of the situation, especially in spoken German.

‘haben’ (to have) in the imperfect tenseNext, let’s talk about haben (“to have”), which becomes ich hatte in the ich form. Here’s an example:

Wir hatten leider kein gutes Wetter und haben die meiste Zeit im Hotel verbracht.
Unfortunately, we didn’t have good weather and spent most of the time in the hotel.

Again, the imperfect tense, wir hatten, is used here because the perfect tense alternative, wir haben gehabt, would sound almost unnecessarily complicated and long to a native speaker.

‘wissen’ (to know) in the imperfect tenseThen, there’s wissen (“to know”), which becomes ich wusste in the ich form. For example:

Ich wusste nicht, was ich machen sollte.
I didn’t know what I should have done.

Using wusste sounds much more natural in the imperfect than the perfect tense form of the verb.

Modal verbs in the imperfect tenseLet’s not forget about modal verbs. Modal verbs like müssen and können are often used in the imperfect tense in German to express necessity, ability, or desire in the past.

wollen > wollten
können > konnten
müssen > mussten
dürfen > durften
mögen > mochten
sollen > sollten

Have a look at the following examples:

Du musstest nur den Knopf drücken.
You only had to press the button.

Sie konnten gestern nicht kommen, obwohl sie wollten.
They couldn’t come yesterday, even though they wanted to.

‘es gab’ (there was/were)Moving on to expressions such as es gab (“there was/were”), es gibt is commonly used to say “there is” or “there are”. In the past in German this is always seen in the imperfect. For example:

Wir haben gestern meine Freunde besucht und es gab Kuchen.
Yesterday, we visited my friends and there was cake.

‘etwas ging/lief’ (something went)And finally, we have etwas ging/lief (“something went”). Es geht and es läuft are also expressions used frequently in German. However, in the past, the imperfect is the past tense of choice. Take a look at these examples:

Der Vortrag ging viel zu lang.
The lecture went on for way too long.

Das Training lief sehr gut.Training went really well.

Das Interview lief sehr gut.
The interview went very well.

Verbs such as ging and lief are commonly used in the imperfect tense to describe how something unfolded in the past.

A visual summary of when to use the imperfect in GermanSo, the next time you find yourself recounting past events in German, we hope that everything you’ve learned here comes in useful.

If you found this interesting, make sure to listen to the full episode with Thomas and Mark on The Coffee Break German Show where they talk more about past tenses in German. We will regularly be uploading more episodes for German learners, so make sure to subscribe to our podcast feed and our channel on YouTube to find out when the next episode is available.

Happy Coffee Breaking!

Listen to the podcastThe post German past tenses: when to use the imperfect tense in spoken German appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

If you’re an Italian learner, you’ll know that there are some interesting pronunciation points that take a little getting used to. One of the key ones is understanding how to pronounce the letters C and G. This is because Italian has both a hard and soft C and G sound.

The Coffee Break Italian Show is an audio and video podcast series of short, informal discussions about interesting topics for Italian learners. In our latest episode, we’re looking at an interesting aspect of Italian alphabet pronunciation, as Francesca and Mark explain all about hard and soft C and G sounds.

Make sure to listen along to the podcast episode as you read this article, in order to hear how each of the sounds is pronounced.

When you reach the end of this article, you’ll also have the chance for some further practice in our free worksheet. So, don’t forget to look out for the download button. Cominciamo!

Hard and soft C and G sounds in ItalianIn Italian, the letters C and G can be pronounced in two different ways, depending on the letters that follow.

Each of these consonants has a hard sound and a soft sound. In the podcast episode, Francesca starts with a few examples of the soft and hard C and G sounds. Make sure to listen to the audio version or watch the video to hear how she pronounces the following words.

hard C sound:
casa
house

hard G sound:
gatto
cat

soft G sound:
gelato
ice cream

soft C sound:
cibo
food

Let’s look into this in more detail and learn the letter combinations that determine the hard and soft C and G sounds.

Hard soundsThe hard sound of the letter C in Italian is similar to the English K, or the C in “cat”.

The hard sound of the letter G in Italian is similar to the English G in “go”.

In Italian, you will hear the hard sound when C or G is followed by the vowels A, O or U. Here are some examples:

correre
to run

curioso
curious, nosey

gola
throat

lingua
tongue, language

How to pronounce CH and GH in ItalianAs we’ve seen, the letters C and G are usually followed by a vowel in Italian. However, the common exception is the letter H.

The letter combinations CH and GH can be a little confusing for learners. This is because the letter H is often used in other languages to create a soft sound (consider, for example, the English sounds “ch” and “sh”).

In Italian, however, the presence of the letter H after a C or a G makes it a hard sound. For example, in the following words:

occhi
eyes

unghia
(finger/toe)nail

In summary, when the letter C or G is followed by A, O, U or H, it makes a hard sound (as in “cat” or “go”).

Soft soundsThe soft sound of the letter C in Italian is similar to the English “ch” in “church”.

The soft sound of the letter G in Italian is similar to the English J in “jam”.

You will hear the soft sound when C or G is followed by the vowels E or I in Italian. Here are some examples:

cena
dinner

gelato
ice cream

undici
eleven

In the following example, the G + I produces a soft G sound. However, pay attention to the hard C sound created by the combination of C + U.

cugini
cousins

As we saw previously, if there is a letter H between the C/G and the E or I, the H takes over and determines that this will be a hard sound instead. For example:

chiedere
to ask

In summary, when the letter C or G is followed by E or I, it makes a soft sound (as in “church” or “jam”).

A common pronunciation mistake in ItalianNow that we’ve covered hard and soft C and G sounds in Italian, there’s one extra pronunciation point to pay attention to. This common mistake concerns over-emphasising the letter I in certain words.

There are many words in Italian where the letter I is present, but is not strongly pronounced. Instead, it signals that the preceding C or G has a soft sound.

For example, consider the following word:

ciao
hi

We don’t really hear the letter I itself, as its function is simply to change the sound of the consonant (from the hard C sound we would hear if the word were cao, to the soft C sound).

Another commonly mispronounced word is the name Giovanni, in which the first three letters make up only one syllable, rather than two. This is because the I is only there to make the G into a soft sound. Make sure to listen to the episode to hear how Francesca and Mark pronounce this name correctly.

There are situations, however, where the letter I is pronounced more fully, where the stress of the word falls on that syllable. For example:

farmacia
pharmacy, chemist’s

bugia
lie

In these two words, the I is more prominent because the stress of the word falls on that syllable. In the name Giovanni, on the other hand, the stress of the word falls on -va-.

Regional differences in soft C and G soundsThere is one interesting regional difference to note when it comes to the soft C and G sounds in Italian.

In some parts of central and southern Italy, you may hear these pronounced slightly differently to the J (as in “jam”) and “ch” (as in “church”) sounds we have learned. In this case, the C sound is like a “sh” in English (as in “sheep”), and the G sound is similar to the sound of the “su” or “si” in “treasure” or “decision”.

Watch out for this moment in the video or the audio version of the episode to hear Francesca give an example of these sounds.

The role of S before C in ItalianBefore we finish, let’s take a look at another common letter combination in Italian – S + C – and see what this means for our soft or hard C sounds.

Here’s an example:

scuola
school

In scuola, the hard sound of the C remains, as it is followed by the letter U.

In the following words, however, the soft sound that you would expect from a C + I becomes a “sh” sound (as in “sheep”) because of the presence of the S.

sciare
to ski

asciutto
dry

Finally, what happens when we have the combination SCH in Italian? For example:

scherzo
joke, prank

In this case, we are back to the hard C sound we are familiar with, just with the addition of the S before it.

Practising hard and soft C and G soundsNow, it’s over to you! In the podcast episode, Francesca tests our spelling of some words containing soft and hard C and G sounds. Listen to the episode to have a go yourself, or look at the words in the list below and see if you can pronounce them correctly. Forza!

acciuga (“anchovy”)
scena (“scene”, “stage”)
schiena (“back”)
magia (“magic”)
chiacchierare (“to chat”)

In the podcast episode, Francesca and Mark also draw our attention to the double consonants in words such as acciuga, so watch out for this pronunciation point too.

Tips to keep practising soft and hard C and G soundsWe hope that you now feel more comfortable knowing when to pronounce hard and soft C and G sounds in Italian.

In order to keep practising, pay attention both to what you’re hearing and what you’re seeing every time you hear Italian out loud while seeing the words written down. One good way to do this is by turning on Italian subtitles if you’re watching a TV show or film in Italian.

To hear all of the hard and soft C and G sounds pronounced in this episode, watch the video or listen to the audio version with Francesca and Mark on The Coffee Break Italian Show. By subscribing to our channel on YouTube or to our podcast feed, you’ll be notified when the next episode of The Coffee Break Italian Show is available, to help you improve more aspects of your Italian.

And for more help with your Italian on a whole range of topics, you can sign up for our free email lessons. Find out how to do this below, and we hope that you enjoy the first lesson that arrives in your inbox.

Happy Coffee Breaking!

PS. Here are the answers to the pronunciation challenge:

acciuga (soft C sound)
scena (soft C sound pronounced as “sh”)
schiena (hard C sound)
magia (soft G sound)
chiacchierare (both hard C sounds)

Listen to the podcastThe post Hard and soft C and G sounds in Italian: learn how to pronounce these letters appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Saying “to play” in French initially seems straightforward: jouer. However, do you know the difference between jouer à and jouer de? We receive many questions from our Coffee Break community about French verbs with prepositions, such as jouer, as these can be challenging to get to grips with as a French learner.

The tricky part of translating “to play” in French is that we need to take into consideration what it is you are playing. This is because if you are talking about playing a sport or a game, you are going to use one preposition, whereas if you are talking about playing a musical instrument, you are going to use a different preposition.

The Coffee Break French Show is a podcast series for learners of French, in which we cover a whole variety of topics. If French verbs with prepositions is a topic that you find tricky, don’t worry, as in our latest episode, Pierre-Benoît and Max talk about how to translate “to play” in French and choose the correct preposition every time.

So, let’s get into the topic for today, and why not listen along to the podcast episode while you read? At the end of this article, you will also find a free worksheet which will allow you to practise what you learn. C’est parti !

How to say “to play” in FrenchThe verb “to play” in French is jouer. Before we get into prepositions, let’s start by reviewing the conjugation of jouer in the present tense, so that you can use the verb in all its forms.

The good news is that jouer is a regular -er verb in the present tense, which means that it follows the usual pattern of other -er verbs.

jouer conjugation – present tense:

je joue – “I play”
tu joues – “you play” (informal singular)
il/elle/on joue – “he/she/we play”
nous jouons – “we play”
vous jouez – “you play” (formal singular or informal/formal plural)
ils/elles jouent* – “they play”

The different uses of the on form of verbs is a whole other topic in itself. If you’d like to know more about how to translate the subject pronoun on, you can find another episode of The Coffee Break French Show* here.

French verbs with prepositions: ‘jouer à’ vs ‘jouer de’As we said earlier, getting used to French verbs with prepositions can be challenging. This is because there are many verbs in French that require a preposition following the verb, and that preposition can change the meaning of the verb.

When it comes to the verb jouer, this means that we need to understand the difference between jouer à and jouer de.

Translating “to play” in French: sports and gamesWhen you’re talking about playing a sport or a game in French, you use jouer à. That is to say that we conjugate the verb jouer, add the preposition à, then add the word for the sport or game.

However, we saw in our previous episode of The Coffee Break French Show that prepositions and certain definite articles (le or les) have to undergo changes when they appear side by side. Look out for this as you read through the examples. To review how to combine à + le or à + les you can find that episode here.

Let’s look at some examples of “to play” in French, followed by the preposition à and a sport or game.

First of all, let’s see jouer à followed by sports or games that are feminine singular nouns:

Je joue à la marelle.
I play hopscotch.

Je joue à la pétanque.
I play pétanque.

Next, with sports that are masculine singular nouns:

Je joue au foot.
I play football / soccer.

Je joue au rugby.
I play rugby.

Now, with sports or games that are plural nouns:

Je joue aux fléchettes.
I play darts.

Je joue aux cartes.
I play cards.

Finally, here’s an example with a sport that starts with a vowel. We will therefore see à + l’:

Je joue à l’ultimate frisbee.
I play ultimate frisbee.

In summary, to say “to play” in French, followed by a sport or a game, use jouer à.

Translating “to play” in French: musical instrumentsWhat about playing a musical instrument, rather than a sport or a game? In this case, we’re not going to use jouer à, but jouer de.

Pay attention to how the preposition de combines with the definite articles le and les as you look at the next examples.

Let’s start with jouer de followed by a musical instrument that is a feminine singular noun:

Je joue de la guitare.
I play the guitar.

Now, with a musical instrument that is a masculine singular noun:

Je joue du piano.
I play the piano.

An example of a plural noun for a musical instrument could be:

Je joue des maracas.
I play the maracas.

And one that starts with a vowel:

Je joue de l’accordéon.
I play the accordion.

Remember that nouns that start with a silent h- are treated the same as nouns that start with a vowel. For example:

Je joue de l’harmonica.
I play the harmonica.

However, if a noun starts with an aspirated h-, it is treated the same as nouns that start with a consonant. Here, therefore, we will see the combination of de + le = du:

Je joue du hautbois.
I play the oboe.

To summarise, to say “to play” in French, followed by a musical instrument, use jouer de.

Practising using “to play” in FrenchNow it’s time to put into practice what we’ve learned about jouer à vs jouer de, as well as about French verbs with prepositions in general, and what happens when the à or de is combined with the definite articles.

Translate the following sentences from English into French to test your knowledge. The answers are at the bottom of this article. Bon courage !

My sister plays golf on Saturdays.
I play the trombone.
My parents play dominoes every night.
My friend Paul played drums for six years.

We hope that you found this useful and now know exactly when to use jouer à and when to use jouer de to say “to play” in French.

For further explanation, don’t forget to listen to the podcast version of this lesson with Pierre-Benoît and Max on The Coffee Break French Show. We’ll be releasing more episodes soon, so make sure to subscribe to our podcast feed and our channel on YouTube for more help with your French.

What’s more, if you’d like to receive regular, free email lessons to help you improve your French, you can sign up below. Your next French lesson will arrive straight to your inbox very soon.

Happy Coffee Breaking!

PS. Here are the answers to the translation challenge:

Ma sœur joue au golf le samedi.
Je joue du trombone.
Mes parents jouent aux dominos tous les soirs.
Mon ami Paul a joué de la batterie pendant six ans.

Listen to the podcastThe post ‘Jouer à’ or ‘jouer de’? The verb ‘to play’ in French appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Tener is likely one of the very first verbs that you came across in your Spanish-learning journey. As you’ll know, the basic meaning of tener in English is “to have”. However, there are many useful expressions with tener in Spanish in which the verb does not translate as “to have”.

The Coffee Break Spanish Show is a video and audio podcast series of short, informal discussions about interesting topics for Spanish learners. In our latest episode, Concha and Mark talk about useful, everyday expressions with tener, and in particular, ones in which “to be” would be used instead in English.

Keep reading to learn more about these expressions, and we’d recommend listening to the podcast as you read. Plus, look out for our free worksheet at the end of the article, which will help you practise what you learn!

The verb ‘tener’As you may know, tener is an irregular verb in the present tense. So, let’s start by doing a quick review of its conjugation in the present tense:

(yo) tengo
(tú) tienes
(él/ella/usted) tiene
(nosotros/nosotras) tenemos
(vosotros/vosotras) tenéis
(ellos/ellas/ustedes) tienen

In its most basic meaning, the verb tener is used to talk about possession – the things that you have. For example:

Tengo una familia maravillosa.
I have a wonderful family.

Tenemos una casa preciosa.
We have a beautiful house.

‘Tener’ in EnglishHowever, tener is not always used for possession and, what’s more, tener doesn’t always translate as “to have” in English.

In fact, there are many occasions when we use tener, when in English we would use the verb “to be” instead.

Expressions with ‘tener’The first example we’ll look at is one you’ll already be very familiar with, and this is when you’re talking about age.

Tener … añosRemember that we talk about “having” years in Spanish, when giving someone’s age. For example, we would say:

¿Cuántos años tienes?
How old are you?

Literally, this means “how many years do you have?” The answer to this may be:

Tengo dieciocho años.
I am 18 years old. (Literally, “I have 18 years.”)

This is our first example of a tener expression, where tener is used in Spanish where “to be” would be used in its English equivalent.

9 more expressions with ‘tener’There are many other expressions with tener that work in a similar way.

In the podcast episode, Concha gives us a great example sentence that contains some very common, everyday tener expressions. Here it is:

Tienes razón: Juan Pablo siempre tiene frío cuando tiene hambre y, si tiene sueño, no tiene paciencia.
You are right – Juan Pablo is always cold when he is hungry, and if he is sleepy, he isn’t patient.

Let’s talk through each of these expressions with tener one by one.

Tener razóntener razón
to be right

Razón is a noun and it translates as “reason” or “correctness” in English. Tener razón therefore literally means “to have reason / correctness”, but this tener expression would translate into English as “to be right”. For example:

Tengo razón.
I am right.

Tienes razón.
You are right.

Tener frío / calortener frío
to be cold

tener calor
to be hot

In Spanish, we also express the feeling of being cold or warm using expressions with tener. For example:

Tengo mucho calor.
I am very hot.

Juan Pablo siempre tiene frío.
Juan Pablo is always cold.

Tener hambre / sedtener hambre
to be hungry

tener sed
to be thirsty

These two tener expressions are used to talk about feeling hungry or thirsty. In Spanish, you literally say that you “have hunger” or “have thirst”. For instance:

Tiene hambre.
He / She is hungry.

Tengo mucha sed.
I am very thirsty.

Note in this example that we have used mucha to describe being “very” thirsty. This is because we are literally saying “I have a lot of thirst”, which means we have to use mucha (agreeing with the feminine noun sed), instead of muy.

Tener sueñotener sueño
to be sleepy

In Spanish, we use another of our expressions with tener to talk about feeling sleepy. We are therefore literally saying something like “to have sleepiness”. For example:

Juan Pablo tiene sueño.
Juan Pablo is sleepy.

Tener paciencia / prisatener paciencia
to be patient

tener prisa
to be in a hurry

Whether you’re waiting in line or rushing to catch a train, we’ll be using more expressions with tener in Spanish. For instance:

No tiene paciencia.
He / She isn’t patient.

Tengo prisa: necesito irme.
I’m in a hurry – I need to go.

Tener ganastener ganas de
to feel like / fancy, to look forward to

One very useful expression with tener is tener ganas de. This expression can either be followed by a noun or a verb in the infinitive form.

Tener ganas de has two related meanings. First of all, this tener expression is used when you fancy or feel like something. For instance:

Tengo ganas de cantar.
I feel like singing.

Tengo ganas de un café.
I fancy a coffee.

The second meaning of this expression with tener is “to look forward to”. For example:

Mark y yo tenemos muchas ganas de grabar el próximo episodio de The Coffee Break Spanish Show.
Mark and I are really looking forward to filming the next episode of The Coffee Break Spanish Show.

This tener expression is also used in the sense of “can’t wait” in English.

¡Tengo muchas ganas! / ¡Qué ganas tengo!
I can’t wait!

If you want to say that you can’t wait for something in Spanish, you can therefore use this one of our expressions with tener, rather than saying no puedo esperar, which wouldn’t make sense in this context.

Practising expressions with ‘tener’Now that we’ve learned 10 new tener expressions, it’s time to put your knowledge to the test!

Try translating the following sentences from Spanish into English or from English into Spanish. The answers are at the end of this article.

Julia siempre tiene razón.
No vamos a comer ahora porque no tenemos hambre.
I’m looking forward to your birthday party.
You must be patient when you work with children.

We hope that you now feel more confident using some of the most common, everyday expressions with tener – particularly those where “to be” would be used in English.

Are you also a learner of French or Italian? If so, we have an episode in each of these languages on a very similar topic. Learn more about avoir expressions in this episode of The Coffee Break French Show, or for help with your avere expressions, check out this episode of The Coffee Break Italian Show.

If you enjoyed this lesson, don’t forget to watch or listen to the full podcast episode with Concha and Mark on The Coffee Break Spanish Show. In fact, our next episode will focus on a key point from the final sentence you were translating, as we’ll be looking at three ways to express obligation in Spanish. So, make sure to subscribe to our podcast feed or our channel on YouTube to learn when the episode is available.

Finally, if you’d like more help with your Spanish, we regularly send out free, bite-sized email lessons. You can sign up for these for free below.

For now, good luck as you continue practising your tener expressions and, as always, happy Coffee Breaking!

PS. Here are the answers to the translation challenge:

Julia is always right.
We aren’t going to eat now because we’re not hungry.
Tengo ganas de tu fiesta de cumpleaños.
Debes tener paciencia / Hay que tener paciencia / Tienes que tener paciencia cuando trabajas con niños.

Listen to the podcastThe post 10 essential Spanish expressions with ‘tener’ appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Last time we spoke about the past tense of the verb “to be”, and in this lesson we’re looking at the future tense so you can talk about future events. Take your conversation skills to the next level with this lesson of Coffee Break Gaelic!

The post CBGa 1.29 | Talking about the future in Gaelic – The future tense using the verb ‘to be’ appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Today, we’re diving into the fascinating world of prepositions of location in German.   So, whether you’re a beginner just starting your German journey, or a seasoned learner looking to polish your skills, understanding how to identify and use these prepositions with confidence will let you take your German to the next level.

The Coffee Break German Show is a podcast series of bite-sized, friendly conversations in which we chat through interesting German language topics. In the latest episode, Mark and Thomas explore the world of German prepositions, following on from the previous episode looking at when certain prepositions take the accusative or the dative. They look at each preposition in turn, the case it uses and provide loads of examples to accompany their explanations.

Continue reading to find out more and why not listen to the podcast as you go? Plus, don’t miss our free worksheet at the end to practise what you learn!

It’s all about the locationPrepositions of location in German will vary according to (believe or not) the type of location you are talking about. If you are confused with this explanation so far, fear not! We will explain everything you need to know about the subject below.

Let’s get on top of ‘auf’Let’s kick things off with auf. In German, auf is your go-to preposition when talking about being “on top of” something. For example:

Er legt sich auf die Couch.
He’s lying down on the couch.

There’s movement involved in the action of moving to the couch and starting to lie down on it, so the accusative is used. An open space to consider is:

Auf dem Marktplatz ist viel los.
Lots is happening on the market square.

Or, another context in which we can use auf is the following:

Meine Freunde gehen alle auf das Festival.My friends are all going to the festival.

Plus, it’s perfect for describing places like islands, roofs, or even mountains. Remember, don’t try to translate directly from English because it could hinder you in choosing the correct preposition in German. So, next time you’re chilling on a rooftop terrace, remember: you’re auf the roof!

To say where you’re at, ‘an’ does the jobNext up, we have an on your list of prepositions in German. This versatile word comes in handy when you’re talking about being “close to” something and, interestingly, all things related to water.   Here are a few examples:

Im Sommer fahren wir an das Meer.In the summer we’re going to the sea.

Wir sind an dem Meer.We’re at the sea.

Ich stehe an der Haltestelle.I am standing at the bus stop.

Ich sitze am Computer.I sit at the computer.

In all of these contexts, the preposition an is the one to use.

Let’s get ‘in’ to thisNow, let’s talk about the preposition in in German – a small word with a lot of power. It’s used to describe being “inside” something – any building, for example.

Wir sitzen im Café.We are sitting in the café.

Wir laufen in das Einkaufszentrum.We’re going into the shopping centre.

In is also used for exploring when we’re out and about, surrounded by something. For example:

Wir gehen im Wald spazieren.We’re going walking in the forest.

Die Kinder wollen in den Park.The children want to go to the park.

Regions, countries and cities which have an article use in. So, if you’re planning a trip to the Black Forest or Switzerland, you know which preposition to use!

Wir machen einen Ausflug in den Schwarzwald.We are going on a trip to the Black Forest.

Wir fahren in die Schweiz.We are going to Switzerland.

But beware! It’s been the same preposition for destination or location until now. However, when talking about countries and cities that don’t use an article, there’s a difference. For example, in the following sentence, the country is a destination, and we have to use nach:

Ich fliege nach Schottland.I am flying to Scotland.

However, here, the country is a location, and we have to use in:

Ich wohne in Deutschland.I live in Germany.

A handy flowchart: noun > preposition > caseAs promised in the podcast episode, we’ve put together a flowchart to help you with your choice of German prepositions and cases when it comes to countries.

Click on the image to download your own PDF copy of the flowchart.

Dative destinations only – ‘zu’What about the use of zu in German?

This preposition is exclusively used for destinations, when a question is asked using wohin. But there’s a catch: it’s always followed by the dative case.   Let’s look at an example:

Wir gehen zu dem Konzert.We are going to the concert.

It’s also used for all people, professions and institutions. So, whether you’re visiting family or heading to the bank, zu is the preposition to choose.

Ich gehe zu meinen Eltern.I am going to my parents’ (house).

Ich gehe zu einem Freund.I am going to a friend’s house.

Ich gehe zu der Bank.I am going to the bank.

Ich gehe zum Arzt.I am going to the doctor’s.

‘Bei’ is your ‘zu’ for locationsAs just mentioned, zu is only used for destinations – places you haven’t reached yet. Once you are there and it is now your location, bei is used. For example:

Wir sind bei meinen Eltern.We are at my parents’ (house).

Ich bin beim Arzt.I am at the doctor’s.

So, there you have it, a swift introduction to prepositions of location in German. Whether you’re lounging auf the couch, chilling an the beach, exploring in the park, or heading zu grandma’s house, these prepositions have got you covered.

So, go ahead, get practising, and soon enough, you’ll be a pro at navigating German prepositions of location like a native speaker. Happy Coffee Breaking!

Listen to the podcastThe post Mastering prepositions of location in German: a handy guide   appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In lesson 29 of Coffee Break Portuguese, we’re learning how to make a phone call in Portuguese. Join Rafael and Ava to find out what to say when you answer the phone in Portuguese, learn other useful phrases you’ll need for a telephone conversation, and hear everything in context in a practice dialogue.

The post CBP 1.29 | Making a phone call – How to answer the phone in Portuguese appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Do you know the difference between di and da? These two Italian prepositions are easily confused by learners of the language, but in this article we’re going to look at the most common uses of each of these prepositions in Italian so that you never confuse them again!

The Coffee Break Italian Show is a series of bite-sized, friendly podcast episodes, in which we unpack and explain tricky topics for Italian learners. Join Francesca and Maurizio in our latest episode to find out more about the Italian prepositions di and da, and to learn when to use each of them.

So, let’s get into the topic, and we’d recommend listening to the podcast episode as you go. Plus, make sure to look out for your free worksheet at the end, to help you test your knowledge!

The Italian preposition ‘di’First up, let’s talk about di. When it comes to prepositions in Italian, di often expresses origin, ownership, or composition. For example:

Questa è la bici di Matteo.
This is Matteo’s bike. (Ownership)

Ho comprato una cravatta di seta.
I bought a silk tie. (Composition)

When you were learning how to ask someone where they come from, you may have learned something along the lines of the following phrases:

Di dove sei?
Where are you from?

Sono di Torino.
I am from Turin.

Here, we’re using the preposition di to indicate your place of origin.

The Italian preposition ‘da’Now, let’s turn our attention to the preposition da. Da typically expresses movement from a location.

You may have come across another possibility when learning how to talk about where you come from:

Da dove vieni?
Where do you come from?

Vengo da Torino.
I come from Turin.

So, when it comes to choosing between prepositions in Italian to say where you come from, just remember the following:

essere + di or venire + da

If you’re giving the name of your country, we need to remember to include the article, and in this case we can only use venire da. For example:

Vengo dall’Italia.
I come from Italy.

Vengo dalla Scozia.
I come from Scotland.

Here, we’re using the articulated form of the preposition da, where it is combined with the definite article.

Using the preposition ‘da’ with a person’s placeHowever, da doesn’t always mean “from”. In fact, this Italian preposition can be used in various contexts.

Da can also indicate movement towards or location at a person’s house, or a professional’s shop or office.

For instance, if you had been at a doctor’s appointment, you would say:

Sono andato dal dottore.
I went to the doctor’s.

But we would also use da to indicate your current location, rather than destination. For example:

Sono dal dottore adesso.
I’m at the doctor’s just now.

As you can see, da can be translated in different ways in English, depending on the context. So, remember that it is important not to associate Italian prepositions with just one meaning in English.

When it is used with a person’s name, the Italian preposition da is used to talk about going to or being at someone’s place or house. Here are some examples:

Vado da Francesca.
I’m going to Francesca’s (house).

Sono da Francesca.
I’m at Francesca’s (house).

Choosing between the Italian prepositions ‘di’ and ‘da’In this podcast episode of The Coffee Break Italian Show, Francesca and Maurizio mention a particularly interesting use of di and da, where the choice of preposition can quite drastically change the meaning.

Imagine you’re enjoying a nice cup of coffee. To refer to what you’re drinking, you’d use the following phrase:

una tazza di caffè
a cup of coffee

Here, we know that it is a cup that contains coffee.

However, if you’re in a shop and looking to buy some new coffee cups for your house, what you are looking for is the following:

una tazza da caffè
a coffee cup

When the preposition da is used in this phrase, it introduces the purpose or function of the cup, but there isn’t necessarily currently any coffee in it.

Let’s see two more examples of this difference in full sentences:

Vorrei sei tazze di caffè.
I would like six cups of coffee.

Vorrei sei tazze da caffè.
I would like six coffee cups.

You will come across the same difference between these two prepositions in Italian in other contexts. For example, compare the following phrases:

un bicchiere di vino
a glass of wine

un bicchiere da vino
a wine glass

A final, subtle difference between ‘di’ and ‘da’Let’s look at one more common context in which it can be tricky to choose between the Italian prepositions di and da.

Consider the distinction between the following phrases:

un libro di Italo Calvino
an Italo Calvino book

un libro scritto da Italo Calvino
a book written by Italo Calvino

You may recognise that the second phrase is using a passive structure. In the passive voice, the preposition da is used to introduce what is known grammatically as the agent – the person by whom the action has been performed. In a full sentence, our example would be as follows:

Questo libro è stato scritto da Italo Calvino.
This book was written by Italo Calvino.

Francesca and Maurizio mention in the podcast episode that Calvino’s books are some of their favourites. If you’re not already familiar with his works, we have another Coffee Break Italian podcast episode all about Calvino.

Let’s look at two final examples – this time comparing the use of the prepositions di and da when talking about a film.

un film di Federico Fellini
a Federico Fellini film

un film che è stato diretto da Federico Fellini
a film that was directed by Federico Fellini

A visual summary of the Italian prepositions ‘di’ and ‘da’We hope that you now feel more confident choosing between di and da. However, these two prepositions in Italian can be easily mixed up by anyone, so don’t worry if you make mistakes, as native speakers will still understand what you mean.

To get the most out of this article, we’d recommend watching or listening to the full podcast episode with Francesca and Maurizio on The Coffee Break Italian Show. And don’t forget to subscribe on YouTube or wherever you get your podcasts so that you always know when there’s a new episode available.

Finally, if you’d like more help with your Italian, you can sign up to receive regular, free email lessons, which will arrive straight to your inbox. Just sign up at the bottom of this article.

Keep listening out for uses of di and da, so that you become more familiar with these two Italian prepositions. In the meantime, as always, happy Coffee Breaking!

Listen to the podcastThe post When to use ‘di’ and ‘da’: Italian prepositions appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

As French learners, you have probably come across many words in French that may be short, but which can be tricky to get your head around. This is because there are many French contractions – words that are the combined form of two words.

Today we’re going to focus on some of the most common French contractions: du, des, au and aux. These are called contracted articles in French and if you’ve previously been confused by them, don’t worry!

The Coffee Break French Show is a video and audio podcast series, in which we discuss and explain interesting French language topics for learners. In our most recent episode, Pierre-Benoît and Max are here to equip you with the knowledge to use French contractions confidently in your conversations.

If you’re ready, let’s get into our topic for today and learn more about French contractions, and we’d suggest listening along to the podcast as you read.

Plus, look out for your free worksheet at the bottom of this article, which will help you put what you’ve learned to the test. C’est parti !

Definite articles in FrenchBefore we look at how to form and use French contractions, do you know what du, des, au and aux all have in common?

All four of these French contractions incorporate a definite article. Like in English, there are both definite and indefinite articles in French, and when we talk about definite articles, we are referring to the words for “the”.

As you probably already know, in French there are four words for “the”. Let’s do a quick review of these.

le
the (masculine singular)

la
the (feminine singular)

les
the (masculine and feminine plural)

l’
the (masculine and feminine singular when the noun starts with a vowel or silent h-)

L’ is used with both masculine and feminine singular nouns that start with a vowel or a silent h-. For example:

l’université
the university

l’homme
the man

l’heure
the hour, the time

Understanding French contractionsWhen the definite articles in French meet prepositions, some of them undergo contraction, resulting in the words we’re exploring today: du, des, au and aux.

Contracted articles in French with the preposition ‘de’So, what happens when we use de in front of these definite articles?

duLet’s start by looking at what happens when the preposition de meets the masculine singular definite article, le.

de + le = du

In contexts where le means “the”, it is not possible to have de le together – they always merge to become du. Du is therefore an example of a contracted article in French.

Watch out for the pronunciation of the u vowel sound in du, as it is a very commonly used word, which is easily confused with doux (“soft”) or d’où (“from where” or “hence”). For help with the difference between the vowel sounds u and ou in French, you can find our podcast episode and article here.

de laNow, let’s look at what happens when the preposition de meets the feminine singular definite article, la.

de + la = de la

This one is straightforward, as de and la can always exist side by side and there is therefore no contraction.

desWhen de is followed by the plural definite article, les, this becomes another contracted article in French.

de + les = des

It is not possible to have de les together in this context – it always changes to des.

de l’Finally, when de is followed by the definite article l’, like de la, it is straightforward and there is no contraction.

de + l’ = de l’

Partitive articles in FrenchBut what do the French contractions du, de la, des and de l’ mean? These four forms of de + definite article often translate as “of the” or “from the”.

However, in other contexts, they function as partitive articles in French. Partitive articles are used to express unspecified quantities of a noun and are used where in English we would use “some” or simply no article at all.

For example:

du pain
some bread (or simply “bread”)

de la confiture
jam, some jam

des fruits
fruit, some fruit

de l’alcool
alcohol, some alcohol

The preposition ‘de’ with verbsAnother situation in which we commonly see the combination of de and the French definite articles is when we have a verb that requires the preposition de, which is then followed by a definite article and a noun.

For instance, we can take the following verbal phrase, which requires the preposition de:

avoir besoin de
to need

If you want to say that you need the phone, we’re going to see a contracted article in French. This is because le téléphone is a masculine singular noun, and the de will merge with the le:

J’ai besoin du téléphone.
I need the phone.

Another verb that is sometimes followed by the preposition de is parler.

parler de
to talk about

parler de la pluie et du beau temps
to chit-chat, to make small talk, to talk about trivial things

This French idiom literally means “to talk about the rain and the good weather”.

Now an example with a plural noun:

Nous parlons des vacances.
We’re talking about the holiday / vacation.

Finally, let’s see some examples of contracted articles with de following the verb penser.

penser de
to think of (in the sense of having an opinion on something)

For example:

Qu’est-ce que tu penses du film ?
What do you think of the movie?

Qu’est-ce que tu penses de l’histoire ?
What do you think of the story?

Contracted articles in French with the preposition ‘à’Now, let’s see what happens when we use à in front of the definite articles in French.

auWhen the preposition à meets the masculine singular definite article, le, there is a contraction.

à + le = au

Just as we saw before with du, in contexts where le means “the”, it is not possible to have à le together – they always merge together to form the French contraction au. Au is therefore another example of a contracted article in French.

à laSimilarly, just as de la is possible in all contexts, à and la can also always exist side by side and there is therefore no contraction in French.

à + la = à la

auxWhen à is followed by the plural definite article, les, this becomes another contracted article in French.

à + les = aux

à l’Finally, when à is followed by the definite article l’, like de l’, it is straightforward and there is no contraction in French.

à + l’ = à l’

The preposition ‘à’ with verbsThere are many verbs that require the preposition à after them, when they are followed by a noun. This means that we often come across à followed by a definite article in French.

Let’s take a look at some examples, starting with the verb aller:

aller à
to go to

Je vais au cinéma.
I’m going to the cinema.

Je vais à la piscine.
I’m going to the swimming pool.

Earlier, we mentioned penser de. However, the verb penser is also sometimes used with the preposition à.

penser à
to think about (in the sense of having something on your mind)

Je pense aux films qu’on a vus ensemble.
I’m thinking about the movies we watched together.

Did you notice the spelling of vus? If you’re wondering about that extra -s on the end, stay tuned for another episode coming later in this season of The Coffee Break French Show.

When do we not use French contractions with ‘de’ and ‘à’?The final point to mention on the topic of contracted articles in French is that there are some situations where de le, de les, à le and à les do exist side by side, and don’t merge into the French contractions du, des, au and aux.

This happens when the le or les is not functioning as a definite article, but instead as a direct object pronoun. For example:

J’ai besoin de le contacter.
I need to contact him.

J’ai peur de les déranger.
I’m afraid to disturb them.

Pense à le rappeler !
Think about calling him back!

In these three sentences, the le or les are direct object pronouns, which means that they don’t form contracted articles with the preposition de or à.

A visual summary of contracted articles in FrenchWe hope that you now have a better understanding of French contractions and, in particular, that you feel equipped to use the tricky words du, des, au and aux with confidence.

If you haven’t already, join Pierre-Benoît and Max in the podcast version of this lesson on The Coffee Break French Show to learn more about French contractions. And don’t forget to subscribe to our podcast feed and our channel on YouTube to find out when the next episode is released, which will be on another useful topic for French learners.

Looking for further help with your French? You should also know that we send out regular, free lessons by email, which will help you improve your French in short, coffee-break-length lessons. Sign up below!

Happy Coffee Breaking!

Listen to the podcastThe post ‘Du’, ‘des’, ‘au’ and ‘aux’: a guide to French contractions appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

With accent marks and upside-down question marks, there is a lot to think about when it comes to using Spanish question words. This is why forming questions in Spanish is something our Coffee Break language learners regularly ask us about.

The Coffee Break Spanish Show is a podcast series of short but useful conversations, in which we talk about interesting Spanish language topics. In the latest episode, Concha and Mark are here to explain all about Spanish questions and, in particular, Spanish question words.

Continue reading to find out more, and why not listen to the podcast as you go? Plus, don’t miss our free worksheet at the end to practise what you learn!

Common Spanish question wordsFirst of all, let’s start with a reminder of some of the most common Spanish question words. For each question word, we’ll include a short example. ¡Vamos a ello!

¿Cómo?
How?

¿Cómo te llamas?
What’s your name? (literally, “how do you call yourself?”)

¿Dónde?
Where?

¿Dónde está la biblioteca?
Where is the library?

¿Cuándo?
When?

¿Cuándo es tu cumpleaños?
When is your birthday?

¿Qué?
What?

¿Qué estás haciendo ahora?
What are you doing just now?

Here are some bonus question words in Spanish that Concha and Mark didn’t mention in the podcast episode.

¿Quién? / ¿Quiénes?
Who?

¿Quién es tu madre?
Who is your mother?

¿Cuál? / ¿Cuáles?
Which?, What?

¿Cuál es tu color favorito?
What’s your favourite colour?

¿Cuánto/a?
How much?

¿Cuánta agua bebes al día?
How much water do you drink daily?

¿Cuántos/as?
How many?

¿Cuántas veces haces ejercicio a la semana?
How many times a week do you exercise?

Straight away, there are two really interesting things to note about all of these questions: each of the question words has an accent, and the sentences start with an upside-down question mark. Let’s talk about that question mark first.

Opening question marks in SpanishWhen using Spanish question words to ask a question in Spanish, remember that you always need an opening question mark at the start of the question.

However, the start of the question doesn’t necessarily mean the start of the sentence. For example, an opening question mark can come after another form of punctuation or midway through a sentence:

Sé que ya me lo has dicho, pero ¿me puedes decir otra vez dónde está tu casa?
I know you have already told me, but can you tell me again where your house is?

However, we could also simply ask:

¿Me puedes decir dónde está tu casa?
Can you tell me where your house is?

Because these questions are structured slightly differently, they therefore require the opening question mark in different parts of the sentence.

Now, let’s turn our attention to the accents on Spanish question words.

Accents on Spanish question wordsAs you’ll have noticed in the earlier examples, all of the Spanish question words contain an accent. This is a straightforward rule: within a direct question, the question word must have an accent on it.

Spanish question words in indirect questionsHowever, Spanish question words can also be used in indirect questions.

This means that in situations in which we don’t have a direct question, but the question is implied within the statement, we still use a Spanish question word (and therefore an accent appears on the word). We can think of these as “indirect questions”.

Vamos a ver algunos ejemplos.

Me pregunto dónde está María.
I wonder where María is.

No sé cómo lo hace.
I don’t know how he / she does it.

No sé cuándo va a llegar Marta, dijo que iba a llegar a las doce.
I don’t know when Marta is going to arrive. She said she was going to arrive at 12 o’clock.

In all of these statements, although there are no question marks, there is still an element of questioning implied. To illustrate this, we can easily restructure the statements to form questions. For example:

Me pregunto: ¿dónde está María?
I wonder: where is María?

¿Cómo lo hace? No sé.
How does he / she do it? I don’t know.

Therefore, because the question is implied within the statement, we are still using a Spanish question word and therefore still an accent.

Similar Spanish words without accentsYou may have come across the same words from our list of question words above, but without an accent.

If so, you’ll know that it can sometimes be tricky to know when to include the accent or not. For example, do you know the difference between que and qué, or como and cómo?

As we’ve just seen, Spanish question words can be used in either direct or indirect questions, and the question words always contain an accent.

However, there are words similar to our Spanish question words that don’t have an accent. In this case, the words are not question words, and they are instead serving a different function.

Let’s take a look at some examples:

Esta chaqueta es como la que tenía cuando era pequeña.
This jacket is like the one I had when I was little.

Estoy donde me dijiste.
I am where you told me (to be).

In these two examples, como and donde have a different function to cómo and dónde, and since there is no question implied, there is no accent on them.

Here’s another interesting example:

Veremos qué pasa.
We’ll see what happens.

In this example, qué is our question word (within an indirect question). We’re wondering what is going to happen and there is an element of doubt about what that might be.

However, this sentence would also be correct without the accent on the qué, but it would have a subtle difference in meaning.

Veremos que pasa.
We’ll see it happen. / We’ll see that it happens.

This time, we’re not wondering about what is actually going to happen, but rather simply stating that whatever that is, we’ll see it.

Test yourself on Spanish question words: accent or no accent?Now that you’ve learned more about question words in Spanish, it’s time to put your knowledge to the test! We have a short quiz to help you put into practice what you’ve learned.

Read the following sentences and decide if the word in brackets should include an accent or not. The answers are at the end of this article. ¡Buena suerte!

Ese es el profesor (que / qué) te comenté.
Dime (cuando / cuándo) aterriza tu vuelo y voy a recogerte.

¡Eso es todo! We hope you now feel more comfortable knowing how to form questions in Spanish and how to tell the difference between que and qué, donde and dónde, and como and cómo!

If you found this article useful, why not listen to the full episode with Concha and Mark on The Coffee Break Spanish Show. For more episodes for Spanish learners, make sure to subscribe to our podcast feed and our channel on YouTube.

In the meantime, pay attention to these question words in Spanish the next time you’re reading. Or, when you’re listening aloud, try to visualise where the accents would be included. Good luck as you keep practising your Spanish and, as always, happy Coffee Breaking!

PS. Here are the answers to the test:

Ese es el profesor que te comenté. (“That is the teacher that I mentioned to you.”)
Dime cuándo aterriza tu vuelo y voy a recogerte. (“Tell me when your flight lands and I’ll go and pick you up.”)

Listen to the podcastThe post Spanish question words: with or without an accent? appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Understanding which case to use when talking about locations and destinations can be a game-changer in your German-learning journey.

Today we’re focusing on prepositions of location in German. So, let’s decipher the dative and accusative cases in German and unravel whether it’s a location or destination together!

The Coffee Break German Show is a podcast series of short, friendly conversations in which we discuss tricky topics for German language learners. In the latest episode, Thomas and Mark talk about locations and destinations in German, and which case to use with each.

Continue reading to find out more, and why not listen to the podcast as you go? Plus, don’t miss our free worksheet at the end to practise what you learn!

‘Wo’ or ‘wohin’?First things first, let’s talk about the key distinction between wo, “where”, and wohin, “where to”. In English, we might not be accustomed to such a clear differentiation, but in German, it’s crucial. Here’s a quick comparison:

Wo bist du?Where are you?

Here, we’re asking for a static location, which requires the dative case.

Wohin gehst du?
Where are you going?

In this case, we’re asking about movement or direction, which calls for the accusative case in German.

We’re going to be talking about the dative and accusative cases a lot in this article, so if you need a reminder of what cases are in German and how they work, you can read our introduction to German cases.

Location using the dative, or destination with the accusative?Now, let’s focus on some examples.

Dein Schlüssel liegt auf dem Küchentisch.
Your key is on the kitchen table.

Here, we’re describing a static location, so we use the dative case in German with dem Küchentisch. Note that der changes to dem in the dative.

The clue’s in the question: ‘wo’ or ‘wohin’?Consider the following sentence:

Ich lege die sauberen Klamotten auf das Bett.
I’m putting the clean clothes on the bed.

Since we’re indicating movement towards a destination (the bed), we use the accusative case with das Bett. This involves the question:

Wo legst du die sauberen Klamotten hin?
Where are you putting the clean clothes?

The suffix -hin at the end shows there is movement involved – a change of location – and therefore, the need for the accusative case.

Here’s another example to consider:

Die Rehe leben im Wald.
The deer live in the forest.

Again, we’re describing a static location (the forest), so we use the dative case with im Wald. And this involves the question word wo?

Wo leben die Rehe?
Where do the deer live?

Dative or accusative case in German?In the following example, we’re indicating movement towards a destination (the burrow), so we use the accusative case in German with in seinen Bau.

Der Fuchs rennt in seinen Bau unter der Erde.
The fox is running into its burrow underground.

Unter der Erde is in the dative because that is the location of the burrow.

Let’s look at another example:

Wir treffen uns bei meinen* Eltern.We’re meeting at my parents’ house.*

When we talk about meeting at a location, even if we are not there yet, we use the dative case with bei meinen Eltern.

Here’s another example:

Am Samstag gehen wir auf ein Konzert.
We’re going to a concert on Saturday.

Since we’re indicating movement towards a destination (the concert), we use the accusative case with auf ein Konzert.

There’s always an exception!But wait, there are a couple of prepositions in German that require special attention!

Zu always takes the dative case in German, even when used in the context of a wohin question. For example:

Ich gehe zum Arzt.
I’m going to the doctor.

Wir fahren zu meinen Eltern.
We’re driving to my parents’ place.

Nach also always takes the dative case, although it’s typically used without an article, so it cannot be seen that it is in the dative case:

Er fliegt morgen nach Spanien.He’s flying to Spain tomorrow.

Der Zug fährt nach Westen.
The train is heading west.

A visual summary of prepositions of location in GermanSo, there you have it – your guide to navigating prepositions of location in German! Understanding the nuances of cases and contexts will not only enhance your language skills, but also make you feel more confident in your German conversations.

So give it a go – use what we’ve covered today and you’ll gain confidence with using the dative and accusative cases in German with no problems at all! Stay tuned for next week’s exploration of the differences between in, an, auf, nach, and zu. Bis bald and happy Coffee Breaking!

Listen to the podcastThe post Deciphering the dative and accusative cases: exploring two-way prepositions in German appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

If you’re a learner of Italian, you might be wondering: how do you say “I like” in Italian?

You may have already come across mi piace and mi piacciono. These little expressions hold the key to expressing your likes and dislikes in Italian and, luckily, they’re not as complicated as they may seem at first glance.

The Coffee Break Italian Show is a podcast series of bite-sized, friendly conversations in which we demystify tricky Italian language topics. In the latest episode, Maurizio and Mark discuss the phrases mi piace and mi piacciono, and how to use them to say “I like” in Italian.

So, let’s get started and unpack the intricacies of mi piace vs mi piacciono together.

Continue reading to find out more, and why not listen to the podcast as you go? Plus, don’t miss our free worksheet at the end to practise what you learn. Cominciamo!

How to use ‘piacere’ in ItalianFirst of all, let’s make sure we understand the basic structure of the verb piacere.

In English, we say “I like” followed by the thing that we like. In Italian, however, it’s a little different. The idea is expressed as follows: “something is pleasing or appealing to me”. Or, if you want to flip it around: “to me is pleasing or appealing something”.

Now, using this idea, let’s explore how to use mi piace and mi piacciono in different scenarios.

Expressing likes using ‘mi piace’ with singular nounsWhen you’re talking about liking singular nouns, we use mi piace. For instance:

Mi piace l’italiano.
I like Italian.

Mi piace la zuppa di ceci.
I like chickpea soup.

What if you don’t like something? Easy! We just add non in front of mi piace. For example:

Non mi piace lo sciroppo d’amarena.
I don’t like sour cherry syrup.

Note that, as we explained in the previous section, it is the thing that you like (for example, Italian or chickpea soup) that is the subject of the sentence – in other words, what is carrying out the action of pleasing.

Expressing likes using ‘mi piacciono’ with plural nounsNow, what if you’re a fan of multiple things?

Mi piacciono in English also translates to “I like”. When the thing that you like is plural, you use this expression. Remember that this is because the subject of the verb is the thing that you like, or rather the thing that is pleasing to you. This means that the verb has to change to be in its plural form.

For example:

Mi piacciono le verdure.
I like vegetables.

Here, we are literally saying “vegetables are pleasing to me”.

Mi piacciono le persone interessanti.
I like interesting people.

Non mi piacciono gli spaghetti all’amatriciana.
I don’t like amatriciana spaghetti.

Mi piacciono il salotto e il bagno di questa casa.
I like this house’s living room and bathroom.

The two sentences above are both curious examples. First of all, we need to remember that spaghetti is a plural concept in Italian, even though it is usually considered a singular, uncountable noun in English.

In the final example, note that although il salotto and il bagno are, individually, singular nouns, here they are combined to form a plural subject, which is why we use mi piacciono instead of mi piace. Therefore, if you’re making lists of things you like (or don’t like), use piacciono, even if they are, individually, singular nouns.

That’s it for nouns… But how do you say “I like” in Italian if you are talking about an activity, rather than a thing?

Expressing likes using ‘mi piace’ with verbsTo express that you like doing something, we are going to use mi piace followed by the verb in its infinitive form. For instance:

Mi piace viaggiare.
I like to travel / I like travelling.

Mi piace camminare.
I like to walk / I like walking.

Mi piace correre e viaggiare.
I like running and travelling.

Did you notice something interesting about our third example? That’s right – while we used mi piacciono with il salotto and il bagno combined, we always stick with mi piace for infinitives, which is why correre and viaggiare together are still used with mi piace.

How to say what someone else likesTo talk about someone else’s likes, simply swap out mi for the relevant pronoun. This is because in Italian we are literally saying “to you is pleasing …” or “to them is pleasing …” Let’s look at some example sentences:

Mi piace guidare. Ti piace guidare?
I like driving. Do you like driving?

The verb therefore stays the same and it is only the pronoun that changes (in this case from mi to ti).

Non gli piacciono le moto.
He doesn’t like motorbikes. / They don’t like motorbikes.

Note that gli can either mean “to him” or “to them”.

Le piace andare in palestra.
She likes going to the gym.

Ci piacciono le gite in montagna.
We like mountain trips.

Non vi piace il gelato al cioccolato?
Don’t you (all) like chocolate ice cream?

Before we move on, here is a summary of all of the pronouns we are going to use with piacere:

mi – “to me”
ti – “to you”
gli – “to him”
le – “to her”
ci – “to us”
vi – “to you (plural)”
gli / a loro – “to them”

Note that you can use a loro with piace or piacciono instead of gli, when you want to say “they like”. If the verb is in the negative form, a loro comes before non, unlike other pronouns. For example:

A loro non piacciono le moto.
They don’t like motorbikes.

Using ‘piacere’ with namesWhen you want to talk about specific people and what they like, use a followed by the person’s name. For example:

A Mark piace insegnare le lingue.
Mark likes teaching languages.

Here, the Italian structure is along the lines of “to Mark teaching languages is pleasing”.

Or, a negative example could be:

A Francesca non piace il pollo sulla pizza.
Francesca doesn’t like chicken on pizza.

Practising ‘mi piace’ vs ‘mi piacciono’Now that you’ve got the hang of how to say “I like” in Italian, why not try a couple more on your own?

Have a go at translating the following sentences from English into Italian. The answers are at the end of the article.

I don’t like writing emails.
Michela likes Swedish language and culture.

That’s it for the basics on the verb piacere in Italian. Now, with a little practice, you’ll be effortlessly expressing your likes and dislikes in Italian like a native speaker!

If you found this interesting, make sure to listen to the full episode with Maurizio and Mark on The Coffee Break Italian Show. We will regularly be uploading more episodes for Italian learners, so subscribe to our podcast feed and our channel on YouTube to find out when the next episode is available.

Plus! To get regular, free Italian lessons in your inbox, you can sign up for our short (coffee-break-sized) email lessons that will help you improve your Italian. You will also hear from Mark, the founder of Coffee Break Languages, giving advice to language learners at any level. Sign up below!

Good luck as you keep practising your Italian and, as always, happy Coffee Breaking!

PS. Here are the answers to the translation challenge:

Non mi piace scrivere (le) email.
A Michela piacciono la lingua e la cultura svedese.

Listen to the podcastThe post How do you say ‘I like’ in Italian: ‘mi piace’ vs ‘mi piacciono’ appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Have you ever found yourself wondering: what does on mean in French? The subject pronoun on is one of the handiest yet sometimes puzzling pronouns in French. But don’t worry, as we’re about to shed some light on this versatile little word.

The Coffee Break French Show is a podcast series of bite-sized, friendly conversations in which we explain tricky French language topics. In the latest episode, Max and Mark discuss the use of the on pronoun in French in everyday contexts.

Continue reading to find out more, and why not listen to the podcast as you go? Plus, don’t miss our free worksheet at the end to practise what you learn!

French subject pronounsFirst things first, let’s do a quick review of the French subject pronouns.

Typically, when you’re looking at a verb table or practising conjugations in French, the verb is divided up into its six forms, with the subject pronouns listed as follows:

je – “I”
tu – “you” (informal singular)
il, elle, on – “he, she, one/you/we”
nous – “we”
vous – “you” (formal singular or informal/formal plural)
ils, elles – “they”

As we look into the uses of on, remember that it is included on the same line as il and elle because it uses the same form of the conjugated verb. So, when conjugating verbs with on, you treat it like you would il or elle (for example, on mange or on parle).

The key thing to remember here is that the third line – il, elle, on – does not translate to “he, she, it”. The subject pronoun on can be translated in various ways, but it doesn’t mean “it”.

What does ‘on’ mean in French?After this brief recap, the question remains: what does on mean in French? In fact, the versatile pronoun on has three main uses and meanings.

Let’s look at them below!

When ‘on’ means “we”In informal settings, on is very often used instead of the subject pronoun nous. In these situations, on therefore simply means “we”.

On is less formal than nous and more commonly used in spoken French. For example, at the start of this podcast episode, Mark asked Max:

De quoi parle-t-on aujourd’hui ?
What are we talking about today?

It would have been equally correct to use nous and say:

De quoi parlons-nous aujourd’hui ?
What are we talking about today?

This sounds much more formal to a native French speaker. In standard, written French, however, remember to use nous instead of on.

Let’s look at some more examples where on is used instead of nous to mean “we”.

Si tu veux, on peut déjeuner ensemble.
If you want, we can have lunch together.

On va au ciné samedi ?
Shall we go to the cinema on Saturday?

On se voit demain soir ?
Shall we see each other tomorrow evening?

In this example, note that the reflexive pronoun used (se) matches the third person singular form of the verb. Using the nous form instead, this sentence would be:

Nous nous voyons demain soir ?
Shall we see each other tomorrow evening?

When ‘on’ refers to people in generalThe second use of the French pronoun on is to refer to everyone. That is to say that on can be used to make generalisations about what groups of people do.

In this sense, on can be compared to “one” in English. However, although “one” is rarely used outside very formal situations in English, on is completely neutral and natural in French.

Let’s look at some examples and notice how on can be translated in various ways when it refers to people in general.

En France, on mange beaucoup de fromage.
In France, people eat a lot of cheese.

En Italie, on parle italien.
In Italy, everyone speaks Italian.

En Écosse, on doit s’habituer à la pluie.
In Scotland, you have to get used to the rain.

As a side note, notice that in all of these statements we are using the preposition en with the name of each country. If prepositions with cities and countries is something that you’re looking for more help with, we have another episode of The Coffee Break French Show all about this topic.

We’ve therefore seen how on can refer to “we” or to people in general. However, there is a third use of the pronoun on in French, so let’s look at this one now.

When ‘on’ refers to an unidentified personThe third use of this subject pronoun in French is when it refers to an unidentified or unspecified person. So, what does on mean in French in these contexts? Well, in this scenario, on is like saying “someone” in English.

Consider these examples:

On a frappé à la porte.
Someone knocked at the door. / There was a knock at the door.

On m’a volé mon portefeuille.
Someone stole my wallet. / My wallet was stolen.

This is just like saying:

Quelqu’un m’a volé mon portefeuille.
Someone stole my wallet.

In the sentences above, since the identity of the subject is unknown, we can use on in French.

On nous* a demandé de sortir.
We were asked to leave. / They asked us to leave.

On nous* a dit que le musée était fermé aujourd’hui.
We were told that the museum is closed today. / They told us that the museum is closed today.

In these two examples, it is likely that the identity of the person or people is known, but it isn’t important to the conversation, which is why on is used.

Watch out for the nous in these examples. This isn’t to be confused with the subject pronoun nous. Instead, this nous* is an indirect object pronoun, indicating that it was “us” that they asked to leave.

That’s it for the three uses of the pronoun on in French. Before we finish, let’s focus on one final aspect of this interesting pronoun.

Using possessive adjectives with ‘on’We’ve now answered our main question: what does on mean in French? But there are still a couple of interesting points to consider.

Earlier, we saw that when on is used with a reflexive verb, it uses the third person singular reflexive pronoun se. For example:

En Écosse, on doit s’habituer à la pluie.
In Scotland, you have to get used to the rain.

However, there is another interesting aspect of agreement when using on, which we need to keep in mind, and that is with possessive adjectives.

Let’s start by looking at the following question using the subject pronoun nous:

Est-ce que nous avons fait nos valises ?
Have we packed our suitcases?

If we replace nous with on, something interesting happens!

Est-ce qu’on a fait nos valises ?
Have we packed our suitcases?

Did you expect nos to change to ses? In fact, because the possessive adjective means “our” here, we still use the adjective associated with nous (notre in the singular or nos in the plural), in order to follow the same meaning.

However, there are other situations in which we would use the possessive adjective son, sa or ses with on. For example:

On doit prendre son passeport pour voyager.
One must take one’s passport to travel. / You must take your passport to travel.

In this situation, since on refers to people in general, rather than “us”, the correct possessive adjective to use is son, instead of notre.

So, when on means “we”, use the possessive adjective notre or nos. When on means “everyone”, “one” or a general “you”, use the possessive adjective son, sa or ses.

A summary of what ‘on’ means in French and when to use itThe pronoun on is very commonly used in French, so we hope that you now understand when and why it is used, and that you feel you know how to incorporate it into your own speaking.

Don’t forget to listen to the full episode about the pronoun on with Max and Mark on The Coffee Break French Show. For more episodes for French learners, you can subscribe to our podcast feed and our channel on YouTube.

As well as this, we regularly send free email lessons that will help you improve your French. Sign up below to receive the next free lesson straight to your inbox.

So, the next time you’re conversing in French, don’t hesitate to let on take its place!

Happy Coffee Breaking!

Listen to the podcastThe post What does ‘on’ mean in French? Find out the 3 meanings of this pronoun appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Welcome to another episode of Coffee Break Gaelic! Join teacher Susanna and learner Mark as they go through the past tense of the verb “to be”. In this lesson, you’ll also learn how to talk about events in the past in Gaelic.

The post CBGa 1.28 | Talking about the past in Gaelic – The past tense using the verb ‘to be’ appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Welcome to lesson 28 of Coffee Break Portuguese! The topic of this lesson is free time. We’re going to learn how to talk about your hobbies and the activities you enjoy doing, as well as how to say when and how often you do them, using adverbs of frequency in Portuguese. We’ll also be joined by Catarina in a Cafezinho com Catarina all about Portuguese food and cooking.

The post CBP 1.28 | Hobbies and free time – Talking about what you like doing in Portuguese appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Welcome back to another lesson of Coffee Break Gaelic! This time, Susanna and Mark are exploring how to ask the question “why?” in Gaelic. By the end of the lesson, you’ll be able to discuss the reasons why you’re learning Gaelic.

The post CBGa 1.27 | How to ask ‘Why?’ – Forming and responding to questions in Gaelic appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In lesson 27 of Coffee Break Portuguese, we’re covering another useful, everyday topic – telling the time. We’ll learn how to ask someone for the time, how to say what the time is in Portuguese, and how to say at what time events start and end. Vamos lá!

The post CBP 1.27 | Telling the time – How to tell the time in Portuguese appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In this lesson of Coffee Break Gaelic, we’re talking about descriptions so we can describe what people look like. Don’t miss this important lesson!

The post CBGa 1.26 | Describing people in Gaelic – Eye colour, hair, and other personal features appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Olá! The topic of today’s lesson is work. In this episode we’re learning new vocabulary to refer to different types of work and professions, as well as finding out how to ask someone what their job is and how to talk about what you do.

The post CBP 1.26 | Talking about work – Jobs and professions in Portuguese appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In this lesson, we’re focusing on the topic of clothing and colours. We’ll learn some key vocabulary for items of clothing and how to describe what someone is wearing. This provides the perfect opportunity to revise adjective agreements in Gaelic.

The post CBGa 1.25 | Clothes and colours – Talking about what you are wearing appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

We’ve reached lesson 25 of our course and today’s topic is describing people in Portuguese. We’ll be learning useful words and phrases to describe someone’s appearance and say what they are like. This means that we’ll also be reviewing the basics of adjective agreement in Portuguese. Finally, we’ll be joined by Catarina, who has a fascinating cultural segment about a very famous writer from the Portuguese-speaking world.

The post CBP 1.25 | Descriptions and appearances – How to describe people in Portuguese appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In a world where communication transcends barriers, Coffee Break, renowned for its innovative language learning methods, introduces a groundbreaking addition to its repertoire: Coffee Break Dog. This initiative marks a significant leap in understanding and, starting 1st April 2024, will help to bridge the communication gap between humans and their beloved canine companions.

A simple conceptThe concept is simple yet profound: to empower individuals with the ability to converse with their dogs in a language they understand. Mark, the founder of Coffee Break, encapsulates the essence of this venture, stating “imagine starting your day not just with your favourite coffee but with a conversation that goes beyond words, reaching out to your furry friend in a language they understand.”

Groundbreaking techniquesAt the heart of Coffee Break Dog lies the fusion of Coffee Break’s proven language learning techniques with the pioneering research of renowned dog expert, Flora Lipos. Lipos’ insights into canine behavior and communication serve as the cornerstone for this transformative experience. By applying the Coffee Break methodology to Lipos’ research, learners embark on a journey to decipher the intricate nuances of dog language.

According to Lipos, “Dogs communicate through a complex interplay of vocalizations, body language, and subtle cues. Understanding these signals is key to forging a deeper bond with our canine companions.” This sentiment underscores the significance of Coffee Break Dog in facilitating meaningful connections between humans and dogs.

Curriculum OutlineThe curriculum of Coffee Break Dog comprises twenty comprehensive video and audio lessons, meticulously crafted to equip learners with the skills to converse with their pets effectively. From interpreting barks to deciphering different types of tail wagging, each lesson delves into the intricacies of canine communication. What sets this program apart is its interactive nature, encouraging active participation from both learners and their furry counterparts.

As Mark emphasizes, “It’s Coffee Break style for canine communication.” This approach not only makes learning enjoyable but also fosters a sense of camaraderie between humans and their canine companions.

Bone-us contentFurthermore, Coffee Break Dog goes beyond solo learning experiences by offering a special bonus: a partner course tailored specifically for dogs. Through this complementary program, dogs are empowered to understand and respond to human cues, thereby facilitating seamless communication between the two species.

Whether you’re a seasoned dog lover, a devoted pet parent, or simply intrigued by the language of loyalty and love, Coffee Break Dog promises to be your gateway to a whole new world of connection. As Mark aptly puts it, “You’ll no longer be barking up the wrong tree.”

Coffee Break Dog represents a revolutionary approach to fostering communication and understanding between humans and dogs. By amalgamating cutting-edge research with innovative teaching methodologies, this initiative not only enriches the lives of individuals and their pets but also strengthens the bond that transcends species barriers. So why wait? Start learning the language of loyalty with Coffee Break Dog today and embark on a journey of unparalleled connection with your furry companion.

April Fools!Yes, Coffee Break Dog is, of course, a special announcement for April Fools Day, but we do have 10 other human languages available. Click here to discover your next language today!

The post Unlocking the language of loyalty: Coffee Break Dog appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In Lesson 24 of Coffee Break Gaelic, we’re looking at the topic of health. Language expert Susanna teaches learner Mark the words for different parts of the body and how to describe aches and pains.

The post CBGa 1.24 | Parts of the body and talking about your health appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In lesson 24 of Coffee Break Portuguese we’re covering two essential topics to help you take your beginner’s Portuguese further. Join Rafael and Ava to learn how to conjugate regular verbs in the present tense and learn the Portuguese alphabet. Vamos lá!

The post CBP 1.24 | The present tense and the alphabet – Beginners’ essentials to verbs and spelling in Portuguese appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

We’re covering a very important topic in Lesson 23 of Coffee Break Gaelic – telling the time! This is a great opportunity to revise Gaelic numbers.

The post CBGa 1.23 | Telling the time in Gaelic and numbers up to twenty appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Welcome to lesson 23 of Coffee Break Portuguese! In this lesson we’re covering the transactional language that you’ll need on a trip to the pharmacy in a Portuguese-speaking location. We’ll be learning how to ask for medicine and ask how to take it, as well as other useful words and phrases on the topic of health. This episode expands on what we learned in the previous episode, so make sure to check out episode 22 wherever you’ve found this episode.

The post CBP 1.23 | At the pharmacy – Health and medicine vocabulary appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Now that we know how to talk about our hobbies, we can explore how word order can change when expressing likes and dislikes. We’ll also take this topic a step further and learn how to express preferences in Gaelic.

The post CBGa 1.22 | How to say what you prefer in Gaelic appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In lesson 22 of our course, teacher Rafael and learner Ava are talking about aches and pains, and how to say that you’re not feeling well. We’ll be learning some parts of the body in Portuguese, how to say that we are experiencing a problem with one of these, the vocabulary for some other health problems, and some other useful phrases that you can use if you’re visiting a doctor. We’ll also be joined by Catarina in today’s Cafezinho com Catarina, in which we’ll be learning all about fado.

The post CBP 1.22 | Aches and pains – Vocabulary for body parts, symptoms and illnesses appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Susanna and Mark are back with another episode of Coffee Break Gaelic! In lesson 21, we’re learning to talk about likes and dislikes in the language. By the end of this lesson, you’ll be able to discuss your hobbies with your Gaelic-speaking friends.

The post CBGa 1.21 | How to talk about likes and dislikes and discuss your hobbies appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Welcome back to another lesson of Coffee Break Portuguese! We’re now halfway through our 40-lesson course and in lesson 21 we are talking about the weather. We’ll be learning how to ask what the weather is like today and what it is going to be like tomorrow, how to answer these questions to describe various types of weather, and hear a weather forecast for Portugal in today’s Cafezinho com Catarina. We’ll also have a more in-depth look at one particular aspect of Portuguese grammar – the difference between the verbs ser and estar, which both translate as “to be”. Vamos lá!

The post CBP 1.21 | The weather – How to talk about the weather in Portuguese appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Do you know when to use how much and how many in English?

It can be confusing, but don’t worry – there are some clear rules to follow. In this episode of The Coffee Break English Show, we’ll help you understand when to use how much and how many to talk about countable and uncountable nouns.

The Coffee Break English Show is a podcast series of bite-sized, friendly conversations to help you understand some difficult topics in English. In the latest episode, Josie and Maurizio talk about when to use how much and how many and look at a few examples.

So, let’s get started! Continue reading to find out more and why not listen to the podcast episode as you go?

‘How much?’ and ‘how many?’ for questionsTo decide whether to use how many? or how much? you need to know if you are asking about a countable or uncountable noun.

Use ‘how many?’ with countable nounsWe use how many in questions with countable nouns. Countable nouns are things that we can count. Let’s look at some examples:

Q: How many siblings do you have?
A: I have one sister.

Q: How many microphones are in this room?
A: There are two microphones in this room.

Q: How many cakes did you bring?
A: I brought five cakes.

In these examples, we ask questions about siblings, microphones, and cakes. These are things that we can count – one sibling, two microphones, five cakes.

Use ‘how much?’ with uncountable nounsWe use how much in questions with uncountable nouns. Uncountable nouns are things that we don’t count, and we think of as one unit, or mass. Uncountable nouns do not exist in lots of languages.

In the episode, Josie and Maurizio talk about some common uncountable nouns, including water, milk, time, information and money. Here are some examples of questions with how much and these uncountable nouns:

Q: How much water is in your water bottle?

Q: How much information do you have about the project?

Q: How much time does it take you to get to work?
A: It takes me two hours to get to work.

This question uses how much, because time is an uncountable noun. However, the answer is with a number of hours. The word time is uncountable, but the words hours, minutes, and seconds are countable.

Q: How much money do you have in your pocket?
A: I have £20 in my pocket.

Again, this question is with how much, because money is an uncountable noun. But the answer is a number, because we can count words like pounds, euros, dollars, coins, and notes.

Counting uncountable nounsThere are lots of food words that are uncountable nouns, like bread, rice, pasta, and coffee. We can count these nouns by adding a word or phrase in front of them. Let’s look at some examples:

a slice of bread

three bowls of pasta

200 grains of rice

two cups of coffee

We can also use coffee as a countable noun, to mean “a cup of coffee”. So, we can say two coffees. Maybe now is a good time to get a coffee, before we continue!

‘Not much’ and ‘a lot of’ with uncountable nounsIs everything clear so far? We know that how much is for questions with uncountable nouns, but what happens when we answer these questions? It depends if the answer is affirmative or negative…

‘Not much’ for negative statementsWhen we want to answer a question with how much and an uncountable noun, we can use not much for a negative answer. Let’s look at some examples:

Q: How much ice cream do you have in your freezer?
A: I don’t have much ice cream in my freezer.

Q: How much time do you have today?
A: I don’t have much time today.

‘A lot of’ for affirmative statementsWhen we want to answer a question with how much and an uncountable noun, we can use a lot of for an affirmative, or positive, answer. Let’s look at some examples:

Q: How much rain is there in Scotland?
A: There is a lot of rain in Scotland.

Q: How much pizza did you eat last night?
A: I ate a lot of pizza last night.

‘Not many’ and ‘a lot of’ with uncountable nounsWhat about questions with countable nouns? Well, to answer them we use not many or a lot of.

‘A lot of’ or ‘many’ for affirmative statementsWhen we want to answer a question with how many and a countable noun, we can give a number, as we saw earlier in the post. For example:

Q: How many siblings do you have?A: I have one sibling.

If we don’t want to give a precise number, we can use a lot of or many for an affirmative answer. Let’s look at some examples:

Q: How many siblings do you have?
A: I have twelve siblings.
A: I have a lot of siblings.
A: I have many siblings.

Q: How many cups are on the table?
A: There are twenty cups on the table.
A: There are a lot of cups on the table.
A: There are many cups on the table.

‘Not many’ for negative statementsWhen we want to answer a question with how many and a countable noun, we can use not many for a negative answer. Let’s look at some examples:

Q: How many books have you read this month?
A: I have read two books this month.
A: I haven’t read many books this month.

Q: How many people did you speak to yesterday?
A: I spoke to one person yesterday.
A: I didn’t speak to many people yesterday.

It’s your turn!Now, let’s practise! Here are four answers to questions. Try to give a possible question, using how much or how many. Some possible questions are at the end of this blog post, but don’t look until you’ve thought about your answers!

I have five dogs.
I don’t drink much tea during the day.
There aren’t many people in my office.
My brother has a lot of money.

To help you remember the rules about how much and how many, why not start a list of countable and uncountable nouns that you learn?

If you found this post interesting, make sure you listen to the full podcast episode with Josie and Maurizio on The Coffee Break English Show. Subscribe to our podcast feed and our channel on YouTube to find episodes about some other useful topics for English learners.

Plus! To get regular free English lessons in your inbox, you can sign up for our email lessons. We regularly send short (coffee-break-sized) email lessons that will help you improve your English. You will also hear from Mark, the founder of Coffee Break Languages, giving advice for language learners at any level. Sign up below!

So, keep practising how much and how many! Remember that all English learners make mistakes, but people can usually still understand you. It’s all part of the language-learning journey.

Happy Coffee Breaking!

PS. Here are some possible questions to the answers given above:

How many dogs do you have?
How much tea do you drink during the day?
How many people are there in your office?
How much money does your brother have?

Listen to the podcastThe post What’s the difference between ‘how much’ and ‘how many’? appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Learning new vocabulary can seem like a daunting task for any language learner.

This is why we’re going to look at some tips and tricks to help you expand your vocabulary in an easy and straightforward way, so that you can gain more confidence in your Spanish. To do this, we are going to be looking at three suffixes, or word endings.

The Coffee Break Spanish Show is a podcast series of short, informal conversations to help you understand some difficult topics in Spanish. In the latest episode, Anabel and Concha dive into vocabulary and, in particular, how to form new words from words you already know by using three suffixes.

Continue reading to find out more and why not listen to the podcast episode as you go?

-menteIn English, one way to create adverbs is to take an adjective and adding “-ly”. For instance, we get “quickly” from “quick” and “positively” from “positive”. And the good news is that something very similar happens in Spanish!

In order to create our adverb, we need to take an adjective (for example rápido – “quick”) and use the feminine form (rápida) to add the ending -mente. In this way, we get rápidamente, which means “quickly”. If it’s an adjective that doesn’t change in gender (for example difícil – “difficult”), we just add the suffix to it (for example difícilmente – “with difficulty”). Fácil, ¿verdad?

Now, we challenge you to give yourself 10–20 seconds to write as many Spanish adverbs ending in -mente as you can! You can find a list of some examples at the end of this article. ¡Buena suerte!

-dadAnother tip that can help us learn new vocabulary is the fact that some words ending in “-ity” in English end in -dad in Spanish. For example, “positivity” is positividad. Note the i that comes before -dad in order to help the pronunciation.

Here’s a really handy tip for you: all words ending with the suffix -dad are feminine.

Now, try coming up with as many Spanish words ending in -dad as possible in 10–20 seconds. Again, you can find some examples at the end of the article. ¡Mucho ánimo!

-ito/aOne of the most common suffixes in Spanish is -ito or -ita. There are a couple of things we need to know about this suffix, however.

First of all, -ito can be interchanged with -illo, -ico, -iño or -ete, depending on the Spanish-speaking area. Moreover, some speakers may prefer one over another, so it may be personal preference. All of them work in the same way, though.

The second thing we need to know about these suffixes is that they are added to the end of a noun to show it is small, or adorable, or both.

For example, if you want to say “small house”, we say casita (casa + ita), but if you want to say “cosy / homey house”, we say casita, too.

As you can see in the example, we have taken a feminine noun (casa) and added -ita. When using a masculine noun (for example libro – “book”), we use -ito. For example:

librito
small / cute book

Now, can you think of some more nouns and add this suffix to say it’s either small or adorable (or both)? Once you have taken 10–20 seconds to think of some -ito/an examples, have a look at the examples we’ve provided at the end of the article. ¡Mucha suerte!

Conclusion and answersWe hope that you feel you’ve expanded your vocabulary and have learned a few ways to continue to do so.

If you found this article interesting, make sure to listen to the full episode with Anabel and Concha on The Coffee Break Spanish Show. This is the series in which we look at a range of topics for Spanish learners, so make sure to subscribe to our podcast feed and our channel on YouTube.

Plus! To get regular free Spanish lessons in your inbox, you can sign up for our short (coffee-break-sized) email lessons that will help you improve your Spanish. You will also hear from Mark, the founder of Coffee Break Languages, giving advice for language learners at any level. Sign up below!

Happy Coffee Breaking!

PS. Here is a selection of examples using each suffix.

Adverbs using -mente:

ligero > ligera > ligeramente (“lightly”)
constante > constantemente (“constantly”)
simple > simplemente (“simply”)
alegre > alegremente (“happily”)
triste > tristemente (“sadly”)
afortunado > afortunada > afortunadamente (“fortunately”)
cortés > cortésmente (“politely”)
cálido > cálida > cálidamente (“warmly”)

Nouns ending in -dad:

festividad (“festivity”)
caridad (“charity”)
natividad (“nativity”)
negatividad (“negativity”)
incompatibilidad (“incompatibility”)
familiaridad (“familiarity”)
productividad (“productivity”)
creatividad (“creativity”)
responsabilidad (“responsibility”)
intencionalidad (“intentionality”)
comunidad (“community”)
dignidad (“dignity”)

Nouns using -ito/a:

regalito < regalo (“gift”)
arbolito < árbol (“tree”)
cuadernito < cuaderno (“notebook”)
comidita < comida (“food / meal”)
tacita < taza (“mug”) (Here, we can also see a change of spelling in the word, just to keep the pronunciation of the th or s sound.)
videito < video (“video”)
ropita < ropa (“clothes”)
manzanita < manzana (“apple”)
poquito < poco (“a little bit”) (We change c > qu to keep the hard k sound.)
abriguito < abrigo (“coat”) (Note the spelling change g > gu to keep the same g sound.)
agüita > agua (“water”) (Note the spelling change to show that the u is pronounced.)

Sometimes, we add ec between the base noun and the suffix (or just c if the noun ends in -e). Some examples are:

solecito < sol (“sun”)
nubecita < nube (“cloud”)
cochecito < coche (“car”)
cafecito < café (“coffee”)

Listen to the podcastThe post 3 suffixes to expand your Spanish vocabulary appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Let’s put everything we’ve learned so far to the test in this special episode marking the end of the first half of our Coffee Break Gaelic course! Listen to an extended conversation featuring key vocabulary covered over the past 19 lessons. We’ll be back soon with lesson 21!

The post CBGa 1.20 | End-of-unit review – The basics in Gaelic from Lessons 1–19 appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

German pronunciation can, at times, seem daunting when you’re learning the language, but once you get the hang of some of the most common sounds and letter combinations, you’ll be speaking more confidently in no time.

The Coffee Break German Show is a podcast series of bite-sized, friendly conversations in which we demystify tricky German language topics. In the latest episode, Mark and Olivera discuss and practise the most challenging German sounds to pronounce, including the sounds created by the letter combinations sch, ei and ie, as well as others.

We will tackle these letter combinations one by one, so continue reading to find out more and why not listen to the podcast episode as you go?

How to pronounce ‘sch’This sound is similar to “sh” in English. You can join in with Olivera and Mark in the podcast episode to practise pronouncing this sound and the others. Let’s see the combination sch in some examples. We’ve also taken the opportunity to practise some festive vocabulary, since this episode was first released during the holiday season, but the words and sounds are useful to practise all year round!

Try reading each word or phrase aloud:

der Schnee
snow

die Schokolade
chocolate

das Schlittenfahren
sledging

schon
already

schön
beautiful*

es schneit
it’s snowing

schenken
to give a present

das Geschenk
present

Note the difference the umlaut makes in the pronunciation of schon and schön*, and how they have completely different meanings.

How to pronounce ‘ei’This is a common vowel sound in German words. The combination “ei” in English can be pronounced in different ways, such as in “height” or “eight”. However, in German ei always has the same sound, which is like “I” or “eye” in English.

Here are some examples of this letter combination. Remember to read each aloud and watch the video or listen to the podcast episode to hear Olivera and Mark pronounce them:

das Eis
ice cream

eins / zwei / drei one / two / three

mein / dein my / your

schreiben
to write
This word is also good practice of the sch sound.

der Wein / Glühweinwine / mulled wine

How to pronounce ‘ie’This vowel sound is pronounced like “ee” in English. Again, in English “ie” can be pronounced in different ways (for example in “field” and “fried”), but in German it’s always pronounced as “ee”. Let’s see ie in some example words in German:

vier
four

sieben
seven

das Lied
song

riechen
to smell

Die Plätzchen riechen gut.
The biscuits smell good.

wieder
again

Siehst du? (from sehen)
Do you see?

der Spiegel
mirror*

Note the pronunciation of Spiegel. It begins with a sound similar to sch, but this is caused by an s at the beginning of the word, followed by the letter p. It is because it is followed by a p that it does not require s*ch at the start.

For a more challenging pronunciation practice, we can combine the ei and ie sounds:

mein Lied
my song

Ich rieche den Wein.
I smell the wine.

How to pronounce ‘au’This vowel sound is like the “ou” sound in “about” in English. Examples of the au sound in German include:

der Baum
tree

das Auto
car

auf
on

das Haus
house

Ich klettere auf das Haus.
I am climbing onto the house.

der Brauch
tradition

How to pronounce ‘eu’This vowel sound combination is pronounced “oi” or “oy”, as in “oyster” or “boy” in English. Let’s see this sound in some examples:

heute today

die Leute
people

euch
all of you

ich freue mich auf (from sich freuen auf)I am looking forward to

das Neujahr
the New Year

How to pronounce ‘ch’The ch sound can have different pronunciations in different words. It is a little like the “ch” in the Scottish pronunciation of the word “loch”, as Mark demonstrates in the episode.

Let’s compare some examples of how it features in different German words. After a, o, u there is a hard h sound. For example, in:

machen
to make, to do

hoch
high

suchen
to search for

Weihnachten
Christmas
This word is also good practice of the ei sound and features the word die Nacht, meaning “night”.

After all other vowels and consonants, not listed in the examples above, the ch sound is pronounced differently, as we see in the examples below. In the episode, Mark gives some tips for pronouncing this sound. He goes to make a c sound, then brings his tongue to the top of his mouth, but then down a little before it reaches the top of his mouth, and then breathes through that. After that, he adds the y sound. Olivera suggests breathing through a very wide grin to get the ch sound correct. Remember to listen to the episode to hear Mark and Olivera discuss how to pronounce this sound, as it is difficult to describe in words.

Here are some examples of words that contain this ch sound:

lächeln
to smile

das Mädchen
girl

die Kirche
church

There are some exceptions, where the ch is pronounced like a k. Here are some examples:

der Chor
choir

die Chemie
chemistryThis can also have some regional differences in pronunciation.

der Chiemsee
the name of a Bavarian lake, sometimes known as the “Bavarian sea”

Sounding great in German!Remember that it’s normal for language learners to have difficulties with pronunciation – the important thing, at first, is that you can be understood. However, keep practising these sounds and use them in conversations, and over time you will sound more like a native speaker.

If you found this post interesting, make sure to listen to the full episode with Mark and Olivera on The Coffee Break German Show. This is the series in which we look at a range of topics for German learners, so make sure to subscribe to our podcast feed and our channel on YouTube.

Plus! To get regular free German lessons in your inbox, you can sign up for our short (coffee-break-sized) email lessons that will help you improve your German. You will also hear from Mark, the founder of Coffee Break Languages, giving advice for language learners at any level. Sign up below!

Happy Coffee Breaking!

Listen to the podcastThe post A guide to German pronunciation: ‘sch’, ‘ei’, ‘ie’ and more appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

We’ve reached lesson 20 of Coffee Break Portuguese, which marks the halfway point in our beginners’ course. In this episode we’re reviewing what we’ve learned throughout the first 19 lessons. We’ll be doing this by listening to a dialogue that incorporates many of the topics we’ve covered so far. We hope you enjoy seeing how much you’ve learned over the past 19 lessons and we’ll be back soon with lesson 21!

The post CBP 1.20 | End-of-unit review – The basics in Portuguese from Lessons 1–19 appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Is there an easy way to know the gender of a noun in Italian?

You probably already know from your experience with Italian that it is a language that has grammatical gender. Every noun in Italian is either masculine or feminine.

Over time, you get to know what gender nouns are, the more you practise and use the words, and often you simply have to memorise the gender of the noun as you’re learning the word itself. However, the good news is that there are some shortcuts that you can learn!

Continue reading to find out more and why not listen to the podcast episode as you go?

How a dictionary can help youThe best way to know the gender of nouns is to look them up in a dictionary. Next to any noun you will see either (m) for masculine or (f) for feminine.

However, we don’t always carry around a dictionary and sometimes our online dictionary app might not be loading, so let’s take a look at some other ways you can work out the gender of nouns in Italian.

Nouns ending in -o & -aOur first rule is one that you’re likely to already be very familiar with. This is that the majority of nouns ending in -o are masculine, while the majority of those ending in –a are feminine. Let’s look at some examples:

ragazzo (m)
boy

ragazza (f)
girl

The correct articles to use with ragazzo are therefore il and un:

il ragazzothe boy

un ragazzoa boy

And the correct articles to use with ragazza are therefore la and una:

la ragazzathe girl

una ragazzaa girl

Some other examples are:

mondo (m)
world

natura (f)
nature

This is quite straightforward, but Francesca and Maurizio mention an exception to this rule. Let’s move onto this now.

Nouns ending in -maThere are a number of nouns ending in -ma, which might lead you to think they are feminine because of their final -a, but they are actually masculine. These masculine nouns have a Greek origin, hence their unusual ending. For example:

problema (m)
problem

sistema (m)
system

Nouns ending in -siThere are also some nouns that end in -si and they also have a Greek origin. Usually, these nouns are feminine in Italian. Let’s see some examples:

crisi (f)
crisis

analisi (f)
analysis

tesi (f)
dissertation, thesis

Notice that the English equivalent is often a word ending in -is.

Nouns ending in -oreYou may know that there are some singular nouns in Italian ending in -e. These nouns can be either masculine or feminine. So, how can we determine their gender? For some nouns ending in -e, only the dictionary will tell you if they are masculine or feminine, but for many others the extended ending will be a useful indicator.

Let’s start with nouns ending in -ore. These are generally masculine. For example:

cuore (m)
heart

amore (m)
love

colore (m)
colour

attore (m)
(male) actor

scrittore (m)
(male) writer

Nouns ending in -tricePay attention to the previous two examples, attore and scrittore, which are both professions ending in -tore. When the masculine version of a profession ends in -tore, its feminine counterpart will end in -trice. For example:

attrice (f)
(female) actor

scrittrice (f)
(female) writer

Nouns ending in -ale & -ileIf a noun ends in -ale or –ile, it is most likely to be masculine. Here are some examples:

canale (m)
canal, channel

campanile (m)
bell tower

cortile (m)
backyard, courtyard

Nouns ending in -zione & -sioneIf a noun ends in -zione or -sione, it is most likely to be feminine. Notice that the English equivalents of these nouns usually have the “-tion” ending. For example:

emozione (f)
emotion

stazione (f)
station

creazione (f)
creation

Nouns of foreign originWhat about nouns that are borrowed into Italian from other languages? Most of the time, these are considered masculine, especially if they end in a consonant. For example:

film (m)
film

computer (m)
computer

gossip (m)
gossip

meeting (m)
meeting

However, there are some exceptions here, as well, and some foreign nouns can be feminine. This can happen when the foreign noun is more strongly associated with its Italian equivalent and when the Italian equivalent is a feminine noun. Let’s see some examples:

call (f) / chiamata (f)
call

mail (f) / posta elettronica (f)
email

band (f) / banda (f)
band

If you’re in doubt, remember that the dictionary will always guide you in this process!

Over to you!At the end of this episode, Francesca and Maurizio invite you to participate in a practice activity.

Can you determine the gender of the following nouns, based on what we have learned today? We’ve also taken the opportunity to practise some festive vocabulary, since this episode was first released during the holiday season!

The answers can be found at the end of the article.

vigilia
regalo
decorazione
panettone

If you found this article interesting, make sure you listen to the full podcast episode with Francesca and Maurizio on The Coffee Break Italian Show. We have many more episodes on useful topics for Italian learners, so make sure to subscribe to our podcast feed and our channel on YouTube to find others.

Plus! To get regular free Italian lessons in your inbox, you can sign up for our short (coffee-break-sized) email lessons that will help you improve your Italian. You will also hear from Mark, the founder of Coffee Break Languages, giving advice for language learners at any level. Sign up below!

Happy Coffee Breaking!

PS. Here are the answers to the challenge.

vigilia (f) – eve, for example in vigilia di Natale (Christmas Eve)
regalo (m) – present, gift
decorazione (f) – decoration
panettone (m) – traditional Italian Christmas cake

Listen to the podcastThe post How do you know if a noun is masculine or feminine in Italian? appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

À cause de and grâce à are easy to get mixed up. This is because, depending on the context, both phrases can be translated as “because of” in English.

However, while both phrases link a cause to a consequence, they paint distinct pictures of the outcome!

We’re going to explore the subtleties of these phrases, unravelling the positive and negative nuances they bring to expressions in French.

Continue reading to find out more and why not listen to the podcast episode as you go?

‘à cause de’ for negative outcomesÀ cause de conveys negativity in French expressions. It translates to “because of” in English, but is exclusively reserved for situations with negative consequences. For example:

J’ai perdu une heure à cause de tes mauvais conseils.
I lost an hour because of your bad advice.

It’s a phrase that signals setbacks – attributing an undesirable result to a specific cause.

Note that à cause de ends with the preposition de. This de points to the origin or source of the negative consequence.

As always happens with the preposition de, it connects and merges with some articles. When we have de + le, it becomes du, and de + les becomes des. When preceding a vowel, de transforms into d’ for smoother pronunciation.

‘grâce à’ for positive outcomesOn the other hand, grâce à radiates positivity – signifying a favourable outcome due to a particular cause. For example:

Grâce à ton aide, j’ai réussi à monter ce meuble.
Thanks to your help, I managed to assemble this piece of furniture.

It’s a phrase that highlights the contribution of a positive factor leading to a successful or beneficial result.

Since grâce à ends with the preposition à, it also undergoes transformations. For example, à + le becomes au, and à + les transforms into aux.

Let’s practise!Here are some sentences in English. Your challenge is to translate them into French, choosing between grâce à and à cause de. The answers are at the end of this article.

It is because of the wind.
It is thanks to them.
We lost because of one mistake.
I learned Spanish thanks to Coffee Break podcasts.
You passed your exams because of me.
I couldn’t travel because of the strikes.
It is thanks to your brother that I know which gift to buy you for Christmas.

We hope that you found this post interesting. These two expressions will not only help you understand situations better, but if you can use them in your conversations you will articulate yourself more clearly.

Make sure to listen to the full episode with Mark and Max on The Coffee Break French Show. This is the series in which we look at a range of topics for French learners, so make sure to subscribe to our podcast feed and our channel on YouTube.

Plus! To get regular free French lessons in your inbox, you can sign up for our short (coffee-break-sized) email lessons that will help you improve your French. You will also hear from Mark, the founder of Coffee Break Languages, giving advice for language learners at any level. Sign up below!

Happy Coffee Breaking!

PS. Here are the answers to the challenge:

It is because of the wind. – C’est à cause du vent.
It is thanks to them. – C’est grâce à eux / elles.
We lost because of one mistake. – Nous avons / On a perdu à cause d’une erreur.
I learned Spanish thanks to Coffee Break podcasts. – J’ai appris l’espagnol grâce aux podcasts Coffee Break.
You passed your exams because of me. – Tu as réussi tes examens grâce à moi.
I couldn’t travel because of the strikes. – Je n’ai pas pu voyager à cause des grèves.
It is thanks to your brother that I know which gift to buy you for Christmas. – C’est grâce à ton frère que je sais quel cadeau t’acheter pour Noël.

Listen to the podcastThe post What’s the difference between ‘à cause de’ and ‘grâce à’? appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Do you know how to say the words Tuesday and Thursday correctly in English?

These two words can be confusing when it comes to pronunciation. This is because the sounds at the beginning of the words (tu and th) can be difficult to pronounce.

There are lots of other words that contain these sounds, so if you can pronounce the words Tuesday and Thursday correctly then you will be able to pronounce many more.

The Coffee Break English Show is a podcast series of short, informal conversations to help you understand some difficult topics in English. In the latest episode, Josie and Mark talk about how to pronounce Tuesday and Thursday correctly.

Because this episode focuses on pronunciation, it’s best to watch the video or listen to the podcast episode while you read this article, to hear Josie and Mark making the sounds.

So, let’s get started and look at the words Tuesday and Thursday. Why not get a cup of coffee or tea to enjoy while you read and listen!

TuesdayThere are three different ways to pronounce the letters tu at the beginning of Tuesday. But don’t worry, they are all quite similar! The best way to understand the sounds is to watch the video, but here are the written versions to help you:

Tuesday = [chewz-day]
This is how Josie pronounces it in the episode.

Tuesday = [tee-ooz-day]
This is how Mark pronounces it in the episode.

Tuesday = [tooz-day]
This is the North American English pronunciation.

The letters ‘tu’ in the middle of a wordWhen the letters tu are in the middle of a word, most English speakers pronounce them as ch, like the first sound in the word cheese. Let’s look at some examples of these words:

culture

adventure

century

congratulations

nature

mature

The letters ‘tu’ at the start of a wordWhen the letters tu are at the start of a word, we can pronounce them as ch, like in the words above. We can also pronounce them in two other ways. Let’s look at some examples:

tune
[choon] or [tee-oon] or [toon]

tube
[choob] or [tee-oob] or [toob]

stupid
[s-choo-pid] or [stee-oo-pid] or [stoo-pid]

tutor
[choo-tor] or [tee-oo-tor] or [too-tor]

Be careful! There are lots of words that begin with tu that have a different sound. For example, in the words tunnel, turn, and turtle, the letter t is always pronounced like the letter of the alphabet T.

ThursdayIs everything clear so far? Let’s move onto the word Thursday. To make the th at the beginning of this word, we put our tongue between our teeth and blow out air. There are actually two ways to pronounce th in English.

Unvoiced ‘th’The th sound at the beginning of Thursday is unvoiced. This means that we don’t use our voice when we make this sound.

To practise, put your hand on your neck, just under your chin, and say the sound th at the beginning of Thursday. You should not feel any vibrations or movement in your neck. Here are some other words with the unvoiced th sound:

think

three

thanks

bath

nothing

Voiced ‘th’The th sound at the beginning of the word the is voiced. This means that we use our voice when we make this sound.

To practise, put your hand on your neck, just under your chin, and say the sound th at the beginning of the. You should feel your throat (inside your neck) moving and vibrating. Here are some other words with the voiced th sound:

this

that

although (can be pronounced voiced or unvoiced)

weather

other

It’s your turn!Now, let’s practise! Here are three sentences. If you want, you can listen to Josie saying them in the video, and repeat them after her.

1. On Tuesday, we’re going on an adventure.
2. Let’s play a tune on Thursday.
3. There is nature and culture on Tuesday and Thursday.

If you found this post interesting, make sure you listen to the full podcast episode with Mark and Josie on The Coffee Break English Show. In this series, we talk about useful topics for English learners, so make sure to subscribe to our podcast feed and our channel on YouTube.

Keep practising the sounds at the beginning of Tuesday and Thursday. We recommend that you make a list of all the words with these sounds that you find difficult to pronounce and practise them every day.

Remember that it’s ok if you don’t sound like a native speaker when you’re speaking English! It’s more important that you are confident when you’re speaking, and people can understand you.

Happy Coffee Breaking!

Listen to the podcastThe post How to pronounce ‘Tuesday’ and ‘Thursday’ appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Making negative statements in Spanish can be challenging for learners. The negative in Spanish works differently from English which can mean it’s easy to make mistakes.

However, there are some simple rules that can help us correctly use negative structures when we are speaking in Spanish.

The Coffee Break Spanish Show is a podcast series of short, informal conversations to help you understand some difficult topics in Spanish. In the latest episode, Mark and Anabel talk about how to use negatives in Spanish.

We hope that you find this guide to negation useful and we recommend listening along to the podcast or video episode as you read!

Plus, don’t miss our free worksheet at the end to practise what you learn!

How to form a negative statement in SpanishTo turn a positive statement into a negative statement in Spanish, the first rule to know is that we use no before any verb, compound verb, or verb with its pronouns. Let’s look at some examples:

no tengoI don’t have

no soy escocés
I am not Scottish

no lo sé
I don’t know (it)

no me desperté
I didn’t wake up

It can get a bit more challenging when we add another negative word into the sentence. This is because it creates what we call “double negation”.

In English (in most varieties), we say “I have nothing” or “I don’t have anything”, where only one negative word is possible in the sentence to negate the statement – either “nothing” or “don’t”.

This works differently in Spanish, however. In Spanish, this double negation often appears, when we have two of these negative words to create a negative statement.

Words used to negate in SpanishWe’ve already looked at no (“not”), so let’s now see some other negative words in Spanish:

nunca / jamás
never

nunca jamás
never ever

tampoco
neither

nadie
no one / nobody

ningún / ninguno / ninguna
any

nada
nothing

If we are using one of these words in a statement, we have two options in how to structure the statement:

‘no’ + verb + negative wordFor example:

No vimos nada.We didn’t see anything. / We saw nothing.

No me ha llamado nadie.
No one has called me.

No he desayunado tampoco.
I haven’t had breakfast either.

negative word + verbFor example:

Nada vimos.
We didn’t see anything. / We saw nothing.

Nadie me ha llamado.
No one has called me.

Tampoco he desayunado.
I haven’t had breakfast either.

This second construction, where the negative word comes before the verb, creates a more emphatic statement. Let’s use one of our examples in context to see this emphasis:

A: ¿Te han llamado esta tarde?
B: No me ha llamado nadie.
A: Dime la verdad. ¿Te ha llamado Juan? ¿Alberto? ¿Tal vez Clara?
B: No, nadie me ha llamado.

A: Did anyone call you this afternoon?
B: No one has called me.
A: Tell me the truth. Did Juan call you? Alberto? Maybe Clara?
B: No, no one has called me.

To summarise, in Spanish, we must have a negative word before the verb. This is why we may have double negation, in cases where a negative word such as nada or nunca goes after the verb.

A visual summary of making negative statements in SpanishLet’s practise making negative statements in SpanishNow it’s your turn to practise the negative in Spanish! Your challenge is to write down the two possible Spanish translations of each of the following sentences.

I don’t know anything.
No one buys there.
No client has it.

You will find the answers at the end of this article, and for a little more practice download the free worksheet below to see how much you’ve learned about making negative statements in Spanish.

Make sure to listen to the full episode with Mark and Anabel on The Coffee Break Spanish Show. This is the series in which we look at a range of topics for Spanish learners, so make sure to subscribe to our podcast feed and our channel on YouTube.

We hope that you now know enough about negation in Spanish to feel positive when you are using your Spanish negatives!

Happy Coffee Breaking!

PS. Here are the answers to the translation challenge.

I don’t know anything. – No sé nada. / Nada sé.**
No one buys there. – No compra nadie allí. / Nadie compra allí.**
No client has it. – No lo tiene ningún cliente. / Ningún cliente lo tiene.**

Listen to the podcastThe post A guide to making negative statements in Spanish appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Making negative sentences in German does not have to be a negative experience!

If you understand how to use nein, nicht and kein then you will have no problem negating sentences in German.

The Coffee Break German Show is a podcast series of bite-sized, friendly conversations, in which we demystify tricky German language topics. In the latest episode, Mark and Thomas discuss how negation works in German using nein, nicht and kein.

Continue reading to find out more and why not listen to the podcast as you go?

NeinNein is used as an answer to a closed question. In all cases, it simply means “no”. For example:

– Möchtest du ein Stück Kuchen? – Nein, danke.
– Would you like a piece of cake? – No, thanks.

– Besuchen wir morgen deine Eltern? – Nein, am Freitag.
– Are we visiting your parents tomorrow? – No, on Friday.

NichtNicht is used to negate different parts of a sentence, including prepositions, adverbs, adjectives and verbs. Let’s look at some examples:

Dieser Salat ist nicht frisch.
This salad is not fresh.

Wir fahren heute nicht nach Berlin.
We are not travelling to Berlin today.

The position of nicht emphasises the part of the sentence you are negating.  In the sentence above the position of nicht negates the piece of information nach Berlin (“to Berlin”). It emphasises that Berlin is not the destination today.

Wir fahren nicht heute nach Berlin.
We are not travelling to Berlin today.

As the sentence is now worded, the adverb heute is negated, meaning that maybe another day they will travel to Berlin, but not today.

Das weiß ich nicht.
I don’t know that.

Ich tanze nicht.
I am not dancing.

In the examples above, the nicht is placed at the end, negating the whole sentence.

Negating with modal verbsIn German, how do you negate a sentence when you are using modal verbs? This is possibly best demonstrated with examples:

Ich kann nicht schwimmen.
I cannot swim.

Note that nicht is placed before the infinitive.

Ich möchte diese Hose nicht anziehen.
I would not like to put on these trousers.

There is further information in this sentence, but nicht is still placed before the infinitive.

KeinKein is used to negate nouns.

Kein can be seen as the negative of the indefinite article – the opposite of “a”. It is therefore placed before the noun it is negating. Take a look at the examples below to demonstrate its use:

Ich habe einen Hund.I have a dog.

Ich habe keinen Hund.
I don’t have a dog. / I have no dog.

Ich habe heute Lust ins Kino zu gehen.
I want to go to the cinema today.

Ich habe heute keine Lust ins Kino zu gehen.I don’t want to go to the cinema today.

One important point to remember when using kein is that it has to agree with the noun it is negating. This means it has to take account of the noun’s gender, whether it is plural or singular, and the case being used.

Other forms of negatingThere are two other ways to negate your sentences that are worth mentioning:

nichts
nothing

niemand
nobody

For example:

Sie will heute nichts machen.
She wants to do nothing today. / She doesn’t want to do anything today.

Leider ist niemand auf die Party gekommen.Unfortunately, nobody came to the party.

In conclusionOnce you have a good grasp of forming negative phrases and sentences in German you will be more comfortable in conversation. Of course, it is easy to make mistakes with this and it is all part of the learning process – keep practising and you will improve.

If you found this post interesting, make sure to listen to the full episode with Mark and Thomas on The Coffee Break German Show. This is the series in which we look at a range of topics for German learners, so make sure to subscribe to our podcast feed and our channel on YouTube.

Happy Coffee Breaking!

Listen to the podcastThe post Negation in German: ‘nein’, ‘nicht’ and ‘kein’ appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

“I’m sorry!” – a very common phrase in any conversation, but what is the best way to say sorry in Italian?

There are many ways to say sorry, excuse yourself and ask for permission in Italian, and the one to choose will depend on the context. Not only is it useful to know what they mean, but also the subtleties of each phrase.

The Coffee Break Italian Show is a podcast series of bite-sized, friendly conversations in which we demystify tricky Italian language topics. In the latest episode, Mark and Maurizio dive into the world of Italian apologies. They explore different expressions for saying “I’m sorry” or “excuse me” politely and appropriately in various situations.

Continue reading to find out more and why not listen to the podcast as you go?

Plus, don’t miss our free worksheet at the end to practise what you learn!

How to say you’re sorry in ItalianLet’s begin with four ways to say “I’m sorry” in Italian.

mi dispiaceOne of the most common ways to say sorry is to use the phrase mi dispiace, or its shortened version, mi spiace. It literally means “it displeases me” and it is used to apologise for something you have done.
scusa / scusiAnother common way to apologise is scusa or scusi (the former being used in informal contexts and the latter in formal contexts).

This phrase is also used to attract someone’s attention, for example if you want to stop someone in the street to ask for information:

Scusi, dov’è la piazza?
Excuse me, where’s the square?

You can also say scusami (informal) or mi scusi (formal) – notice the different placement of the pronoun mi in the two versions.

perdonami / mi perdoniIf you have done something very serious and you want to say “I’m sorry”, you should probably say perdonami (more literally “forgive me” or “pardon me”). The formal version would be mi perdoni.

In the podcast episode, Maurizio also shares something funny about the use of perdonami or mi perdoni. You can sometimes use it to introduce something that might sound harsh to your interlocutor (similar to the English “I’m sorry, but…”). For example:

Perdonami, ma non sei simpatico.
I’m sorry, but you’re not nice.

è colpa miaWhat about taking the blame in Italian? In this case, you can say è colpa mia (“it’s my fault”). You can, of course, replace the possessive adjective and use tua, sua, nostra, vostra, loro depending on who you are blaming.

Notice the position of the possessive adjective in this expression. It is, unusually, placed after the noun. Normally in Italian possessive adjectives are placed before the noun and they are introduced by a definite article.

How to ask for permission in ItalianAgain, there are a few ways to ask for permission in Italian. Let’s look at the three most common ones.

permesso?When you are in a crowded place and someone wants to pass through, you might hear: è permesso?, or simply permesso? This phrase is used to ask for permission and used especially for these kinds of situations, when you want to go through or enter a room.
posso?You can use the versatile phrase posso…? (“may I…?”) in many different contexts. Remember that the verb to use after this phrase must be in the infinitive. For example:

Posso fare una telefonata?
May I make a phone call?

chiedo scusaIn the episode, Mark tells us a story to give some background to this expression. He was recently in the process of checking out of a hotel when the receptionist had to pause to answer the phone. To apologise and explain her brief absence, she said:

Chiedo scusa, devo rispondere al telefono.
Excuse me, I have to answer the phone.

Maurizio explains that chiedo scusa is used to politely excuse yourself from a situation.

Let’s imagine you’re at a party and you’re talking to a group of people. You see someone you meant to talk to and you want to go and chat with them. In this situation you can say:

Chiedo scusa, devo andare a parlare con Antonio.
Excuse me, I need to go and speak to Antonio.

A visual summary of apologising & asking permission in ItalianNow you can apologise in Italian!Ecco qui! That was a glimpse into the various ways to apologise in Italian.

Remember that the Italian language is rich in nuances, and choosing the right expression can make a difference in your daily interactions. We hope this information has been helpful, and you can put it into practice in your next Italian adventures.

For a little extra practice, download the free worksheet below, and see how much you’ve learned about apologising and asking permission in Italian.

If you found this interesting, make sure you listen to the full podcast episode with Mark and Maurizio on The Coffee Break Italian Show. We will be regularly uploading more episodes for Italian learners, so make sure to subscribe to our podcast feed and our channel on YouTube to find out when the next episode is available.

Happy Coffee Breaking!

Listen to the podcastThe post How to apologise and ask for permission in Italian appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

As a French learner, deciding which preposition to use with locations, such as cities and countries, can be frustrating. Getting to grips with why we make these choices will help us make the correct decision.

We hope that you find this article useful as your roadmap to prepositions for cities and countries in French. Continue reading to find out more and why not listen to the podcast as you go?

CitiesIn French, cities generally take the preposition à. For example:

Tu habites à Paris ?
Do you live in Paris?

Je veux aller à New York.
I want to go to New York.

However, there are a few points to remember. As you may know, à + le becomes au, so cities starting with Le (for example Le Caire – Cairo) require a contraction after à. For example:

J’habite au Caire.
I live in Cairo.

Je vais au Mans.
I’m going to Le Mans.

These contractions apply exclusively to cities that begin with Le. Other well-known examples are Le Cap (Cape Town) and the French port town of Le Havre.

You may have noticed something crucial from all of these examples: à can translate as “in” or “to”. There is only one option for the preposition in French, covering the idea of both being “in” and going “to” a city.

CountriesDescribing countries in French involves a bit more nuance.

Feminine countriesFor feminine countries (usually these can be spotted because they end in –e), the preposition en is used. These include:

en France
in / to France

en Espagne
in / to Spain

en Argentine
in / to Argentina

Masculine countriesOn the other hand, masculine countries (generally those not ending in -e) typically take the preposition au. Examples include:

au Portugal
in / to Portugal

au Canada
in / to Canada

au Chili
in / to Chile

Note that some countries’ names end with an -e but they are masculine. These all use au, similar to other masculine countries. There are six of these exceptions, and they are:

le Mexique
Mexico

le Bélize
Belize

le Cambodge
Cambodia

le Mozambique
Mozambique

le Suriname
Suriname

le Zimbabwe
Zimbabwe

Countries starting with a vowelThere is another exception for countries starting with a vowel. Regardless of gender, en is used. For example:

en Uruguay
in / to Uruguay

en Afghanistan
in / to Afghanistan

Plural countriesWhen it comes to plural forms, gender becomes irrelevant, and the preposition aux is applied. For instance:

aux États-Unis
in / to the USA

aux Philippines
in / to the Philippines

aux Pays-Bas
in / to the Netherlands

IslandsThe rule for islands is straightforward. Singular islands take à, while plural islands take aux. For instance:

à Madagascar
in / to Madagascar

aux Maldives
in / to the Maldives

ContinentsFinally, continents in French take the preposition en:

en Europe
in / to Europe

en Afrique
in / to Africa

en Asie
in / to Asia

Let’s reviewWe hope that you now feel more confident using prepositions with place names in French.

Remember these key points and you will have a good start:

à for cities and islands
en for feminine countries, all countries starting with a vowel, and continents
au for masculine countries (except those that begin with a vowel)
aux for plural countries and islands

Remember, we all make mistakes, and French speakers will still understand you if you get this wrong. However, the more you master using prepositions with places, the more comfortable you will be and the more natural you will sound when you speak French.

If you found this post interesting, make sure to listen to the full episode with Mark and Max on The Coffee Break French Show. This is the series in which we look at a range of topics for French learners, so make sure to subscribe to our podcast feed and our channel on YouTube.

Bonne chance et bon voyage !

Happy Coffee Breaking!

Listen to the podcastThe post Which prepositions are used with cities and countries? appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Do you know when to use a and the in English?

These little words are called articles. They can be difficult to use correctly, because they are used in different ways in different languages, and in some languages they don’t exist at all!

The Coffee Break English Show is a podcast series of bite-sized, friendly conversations to help you understand some difficult topics in English. In the latest episode, Josie and Mark talk about when to use a and the to talk about general and specific things.

So, let’s get started and look at a and the. Continue reading to find out more and why not listen to the podcast as you go?

‘A’ and ‘the’ for singular nouns‘A’ for singular, non-specific thingsWe use the article a in front of singular nouns. A is an indefinite article, and we use it to describe something that is not specific, or something general. Let’s look at some examples:

I saw a dog yesterday.
= this is not a specific dog, and it’s the first time I have mentioned it

Can you give me a pen, please?
= I am not asking for a specific pen, I just need any pen available to write something

A cheetah can run very fast.
= we are not talking about one specific cheetah, we are saying that, in general, cheetahs can run fast

Watch out! If the noun begins with a vowel (a, e, i, o, u) we use an instead of a. For example:

She picked an apple from the tree.

You have to take an aeroplane to get to the USA.

‘The’ for singular, specific thingsWe can also use the article the in front of singular nouns. The is a definite article, and we use it to describe something specific, instead of something general. Let’s look at some examples:

I saw a dog yesterday. The dog was cute.
= the second time I mention the dog, I use the, because we know which specific dog I am talking about – it’s the dog that I saw yesterday

Did you watch the match last night?
= Mark and Josie both follow the same sport or team, so when Josie asks this, they both know which specific match she is talking about

The restaurant next to my apartment is really good.
= I am talking about a specific restaurant – I know exactly where it is

‘The’ for unique thingsWe also use the for things of which there is only one. These things are unique:

the sky
e.g. The sky is blue.

the Internet
e.g. I’ll look it up on the Internet.

the Earth
e.g. The Earth orbits the sun.

the sun
e.g. The sun rises in the east.

the moon
e.g. The moon is beautiful tonight.

‘A’ for jobs and professionsWe use a when we talk about someone’s job. For example:

I’m a teacher.

He is a doctor.

Are you a nurse?

‘The’ or no article for plural nounsHow’s it going so far? Get some more tea or coffee if you need to! Remember, in front of plural nouns we never use a. A is only for singular nouns. For plural nouns we use the or no article at all.

No article for plural, general thingsWhen we talk about general or non-specific things in the plural form, we don’t use an article. Here are some examples:

I love horror films.
= I love horror films in general, all horror films

Do you have pets?
= Josie doesn’t know if Mark has pets, so she can’t be specific when she asks this question

No article for uncountable, general thingsUncountable nouns are things that we don’t count individually, and which we think of as one mass. Some examples are water, rice, pasta, time and information. Let’s look at some examples:

I’m thirsty, I need to drink water.
= I don’t want some specific water, I just want any available water

I need information about the project.
= I’m not asking for some specific information, I just want to know something about the project

Pasta tastes delicious with tomato sauce.
= I am saying that all pasta tastes delicious with tomato sauce, and I am not talking about a specific pasta dish that I have eaten

‘The’ for specific things (plural and uncountable)As we mentioned earlier, when we talk about specific, singular things, we use the article the. We also use the for specific things when they are plural or uncountable. These examples are all connected to previous examples in this blog post, so you can scroll up and compare them if you need to:

The horror films that I watched last week were very scary.

The dogs that I know are friendly.

The information that you gave me is clear.

The water that comes from my tap is delicious.

Let’s reviewIf you found this post interesting, make sure you listen to the full podcast episode with Mark and Josie on The Coffee Break English Show. We will release more episodes soon, about some more useful topics! Subscribe to our podcast feed and our channel on YouTube to learn when the next episode is available.

So, keep practising the and a! Remember that all English learners make mistakes, but people can usually still understand you. It’s all part of the language-learning journey.

Happy Coffee Breaking!

Listen to the podcastThe post When to use ‘a’ and ‘the’ in English appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

¿Está bueno o es bueno? Are both of these phrases correct? Do they mean the same thing?

As a Spanish learner, at times, it can be difficult to know when to use ser and when to use estar to translate “to be”. And did you know that there are some adjectives that have a different meaning depending on whether they are used with ser or estar?

The Coffee Break Spanish Show is a podcast series of short, informal conversations to help you understand some difficult topics in Spanish. In the latest episode, Mark and Concha continue to look at the verbs ser and estar, but this time discussing how the choice of verb can change the meaning of some words.

This episode is the second part of a double episode all about these two verbs, and in our previous episode we discussed how and when to use ser and estar in Spanish. So, before we start, if you haven’t already watched that episode, or read its accompanying blog article, you can find it here.

Continue reading to find out more and why not listen to the podcast as you go?

Si está todo preparado, ¡vamos a ello!

What changes with ‘ser’ and ‘estar’?There are some adjectives in Spanish whose meaning changes a little bit when we use ser instead of estar. That is to say, although we would translate ser and estar as “to be” in English in both cases, the adjective that accompanies them changes its meaning.

As we begin this discussion, we need to keep two things in mind:

Not all adjectives have this ser/estar change in meaning.
For adjectives that don’t fall into this category, it’s helpful to remember the ser and estar rules that Mark and Concha taught us in the previous episode, so that you know whether to use the adjective with ser or estar.

So, what are these adjectives? One of our personal favourites is aburrido/a. Ser aburrido/a means “to be boring”, but estar aburrido/a is “to be bored”. So, be careful next time you want to say you are bored! Let’s see this in an example sentence:

La película es muy aburrida y ahora estamos aburridos.
The film is very boring and now we are bored.

However, it’s not quite as simple as equating English -ing vs -ed adjectives with ser vs estar, so let’s look at some further examples and see what happens when some other adjectives are used with ser and estar.

Abierto/aSer abierto/a and estar abierto/a can both be translated as “to be open”, but in two different senses. Let’s look at this in some example sentences:

estar abierto/a
to be open

La tienda está abierta hasta las once.
The store is open until eleven.

ser abierto/a
to be open / outgoing

Mi padre es muy abierto: puede hablar con todo tipo de personas.
My father is very open, he can talk to all kinds of people.

Listo/aThe adjective listo/a can carry two very different meanings, depending on whether it is used with ser or estar.

estar listo/a
to be ready

En cinco minutos estaré lista.
In five minutes, I’ll be ready.

ser listo/a
to be witty / clever

Es muy lista y por eso aprende muy rápido.
She is very smart and that is why she learns very quickly.

Bueno/aNow, let’s turn our attention to one very commonly used adjective.

estar bueno/a
to be delicious

Esta paella está muy buena, ¿quién la ha hecho?
This paella is very tasty. Who made it?

Note that in Latin America, if we are talking about an experience such as a show, film or trip, we use estar bueno/a, too. For example:

Las vacaciones pasadas estuvieron buenas.
Our last holiday was good.

Bueno/a is used with ser in slightly different contexts.

ser bueno/a
to be good quality, to be good for you

Este ordenador es muy bueno. Tiene cinco años y aún funciona perfectamente.
This computer is very good. It’s five years old and still works perfectly.

¡Ojo! Don’t confuse the adjective bueno (“good”) with the adverb bien (“well”). While we can use bueno/a with both ser and estar, we can only use bien with estar. For example:

Estoy muy bien.
I’m very well.

Malo/aNow for the opposite of bueno/a: malo/a.

estar malo/a
to be in bad condition

Creo que este queso está malo, huele muy fuerte. I think this cheese is off – it smells very strong.

Estar malo/a can also mean “to be sick”.

Hugo no fue a clase porque estaba malo.
Hugo didn’t go to class because he was sick.

Like with bueno/a, in Latin America, if we are talking about an experience such as a show, film or trip, we use estar malo/a, too. For example:

No estuvo malo, ¿no creen?
It wasn’t bad, don’t you think?

Ser malo/a, on the other hand, is used in different contexts.

ser malo/a
to be bad

Espero que el tiempo mañana no sea malo.
I hope the weather tomorrow isn’t bad.

¡Ojo! Pay special attention to one difference between the adjective malo/a (“bad”) and the adverb mal (“badly / wrong”). While we can use malo/a with both ser and estar, we can only use mal with estar. For example:

Este ejercicio está mal.
This exercise is wrong.

Orgulloso/aWhen orgulloso/a is used with estar, it generally has a positive connotation.

estar orgulloso/a
to be proud

Hijo, ¡qué orgullosos estamos de ti, no tienes ni idea!
Son, we are so proud of you, you have no idea!

When orgulloso/a is used with ser, however, it generally has a negative connotation, and can convey arrogance or feeling full of yourself.

ser orgulloso/a
to be prideful

¡Ay, Pepa, no seas tan orgullosa y dame un abrazo!
Oh, Pepa, don’t be so proud and give me a hug!

Reservado/aReservado/a can be translated as “reserved”, whether it’s used with ser or estar. However, in English we used “reserved” in two quite different contexts. In Spanish, this difference is shown through the choice of verb. Let’s look at some examples:

estar reservado/a
to be booked / reserved

Lo siento señora, esta mesa está reservada. Puede sentarse en esta otra.
Sorry ma’am, this table is reserved. You can sit at this other one.

ser reservado/a
to be discreet / reserved (in personality)

Luis es muy reservado, nunca nos cuenta nada.
Luis is very reserved, he never tells us anything.

Here’s something interestingThere are some adjectives that can be equally used with ser and estar, and their meaning doesn’t change. For example:

soltero/a
single

casado/a
married

divorciado/a
divorced

viudo/a
widowed

jubilado/a
retired

In conclusionPay special attention to how you use ser and estar and you will be well on your way to fixing one of the most common mistakes made by Spanish learners.

We hope you found this post interesting. Make sure to listen to the full episode with Mark and Concha on The Coffee Break Spanish Show. This is the series in which we look at a range of topics for Spanish learners, so make sure to subscribe to our podcast feed and our channel on YouTube.

Happy Coffee Breaking!

Listen to the podcastThe post 6 Spanish words that change meaning with ‘ser’ and ‘estar’ appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In this episode, we’re moving on to the topic of drinks so you can enjoy a Gaelic coffee break! You’ll learn the words for different types of drinks in Gaelic and how to ask and answer the question “what do you want?”

The post CBGa 1.19 | Offering drinks in Gaelic appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

There are various ways the infinitive form of verbs can be used in German: on their own as an infinitive, with zu, or with um … zu.

Remember that the infinitive form of a verb is the base form that you would find in a dictionary.

The Coffee Break German Show is a podcast series of bite-sized, friendly conversations, in which we demystify tricky German language topics. In the latest episode, Mark and Thomas discuss how to use the infinitive form of verbs in German sentences.

Continue reading to find out more and why not listen to the podcast as you go?

How do you use the infinitive in German?Using the correct form of verbs in German will ensure that you are understood. There are several occasions when you would want to use the verb in the infinitive, but what are they?

There are three ways to use the infinitive form of verbs in sentences in German:

Use the infinitive on its own
Use zu + the infinitive
Use um … zu + the infinitive

Let’s look at these one by one.

Infinitive verbs on their ownLet’s take the following verb as our example infinitive:

verbessern
to improve

This is the infinitive form on its own and it is the form you will see in a dictionary. It remains in this form, no matter what the tense is.

We would see the verb used in this form with auxiliary verbs, for example:

Wir werden unser Deutsch verbessern.
We will improve our German.

You also see this when the infinitive form of a verb is combined with a modal verb. They don’t require a zu clause, as they operate as auxiliary verbs combined with an infinitive. For example:

Wir müssen üben.
We have to practise.

The infinitive with ‘zu’Sometimes when the infinitive form of the verb is in a sentence, we need zu with the infinitive. Here are some examples:

Wir vergessen jedes mal, die Fenster zu schließen.
We forget to close the windows every time.

Du hast mir versprochen, dein Zimmer aufzuräumen.
You promised me that you would tidy your room.

Er freut sich dich wieder zu sehen.
He is looking forward to seeing you again.

In the podcast episode, Thomas points out that in these sentences there is usually a comma separating the two parts of the sentence – the part containing the zu + infinitive is in a “separate clause” from the main clause.

A great way to think about this is that the sentences that need zu with the infinitive ask “what?”.

From the examples above, think about the question “what did we forget?”, “what did you promise?”, and “what is he looking forward to?”. The answer always involves “to…”, so in the above examples, the answers will be “to close the windows”, “to tidy the room”, and “to see you again”.

Sentences with ‘um … zu’If the zu + infinitive construction answers the question “what?”, the um … zu + infinitive construction answers the question “why?” or “for what purpose?”. This construction is often translated as “in order to” in English. Let’s look at some examples:

Sie fahren nach München, um ihre Oma zu besuchen.
They are travelling to Munich to see their granny.

Ich gehe Tomaten kaufen, um einen Salat zu machen.
I am going to buy tomatoes to make a salad.

Note that there is a comma between the two parts of the sentence, just as we saw with the zu + infinitive construction.

‘Zu’ and ‘um … zu’ combinedIn the episode, Thomas points out that both zu + infinitive and um … zu + infinitive can appear in one sentence. For example:

Heute lernen wir, Infinitivsätze zu benutzen, um unser Deutsch noch zu verbessern.
Today, we are learning to use infinitive sentences to improve our German.

Morgen werden wir noch mehr Infinitivsätze benutzen, um unser Deutsch noch mehr zu verbessern.
Tomorrow, we will use even more infinitive sentences to improve our German even more.

In conclusionWe hope this has helped you become more confident in knowing when to use the infinitive in your German conversations.

Don’t be afraid to make mistakes – it’s all part of the language-learning journey and the more you practise using these constructions in German, the more natural they will become.

If you found this post interesting, make sure to listen to the full episode with Mark and Thomas on The Coffee Break German Show. This is the series in which we look at a range of topics for German learners, so make sure to subscribe to our podcast feed and our channel on YouTube.

Happy Coffee Breaking!

Listen to the podcastThe post ‘Zu’ and ‘um … zu’ constructions in German appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Have you ever found yourself tongue-tied when trying to pronounce the Italian sound gli?

You’re not alone! Gli is considered one of the trickiest sounds to master in Italian, mainly because it’s not commonly found in many other languages. But there’s no need to worry, as there are some techniques that you can learn to help you pronounce this sound, which we’re going to look at today.

The Coffee Break Italian Show is a podcast series of bite-sized, friendly conversations in which we demystify tricky Italian language topics. In the latest episode, Mark and Francesca unravel the mystery of how to pronounce gli.

This sound is not confined to the definite article gli, as you will also find it in other words like figlio (“son”), scoglio (“rock / cliff”), maniglia (“handle”) and, yes, even tagliatelle.

Continue reading to find out more, and why not listen to the podcast as you go?

What’s the difference between ‘GLI’ and ‘L’?If you want to perfect your pronunciation, you’ll have to do some tongue gymnastics. Just like when you are serious about going to the gym, for example, you need to train your mind to understand what is going on and the muscles that you are moving.

Let’s learn how to pronounce the sound gli by looking at a similar sound: l. Try to pronounce the following words:

filo thread

pala
shovel, spade

Be conscious of what is happening in your mouth. Your tongue is behind your teeth and to the front of the palate.

Now let’s try to pronounce gli. Focus on the movement we’ve observed when saying l. Try to spread your tongue across the palate, taking up more space, and push it a little bit more towards your front teeth. You should feel a little bit of breath coming from the sides of your mouth.

In the podcast episode, Francesca shares a useful tip to help you pronounce gli: try to smile!

Let’s practise ‘gli’Now let’s practise by reading these words out loud:

figli
children, sons

mogli
wives

scogli
rocks, cliffs

Note that you can have another vowel after the sound gli. In these cases, the letter i is there for phonetic reasons, so you shouldn’t emphasise the i while pronouncing these words:

figlio
child, son

coniglio
rabbit

moglie
wife

foglie
leaves

tovaglia
tablecloth

voglia
desire, want

You should now feel the difference between words containing gli or l. For example, try pronouncing the following pairs of words to feel the difference:

filithreads

figli
children, sons

scoli
you drain

scogli
rocks, cliffs

‘Gli’ at the start of a word Francesca and Mark also mention that the sound gli is never at the start of a word, unless it’s the definite article or the pronoun gli. (Speaking of the article gli, our previous episode of The Coffee Break Italian Show was all about Italian definite articles, so if you’d like more information on this, you can find the episode by clicking here.)

When the letters gli come at the beginning of a word, we pronounce a hard g sound. For example:

glicine
wisteria

glissare
to skirt (an issue), to move forward, to gloss over

In these examples, the combination of the letters gl (without an i) is pronounced with a hard g sound, just like in the following words:

inglese
English

gladiatore
gladiator

glutine
gluten

globo
globe

Regional differencesOne more point to note: in certain regions of Italy, for example in the Marche region, people pronounce gli differently, similar to the sound of “y” at the beginning of words in English.

Ecco fattoThere you have it, our crash course on mastering the Italian gli sound.

We hope you found this lesson informative and helpful as you embark on your Italian pronunciation journey. Remember, while it may seem challenging at first, with practice and a keen ear, you’ll soon find yourself pronouncing gli like a native speaker.

If you found this interesting, make sure you listen to the full podcast episode with Mark and Francesca on The Coffee Break Italian Show. We will be regularly uploading more episodes for Italian learners, so make sure to subscribe to our podcast feed and our channel on YouTube to find out when the next episode is available.

Happy Coffee Breaking!

Listen to the podcastThe post How to pronounce ‘gli’ in Italian appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

This lesson of Coffee Break Portuguese is all about travel. Join Rafael and Ava to learn the phrases you need to know when dealing with travel situations in a Portuguese-speaking country, including using public transport and buying travel tickets. We’ll also listen to a practice dialogue set in a train station and hear from Catarina in today’s Cafezinho com Catarina, in which she tells us a little more about the Azores.

The post CBP 1.19 | Travelling by public transport appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Knowing when to use qui and when to use que is a tricky topic for many French learners.

In this article we’re going to practise qui and que to help you know when to use each of them.

The Coffee Break French Show is a podcast series of bite-sized, friendly conversations, in which we demystify tricky French language topics. In the latest episode, Mark and Max continue their discussion of qui and que and how to choose between them when speaking French. This episode is the second part of a double episode on this topic. So, before we start, if you haven’t already watched our other episode on this topic, or read its accompanying blog article, you can find it here.

Continue reading to find out more and why not listen to the podcast as you go?

Let’s start with a quick recap.

‘Qui’ replaces a subjectWhen replacing a subject, qui connects actions to the subject. For instance, pay attention to how qui is used to connect the following sentences:

Je téléphone à mon ami. Mon ami habite à Londres.
I’m phoning my friend. My friend lives in London.

Je téléphone à mon ami qui habite à Londres.
I’m phoning my friend who lives in London.

‘Que’ replaces a direct objectQue, on the other hand, replaces a direct object. Let’s compare the following sentences to see how que can be introduced in order to link two sentences:

J’ai mangé un gâteau. Le gâteau est au chocolat.
I’ve eaten a cake. The cake is a chocolate cake.

Le gâteau que j’ai mangé est au chocolat.
The cake that I’ve eaten is a chocolate cake.

And remember, when the word following que starts with a vowel, que becomes qu’.

Let’s practise ‘qui’ and ‘que’In this podcast episode, Mark and Max put theory into practice with a fill-in-the-gaps exercise. Let’s have a look at the text they tackle:

J’ai un ami _ habite dans une petite maison _ j’adore visiter. Il a un chien _ je trouve très mignon. Le chien, _ j’ai rencontré hier, est très joueur. Mon ami, _ est passionné par la musique, joue du piano _ ses parents lui ont offert. Il a une sœur _ je connais depuis l’enfance. Sa sœur, _ est médecin, travaille dans un hôpital _ je n’ai jamais visité. Mon ami et sa sœur ont des parents _ sont très sympathiques. Les parents, _ j’ai rencontrés hier soir, m’ont invité à dîner ce week-end. C’est une famille _ j’apprécie énormément.

Our tip is that when you find yourself in a situation where you have to pick between qui and que, the very next word can help you make your choice. If the word that follows is a subject (e.g. je, tu, il, mon frère, Jeanne et Serge), choose que. If the next word is a conjugated verb or a pronoun, it is most likely to be qui.

Have a go at making the paragraph flow more naturally by using qui and que. You can check your answers at the end of this blog article, along with the English translation.

In conclusionRemember, when faced with the choice between qui and que, let the context guide you. It may help you to memorise pairs of examples, like the ones used in this episode.

Don’t worry if you make mistakes with qui and que, French speakers will still understand you. The important thing is to practise and you will improve. Embrace the learning process, practise regularly, and soon, the distinctions between qui and que will become second nature.

Happy Coffee Breaking!

PS. Here is the full paragraph with the gaps completed with qui and que:

J’ai un ami qui habite dans une petite maison que j’adore visiter. Il a un chien que je trouve très mignon. Le chien, que j’ai rencontré hier, est très joueur. Mon ami, qui est passionné par la musique, joue du piano que ses parents lui ont offert. Il a une sœur que je connais depuis l’enfance. Sa sœur, qui est médecin, travaille dans un hôpital que je n’ai jamais visité. Mon ami et sa sœur ont des parents qui sont très sympathiques. Les parents, que j’ai rencontrés hier soir, m’ont invité à dîner ce week-end. C’est une famille que j’apprécie énormément.

Here’s an English translation:

I have a friend who lives in a small house that I love to visit. He has a dog whom I find very cute. The dog, whom I met yesterday, is very playful. My friend, who is passionate about music, plays the piano that his parents gave him. He has a sister whom I have known since childhood. His sister, who is a doctor, works in a hospital that I have never visited. My friend and his sister have parents who are very friendly. The parents, whom I met last night, invited me to dinner this weekend. It’s a family that I greatly appreciate.*

*Note that while “whom” is strictly the correct word to use when referring to the object of the sentence in English, outside formal contexts we very often hear “who” being used instead nowadays.

Listen to the podcastThe post Practising relative pronouns: ‘qui’ and ‘que’ appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Do you know when to use in, on, and at in English?

These little words are called prepositions. They can be difficult to use correctly, because they appear very often, and there aren’t many rules to follow!

The Coffee Break English Show is a podcast series of bite-sized, friendly conversations to help you understand some difficult topics in English. In the latest episode, Josie and Maurizio talk about the rules for when to use in, on, and at when we talk about time, and they give examples to help you understand.

Continue reading to find out more and why not listen to the podcast as you go?

So, let’s get started and look at in, on, and at!

‘In’ for general time periodsWe use the preposition in to talk about general, or “big” time periods. Here are some examples of these time periods.

‘In’ for yearsWe use in with years. For example:

I went on holiday in 2023.

He was born in 1995.

‘In’ for decades and centuriesWe also use in to talk about decades (groups of 10 years) and centuries (groups of 100 years). Let’s look at some examples:

I was born in the 1990s.

The Beatles became popular in the 1960s.

We are in the 21st century.

The first man walked on the moon in the 20th century.

‘In’ for months and seasonsWhen we are talking about months and seasons in the year, we also use in. For example:

We usually go on holiday in June.

School starts in September.

My birthday is in the summer.

It sometimes snows in the winter.

‘In’ for times of the dayWe also use in when we are talking generally about times of the day. Let’s see some more examples:

The sun rises in the morning.

I usually exercise in the afternoon.

He always takes a shower in the evening.

Watch out! We say in the morning, in the evening, and in the afternoon. But we don’t say ~~in the night~~, we say at night.

‘On’ for more specific periods of timeAre you following so far? Maybe you need a refill of tea or coffee! Let’s continue…

We use the preposition on to talk about time periods that are less general than those with in. Here are some examples of these time periods.

‘On’ for days of the week and times within days of the weekWe use on to talk about days of the week. We also use on when we mention times of the day within a specific day of the week.

A good rule to follow is: if we use the name of the day, we must use on.

Here are some examples:

I do yoga on Mondays.

Let’s meet up on Saturday.

On Sunday mornings she gets up late.

We are going out on Friday night.

‘On’ for special daysWe also use on to talk about special days, like holidays and festivals. For example:

I eat lots of food on Christmas Day.

On Valentine’s Day, lots of people send cards and flowers.

We always have a big party on New Year’s Eve.

Watch out! We only use on with special days when the name includes the words day or eve. For holiday periods, we use at. This is explained in more detail later in the article.

‘On’ for datesWe use on for dates. Here are some examples:

My birthday is on June the 10th.

The election will be on the 21st of October.

‘At’ for the most specific periods of timeSo far, we have looked at in for general periods of time, and on for more specific periods of time. Finally, let’s focus on at. We use at for periods of time that are even more specific, and “smaller” than those with in and on.

‘At’ for timesWe use at to talk about precise times. Let’s see some more examples:

I finish work at 4 o’clock.

My nephew was born at 10.32 am.

We also use at to talk about specific points in the day. These may happen at different times. For example:

He always gets up at sunrise.

The beach is beautiful at sunset.

I talk to my colleagues at lunchtime.

‘At’ for holiday and festival periodsEarlier in this article, we learned about using on for holidays and special days, like on Christmas Day. But when we talk about holidays and festival periods, without using the words day or eve, we use at. Let’s look at a few examples:

We always take time off work at Christmas.

At Diwali, lots of people decorate their homes with lights.

I’m visiting my family at Ramadan this year.

It’s your turn!Now, let’s practise! Here are three questions. Answer them so that they are true for you, using in, on, or at. Some possible answers are at the end of this blog post, but don’t look until you’ve thought about your answers!

What time do you start work?
When is your birthday?
When do you watch TV during the day?

If you found this post interesting, make sure you listen to the full podcast episode with Josie and Maurizio on The Coffee Break English Show. We will release more episodes soon, about some more useful topics! Subscribe to our podcast feed and our channel on YouTube to learn when the next episode is available.

So, keep practising in, on, and at! Remember that all English learners make mistakes, but people can usually still understand you. It’s all part of the language-learning journey.

Happy Coffee Breaking!

PS. Here are some possible answers to the test.

I usually start work at about 8.30 am, but on Fridays I start at 9 am.
My birthday is on the 10th of May. I was born in 1995.
I usually watch TV in the evenings or at night, and I never watch TV in the mornings.

Listen to the podcastThe post When to use ‘in’, ‘on’ or ‘at’ with time appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

¿Ser o estar? That is the question.

As you may already know, in Spanish there are two verbs that translate as “to be”, and knowing which to choose in each situation can be one of the biggest challenges for Spanish learners.

The Coffee Break Spanish Show is a podcast series of short, informal conversations to help you understand some difficult topics in Spanish. In the latest episode, Mark and Concha help us to better understand these two verbs and decide in which moments to use ser and when to choose estar.

Continue reading to find out more and why not listen to the podcast as you go?

Identity and circumstanceIt is often taught that ser is used to describe something that is permanent and estar is for something that is temporary. In the episode, Concha proposes a different way to think about this:

ser – identity (as opposed to permanent)
estar – circumstance (as opposed to temporary)

SerLet’s look at the following description of Concha’s cousin and consider why we use ser in this situation:

Mi prima es española, es rubia, es guapa y es estudiante.My cousin is Spanish, blonde, pretty and she’s a student.

Here, ser is used because we are identifying Concha’s cousin. Not only are we describing her nationality (es española) and her physical traits (es rubia, es guapa), but we are also saying what she does (es estudiante). It’s like playing ‘Guess who?’.

However, let’s focus on es estudiante, because here is where things get interesting. At the time we are describing Concha’s cousin, she is a student, but she will become a lawyer in a couple of years. Entonces, if it’s not something permanent, ¿por qué usamos ser? Well, we use ser because at the time of the description, she identifies herself as a student – she is not a lawyer yet!

This is a great example of why saying that ser is ‘identity’ can sometimes be a more useful way of thinking about it than ‘permanent’.

EstarAnother example will help us here, so that we can compare ser with estar. Let’s imagine Mark has a friend called Roberta, and he tells us:

Roberta es alta, es rubia y es simpática.
Roberta is tall, blonde and friendly.

Let’s say the same Roberta decided to change her hair, and when Concha saw her for the first time, she was not very friendly with her. Then, Concha would tell us:

Roberta es alta, es pelirroja y es antipática.
Roberta is tall, red-haired and unfriendly.

Mark saw her that very same day, but his description would be:

Roberta es alta, está pelirroja y está antipática.
Roberta is tall, red-haired and unfriendly.

As we can see, Mark has changed ser for estar. He says está pelirroja because he knows she used to be blonde, and he says está antipática because Roberta is a nice person, but that day she wasn’t as nice as usual.

These two changes in the verb are because the circumstances have changed for Mark (but not for Concha) and now Roberta has red hair and is unfriendly.

We can clearly see this contrast in these sentences:

El cielo es azul pero hoy está gris.
The sky is blue but today it’s grey.

La sala es grande y hoy está llena.
The room is big but today it’s full.

You might notice that hoy (“today”) helps to show that the meaning of something is circumstantial and may change.

¡Hora de practicar!Now it’s time to test yourself! ¡Vamos a ponernos a prueba! Translate the following sentences into Spanish. You’ll find the answers at the end of the article. ¡Mucha suerte!

Pedro is a healthy boy, but today he is sick.
Normally, you are serious, but today you are funny. (Use either tú or usted.)

We hope that you found this article useful. Make sure to listen to the full episode with Mark and Concha on The Coffee Break Spanish Show. In our next episode, we’ll be continuing with this topic and we’ll be exploring situations in which the choice of ser or estar changes the meaning of a phrase. Subscribe to our podcast feed and our channel on YouTube so that you know when the next episode is available.

Keep practising using ser and estar, and whenever you’re unsure which to use, just think about whether it’s a question of identity or circumstance.

Happy Coffee Breaking!

PS. Here are the answers to the translation challenge.

Pedro is a healthy boy, but today he is sick. – Pedro es un chico sano pero hoy está enfermo.
Normally, you are serious, but today you are funny. – Normalmente, eres serio, pero hoy estás gracioso. / Normalmente, es serio, pero hoy está gracioso.

Listen to the podcastThe post When to use ‘ser’ and ‘estar’ in Spanish appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

You may have already come across some long German words in your experience as a German learner – and they can be very long!

Why does this happen? It’s mostly because German allows us to join different words together to form a new one, called a compound word.

The Coffee Break German Show is a podcast series of bite-sized, friendly conversations, in which we demystify tricky German language topics. In the latest episode, Thomas and Olivera discuss how to construct and understand German compound words.

They discuss the rules for forming these words by looking at the most common group of them – the compound nouns.

Continue reading to find out more and why not listen to the podcast as you go?

What are compound nouns?Let’s start off with a couple of examples of compound nouns, so that you can see what they are and how they work:

das Stachelschwein (der Stachel + das Schwein)porcupine (spike + pig)

der Bahnhof (die Bahn + der Hof)
the railway station  (railway + yard)

An important tip is to start by looking at the last word in the chain of words. This is useful for a number of reasons:

This last part determines the gender of the noun.
It also determines how you would form the plural.
It gives the greatest clue as to what you are talking about (often the words before it just narrow down details or qualify that last part).

Let’s take a few compound nouns that have the same ending. You can see how the first part of each word gives the details that differentiate the nouns from one another:

die Sprachschule
language school

die Grundschule
primary school

die Hauptschule
high school

Note that compound nouns can contain other elements than just nouns. This includes verbs, adjectives, and prepositions. However, the last element is always a noun.

Let’s look at some examples of these.

Nouns formed with adjectivesHere are some examples of compound nouns formed with an adjective:

das Hochhaus
skyscraper (literally, “high house”)

der Feinschmecker
gourmet (literally, “fine taster”)

Nouns formed with verbsThe following compound nouns are formed using a verb:

der Schwimmunterricht
swimming lesson

die Sprechblase
speech bubble

Nouns formed with more than two wordsIt is also common to have compound nouns formed with more than two words. For example:

das Geburtstagsgeschenk  (Geburt + Tag + Geschenk)
birthday present  (birth + day + present)

To make the compound noun plural, you only have to make the last word plural. So, in the case of the previous example, it would be:

die Geburtstagsgeschenke
birthday presents

There are also some compound nouns that are made up of two or more individual parts and which don’t make sense if you translate them literally, but instead are used as metaphors. For example:

die Saukälte
really cold

der Mordsspaß
a lot of fun

Time to test yourselfLet’s work out the meaning of the following compound nouns. When you’re ready, scroll down to the bottom of the article to find the answers.

der Marmeladenglasverschluss
der Haustürschlüssel
die Donaudampfschiffahrtselektrizitätenhauptbetriebswerkbauunterbeamtengesellschaft

Let’s reviewAlthough they can seem daunting, once you get the hang of compound nouns in German, you will find them quite natural. It’s all about practice!

If you found this post interesting, make sure to listen to the full episode with Thomas and Olivera on The Coffee Break German Show. This is the series in which we look at a range of topics for German learners, so make sure to subscribe to our podcast feed and our channel on YouTube.

Happy Coffee Breaking!

PS. Here are the answers to our challenge:

der Marmeladenglasverschluss – jam jar lid
der Haustürschlüssel – house / front door key
die Donaudampfschiffahrtselektrizitätenhauptbetriebswerkbauunterbeamtengesellschaft – Association for subordinate officials of the main maintenance building of the Danube steam shipping electrical servicesThis one was even a challenge for Thomas and Olivera, so well done if you managed to piece together even some of the elements. This word is a great example of just how long German compound nouns can be!

Listen to our podcastThe post Compound nouns – breaking down long German words appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

How do we translate “the” into Italian?

There are, in fact, seven options, and it depends on the grammatical gender (masculine or feminine) and the number (singular or plural) of the noun.

Continue reading to find out more, and why not listen to the podcast as you go?

Let’s see the rules to follow to choose the right definite article in Italian every time!

“The” with singular Italian nounsLet’s start with singular nouns.

We have to take into account whether the grammatical gender of the noun is masculine or feminine. Then, when it comes to masculine nouns, the first letter or letters of the word also play into which definite article to choose.

Masculine singularilWe use il for most masculine singular nouns. For example:

il ragazzo
the boy

il libro
the book

il pescethe fish

loWe use lo for masculine singular nouns starting with s+consonant, z, y, x, ps, pn, gn. For example:

lo studente
the student

lo spettacolo
the show

lo scatolone
the big box

lo gnocco
the potato dumpling

lo gnomothe gnome

lo psicologothe psychologist

lo zaino
the rucksack

lo zucchero
the sugar

lo yogurt
the yoghurt

l’We use l’ for masculine singular nouns starting with a vowel. For example:

l’amico
the (male) friend

l’elefante
the elephant

l’ombrello
the umbrella

l’uomo
the man

Feminine singularlaWe use la for most feminine singular nouns. For example:

la ragazza
the girl

la penna
the pen

la stazione
the station

la zia
the aunt

l’We also use l’ for feminine singular nouns starting with a vowel. For example:

l’amica
the (female) friend

l’Italia
Italy

l’uva
the grape

l’emozione
the emotion

“The” with plural Italian nounsWith plural nouns, we also have to take into account whether they are masculine or feminine, and the letter with which they begin.

Masculine pluraliWe use i (plural of il) for most masculine plural nouns. For example:

i ragazzi
the boys

i libri
the books

gliWe use gli (plural of lo and l’) for masculine plural nouns starting with s+consonant, z, y, x, ps, pn, gn, or a vowel. For example:

gli studenti
the students

gli zaini
the rucksacks

gli gnocchi
the potato dumplings

gli psicologici
the psychologists

gli amici
the friends (male or mixed group)

gli elefanti
the elephants

gli ombrelli
the umbrellas

gli uomini
the men

Feminine pluralleWe use le (plural of la and l’) for all feminine plural nouns. For example:

le ragazze
the girls

le penne
the pens

le amichethe (female) friends

When to use the definite article in ItalianLet’s look at some situations in which the definite article is used in Italian but not in English.

In Italian, you use the article with:

Continents, countries, states, nations, regionsFor example:

la Francia
France

il Regno Unito
the UK

gli Stati Uniti
the USA

lo Sri Lanka
Sri Lanka

la Toscana
Tuscany

la Sicilia
Sicily

il Piemonte
Piedmont

le Marche
Marche

il Texas
Texas

il Devon
Devon

la Cornovaglia
Cornwall

Rivers, mountains, seas, lakes, volcanoes, islandsFor example:

il Po
the Po

il Tamigi
the Thames

la Senna
the Seine

il Monte Bianco
Mont Blanc

l’Everest
Everest

We would see the definite article being used in the following sentence, for example:

L’Italia è un bellissimo paese.
Italy is a beautiful country.

However, in Italian, you don’t use the article with cities. For example:

Roma
Rome

Torino
Turin

Napoli
Naples

Note that there are some exceptions. For example:

La Spezia
La Spezia

Il Cairo
Cairo

It’s worth noting that you do use the definite article before a city when you want to talk about its football club. For example: la Roma, il Torino, il Napoli.

È tutto per oggi!While this might seem like a lot of information, these little words are used all the time in Italian, so you will gradually get used to seeing and using them.

The best way to improve is to try to put them into practice and remember: if you make mistakes, that’s a normal part of learning. Italian speakers will be likely to still understand you, anyway.

Make sure to listen to the full podcast episode that accompanies this blog article with Mark and Francesca on The Coffee Break Italian Show. This is the series in which we look at a range of topics for Italian learners, so subscribe to our podcast feed and our channel on YouTube to find out when the next episode is available.

Happy Coffee Breaking!

Listen to the podcastThe post How do you say “the” in Italian? appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Do you know the difference between qui and que?

Both qui and que are relative pronouns – designed to replace a noun in a sentence – yet, each has its distinct role.

When to use qui and when to use que is one of the questions we get asked the most by our Coffee Break French community. So, let’s explore both words so that we can better understand when to use each of them.

Grasping the subtle differences between qui and que is a key step towards mastering French grammar. Continue reading to find out more and why not listen to the podcast as you go?

Using ‘qui’ to replace a subjectStarting with qui, this relative pronoun comes into play when replacing a subject – the thing that is carrying out the action of a verb. Qui can mean “who”, “which” or “that”.

For example, consider the following sentences.

Je parle à mon frère. Mon frère habite à Toulouse.
I am speaking to my brother. My brother lives in Toulouse.

By combining them, you get:

Je parle à mon frère qui habite à Toulouse.
I’m speaking to my brother who lives in Toulouse.

The use of qui helps to link the two sentences together. The brother is the person carrying out the action that follows in the next part of the sentence (in this case, living). This means that he is the subject of the verb habiter. So, when mon frère is replaced by a relative pronoun (to replace “my brother” with “who”) the relative pronoun has to be qui.

Using ‘que’ to replace a direct objectNow, let’s turn our attention to que, which replaces a direct object – the thing that is receiving the action of a verb. Que can mean “which”, “that” or “whom”.

Let’s look at the following sentences:

J’ai acheté un manteau. Le manteau est blanc.
I bought a coat. The coat is white.

When merged, you get:

Le manteau que j’ai acheté est blanc.
The coat that I bought is white.

Here, que replaces the direct object le manteau. This helps with clarity and conciseness.

The coat is the thing that is being bought. This means that it is the object of the verb acheter. So, when le manteau is replaced by a relative pronoun (to replace “the coat” with “that” or “which”) the relative pronoun has to be que.

Note that when preceding a vowel, que transforms into qu’. Qui, on the other hand, never changes when preceding a vowel.

A useful tipIn the episode, Mark shares a useful tip to help you know when to use qui and when to use que.

If the relative pronoun is followed immediately by a verb or a pronoun (for example, habiter, être or me, lui, y) then it is most likely to be qui. If the relative pronoun is followed immediately by a subject (for example, Jean, mon frère, je) then it has to be que.

More examples of ‘qui’ and ‘que’To solidify our understanding, let’s explore a couple of additional examples.

J’ai un ami qui parle allemand et qui habite à Berlin.
I have a friend who speaks German and lives in Berlin.

C’est le film que j’ai regardé hier et que j’ai adoré.It’s the film that I watched yesterday and loved.

These examples highlight the versatility of qui and que in constructing meaningful and precise sentences.

In conclusionMake sure to listen to the full episode with Mark and Max on The Coffee Break French Show. This is the series in which we look at a range of topics for French learners, so make sure to subscribe to our podcast feed and our channel on YouTube.

Qui and que are linguistic tools that will help you sound more confident when communicating in French. Keep exploring, keep learning, and enjoy the journey of mastering the French language!

Happy Coffee Breaking!

Listen to the podcastThe post When to use ‘qui’ and ‘que’: French relative pronouns appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Do you know when to use is it? at the end of a phrase in English?

Is it? is a question tag. Question tags can be a little difficult to use in English, but once you understand the rules, they are very useful.

The Coffee Break English Show is a podcast series of bite-sized, friendly conversations to help you understand some difficult topics in English. In the latest episode, Josie and Mark talk about the rules for how to use question tags, and give some examples to practise.

Continue reading to find out more and why not listen to the podcast as you go?

So, now we can start looking at question tags, can’t we?

How to use question tagsQuestion tags are like “mini-questions”, which we add onto the end of phrases or sentences to check that the information we are giving is correct.

For example, if I think it is not raining outside, but I want to check that I am right, I can say:

It’s not raining, is it?

Is it? is a question tag. All question tags are made of a verb and the subject from the main sentence.

When the first verb in the sentence is in the negative form, the question tag is in the affirmative form, like in the example above. However, when the first verb is in the affirmative form, the question tag is in the negative form, like this:

It’s raining outside, isn’t it?

Now, let’s talk about how to make question tags. The rules depend on the first verb in the main sentence.

Question tags with the verb ‘be’When the first verb in the main sentence is be, this is the verb that we use in the question tag. Here are some examples:

She is a doctor, isn’t she?

We are not late, are we?

You’re going running this evening, aren’t you?

I’m not wrong, am I?

Question tags with modal verbs and auxiliary verbsWhen the first verb in the main sentence is a modal verb or an auxiliary verb, we use this verb in the question tag.

Remember, modal verbs are verbs that we put before the main verb, to add a “flavour” of meaning, like possibility, obligation, or probability. Some examples are must, should, can, would and will.

Auxiliary verbs are verbs that we use to build verb tenses, like have.

Let’s look at some examples:

You can speak Spanish, can’t you?

You can’t tap dance, can you?

We should shut the door, shouldn’t we?

I shouldn’t go to bed late, should I?

You have been to Paris, haven’t you?

We haven’t seen that movie, have we?

Question tags with present simple verbsWhen the first verb in the main sentence is in the present simple, we use do, does, don’t or doesn’t in the question tag. Here are some examples:

You like pizza, don’t you?

He doesn’t play the piano, does he?

Question tags with past simple verbsWhen the first verb in the main sentence is in the past simple, we use did or didn’t in the question tag. Here are some examples:

You read that book, didn’t you?

You didn’t go to Spain, did you?

It’s your turn, isn’t it?Now, let’s practise! Here are five sentences. Complete each of them with a question tag. The answers are at the end of this blog post, but don’t look until you’ve thought about the answers!

Mark is from Scotland, … ?
You don’t like fish, … ?
You can speak ten languages, … ?
Josie has never been skiing, … ?
They went to Manchester at the weekend, … ?

We’ve not finished already, have we?Question tags can be difficult to think of fast when you are speaking, so why not review the rules and write your own example sentences using question tags?

If you found this post interesting, make sure you listen to the full podcast episode with Mark and Josie on The Coffee Break English Show. We will release more episodes soon, about some more useful topics! Subscribe to our podcast feed and our channel on YouTube to learn when the next episode is available.

So, keep practising question tags! Remember that all English learners make mistakes, but people can usually still understand you. It’s all part of the language-learning journey.

Happy Coffee Breaking!

PS. Here are the answers to the test.

Mark is from Scotland, isn’t he?
You don’t like fish, do you?
You can speak ten languages, can’t you?
Josie has never been skiing, has she?
They went to Manchester at the weekend, didn’t they?

Listen to the podcastThe post Question tags: when to say ‘is it?’ at the end of a sentence appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

When it comes to Spanish pronunciation, some aspects of it are relatively easy to get your head around. However, at times, things can get a little tricky when it comes to knowing which syllable to stress when pronouncing a word in Spanish.

Like in English, the stress of words is not always on the same syllable. On top of this, what happens with the accents when written? Have you ever wondered why some words have an accent on the stressed vowel and why other words don’t?

The Coffee Break Spanish Show is a podcast series of short, informal conversations to help you understand some difficult topics in Spanish. In the latest episode, Mark and Concha look at where the stress can be in a Spanish word and learn when to use accent marks on vowels.

Continue reading to find out more and why not listen to the podcast as you go?

To make this easier, we can divide all Spanish words into four categories, depending on which syllable of a word is stressed.

1 – agudaWhen a word has the stress on the final syllable, it is called aguda. Agudas have an accent on the vowel of the final syllable when the word ends in -n, -s or a vowel. Here are some examples of agudas:

mujerwomanThe stress is muJER, but there’s no accent because it ends in -r.

ajedrezchessThe stress is ajeDREZ, but there’s no accent because the word ends in -z.

televisióntelevision
The stress is televiSIÓN, and there’s an accent because it ends in -n.

interésinterestThe stress is inteRÉS, and there’s an accent because it ends in -s.

cafécoffeeThe stress is caFÉ, and there’s an accent because it ends in a vowel.

2 – llanaWhen a word has the stress on the second-last syllable, it is called llana. Llanas have an accent on the penultimate syllable when the word doesn’t end in -n, -s or a vowel. Here are some examples:

volumenvolumeThe stress is voLUmen, and there’s no accent because the word ends in -n.

estatuasstatues
The stress is esTAtuas, and there’s no accent because the word ends in -s.

cajaboxThe stress is CAja, and there’s no accent because the word ends in a vowel.

dólardollarThe stress is DÓlar, and there’s an accent because the word ends in -r.

móvilmobileThe stress is MÓvil, and there’s an accent because the word ends in -l.

3 – esdrújulaWhen a word is stressed in the third-to-last syllable, it is called esdrújula. Esdrújulas always have an accent showing the stressed syllable. Here are some examples:

músicamusicThe stress is MÚsica.

AméricaAmericaThe stress is aMÉrica.

miércolesWednesdayThe stress is MIÉRcoles.

¡Cuidado! Sometimes, forming the plural of a word can add another syllable, making the word require an accent when before it didn’t need one.

Here’s an example:

examenexamThe stress is eXAmen, so it’s llana and it doesn’t have an accent because it ends in -n.

exámenes
examsThe stress is eXÁmenes, so it’s esdrújula and so it does have an accent.

Something similar happens with an infinitive form of the verb when we use more than one pronoun:

dártelo (dar + te + lo)
to give it to you

4 – sobresdrújulaOccasionally, we are going to find words that are stressed on the fourth-to-last syllable. This type of stress is called sobresdrújula. These types of words always have an accent mark and they are often found in verbs with pronouns. For example:

devuélvemelo (devolver in the imperative form + me + lo)
give it back to me

comprándotelo (comprar in the gerund form + te + lo)
buying it for you

The other situation where we find this stress pattern is in adverbs ending in -mente. When forming adverbs in -mente, the adjective retains the same accented syllable as before and so we don’t ever need to add or take away an accent when written. So, that’s why we have:

fácilmente (fácil + mente)
easily

difícilmente (difícil + mente)
with difficulty

lentamente (lento + mente)
slowly

¡Un consejo! With a very long word, we recommend practising by splitting it into chunks of two or three syllables and saying them out loud individually until you can combine them. Por ejemplo:

devuélvemelo > devuelve-melo

comprándotelo > comprando-telo

¡Hora de practicar!Now it’s time to put your knowledge to the test! Translate the following phrases into Spanish. Think carefully about where to place any accents and which syllable to stress when saying each word out loud. You’ll find the answers at the end of this article.

immediately
write it (la carta) to me
say it (el mensaje) to him

Scroll down for the answers to the translation challenge. Next time you read a Spanish text pay special attention to the accents and ask yourself: is it aguda, llana, esdrújula or sobresdrújula?

Happy Coffee Breaking!

PS. Here are the answers to the translation challenge.

inmediatamente (inmediata + mente)
The adjective inmediato/a is llana ending in a vowel, so there’s no accent.
escríbemela (escribe + me + la)
dímelo (di + me + lo)

Listen to the podcastThe post How to know which syllable to stress in Spanish appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

When we start to learn German, one of the most important steps is to get our heads around cases of nouns and pronouns.

For that reason, it’s time for a crash course on cases in German!

The Coffee Break German Show is a podcast series of bite-sized, friendly conversations, in which we demystify tricky German language topics. In the latest episode, Mark and Olivera discuss the four German cases and how to identify and use them.

Continue reading to find out more and why not listen to the podcast as you go?

What do cases do?Each case serves a different grammatical function and indicates the role a noun or pronoun plays in a sentence.

Let’s look at the four German cases, one by one.

Nominative case: ‘Nominativ’The nominative is used for the subject of a sentence. It represents the “doer” or the one performing the action. For example:

Der Lehrer unterrichtet.
The teacher teaches.

It’s also used for predicate nouns (that means nouns that come directly after verbs, for example sein and werden), indicating a state of being. Here are some examples:

Sie ist Lehrerin.
She is a teacher.

Mario ist ein guter Schüler.
Mario is a good student.

Accusative case: ‘Akkusativ’The accusative is used for the direct object of a sentence. It represents the noun or pronoun that receives the action of the verb. Let’s look at some examples. The noun or pronoun that is in the accusative in each German sentence is in italics.

Ich mag dich.
I like you.

Ich esse den leckeren Apfel.
I am eating the delicious apple.

It’s also used after certain prepositions indicating motion or direction:

Wir fliegen in den Urlaub.
We are flying away on holiday / vacation.

Wir gehen zu unserer Oma.
We are going to our grandma’s.

Wir fahren an den See.
We are going to the lake.

Dative case: ‘Dativ’The dative case is used for the indirect object of a sentence. It represents the noun or pronoun that benefits from the action of the verb. Take a look at the following sentences, where the examples of the dative are in italics:

Ich helfe dir.
I am helping you.

Ich schenke meiner Schwester einen Apfel.
I give an apple to my sister. (Note that the direct object, “apple”, is in the accusative.)

It’s also used after certain prepositions indicating location, time or direction:

Das Essen ist im Kühlschrank.
The food is in the fridge.

Das Buch liegt auf dem Tisch.
The book is lying on the table.

Wir sind im Theater.
We are in the theatre.

Die Kinder sind bei den Nachbarn.
The children are at the neighbours’ house.

Note that in the dative case we add an -n or -en to the end of plural nouns, as can be seen in Nachbarn.

Genitive case: ‘Genitiv’The genitive case is used to indicate possession, origin or relationships between nouns. This will become clear with some more examples. Again, we’ve put the nouns that are in the genitive in the German sentences in italics:

das Foto des Mädchens
the girl’s photo

Das ist das Hemd meines Vaters.
That is my father’s shirt.

der schönste Ort der Welt
the most beautiful place in the world

Note that when using the genitive case an -es or -s is added to the end of masculine and neuter nouns, as seen in the examples above: des Mädchens, meines Vaters.

In conclusionThere is a lot more to discover about cases, but we hope that this article and episode have given you a brief overview to help you get started.

If you found this post interesting, make sure to listen to the full episode with Mark and Olivera on The Coffee Break German Show. This is the series in which we look at a range of topics for German learners, and we’ll certainly cover German cases in more detail in future episodes, so make sure to subscribe to our podcast feed or our channel on YouTube.

Happy Coffee Breaking!

Listen to the podcastThe post An introduction to German cases appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Welcome back to another lesson of Coffee Break Gaelic! This time, Susanna and Mark are focusing on how to ask “what are you doing?” in Gaelic. By the end of this lesson, you’ll not only know how to ask this question, you’ll also be able to provide a range of answers. You’ll be one step closer to becoming a fluent Gaelic speaker!

The post CBGa 1.18 | What are you doing? – How to talk about what you are doing in Gaelic appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Welcome to lesson 18 of Coffee Break Portuguese! In this lesson we are talking about how to ask for directions and how to give directions in town. If you haven’t already listened to episode 8 of our course, we would recommend finding it wherever you’re listening to this episode, as we’ll be expanding on what we learned in that lesson. Vamos lá!

The post CBP 1.18 | Understanding and giving directions – How to give directions in Portuguese appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

There are many expressions in Italian that are used very often, but which you may have to think twice about before translating directly from English. If you want to say that you’re hungry, for example, it may take a while before it feels natural not to use the verb essere (“to be”).

In this article we are looking at everyday avere expressions. These are expressions that use the verb avere in Italian, but whose English equivalent doesn’t contain the verb “to have”.

The Coffee Break Italian Show is a podcast series of bite-sized, friendly conversations, in which we demystify tricky Italian language topics. In the latest episode, Francesca and Maurizio discuss the verb avere and some of the most common expressions featuring this verb, which don’t translate using “to have” in English. This episode is the second part of a double episode on this topic. So, before we start, if you haven’t already watched our other episode on this topic, or read its accompanying blog article, you can find it here.

When you’re ready, continue reading to find out more and why not listen to the podcast as you go?

Everyday ‘avere’ expressions: a quick recapTo help you review the expressions we discussed in our previous episode and blog article, let’s do a quick recap – cominciamo con un ripassino!

While in English you use the verb “to be” to talk about how old you are, in Italian you have to use the verb avere.

avere _ anni
to be _ years old

For example:

Ho diciotto anni. I’m eighteen years old.

The same happens with other expressions, such as:

avere caldo to be warm / hot

avere freddo
to be cold

Remember that you don’t need to worry about gender agreement with these expressions because we are using avere and not essere. For example, both Francesca and Maurizio would say ho freddo or ho caldo to say that they’re feeling cold or warm.

The following expressions also use avere, whereas in English they are translated using the verb “to be”.

avere fame
to be hungry

avere sete
to be thirsty

avere sonno to be sleepy

For example:

Abbiamo sempre sonno.
We are always sleepy.

Francesca and Maurizio also mention some other expressions, such as:

avere ragioneto be right

avere tortoto be wrong

Here are some examples:

Tu hai ragione.
You’re right.

Francesca non ha mai torto.
Francesca is never wrong.

We also use avere to express being in a hurry.

avere frettato be in a hurry

For example:

Ho fretta!
I’m in a hurry!

To say that you are scared of something, in Italian we literally say that you “have fear of” something.

avere paura (di)
to be scared (of)

For example:

Ho paura del buio. I’m scared of the dark.

Finally, to say that you need or feel like something, in Italian you literally “have need of” or “have desire of” something.

avere bisogno di
to need

avere voglia di
to feel like, to want, to fancy, to crave

For example:

Ho bisogno di aiuto.
I need help.

Ho voglia di un gelato.
I’m craving ice cream.

Ho voglia di leggere un libro.
I feel like reading a book.

Let’s practise!Now it’s time for una piccola sfida, “a little challenge”. In the second part of the podcast episode, Francesca and Maurizio challenge each other to use as many avere expressions as possible to describe how they feel in each of the scenarios they give each other.

Below are the written versions of the short paragraphs Francesca and Maurizio come up with. Why not have a go yourself and write down your own paragraph for each of the situations presented, fitting in as many avere expressions as you can?

Cominciamo!

Situation 1It’s a snowy day and you have to go to work.

Take a few minutes to write down your own answer, then take a look at what Francesca comes up with below.

Francesca’s answer:

Ho freddo. Ho voglia di un caffè / tè bollente. Ho bisogno di una giacca pesante. Ho sonno.
I’m cold. I fancy a hot coffee / tea. I need a heavy jacket. I’m sleepy.

Situation 2You’ve just come back from a hard day at work and you haven’t had your dinner yet.

How many avere expressions can you use to describe how you feel in this scenario?

Here’s Maurizio’s answer:

Ho molta fame. Ho famissima! Ho sonno perché ho lavorato. Ho voglia di una pizza. Ho bisogno di rilassarmi.I’m very hungry. I’m super hungry! I’m sleepy because I’ve worked. I’m craving a pizza. I need to relax.

Situation 3You’re on holiday on a tropical island and the sun is shining.

Here’s what Francesca comes up with:

Ho caldo. Ho bisogno della crema solare. Ho voglia di uno spritz. E anche probabilmente ho paura di scottarmi.I’m warm. I need sunscreen. I feel like a spritz. And I’m also probably afraid of getting sunburned.

Situation 4You’re moving to a new house with a friend of yours.

Have a go at writing your answer to this final challenge before looking at Maurizio’s answer below.

Maurizio’s answer:

Ho sete. Ho voglia di un bicchiere d’acqua. Devo avere pazienza perché il trasloco è stancante. Ho voglia di fare una festa.I’m thirsty. I want a glass of water. I have to be patient because moving is tiring. I want to have a party.

È tutto per oggiEd eccoci alla fine! We hope you enjoyed practising these expressions with avere. We’re sure that they will come in handy in many conversations you’ll have in Italian.

Make sure to listen to the full podcast episode that accompanies this blog article with Francesca and Maurizio on The Coffee Break Italian Show. This is the series in which we look at a range of topics for Italian learners, so subscribe to our podcast feed and our channel on YouTube to find out when the next episode is available.

Happy Coffee Breaking!

Listen to the podcastThe post ‘Avere’ expressions practice appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

French pronunciation can be a challenge, but understanding the rules regarding certain vowels and consonant combinations can make all the difference in your language-learning journey.

In this article, we’ll focus on one very common letter than can have different pronunciations, depending on accents and the letters that follow – the letter e.

The Coffee Break French Show is a podcast series of bite-sized, friendly conversations, in which we demystify tricky French language topics. In the latest episode, Mark and Max discuss how to pronounce the letter e with no accent and how to pronounce é and è, as well as looking at other letter combinations that create the same sounds.

Continue reading to find out more and be sure to listen along to the podcast episode – hearing Max’s pronunciation will be essential for you to get the most from this article.

The sound ‘é’The French letter é, with an acute accent, maintains a consistent pronunciation – the sound you hear in the word café. This sound is always the same when you encounter the letter é. Here are some examples of words containing é:

été
summer

météo
weather

déjeuner
lunch

Note, however, that there are other combinations of letters that produce exactly the same sound as the é.

We find the é sound in infinitive verbs ending in -er. For example:

parler
to speak

manger
to eat

When verbs are conjugated in the vous form, the -ez ending is also pronounced é. For example:

parlez
you speak

donnez
you give

In three-letter words, the combination -es also produces the é sound.

les
the

des
of the, some

mes
my

tesyour

ses
his, her

ces
these, those

The sound ‘è’The French letter è, with a grave accent, also remains consistent in terms of pronunciation. Make sure to listen to the audio or video version of this episode to tune into how è sounds. Here are some common nouns containing this letter and sound:

frère
brother

père
father

bière
beer

The same sound can be obtained with the two-letter combination ai. For example:

français
French

paix
peace

Another way to obtain the sound è is when the letter e is followed by two consonants. Let’s see some more examples:

merci
thanks

respect
respect

appelle
call

In addition, the letters ei are also pronounced è. For example:

neige
snow

beige
beige

peine
sorrow

Max mentions an important point in the episode: as with many pronunciation points, there are regional differences and you may hear these letters and letter combinations pronounced in different ways, depending on where you are in the French-speaking world. So, listen out for slight differences in these vowel sounds and remember that there isn’t one specific regional variety of French to learn or copy – all accents and pronunciations are correct.

The sound ‘e’The letter e, with no accent and when not part of the previously mentioned combinations, is pronounced something like an euh – exactly as it is pronounced in the French alphabet. Here are some common words that contain this sound:

petit
small

ce
this, that

le
the

Again, remember to listen to the podcast and practise this sound with Max and Mark.

In conclusionVoilà pour ce mini-guide de la lettre ‘e’ !

Mastering French pronunciation takes time and practice, but understanding these rules can significantly improve your language skills. Don’t worry if you find these sounds difficult to master – French speakers will love that you are making an effort to pronounce them correctly.

Make sure to listen to the full episode with Mark and Max on The Coffee Break French Show. This is the series in which we look at a range of topics for French learners, so make sure to subscribe to our podcast feed and our channel on YouTube.

If you’d like more help with your pronunciation of French vowel sounds, you can watch a previous episode of The Coffee Break French Show in which Max and Mark discussed the tricky sounds u and ou. Click here to find the episode and the accompanying blog article.

Keep practising your e sounds and you’ll become more confident in your ability to speak and be understood in French. Bonne chance !

Happy Coffee Breaking!

Listen to the podcastThe post Mastering French pronunciation: a comprehensive guide to the letter ‘e’ appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Do you know the difference between like and as when you’re speaking English?

Using like and as can be a difficult topic for English learners, because these words can be used in similar ways.

The Coffee Break English Show is a podcast series of bite-sized, friendly conversations to help you understand some difficult topics in English. In the latest episode, Josie and Mark talk about the rules for when to use like and as, and they give examples to help you to remember them.

Plus, don’t miss our free worksheet at the end to practise deciding between like and as in English!

So, let’s get started and look at the rules for like and as. Why not get a cup of coffee or tea to enjoy while you read and listen to the podcast episode?

Making comparisons using ‘like’ and ‘as’We use like + noun to compare two or more real things, and say that they are similar. Here are some examples:

She’s like my mother.

My shirt is like your shirt.

My perfume smells like flowers.

He looks like a famous actor.

We use like + subject + verb, or as if + subject + verb to compare something real to something imaginary, or not real. Here are some examples:

Mark, you look like you’ve seen a ghost!
Mark, you look as if you’ve seen a ghost!
= Mark looks very scared, but he hasn’t really seen a ghost.

It feels like it’s 50 degrees in this studio.
It feels as if it’s 50 degrees in this studio.
= The temperature in the studio is very hot, but it isn’t 50 degrees.

There’s just one more comparison to talk about now. We use as + adjective/adverb + as to compare two things, and say that they are equal. Here are some examples of this:

I can run as fast as you.

This pizza is as delicious as the pizza I ate in Italy.

He is not as tired as he was yesterday.

Giving examples using ‘like’ and ‘such as’We use both like and such as to give examples of things. Let’s look at some examples:

Why don’t you try a new hobby, like tennis?
Why don’t you try a new hobby, such as tennis?

I’ll bring some snacks, like popcorn.
I’ll bring some snacks, such as popcorn.

Saying something is part of a group using ‘like’We use like when we’re talking about a group of people or things, and we want to mention something which is part of that group. Here, like means “including”. Here are a few examples:

Lots of young people, like my cousin, go to university after they finish school.

Like many cities, Paris has a metro system.

Describing a job or function using ‘as’We use as to describe the job or the function of something. Let’s look at some examples:

He works as an architect.

I didn’t have a knife, so I used my spoon as a knife.

She wears an old t-shirt as pyjamas.

Using ‘as’ to mean ‘because’As can also mean “because”. Here are some examples:

I didn’t go to the beach as the weather wasn’t very good.

As I had a doctor’s appointment, I arrived late to work.

She has lots of work to catch up on, as she was on holiday last week.

Using ‘as’ to mean ‘while’ or ‘during’Finally, as can also mean “while” or “during”, so we use it when two actions happen at the same time. Here are the final examples that Josie and Mark mention in this episode:

She called her husband as she left work.

It started raining as I got home.

As we got to the station, the train was leaving.

A visual summary of when to use ‘like’ and ‘as’Keep practising using ‘like’ and ‘as’These little words can be confusing, so why not review the rules and write your own example sentences with like and as?

For a little more practice, download the free worksheet below and see how much you’ve learned about using ‘like’ and ‘as’.

So, keep practising like and as! Remember that all English learners make mistakes, but people can usually still understand you. It’s all part of the language-learning journey.

Happy Coffee Breaking!

Listen to the podcastThe post What’s the difference between ‘like’ and ‘as’? appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Spanish is a very flexible language, in the sense that we can often move things around in the sentence and change the word order. However, sometimes a different word order can result in a difference in emphasis or in meaning.

This is especially important to remember with some adverbs.

Continue reading to find out more and why not listen to the podcast as you go?

What is an adverb?First of all, let’s refresh our memory. What are adverbs and how do we use them?

Adverbs are words that modify verbs (and occasionally adjectives and other adverbs). Some examples are:

muyvery

simplemente
simply

siemprealways

a veces
sometimes

fácilmente
easily

Adverbs of quantity and mannerAdverbs of quantity and manner usually go after the verb. Let’s look at some examples:

Me gusta mucho.
I like it a lot.(Mucho is an adverb of quantity.)

Hablas bien español.
You speak Spanish well.
(Bien is an adverb of manner.)

In certain cases, you could use the adverb before the verb, but this results in a strong emphasis. For example:

Me gustan mucho los cacahuetes, pero mucho me gustan.
I like peanuts a lot – I really like them.

Some adverbs that go with a direct object could have three different placements:

Leo un libro despacio.
Leo despacio un libro.
Despacio leo un libro.I read a book slowly.

¡Ojo! All three versions mean “I read a book slowly”, but the third one places more emphasis on the fact that we are reading the book slowly (rather than quickly). When this adverb placement is used it gives dramatic effect.

It’s also important to keep in mind that if you’re placing an adverb before the verb, it has to come before any auxiliary verb or pronoun used with the verb. An adverb cannot go between an auxiliary verb and a past participle, or between an object pronoun and a conjugated verb, for example. Let’s see the following examples:

Despacio lo leo.
I read it slowly.

Despacio he leído.
I have read slowly.

Despacio lo he leído.
I have read it slowly.

Adverbs of place and frequencyAdverbs of place and frequency – such as a veces (“sometimes”), frecuentemente (“frequently”) and cerca (“nearby”) – also allow you to use the adverb in the same three places. Here are some examples:

Allí vi a Juan.
Vi allí a Juan.
Vi a Juan allí.
I saw Juan there.

Siempre ve la tele.
Ve siempre la tele.
Ve la tele siempre.
He always watches TV.

Adverbs of timeAdverbs or phrases of time – such as hoy (“today”), esta mañana (“this morning”) and el verano pasado (“last summer”) – have a fourth placement option, as they can also go at the beginning of the sentence. For example:

Ayer Rafa ganó el campeonato.
Rafa ayer ganó el campeonato.
Rafa ganó ayer el campeonato.
Rafa ganó el campeonato ayer.Yesterday, Rafa won the competition.

Let’s practise!Now, how could we say “I quickly finished my breakfast” in Spanish? Try to write down all the possible options and we’ll tell you the answers at the end of this article.

If you want an extra challenge, also try writing down all the possible options if you translate the sentence using the perfect tense (i.e. he terminado) in Spanish.

¿Lo aprendiste rápidamente?Listen out for native speakers using adverbs in conversation and on TV and see if you can notice how the meaning subtly changes depending on the placement. The more exposure you have to the language, the more natural things like adverb placement will feel when you are speaking Spanish.

If you found this post interesting, make sure to listen to the full episode with Mark and Anabel on The Coffee Break Spanish Show. This is the series in which we look at a range of topics for Spanish learners, so make sure to subscribe to our podcast feed and our channel on YouTube.

Happy Coffee Breaking!

PS. Here are the answers to the translation challenge.

First of all, using the preterite tense:

Terminé mi desayuno rápidamente.
Terminé rápidamente mi desayuno.
Rápidamente terminé mi desayuno. (Remember that this is the emphatic structure, so can only be used in certain contexts.)

Now, using the present perfect tense:

He terminado mi desayuno rápidamente.
He terminado rápidamente mi desayuno.
Rápidamente he terminado mi desayuno. (Remember that this is the emphatic structure, so can only be used in certain contexts.)

Listen to the podcastThe post How flexible are Spanish adverbs? appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

It’s time to get to know “you”! Saying “you” in German is slightly more complicated than in English, but what an important word it is.

It won’t surprise you that the word “you”’ is one of the most commonly used words in English. It’s equally as common in German, but there are seven different ways to say “you”.

The Coffee Break German Show is a podcast series of bite-sized, friendly conversations, in which we demystify tricky German language topics. In the latest episode, Mark and Thomas look at how to say “you” when you are in conversation with a German speaker.

Continue reading to find out more and why not listen to the podcast as you go?

The 7 ways to say “you”First things first, what are the seven forms of “you” in German?

You might know about du, Sie and ihr. However, another four arise because of the different cases in German. These are: dir, dich, euch and Ihnen.

What is the formal “you” in German?The formal forms of “you” are Sie (nominative), Sie (accusative) and Ihnen.

Note that this formal form of “you” always has a capital S-, or capital I- for Ihnen. It can be distinguished from the word for “she” and “they”, sie, which always has a lower case s- (apart from at the beginning of a sentence).

Sie – nominativeSie can be used as the subject of a sentence, in the nominative case. Here are some example sentences:

Möchten Sie etwas trinken?
Would you like to have something to drink?

Sie sprechen sehr gut Deutsch.
You speak German very well.

Sie – accusativeSie is also used as an object of a sentence, in the accusative case. For example:

Ich kann Sie gut verstehen.
I can understand you well.

Darf ich Sie etwas fragen?
Can I ask you something?

Ihnen – dativeIhnen is used as an indirect object, in the dative case. Here are some examples:

Wie geht es Ihnen?
How are you?

Kann ich Ihnen helfen?
Can I help you?

When to use the formal “you”There are general rules you can follow so you know when to use the correct form of “you” with German speakers (du, Sie or ihr).

The formal form of “you” should be used with:

people you don’t know very well
people in the workplace
people in a position of authority, such as the police
people who are older than you

Note that there can be some regional differences. Thomas explains in the podcast that in Austria and in southern Germany the du form is more commonly used.

Let’s look at an example context. Imagine you go into an ice cream shop and ask for help. The correct and polite way to address someone in that situation is with the formal form:

Können Sie mir helfen?Can you help me?

However, if the shop assistant was clearly younger than you, and since it is a relatively informal setting, it would be normal to use du when speaking to the assistant. Indeed, it can be seen as a compliment to someone to address them as du, depending on the setting.

Moving from formal to informalOnce you’ve known someone a little while or the situation has changed to become less formal, you may use the following expression in the transition from Sie to du:

das Du anbietento offer the informal “you”

Let’s see this phrase in context in some examples:

Mein Chef hat mir das Du angeboten.
My boss offered that I call him by the informal “you”.

Ich biete dir das Du an. Wir sind gute Freunde.
I am offering that you call me by the informal “you”. We are good friends.

Duzen and siezenThe verb duzen can also be used after das Du anbieten. Duzen means “to use the du form of “you”. For example:

Wir duzen uns.
We are using the informal “you”.

Wir können uns duzen.
We can use the informal “you” with one another.

There is also the verb siezen, which means “to use the Sie form of “you”. Here are some examples:

Sie siezen sich.
They use the formal form of “you”.

Hier in der Arbeit siezen sich alle.
Here at work, everyone uses the formal form of “you”.

A visual summaryWe hope that you found this short overview of how and when to use the formal “you” in German useful. If you still have any doubts, the most important thing is not to worry about this – German speakers will still understand you regardless of which form of “you” you use and you will be sure to get more used to this cultural nuance the more you speak the language.

Happy Coffee Breaking!

Listen to the podcastThe post How to use the formal ‘you’ in German appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

The verb avere was probably one of the first verbs you came across in Italian. Of course, its basic meaning is “to have”, but there are many useful everyday expressions that use avere in which the verb doesn’t translate as “to have”.

The Coffee Break Italian Show is a podcast series of bite-sized, friendly conversations in which we demystify tricky Italian language topics. In the latest Italian episode, Mark and Maurizio discuss the verb avere and many useful expressions featuring this verb.

Continue reading to find out more, and why not listen to the podcast as you go?

A review of the verb ‘avere’First of all, let’s take a second to review the conjugation of avere in the present tense:

avere – present tense:
ho
hai
ha
abbiamo
avete
hanno

As you can see, it’s an irregular verb, but it is also one of the most useful verbs to understand in Italian.

Let’s examine how we use avere, when it doesn’t mean “to have”.

‘Avere’ expressions where “to be” is used in EnglishAs mentioned above, there are some Italian expressions using avere that take the verb “to be” when translated into English. Let’s take a look at these one by one, or in logical pairs.

Ageavere _ anni
to be _ years old

For example:

Ho quarantatré anni. I’m forty-three years old.

Quanti anni hai?
How old are you?

To be cold or hotavere freddo
to be cold

avere caldo to be warm / hot

For example:

Martino ha freddo mentre Arianna ha caldo. Martino is (feeling) cold while Arianna is (feeling) hot.

To be thirsty or hungryavere sete
to be thirsty

avere fame
to be hungry

For example:

Hai sete?
Are you thirsty?

Ho sempre fame!
I’m always hungry!

To be sleepyavere sonno to be sleepy

For example:

Hai sonno?
Are you sleepy?

Sono stanco e ho sonno.
I’m tired and I’m (feeling) sleepy.

As a side note, Maurizio and Mark also mention the very Italian expression avere l’abbiocco, which means “to be sleepy from eating too much” and describes the feeling of tiredness after having a hearty meal like, for example, a delicious Sunday lunch with your Italian family!

To be patientavere pazienza
to be patient

For example:

Bisogna avere pazienza con i bambini.
You need to be patient with children.

To be right or wrongavere ragioneto be right

avere tortoto be wrong

For example:

Paola ha ragione, ma Maurizio ha torto.
Paola is right, but Maurizio is wrong.

To be in a hurryavere frettato be in a hurry

For example:

Non ho fretta, possiamo prendere un caffè e parlare.
I’m not in a hurry, we can have a coffee and have a chat.

To be scaredavere paura (di)
to be scared (of)

For example:

Avevo paura del buio quando ero un bambino / da bambino.I used to be scared of the dark when I was a child / as a child.

To needThere are also other expressions with avere that are translated using neither “to be” nor “to have” in English. The first of these is:

avere bisogno di
to need

For example:

Ho bisogno di quel libro.
I need that book.

Ho bisogno di una mano.
I need a hand / help.

To want or feel like somethingFinally, let’s look at:

avere voglia di
to feel like, to want

For example:

Ho voglia di andare in discoteca.
I feel like going to a nightclub.

Ho sempre voglia di un gelato.
I’m always craving an ice cream.

È tutto per oggiThese expressions with avere will come in useful in many everyday Italian conversations, so keep up your practice and listen out for them.

If you found this interesting, make sure you listen to the full podcast episode with Mark and Maurizio on The Coffee Break Italian Show. We will regularly be uploading more episodes for Italian learners, so make sure to subscribe to our podcast feed or our channel on YouTube.

Happy Coffee Breaking!

Listen to the podcastThe post Useful expressions with ‘avere’ appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Why does French have two words for “day”? The distinction between jour and journée can be confusing for French learners and can seem subtle, but we’re going to look at the nuances of each word to help you know when to translate “day” as jour and when it should be journée.

The Coffee Break French Show is a podcast series of bite-sized, friendly conversations in which we demystify tricky French language topics. In the latest episode, Mark and Max explore the distinction between jour and journée in French, and similar word pairs like soir and soirée, an and année or matin and matinée.

These pairs of words are often used interchangeably by learners, but they have subtle differences in their meanings that deserve exploration, as using the right one will be an extra step towards feeling more confident in French.

Continue reading to find out more and why not listen to the podcast as you go?

‘Jour’ and ‘journée’: what’s the difference?First and foremost, it’s important to understand that jour (a masculine noun) refers to a 24-hour period, as in one calendar day. On the other hand, journée (a feminine noun) refers to the time during the day when the sun is shining, as in from sunrise to sunset.

When we use un jour, it encompasses all the different parts of the day, including la matinée (“the morning”), la journée (“the day”), la soirée (“the evening”) and la nuit (“the night”). Let’s compare jour and journée by looking at the following examples:

Nous avons passé trois jours à Paris.
We spent three days in Paris.

Nous avons passé la journée à Paris.
We spent the day in Paris.

‘Tous les jours’ and ‘toute la journée’It’s also important to note that tous les jours means “every day”, while toute la journée means “all day long”. So, while these two phrases may appear to be similar at first glance, this distinction is crucial to understand when conveying the duration of an activity or event.

‘Matin’ and ‘matinée’, ‘soir’ and ‘soirée’The same pattern applies to matin (a masculine noun) and matinée (a feminine noun). Le matin describes the time of day, whereas la matinée describes a length of time during which an action takes place.

Similarly, we can differentiate between soir and soirée. Soir refers to a period between sunset and the beginning of the night – the evening as a period in time. It is often used as context for something else that happens within that timeframe. This is different from the word soirée, which indicates the duration of the evening.

This is perhaps easiest to understand with two examples:

Ce soir, je vais chez mon ami Nicolas.
Tonight, I’m going to my friend Nicolas’s house (i.e. at some point this evening or tonight, I will travel to Nicolas’s house).

On the other hand:

Je vais passer la soirée chez Nicolas.
I’m going to spend the evening at Nicolas’s (i.e. I will be at Nicolas’s for the duration of the evening).

It’s worth noting that soirée can also mean a “party” or “gathering” held at night, adding another layer to its usage.

‘An’ and ‘année’Lastly, let’s touch on the difference between an and année.

An primarily denotes a year as a unit of time and it is mostly used with numbers (for example, when talking about age or dates) or with expressions like tous les ans (“every year”).

On the other hand, année is used with adjectives (for example, bonne, longue, magnifique) and with quantifiers (for example, chaque, quelques, combien).

A visual summaryTo finish off, if you have watched or listened to this episode of The Coffee Break French Show, you will have heard some examples to think about. Here they are in writing:

Katia va au supermarché tous les matins.
Katia goes to the supermarket every morning.

Qu’est-ce que tu fais ce soir ?
What are you doing this evening?

Passe une bonne soirée chez Louis.
Have a good evening at Louis’s.

L’année prochaine nous allons à Tokyo.
Next year, we’re going to Tokyo.

The nuances between jour and journée, soir and soirée, as well as matin and matinée and an and année may seem subtle, but they play a crucial role in conveying precise meanings. By understanding these differences, you can enhance your communication skills in the French language and express yourself more accurately.

Of course, don’t worry if you do mix these words up – French speakers will have no problem understanding what you mean and the more you use the language, the more natural this will become.

So, whether you’re planning a soirée or looking forward to an année filled with adventures, remember the distinctions and you’ll master the art of using these words effectively.

Happy Coffee Breaking!

Listen to the podcastThe post What’s the difference between ‘jour’ and ‘journée’ in French? appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Do you know how to pronounce the words eat and it correctly in English?

These two words sound very similar, and it can be difficult to understand the difference between them, when it comes to pronunciation.

This is because the vowel (vowel = the letters a, e, i, o, u) sounds are very similar. There are lots of pairs of words that people often mix up, because they contain these sounds.

The Coffee Break English Show is a podcast series of bite-sized, friendly conversations to help you understand some difficult topics in English. In the latest episode, Josie and Maurizio talk about the difference between these vowel sounds and how to pronounce eat and it correctly.

Continue reading to find out more and, because this episode focuses on pronunciation, it’s best to watch the video or listen to the episode before you read this blog, to hear Josie and Maurizio making the sounds.

So, let’s get started and look at these two vowel sounds. Why not get a cup of coffee or tea to enjoy while you read and listen?

The vowel sound in ‘eat’The vowel sound in the word eat is a long sound. To make it, your jaw should be tense (tense = not relaxed), and you should look like you are smiling. The symbol for this sound in the International Phonetic Alphabet is /i:/. Other words that contain this sound are:

feete.g. He has small feet.

sheepe.g. There are nine sheep in that field.

beate.g. My team beat your team in the football match last night.

thesee.g. These microphones are powerful.

cheape.g. My new bike was very cheap.

The vowel sound in ‘it’The vowel sound in the word it is a short sound. To make it, your jaw and mouth should be relaxed, and the tip of your tongue should be behind your bottom teeth. The symbol for this sound in the International Phonetic Alphabet is /ɪ/. Other words that contain this sound are:

fite.g. I go running to keep fit.

ship
e.g. They travelled by ship to America.

bite.g. I speak a bit of German.

this
e.g. This table is big.

chipe.g. My favourite meal is fish and chips.

Example sentences with /i:/ and /ɪ/Is everything clear so far? We hope you are ready for a challenge! Here are some example sentences containing the vowel sounds /i:/ and /ɪ/. Try to say them several times to practise your pronunciation.

I sit on the seat.

Can I eat it?

The shoes fit on my feet.

Is that a ship or a sheep?

Let’s reviewIt’s a good idea to practise the sounds /i:/ and /ɪ/ because they are very similar, and it’s possible that people could misunderstand you if you don’t pronounce them correctly. Try making a list of all the words with these sounds that you find difficult to pronounce, and practise them every day.

However, remember that it’s OK if you don’t sound like a native speaker when you’re speaking English. It’s more important that you are confident when you’re speaking, and that people can understand you.

If you found this post interesting, listen to the full episode with Josie and Maurizio on The Coffee Break English Show. In this series we look at lots of useful topics for English learners, so make sure to subscribe to our podcast feed and our channel on YouTube.

Happy Coffee Breaking!

Listen to the podcastThe post How to pronounce ‘eat’ and ‘it’ correctly appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Knowing when to use tú and when to use usted can be challenging for any learner of Spanish, especially because it depends on the location where you are speaking Spanish.

The Coffee Break Spanish Show is a podcast series of bite-sized, friendly conversations, in which we demystify tricky Spanish language topics. In the latest episode, Anabel and Concha look into how to use tú and usted like native speakers in Spanish and sound natural in any part of the Spanish-speaking world.

Continue reading to find out more and why not listen to the podcast as you go?

Should I say ‘tú’ or ‘usted’?In European Spanish, in general, we use both tú and usted, and there are actually verbs to describe both of these actions:

tutearto use the tú form with

ustedearto use the usted form with

The use of one or the other will be determined by the context and how formal or informal the situation is. For example, we use tú when talking to people close to our age and with friends and family. We use usted when talking to strangers, especially if they are older than us, in order to show respect.

However, the lines aren’t always clear, so don’t worry! Here are some key points to remember:

Use tú with your colleagues and maybe managers if the relationship is informal.
With strangers, use tú with people younger or around your age.
In customer service we can find both tú and usted. Tú is used when the brand looks for a more relaxed and friendly tone with their customers and usted if they prefer to show professionalism. Both are correct and it depends mainly on the company ethos.
As for the plural forms, to address more than one person, we use vosotros/as in all the situations where you would use tú with an individual, and we use ustedes in the situations where you would use usted with an individual.

What about in Latin America?In Latin American Spanish, the diversity in usage is greater and it will depend on the country.

In some countries, the use of vos instead of tú is the preferred option, while in other countries Spanish speakers prefer usted over tú.

One thing all Latin American countries have in common is that the plural form tends to always be ustedes, and not vosotros/as in informal contexts.

Another specific usage to note is that in Colombia, we can use usted to ask for a favour or to talk dearly to someone:

Anabel, ¿puede llevarme a la estación de tren en coche, por favor?
Anabel, can you take me to the train station by car, please?

Another regional differenceIf you have enjoyed learning about the local differences and uses of tú, usted and vos, you may like this!

In the west of Andalucía, Concha says in the episode that she uses ustedes instead of vosotros, but using the vosotros conjugation of verbs. This means that Concha would naturally say ustedes tenéis for “you have”. Qué interesante, ¿verdad?

Keep practising ‘tuteando’ and ‘ustedeando’One important thing to keep in mind is that we don’t need to stress too much about all these differences. Native speakers will be able to understand what you mean! However, it’s always nice to learn about the cultural differences and the diversity we can find in the Spanish language.

If you found this post interesting, make sure to listen to the full episode with Concha and Anabel on The Coffee Break Spanish Show. This is the series in which we look at a range of topics for Spanish learners, so make sure to subscribe to our podcast feed and our channel on YouTube.

Remember to keep practising using tú and usted when you are in a Spanish-speaking country, and listen out to hear how others do so. This is something you will get the hang of little by little and we’re sure that it will start to feel more instinctive in no time.

Happy Coffee Breaking

Listen to the podcastThe post Converse in Spanish like a native: choosing ‘tú’ or ‘usted’ appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In this lesson of Coffee Break Gaelic, we’re talking about work. Join our Gaelic language expert Susanna as she teaches learner Mark how to ask someone about their job and where they work.

The post CBGa 1.17 | What’s your job? – How to talk about jobs in Gaelic appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

How do you ask questions in German?

Questions are essential to every conversation and will always be part of your interactions when visiting a German-speaking country.

So, read on, as we’re going to answer all your questions about forming questions in German!

The Coffee Break German Show is a podcast series of bite-sized, friendly conversations, in which we demystify tricky German language topics. In the latest episode, Mark and Thomas look at how to form questions in German, focusing on the different question words, as well as sentence structure.

Continue reading to find out more and why not listen to the podcast episode as you go?

Die W-WörterAll question words in German begin with the letter w. We’ll look at each of these in turn.

Wann?Wann? means “when?”. Let’s start by looking at some examples using this question word.

Wann öffnet das Museum?
When does the museum open?

Wann fährst du nach Slowenien?
When are you going to Slovenia?

You’ll notice that the question word, wann?, starts the sentence, then the verb is next to it, in second position. The subject is in the third position, after the verb:

question word > verb > subject

Was?Was? means “what?”. For questions with was?, we follow a similar structure.

Was denkst du?
What do you think?

Wer?Wer? means “who?”. This question word looks and sounds a little like “where” in English, but it means “who”.

Wer kommt zur Party?
Who is coming to the party?

In the above example the pattern is:

question word > verb > object (location)

Note that wer is functioning as the subject of the sentence in this case.

Wo?Wo? means “where?”. For example:

Wo liegt die Kirche?
Where is the church?

Wo ist die Bäckerei?
Where is the bakery?

Woher?Woher? means “from where?” or “where from?”. Let’s see an example:

Woher kommst du?
Where do you come from?

“Where” can sometimes be used in English where woher would be needed in German. The suffix -her can be detached and be placed at the end of a question. This does not change the meaning of the question at all:

Wo kommst du her?
Where do you come from?

Wohin?Wohin? means “where to?”. For example:

Wohin fährst du?
Where are you going to?

Wohin fährst du in den Ferien?
Where are you going to in the holidays?

Wo cannot be used where wohin would be needed in German. As Thomas mentions in the podcast, there’s a handy trick. The suffix -hin can be detached and added at the end of a question:

Wo fährst du morgen hin?
Where are you travelling to tomorrow?

Wie?Wie? means “how?”. Here are some examples:

Wie viel kostet das?
How much does that cost?

Wie geht’s dir?
How are you?

As Thomas mentions, wie can be combined with other words to form other questions besides “how”.

Wie spät ist es?
What time is it? (literally, “how late is it?”)

Warum?Warum? means “why?”. Let’s see this in an example sentence:

Warum lernen wir Fragewörter?
Why are we learning question words?

Wieso can also be used to mean “why”, as can weshalb. There can be regional differences in which question words are used. For example, wieso is more common in the south of Germany.

Forming yes/no or closed questionsThe word order changes slightly for this type of question, but there is no question word. The verb comes first, so the subject is next. For example, here’s a question that Coffee Break German learners will be very familiar with from the start of our lessons!

Bist du bereit?
Are you ready?

Let’s see how a previous example question can be altered to become a yes/no question:

Wann fährst du nach Slowenien? > Fährst du nach Slowenien?
When are you going to Slovenia? > Are you going to Slovenia?

Here, the sentence structure is:

verb > subject > object (location)

A visual summaryGetting used to forming questions in German can take some time, but don’t worry, the more you practise and hear people having conversations the more natural questions will become.

Happy Coffee Breaking!

Listen to the podcastThe post A guide to forming questions in German appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In lesson 17 of Coffee Break Portuguese we’re taking what we learned in our previous lesson a stage further and continuing with the topic of shopping. This time, we’re at the market, and we’re applying some of the same language to a new context, as well as learning lots of new words for the food items you might find there and how to express quantities in Portuguese. We’ll also be joined by Catarina in today’s Cafezinho com Catarina, in which she tells us about a famous market in Lisbon.

The post CBP 1.17 | Shopping at the market – Portuguese fruits and vegetables vocabulary appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Did you know that the English verb “can” can be translated into Italian in three different ways? Each of the three verbs brings its own twist to the concept of “can” – creating a painter’s palette of nuanced expressions!

The Coffee Break Italian Show is a podcast series of bite-sized, friendly conversations in which we demystify tricky Italian language topics. In the latest episode, Francesca and Mark guide us through this topic to understand these three verbs and discover how they transform the simple idea of “can”. They discuss the different uses of the three verbs and also their irregular conjugations.

Continue reading to find out more, and why not listen to the podcast as you go!

saperesapere – present tense:
so
sai
sa
sappiamo
sapete
sanno

This verb is used to talk about our abilities and skills that you have acquired. The idea is that there has been a learning process that has allowed you to know how to do something. Here are some examples to clarify this point:

Luca sa suonare il violino.
Luca can / knows how to play the violin.

So giocare a golf.
I can / know how to play golf.

I miei amici non sanno cucinare.
My friends can’t / don’t know how to cook.

poterepotere – present tense:
posso
puoi
può
possiamo
potete
possono

You should use this verb when you have the possibility of doing something or the permission to do something. As Francesca explains, the idea is that other people or some external factors affect your ability to do something. Let’s look at some examples:

Questa sera Anna può uscire perché non lavora.
Tonight, Anna can go out because she is not working.

Non posso mangiare i crostacei.
I can’t eat shellfish.

Notice the difference if we decide to use sapere for this last sentence:

Non so mangiare i crostacei.
I can’t eat shellfish (because I don’t know how to clean them, for example, rather than because of an allergy).

Potere is also a verb of politeness and it is used to make requests. For example:

Puoi prestarmi il motorino, per favore?
Can you lend me your moped, please?

riuscireriuscire – present tense:
riesco
riesci
riesce
riusciamo
riuscite
riescono

Our last verb for today is riuscire, which conveys the idea of succeeding in doing something or managing to do something. It indicates that the person has made an effort to do something. For example, we would say:

riuscire a fare qualcosa
to manage to do something

As you can see there, when using this verb, it is important to remember that it is followed by a + an infinitive. Here are some examples:

Non riesco a trovare le chiavi.
I can’t find my keys (because I left them somewhere).

Luisa riesce sempre a sorprendermi.
Luisa always succeeds in surprising me.

Nuances of ‘sapere’, ‘potere’ & ‘riuscire’We can see the nuances of these three verbs in Italian by changing the verb in this example:

Riesci ad aprire questa bottiglia?
Can you manage to open this bottle?

Puoi aprire questa bottiglia?
Can you / Are you allowed to open this bottle? (Maybe you’ve been saving it for some time for a specific occasion.)

Sai aprire questa bottiglia?
Can you / Do you know how to open this bottle? (Maybe it’s tricky to open because there is a specific way of opening it.)

A little test… Can you do it?Here’s a final test to check if you have understood the difference between sapere, potere and riuscire! Can you identify the subtle difference in meaning between each sentence below? Think about what the context may be in each situation, then scroll down to the end of the article to find the answers.

Non so guidare il camper.
Non posso guidare il camper.
Non riesco a guidare il camper.

Eccoci alla fine!The next time you’re in Italy or engaging in an Italian conversation, remember these three useful verbs. They will not only enrich your language skills but also open doors to a better understanding of the nuances of the Italian language.

If you found this post interesting, make sure to listen to the full episode with Mark and Maurizio on The Coffee Break Italian Show. This is the series in which we look at a range of topics for Italian learners, so make sure to subscribe to our podcast feed or our channel on YouTube.

Happy Coffee Breaking!

PS. Here are the answers to our test:

Non so guidare il camper. I can’t / I don’t know how to drive the camper van. (I have never learned how to drive one.)
Non posso guidare il camper. I can’t / I’m not allowed to drive the camper van. (I don’t have permission to do so, perhaps I don’t have the right licence or insurance policy to do so.)
Non riesco a guidare il camper. I can’t / I’m not able to drive the camper van. (No matter how hard I try – perhaps it feels too big).

Listen to the podcastThe post How to say ‘can’ in Italian: potere, sapere, riuscire appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Which French expressions do you know that use the verb avoir? There are many to choose from! While avoir translates into English as “to have”, its use goes beyond possession and ownership, extending to sensations, emotions and age.

The Coffee Break French Show is a podcast series of bite-sized, friendly conversations in which we demystify tricky French language topics. In the latest episode, Mark and Max chat about the verb avoir and look at some common expressions in which avoir is used differently from “to have” in English.

French’s linguistic quirks make it fascinating and, at times, tricky for learners, so using avoir correctly is an important learning point.

Continue reading to find out more and why not listen to the podcast as you go?

Common expressions that use ‘avoir’Let’s look at how avoir can be combined with various nouns to take on a variety of meanings that may not necessarily relate to possession or ownership.

Ageavoir _ ansto be _ years old

In French, your age is something you “have”. For example:

J’ai 30 ans.
I am 30 years old.

To be hungry or thirstyavoir faim
to be hungry

avoir soif
to be thirsty

When you’re hungry or thirsty, in French this is expressed as “having” the feeling of “hunger” or “thirst”. For example:

J’ai faim.
I am hungry.

J’ai soif.
I am thirsty.

To be hot or coldavoir chaud
to be hot

avoir froid
to be cold

French speakers also use avoir to express temperature sensations. For example:

J’ai chaud.
I am hot.

J’ai froid.
I am cold.

To be right or wrongavoir raison
to be right

avoir tort
to be wrong

In French, you don’t say that “you are right or wrong”. Instead, “you have reason or wrong”. Here’s an example:

Je pense qu’il a raison.
I think he is right.

To be scaredavoir peur de
to be afraid of, to be scared of

When it comes to fear, we also express this using avoir in French. Let’s look at an example:

J’ai peur des araignées.
I am afraid of spiders.

To be sleepyavoir sommeil
to be sleepy

When you’re feeling sleepy, you don’t say that “you are sleepy” in French, rather, “you have sleepiness”.

J’ai sommeil ce soir.
I’m sleepy tonight.

To need somethingavoir besoin de
to need

To express that you need something in French, we literally say that “you have need of” whatever it is. For example:

J’ai besoin de deux kilos de pommes.
I need two kilograms of apples.

To want or feel like somethingavoir envie de
to want, to feel like

We can also express a desire or craving for something using an avoir expression in French. Note that avoir envie de can be followed either by a verb (in the infinitive form) or a noun. Here’s an example:

Tu as envie de manger une tarte aux pommes ?
Do you feel like eating an apple pie?

A little challengeLet’s see if you can remember some of these expressions we’ve talked about. Here are three sentences for you to translate into French, using avoir expressions:

My mother is always right.
I needed five more minutes.
It’s 3 am and I am not sleepy.

Once you have your answers, scroll down to the bottom of the page to see how you got on.

In conclusionAs we’ve seen, the use of avoir in French very often cannot be translated into English as “to have”. Combined with different nouns, its meaning can range from sensations, to emotions and even age.

While these nuances may initially leave learners a little perplexed, don’t worry, you’ll get used to them. Ultimately, they add depth and character to the language, so the next time you encounter avoir, enjoy the thought that this little word can be used for expressing such a wide range of human experiences!

Happy Coffee Breaking!

PS. Here are the answers to the challenge:

My mother is always right. Ma mère a toujours raison.
I needed five more minutes. J’avais besoin de cinq minutes de plus.
It’s 3 am and I am not sleepy. Il est trois heures du matin et je n’ai pas sommeil.

Listen to the podcastThe post Useful expressions with ‘avoir’ appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Do you know the difference between the words travel, trip and journey? They all have similar meanings, so it’s easy to confuse them!

The Coffee Break English Show is a podcast series of bite-sized, friendly conversations to help you understand some difficult topics in English. In the latest episode, Mark and Josie talk about when to use travel, trip and journey correctly.

Continue reading to find out more and why not listen to the podcast as you go?

So, let’s get started and look at the words travel, trip and journey.

TravelTravel is a verb. It describes the action of going to a place.

Here are some examples using travel:

They travelled to London by train.

I’m going to travel to Australia this summer.

Top tip: we can often replace travel with go.

Travel is usually a verb, but not always. The word travels describes the action of visiting different places, and we can replace it with adventures. We use travels in the expressions go on your travels and be off on your travels. For example:

Now that my daughter has finished high school, she’s off on her travels.

When are you going on your travels in Europe?

JourneyJourney is a noun. It describes the action of travelling from one place to another place. For example:

Mark’s journey to work takes 20 minutes.

I am exhausted after my long bus journey.

Have a safe journey home!

TripLike journey, trip is also a noun. It describes the process of travelling to a place, doing things in that place, and travelling back home again. We use trip in the expressions take a trip and go on a trip. For example:

She’s going on a business trip to Thailand.

We’re taking a trip to Greece this summer.

Let’s practise!Now, let’s practise! Here are five sentences. Complete the spaces with travel, trip, or journey. The answers are at the end of this blog post, but don’t look until you’ve thought about the answers!

I ___ to work by train.
It was a really long car ___.
I’d love to go on a ___ around the world.
How long will the ___ to Rome take?
My brother is on a work ___ this week.

Happy Coffee Breaking!If you found this post interesting, make sure you listen to the full podcast episode with Mark and Josie on The Coffee Break English Show. We will release more episodes soon, about some more useful topics! Subscribe to our podcast feed and our channel on YouTube to learn when the next episode is available.

So, keep practising when to use travel, trip, and journey! Remember that all English learners make mistakes, but people can usually still understand you. It’s all part of the language-learning journey.

Happy Coffee Breaking!

PS. Here are the answers to the questions:

I travel to work by train.
It was a really long car journey.
I’d love to go on a trip around the world.
How long will the journey to Rome take?
My brother is on a work trip this week.

Listen to the podcastThe post When do I use ‘travel’, ‘trip’ and ‘journey’? appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Me gusta el español may be one of the first sentences we learn when we start studying Spanish. However, gustar can be a tricky verb to use!

In fact, “how do you say that you like something?” is one of the questions we get asked the most by our Coffee Break Spanish community. That’s why in the latest episode of The Coffee Break Spanish Show Mark and Concha are chatting about how the structure me gusta works and teaching us how to use it in different tenses and situations.

The Coffee Break Spanish Show is a podcast series of bite-sized, friendly conversations in which we demystify tricky Spanish language topics, and we hope that after listening to the episode and reading this article you’ll be confident using the verb gustar in many different situations.

Continue reading to find out more and why not listen to the podcast as you go?

Me gustaVerbs like gustar (used to talk about liking things) or encantar (used to talk about loving things) are back-to-front verbs when we compare the structure to English. Let’s take an example:

Me gusta el café.
I like coffee.

Yes, this means “I like coffee”, but its literal meaning is “to me (me) it pleases (gusta) the coffee (el café)”. Or, in other words, “coffee pleases me” = me gusta el café.

Understanding this structure is key to using the verb properly, because the verb is conjugated according to what is pleasing to us or what we like.

That might sound a bit obscure, so here are three examples where we can see how it is used in different situations:

me gusta + singular noune.g. Me gusta la manzana.
I like the apple.

me gustan + plural noune.g. Me gustan las tazas.I like the mugs.

me gusta + verb (infinitive)e.g. Me gusta estudiar español.
I like studying Spanish.

As you can see in the second structure, when we have a plural noun (tazas – “mugs”), instead of using me gusta (gustar in the third person singular form) we use me gustan (in the third person plural form). Remember that in Spanish we are saying “something pleases me”. When that something is a plural noun (as is the case with tazas), we are therefore saying “they please” (gustan), rather then “it pleases” (gusta).

‘Gustar’ in different tensesNow, let’s take this a stage further and try using gustar in different tenses. How would you say the following sentences in Spanish?

I have liked them a lot.

I liked them a lot.

You will like them.

You are going to like them.

Think about them for as long as you need to, then check the answers below:

I have liked them a lot.

Here, we are using the perfect tense:
Me han gustado mucho.

I liked them a lot.

Now, we are using the preterite tense.
Me gustaron mucho.

You will like them.

Using the future tense, this would be:
Te gustarán mucho.

You are going to like them.

Here, we use the structure ir a + infinitive, and here we have two possible options. In the first option, the pronoun (te) goes before the van a gustar structure. In the second option, the pronoun goes after and is attached to the infinitive. Both are correct and there’s no difference in meaning:
Te van a gustar mucho. / Van a gustarte mucho.

How to say “I like you”We have seen how to use gustar in different tenses and structures, so now, can you guess how “I like you” is expressed in Spanish?

Since we are literally saying “you please me”, this would be me gustas (tú), where the verb is conjugated according to the subject, tú. Remember that the subject pronoun is optional, as usual in Spanish.

To ask somebody “do you like me?”, you would say ¿te gusto?, literally meaning “do I please you?”

Note that using gustar in this way suggests liking someone in a romantic way.

“I like you” – with friendsIf you want to say you like someone, but not in a romantic way, we use caer bien in Spanish. ¡Ojo! Caer is an irregular verb in some tenses. Let’s look at some examples:

La novia de mi hermano me cae bien.
I like my brother’s girlfriend  (literally, “my brother’s girlfriend falls well to me”).

Los vecinos no me cayeron bien.
I didn’t like the neighbours.

Translation challengeLet’s put what we’ve learned to the test. How would you say the following sentence in Spanish? Try translating it using gustar first, then using caer bien, and think about how the meaning changes with each verb. You can find the answers at the end of this article. Here’s your translation challenge:

At the beginning I didn’t like you, but now I like you very much.

Conclusion and answersIf you found this post interesting, make sure to listen to the full episode with Mark and Concha on The Coffee Break Spanish Show. This is the series in which we look at a range of topics for Spanish learners, so make sure to subscribe to our podcast feed and our channel on YouTube.

Happy Coffee Breaking!

PS. Here are the translations of the sentence:

Using caer bien:
Al principio no me caíste bien, pero ahora me caes muy bien.You would use this when talking to a friend or an acquaintance.

Using gustar:
Al principio no me gustabas, pero ahora me gustas mucho.
You would use this when talking to somebody you are romantically interested in.

Listen to the podcastThe post How to use ‘me gusta’ in Spanish appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

As you may already know, the umlaut in German is the two small dots that can be used above the letters a, o and u. But when and why do we use an umlaut? And how does the umlaut change the sound of the letter?

The Coffee Break German Show is a podcast series of bite-sized, friendly conversations in which we demystify tricky German language topics. In the latest episode, Mark and Thomas look at exactly how to pronounce letters with an umlaut and they chat about its different uses.

Continue reading to find out more and why not listen to the podcast as you go?

How did umlauts evolve?It is said the umlaut came about through laziness! Thomas describes them as “vowel harmonies”. Basically, words that had an a, o or u alongside the letter i were difficult to pronounce and over time these letter combinations became ä, ö and ü.

One example of such an evolution in spelling is in the word for “goose”, Gansi > Gänse.

PronunciationThere are three letters that can be written with the umlaut in German. Let’s tackle them one by one.

‘a’ with an umlaut: äLet’s take a look at the ä sound. It is pronounced like the e sound in the English word “egg”. Though beware – different accents in English pronounce such words differently! Here are some examples of the umlaut in action:

Äpfelapples

Händehands

ähnlichsimilar

Käfer
bug, beetle

Of course, there are often exceptions to a rule. The ä sound in the following words has a slightly different pronunciation. To perfect these words, listen carefully to Thomas in the episode and really focus on the pronunciation.

Käse
cheese

Mädchen
girl

Allgäu
an area in Germany

Mäuse
mice

A little note about that last example: it is quite common in German to have a word of only one syllable in the singular, for example Maus (“mouse”), which adds an umlaut in the plural, as well as the -e at the end, in this case becoming Mäuse (“mice”).

‘o’ with an umlaut: öNow, let’s look at the sound created by ö. It can be pronounced as a short sound. You can hear these examples in the episode:

öffnen
to open

können
to be able to

In some words, the ö sound is longer. This can be heard in:

Öl
oil

schön
beautiful

‘u’ with an umlaut: üNext, we’ll look at ü, which you can pronounce by making an “ee” sound in English, but then pursing your lips. Thomas gives a great demonstration of this in the episode. Here are some examples of words containing ü:

fünf
five

Müll
rubbish

Tür
door

üben
to practise

übertrieben
over the top

Note that in the first two examples above the ü has a short sound, but in the last three it has a longer sound.

By the way, the last word is one that Thomas used at the start of the episode to describe how excited he was about this topic!

What else do we need to know about umlauts?It is essential to take note that where an umlaut is found can make a difference not only to the sound of a word, but its meaning, too.

One example is that the word schon means “already”, but schön means “beautiful”. It is only the addition of the umlaut that distinguishes the two words from one another, yet it changes the meaning significantly.

Adding an umlaut can create a plural nounAs we’ve seen, adding an umlaut is often how the plural of a noun is formed, particularly for single-syllable nouns. Here are some more examples:

Maus > Mäuse
mouse > mice

Haus > Häuser
house > houses

Hand > Hände
hand > hands

Zug > Züge
train > trains

Adding an umlaut to form the comparativeWhen changing an adjective into the comparative form, an umlaut is often added to create that form. For example:

groß > größer
big > bigger

arm > ärmer
poor > poorer

It is often the case that one-syllable adjectives form the comparative by adding an umlaut (similar to one-syllable nouns). Obviously, the comparative adds the –er ending as well as adding the umlaut.

Umlauts in conjugated verbsOften, when a verb is conjugated in the present tense, an umlaut is added. Thomas mentions the verb that was the focus of a previous episode in this series, fahren. Previously, we looked at when to use fahren and when to use gehen to translate “to go”, but now let’s see how different parts of the verb are spelled differently, involving an umlaut:

ich fahre
du fährst
er/sie/es fährt
wir fahren
ihr fahrt
Sie/sie fahren

A visual summaryWe hope that you now know how and when to use an umlaut in German. If you’re unsure of how to type letters with umlauts on your keyboard, scroll down to take a look at our tips.

Remember to bookmark this article so that you can refer back to it for help with the pronunciation and uses of the umlaut. We’ll be back soon with another interesting German language topic.

Happy Coffee Breaking!

How to type an umlaut on your keyboardFinally, here is our guide on how to type an umlaut when you are writing on a keyboard or phone.

This, of course, depends on which operating system you use. As Thomas says, if you have a German keyboard, it’s easy as there is an umlaut key on the keyboard.

If you are using a Mac:

Hold down the option/alt key + u, which gives the umlaut.
Then release the keys and type the letter over which you want the umlaut (a, o or u).

If you are using a PC, it’s a little more complicated. Different systems have their own shortcuts, but there is one fail-safe option:

Hold down the Windows key + r to open the Run dialog box, then type in “charmap” and press enter. The character map box should appear.
Double click on the character you want to copy so that it appears in the text box.
Click on “copy” to copy the character, then you can paste it anywhere with the ctrl + v shortcut.

With most smartphones, hold down the letter to which you want to add the umlaut and options will appear. Scroll or swipe along to select the one you want to use.

If you are unable to use any of these options, you can write the letter e after the a, o or u. This option will give the same sound as using an umlaut so it will be understood by readers.

Listen to the podcastThe post Everything you need to know about the German umlaut appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Going to a café can be a great opportunity to sit down and listen to one of our Coffee Break Italian podcasts with a nice cup of coffee or tea. In this article we’re talking about prepositions, so do you know which preposition you’d use in Italian to talk about going to a café or being in a café?

The Coffee Break Italian Show is a podcast series of bite-sized, friendly conversations in which we demystify tricky Italian language topics. In the latest episode Mark and Maurizio talk about prepositions and, in particular, when to use a and when to use in.

These prepositions can describe both being in a location and motion towards a place. Depending on how they are used in a sentence, a and in could be translated into English as “in”, “at” or “to”.

If this sounds confusing just now, don’t worry! In the episode, Maurizio gives us five rules to help us remember when to use these prepositions.

Read on to find out more, and why not listen to the podcast as you go?

Rule 1: use ‘a’ with citiesIn Italian, the preposition a is used to describe both being in a city and going to a city. Let’s look at some examples:

Sono a Londra.
I’m in London.

Vado a Londra.
I go to London.

Abito a Roma.
I live in Rome.

Tommaso va spesso a Dublino.
Tommaso often goes to Dublin.

Rule 2: use ‘in’ with countriesThe preposition in is used to talk about location and motion when it comes to bigger geographical areas, such as continents, countries, states, and regions. For example:

Tommaso va spesso in Irlanda.
Tommaso often goes to Ireland.

Oggi ci troviamo in Oregon.
Today, we are in Oregon (literally, “we find ourselves in Oregon’”).

Mi piace viaggiare in Asia.
I like travelling in Asia.

Vivete in Piemonte o in Liguria?
Do you (plural) live in Piedmont or in Liguria?

Rule 3: use ‘in’ with roomsWe also use the preposition in with rooms. Again, it can mean either “in” or “to”, depending on the context. For example:

Sto andando in cucina per preparare il pranzo.
I’m going to the kitchen to make lunch.

Vado in bagno.
I’m going to the bathroom.

Siamo in classe.
We’re in class.

Andiamo in cucina.
We go to the kitchen.

Dormiamo in camera da letto.
We sleep in the bedroom.

Rule 4: use ‘in’ with buildingsWhen you’re talking about being at or going to a building, you should use the preposition in. Let’s look at these examples:

Andiamo in chiesa.
We go to church.

I miei figli vanno in palestra.
My children go to the gym.

Ora sono in banca.
I’m at the bank now.

Lavorano in ufficio.
They work at the office.

We also use in when talking about places ending in -ia or -teca:

Andiamo in biblioteca.
We go to the library.

Mangiamo in pizzeria.
We eat at the pizzeria.

Rule 5: rules have exceptions!Mark and Maurizio also mention other phrases with a and in that don’t really follow the previous rules.

Despite being a building, we always use the preposition a when we are talking about a house or home. So, a casa can mean both “in the house” and “to the house”. For example:

Sei già a casa?
Are you already home?

Other similar exceptions are school and theatre – a scuola, for example, meaning both “at” or “to the school”, and a teatro, meaning “at” or “to the theatre”. Here are some examples:

Sei ancora a scuola?
Are you still at school?

Andiamo a teatro stasera.
We’re going to the theatre tonight.

Andiamo al teatro alla Scala.
We’re going to La Scala theatre.

Another tricky one is when you go to bed. We mentioned that we say in camera da letto. However, for being “in” or going “to bed” we say a letto.

Sono a letto.
I’m in bed.

Finally, Mark and Maurizio mention some specific phrases with in in relation to going on holiday:

andare in vacanza
to go on holiday

andare in montagna
to go to the mountains

essere in spiaggia
to be at the beach

andare in campagna
to go to the countryside

essere in hotel / albergo
to be in the hotel

A visual summary and a challenge!Siamo pronti? Let’s see if you can translate the following sentences:

Right now, I’m in the office in Milan, in Lombardy, in Italy, in Europe.
Tomorrow, I’ll be on holiday in Palermo, in Sicily, in the hotel or at the beach!

The answers are at the end, but no peeking until you have noted down your translations!

Conclusion and answersIf you found this post interesting, make sure to listen to the full episode with Mark and Maurizio on The Coffee Break Italian Show. This is the series in which we look at a range of topics for Italian learners, so make sure to subscribe to our podcast feed or our channel on YouTube.

Other than that, keep practising when to use in and a! Mastering prepositions can make a complete change to how you sound in a language and will help you be much more confident when you next travel to Italy. However, don’t worry if you make mistakes – you’ll still be understood, even if you get your prepositions wrong. The most important thing is to make the effort to communicate.

Happy Coffee Breaking!

PS. Here are the answers to the challenges:

Right now, I’m in the office in Milan, in Lombardy, in Italy, in Europe.
Adesso sono in ufficio a Milano, in Lombardia, in Italia, in Europa.

Tomorrow, I’ll be on holiday in Palermo, in Sicily, in the hotel or at the beach!
Domani sarò in vacanza a Palermo, in Sicilia, in albergo o in spiaggia!

PPS. We opened this article with the question of how to talk about going to a café and being in a café. In Italian, both “to the café” and “in the café” would be translated as al caffè.

Listen to the podcastThe post 5 rules for when to use ‘a’ and ‘in’ in Italian appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Learning a new language comes with its own set of interesting challenges, and for learners of French, one of these challenges is knowing when to use the informal tu and when to use the formal vous, especially if your native language is one which only has one word for “you”.

Mastering this nuance, however, is important to help you converse in French like a native. This subtle distinction can greatly affect the way you communicate with others and is a crucial aspect of French etiquette.

The Coffee Break French Show is a podcast series of bite-sized, friendly conversations in which we demystify tricky French language topics. In the latest episode, Mark and Max explore the key points related to the use of tu and vous, shedding light on the rules, the exceptions and the social context that surrounds this linguistic choice.

In this article, we are going to look at the tips they give us to be able to confidently hold a conversation in French, choosing whether to go with the informal tu or the formal vous.

Continue reading to find out more and why not listen to the podcast as you go?

‘Tu’ or ‘vous’?Before we get into when to use tu and when to use vous, we should say that while it’s an important and interesting topic for French learners, don’t get too hung up on it! The most important thing is that you are using your French to communicate, and if you use the “wrong” word for “you”, people will understand you’re a learner and will just be happy that you’re practising your French with them.

Now, let’s get into our topic. One of the fundamental distinctions in French language usage is between tu and vous. The choice between these two forms of address is not arbitrary, but rather dictated by politeness and respect.

‘Vous’: a matter of politeness and respect Use vous when you want to convey politeness and maintain a certain distance in your conversation. * Address older individuals, people in professional settings (e.g. restaurants, shops) and strangers with vous*. * It is a common choice when interacting with people you don’t know well or who hold a certain level of authority.

‘Tu’: reserved for family and friends Reserve tu for close relationships, such as family and friends, and when addressing children. * The use of tu* indicates a more intimate and friendly level of communication.

The plural “you” When speaking to two or more individuals simultaneously, always use vous. * This rule takes precedence over other considerations, so vous* is used in both formal and informal situations to refer to a plural “you”.

‘Tutoyer’: a checkpoint in friendshipTransitioning from using vous to tu can be a significant moment in a relationship. It reflects a closer, more intimate bond between individuals.

Often, friends in the making ask each other on se tutoie ? to establish whether they should switch to using tu. This question uses the verb tutoyer, which means “to use the tu form with”. Vouvoyer, on the other hand, means “to use the vous form with”.

Key phrase: On se tutoie ? – Shall we use the tu form with each other?

Some anecdotesTo better understand the nuances of using tu and vous in French, in this episode Mark and Max share some personal anecdotes with us, which highlight how choosing between tu and vous can be dictated by the context, even between the same two people.

Social context can influence choiceMark tells us that he once attended a work event in France where he initially used vous during the day when interacting with colleagues. However, in the relaxed atmosphere of a restaurant later on in the evening, they switched to tu. The next day, back in the formal setting of the conference, they returned to using vous. This demonstrates how context can influence your choice.

Max talks about his teacher at school, who was also the father of a football teammate. In the classroom, he addressed the teacher as vous, but used tu when interacting on the football pitch. This example underscores how the social context can govern whether to use tu or vous.

A sign of growing up!Max explains that, in French culture, the first time someone addresses you with vous is often seen as a moment of growing up or becoming more mature. This typically happens around the time when teenagers start to transition into adulthood.

A visual summaryBefore we go, there’s one last thing to mention about tu and vous, which may have already occurred to you if you watched or listened to episode 1 of our series, and that is pronunciation! In episode 1, Mark and Max discussed the difference between the vowel sounds u and ou in French, so make sure to differentiate between the u in tu and the ou in vous. If you haven’t already seen it, you can find that episode here, and you can practise your u and ou vowels just by saying the two words for “you”!

Mastering the distinction between formal and informal language will make your experience of speaking French richer and more complete. For example, the transition from vous to tu can be a meaningful checkpoint in developing closer, more intimate relationships with native speakers.

So, whether you find yourself addressing a new acquaintance with vous or using tu with a close friend, you’re now equipped to make the right choice in your French conversations. Embracing these language subtleties will enhance your ability to connect with French speakers and immerse yourself more deeply in their culture.

If you found this post interesting, make sure to listen to the full episode with Mark and Max on The Coffee Break French Show. In this series of chats between our language experts, we look at a range of topics for French learners, so make sure to subscribe to our podcast feed and our channel on YouTube.

Finally, while it may seem daunting at first, remember that with practice and experience it will become more natural. In the meantime, making mistakes is normal and native speakers will always be happy to hear you make the effort.

Happy Coffee Breaking!

Listen to the podcastThe post Converse in French like a native: choosing ‘tu’ or ‘vous’ appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Do you know the difference between I work and I am working in English?

This can be a challenging topic for English learners, especially because many languages just have one present tense.

The Coffee Break English Show is a podcast series of bite-sized, friendly conversations to help you understand some difficult topics in English. In the latest episode, Mark and Josie talk about the difference between the present simple and the present continuous tenses.

They explain the rules for when to use these tenses, so hopefully this will help you understand them better.

So, let’s get started and look at the present simple and present continuous tenses. Keep reading to find out more and why not listen to the podcast as you go?

Present simpleI work is the present simple tense. Here is the verb work conjugated in the present simple:

I work
you work
he/she/it works
we work
they work

I don’t work
you don’t work
he/she/it doesn’t work
we don’t work
they don’t work

When to use the present simpleNow that we know the structure of the present simple, do you know when to use it?

We use the present simple when we talk about habits, routines, and things that are always true. For example, when we are talking about someone’s permanent job or career. Here are some examples:

I work as a teacher.

She works as a bus driver.

They work from home.

Present continuousI am working is the present continuous tense. Here is the verb work conjugated in the present continuous:

I am working
you are working
he/she/it is working
we are working
they are working

I’m not working
you aren’t working
he/she/it isn’t working
we aren’t working
they aren’t working

When to use the present continuousWe use the present continuous tense when we talk about temporary actions, or actions that are happening as we are speaking or at the present moment. For example:

I’m working, so I can’t talk right now.
= action happening in the present moment

She usually works in the office, but she’s working at home this week.
= temporary action

Let’s compareHere are some more examples where you can see the difference between the present simple and the present continuous:

I’m drinking coffee now.I drink coffee every day.

We are speaking English at the moment.Josie also speaks French.

I go to the cinema once a month.
This podcast is going very well!

The exception: state verbsSo far, so good! However, there are some verbs that we don’t usually use in the present continuous tense. These are called “state verbs”.

State verbs usually describe internal things like senses, emotions, and possession. So, even when we are talking about temporary actions, or actions that are happening at the present moment, we have to use the present simple, not the present continuous. For example:

~~I am being happy right now.~~
I am happy right now.

~~I am knowing the answer.~~
I know the answer.

~~He is wanting a coffee.~~
He wants a coffee.

There are lots of state verbs, so it’s a good idea to do some more research and learn some more.

Happy Coffee Breaking!

Listen to the podcastThe post The present simple and present continuous: ‘I work’ or ‘I am working’? appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Have you ever wondered why there are some feminine nouns that use the masculine definite article el? You may be thinking of examples like el agua, el hambre or el aula.

You probably already know that when it comes to grammatical gender in Spanish, nouns can either be masculine or feminine. Masculine nouns use the word el to mean “the” in the singular form, while feminine nouns typically use la. So, what is happening with words like el agua?

The Coffee Break Spanish Show is a podcast series of bite-sized, friendly conversations in which we demystify tricky Spanish language topics. In the latest episode, Mark and Anabel look at a selection of words that take the article el despite actually being feminine nouns. By the end of this episode, you’ll know exactly how to use these nouns with any article or adjective, and see that it’s not as complicated as it may seem at first!

Continue reading to find out more and why not listen to the podcast as you go?

Is ‘agua’ masculine or feminine?One of the most common mistakes when it comes to noun gender in Spanish comes with words like agua (“water”), hambre (“hunger”), or aula (“classroom”) – some of the first words you may learn in the language!

You have probably learned to write el agua, el hambre and el aula, and you are not wrong! The issue comes when you assume they are masculine nouns or they always use masculine articles, because that’s not the case.

¿Qué está pasando entonces? Feminine nouns starting with a stressed a sound follow some very special rules.

When a feminine singular noun starts with a stressed a, we use el, un, algún and ningún before them.

For example:

el aguathe water

un aguaa water

algún aguasome water

ningún aguano water

When the noun is in its plural form, we use the feminine form of the article.

For example:

las aguasthe waters

unas aguasa few waters

algunas aguassome waters

ningunas aguasno waters

It’s important to keep in mind that we only use the masculine form with these nouns when we use el, un, algún and ningún before the noun. As you can see, we use the feminine form of the articles when using the plural form.

Take a look at these further examples and notice that esta, mucha and nuestra are in their feminine singular form – back to what you would expect with a feminine noun like agua.

esta aguathis water

mucha aguaa lot of water

nuestra aguaour water

¡Ojo! If we want to say “all the water”, it should be toda el agua, where the feminine form is used in toda, but we keep the masculine article el.

Indeed, when this type of noun is combined with an adjective, the adjective agrees in gender with the noun, even when using a masculine article. For example:

el agua fríathe cold water

However, if we move the adjective before the noun, then we have:

la fría aguathe cold water

In summary, el agua, el hambre and el aula might look like masculine nouns at first, but it is only to help pronunciation – in reality, they are all feminine nouns. The best way to get your head around this is to put it into practice.

Let’s practise!Translate the following phrases into Spanish. For each one, we’ve given you the noun in brackets. You can find the answers and an explanation at the end of this article.

open area (área)
the bald eagle (águila)
some white wing (ala)
the best water (agua)
the small classroom (use aulita (aula + ita) for “small classroom”)

Conclusion and answersIf you found this post interesting, make sure to listen to the full episode with Mark and Anabel on The Coffee Break Spanish Show. In this series of chats between our language experts, we look at a range of topics for Spanish learners, so make sure to subscribe to our podcast feed and our channel on YouTube.

Finally, remember that when it comes to noun gender, while it’s useful to learn the rules and can help to give you more confidence when speaking, you’ll be easily understood even if you make mistakes!

We’ll be back soon with another interesting Spanish language topic. Until then, happy Coffee Breaking!

PS. Here are the answers to the challenges:

open area (área) – área abierta
Área is a feminine noun.
the bald eagle (águila) – el águila calva
Águila is a feminine noun, so the adjective calvo/a agrees with it. However, it starts with a stressed a, so we use the article el.
some white wing (ala) – algún ala blancaThe same applies here as in the previous example. However, we can also say alguna blanca ala. Since the adjective goes before the noun in this case, the article doesn’t change.
the best water (agua) – la mejor aguaThe adjective mejor always goes before the noun. Since the adjective goes before the noun, the article remains as la, rather than el.
the small classroom (aulita) – la aulita
Aulita now has the stress on the syllable –li-, so it doesn’t start with a stressed a, meaning that it doesn’t need a different article. Other options could have been: el aula pequeña or la pequeña aula.

Listen to the podcastThe post When to use ‘el’ with feminine nouns appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Most learners think of the verb gehen when they want to say “to go” in German, but that’s not always correct!

Yes, there are times when you should use gehen, but at other times we use fahren. Both verbs can mean “to go” in different contexts.

The Coffee Break German Show is a podcast series of bite-sized, friendly conversations in which we demystify tricky German language topics. In the latest episode, Mark and Thomas clarify when to use gehen or fahren. Continue reading to find out more and why not listen to the podcast as you go?

Translating “to go” into GermanIn English, “to go” covers all methods of getting to a destination. For example, we can say:

We are going to the supermarket.

We went to Spain last week.

We are going on a holiday.

However, German requires a more nuanced approach.

When to use ‘fahren’Usually, when a method of transport, such as car, bus, or train, is involved, then fahren would be used. Here are some examples:

Ich fahre zum Einkaufen.I am driving / going to the shops.

Er fährt morgen mit dem Zug nach Berlin.He is going to Berlin tomorrow by train.

Wann fährst du in den Urlaub nach Peru?When are you going on holiday to Peru?

When to use ‘gehen’When no method of transport is mentioned, gehen is used. It, therefore, implies that someone is walking somewhere. For example:

Ich gehe zur Post und kaufe eine Briefmarke.I am going / walking to the post office and I am buying a stamp.

Wenn es schön ist, gehe ich zur Arbeit.When the weather is nice, I walk to work.

Both of these examples clearly imply that the person is walking and so gehen is used.

Another use of ‘gehen’The verb gehen is more often used in the context of going somewhere to do an activity or task, or attending something. Let’s look at these examples:

Sie gehen schwimmen.They are going swimming.

Mein Bruder geht in die Grundschule.My brother goes to primary school.

The second example shows how the verb gehen is used to mean “to attend”.

To distinguish between gehen and fahren, Mark uses the example:

Wir fahren morgen zum Schwimmbad. Wir gehen schwimmen.We are going to the swimming pool tomorrow. We are going swimming.

Ready to go?Before we go, here’s a visual summary of what we’ve learned.

As you can imagine, there is a bit of a grey area, so it’s always best to check if you are not sure. But don’t worry – you will always be understood, even if you mix up the verbs.

If you found this post interesting, make sure to listen to the full episode with Mark and Thomas on The Coffee Break German Show. In this series of chats between our language experts, we look at a range of topics for German learners, so make sure to subscribe to our podcast feed and our channel on YouTube.

Happy Coffee Breaking!

Listen to the podcastThe post Saying ‘to go’ in German: ‘fahren’ or ‘gehen’? appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In Lesson 16 of Coffee Break Gaelic, we’re continuing with our holiday theme and learning how to describe the landscape. This topic gives teacher Susanna the perfect opportunity to teach learner Mark about adjective agreements in Gaelic.

The post CBGa 1.16 | Descrbing locations and places in Gaelic appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Welcome to lesson 16 of Coffee Break Portuguese! This is the series in which we’re learning Portuguese right from the beginning, along with Rafael and Ava. The topic of this lesson is shopping. We’re learning some transactional language that will come in useful when you’re in a shop. We learn the words for different types of souvenirs, and how to ask how much things cost.

The post CBP 1.16 | Shopping for souvenirs – Essential Portuguese shopping vocabulary appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Italian is renowned for its smooth and lyrical sounds. One of the intriguing aspects of Italian pronunciation lies in its double consonants – or le doppie.

In Italian, all consonants can be doubled (apart from the letter H). Even the double Q exists – soqquadro (“disarray”).

The Coffee Break Italian Show is a podcast series of bite-sized, friendly conversations in which we demystify tricky Italian language topics. In the latest episode, Mark and Maurizio share some tips on how to perfect your pronunciation of double consonants.

Mastering this phonetic feature is a way to make you sound more Italian when you speak, so continue reading to find out more, and why not listen to the podcast as you go?

The power of ‘le doppie’Sometimes, the pronunciation of le doppie marks the difference in meaning between words. For example, notice the difference in meaning between the following words:

casahouse

cassabox

penapain, suffering

pennapen

This underscores why it is important to learn how to pronounce double consonants. Having said this, context always helps, and in most situations the person you’re speaking to will understand what you’re talking about. Even if you don’t quite pronounce le doppie correctly, most people will just be happy you’re speaking in Italian!

Tips for pronouncing double consonantsProducing the distinctive sounds of Italian double consonants requires a bit of practice. We have some tips to help you out:

Elongate the soundWhen encountering a double consonant, elongate the sound while holding it in your mouth. For example, try saying sasso (“rock”), palla (“ball”) and mamma (“mum”).

Push the sound forcefullyFor consonants like B, P, C, G, T and D, try pronouncing them more forcefully by pushing air through your mouth. This extra burst of air adds emphasis to the consonant. Experiment with words like babbo (“dad”) and mucca (“cow”) to feel the difference.

“Bounce” on the letterOne last tip is to imagine bouncing on the double consonant as you say the word. This mental image can help you emphasise the sound. You could even try to physically bounce on the spot to help you practise the pronunciation of double consonants!

Now, try to pronounce these two sentences. Each has the same consonant sounds, but only one has double-lettered words:

La palla è rossa.The ball is red.

La pala è rosa.The shovel is pink.

Regional differencesIt’s important to note that sounds can also change depending on regional accents. In certain parts of Italy, vowel sounds preceding le doppie may vary.

There are rules of diction for standard Italian when it comes to the sound of vowels before le doppie, but the regional accents of many Italians might appear to contradict these rules.

The most important thing is to speak the language and then you can decide whether to adjust your vowel pronunciation depending on where you find yourself in Italy or who you are talking to.

Remember that there isn’t one specific regional variety of Italian to learn or copy – all accents and pronunciations are correct.

A pronunciation challengeLet’s take a look at some common examples of how double consonants can change the meaning of words. Try to pronounce the following words, then listen to the podcast episode or watch the video to check how Maurizio pronounces each of them.

casahouse

cassatill, cash desk

papapope

papàdad

pappababy food

setethirst

setteseven

cappellohat

capellohair

È tutto per oggi!Keep practising your Italian pronunciation, paying attention to those double consonant sounds, and you will be well on your way to sounding more like a native speaker!

Your pronunciation will improve with practice, so keep listening to Italian songs, watching TV and films, and trying to speak it whenever you can. We’ll be back soon with more interesting discussions about learning Italian.

Happy Coffee Breaking!

Listen to the podcastThe post How to pronounce Italian double consonants appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Adjectives play a crucial role in adding depth to your French conversations. However, understanding where to place them in a sentence can be tricky for learners.

In most cases, adjectives in French come after the noun they modify, but there are some exceptions which can make this rule seem more like a guideline.

The Coffee Break French Show is a podcast series of bite-sized, friendly conversations that demystify tricky French language topics. In the latest episode, Mark and Max discuss how to get your head around adjective placement.

Let’s dive into the world of adjectives in French and explore when and why some go before the noun.

B.A.N.G.S.To help you remember which adjectives go before the noun, you can use the acronym BANGS, which stands for Beauty, Age, Number, Goodness and Size.

BeautyIn French, adjectives that convey the idea of beauty come before nouns. For example:

un beau livrea beautiful book

une belle armoire
a beautiful wardrobe

un bel oiseau
a beautiful bird

une jolie maison
a pretty house

AgeWhen discussing age, adjectives like vieux / vieille (“old”) come before the noun, as in:

un vieux château
an old castle

une vieille maison
an old house

NumberAdjectives related to numbers, such as premier / première (“first”) and deuxième (“second”), are placed before the noun. For instance:

le premier jour
the first day

la deuxième fois
the second time

GoodnessAdjectives like bon / bonne (“good”) and mauvais(e) (“bad”) are positioned before nouns. For example:

le bon gâteau
the good cake

la mauvaise nouvelle
the bad piece of news

SizeAdjectives describing size, such as grand(e) (“large”) and petit(e) (“small”), also go before the noun. For instance:

un grand canapé
a large sofa

une petite table
a little table

Adjectives with two possibilitiesNow, here’s where it gets interesting. Some adjectives can be placed before or after the noun – and their placement alters the meaning. Here are some of them. In each pair of examples, notice how the meaning of the adjective changes, depending on whether it comes before or after the noun.

ancien / anciennemon ancienne maison
my former house

la maison ancienne
the old house

cher / chèreCher Mark …
Dear Mark …

un canapé cher
an expensive sofa

curieux / curieuseune curieuse recette
a strange recipe

mon ami curieux
my curious friend

dernier / dernièrele dernier mois de l’année
the last month of the year

le mois dernier
last month

vrai / vraieC’est une vraie Rolex ?
Is it an actual Rolex?

C’est une histoire vraie.
It’s a true story.

propreC’est ma propre chambre.
It’s my own bedroom.

ma chambre propre
my tidy bedroom

A visual summaryIn conclusionUnderstanding these exceptions and nuances in adjective placement can be a huge boost in your French fluency and allow you to express your ideas more precisely.

So, whether you’re describing a beautiful landscape or discussing your dear friend, mastering the placement of adjectives will help you convey your thoughts and opinions effectively.

Happy Coffee Breaking!

Listen to the podcastThe post Understanding adjective placement in French: when do adjectives go before a noun? appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Do you know when to use do and when to use make when you’re speaking English? This can be a difficult topic for English learners, because many languages just have one verb for do and make. In this episode of The Coffee Break English Show, we’ll do some work to help you avoid making mistakes with do and make.

The Coffee Break English Show is a podcast series of informal conversations to help you understand some difficult topics in English! In the latest episode, Josie and Mark talk about when to use do and make.

There are some rules to follow, but as Josie and Mark explain during the episode, the best way to learn when to use do and make is to learn some fixed expressions.

So, let’s get started and look at the rules and expressions with do and make. Continue reading to find out more, and why not listen to the podcast as you go!

MakeWe use make when we create or produce something. The result is usually something that we can see and touch. Here are some examples:

make dinner
I’m making pasta for dinner tonight.

make lunch
Mark made a salad for lunch.

make breakfast
My grandma makes pancakes for breakfast on Sundays.

make a coffee
Would you like me to make you a coffee?

make clothes
My brother makes his own clothes – he’s very creative.

make furniture
I made this table all by myself.

DoWe use do to describe actions. Let’s look at some examples:

do homework
The children are doing their homework.

do housework (e.g. do the laundry, do the dishes)
I don’t like doing housework.

do something
I’m bored – let’s do something fun!

do anything
Did you do anything yesterday evening?

do nothing
He loves doing nothing on Sunday mornings.

Fixed expressions with ‘make’As we mentioned before, the best way to learn when to use make and do is to learn some fixed expressions. Here are five fixed expressions with make:

make a mistake
When you’re learning a language, you often make mistakes.

make friends
I made all my best friends at university.

make a decision
We need to make a decision about where to go on holiday this summer.

make plans
Have you made plans for the weekend yet?

make a mess
Please try not to make a mess in the kitchen!

Fixed expressions with ‘do’Now you’ve seen some expressions with make, here are five fixed expressions with do:

do your hair / make-up
It usually takes her 10 minutes to do her hair in the morning.

do an exam
I did an exam yesterday, and I passed!

do exercise / sport
Do you usually do exercise in the morning or in the evening?

do the shopping
I’m going to the supermarket to do the shopping.

do research
She is doing research for her PhD at the moment.

Remember, there are many more expressions with make and do. It’s a good idea to make a list when you see or hear a new expression, to help you remember it.

So, keep practising make and do! Remember that all English learners make mistakes, but people can usually still understand you. It’s all part of the language-learning journey. Why not make a coffee now and do some more research about make and do?

Happy Coffee Breaking!

Listen to the podcastThe post When to use ‘do’ and ‘make’ in English appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

The Spanish R is one of the most distinctive sounds when you listen to a native speaker.

For a learner, getting your mouth around the R might not only be challenging, but it can also be tough to know how and when to use it.

The Coffee Break Spanish Show is a podcast series of bite-sized, friendly conversations that demystify tricky Spanish language topics. In the latest episode, Mark and Anabel dive into Spanish pronunciation and chat about how to say the letter R.

Anabel shares valuable tips on how to achieve the correct pronunciation of the Spanish R – both when simple and when rolled – and gives us some creative ways to practise it.

Continue reading to find out more and why not listen to the podcast as you go?

The simple R – R you ready?To pronounce the simple R sound in Spanish, you need to place the tip of your tongue above the back of your teeth, on the roof of your mouth. It’s the same place where you place it to pronounce a D. While you gently touch that point with the tip of your tongue to make a D sound, you have to “caress” it in order to pronounce the R.

If you are good at accents, Mark’s tip is to try saying words like “city”, “bottle” or “letter” in a New York accent. The sound made to pronounce the T in those words is very close to the Spanish R!

Now that you know how to say it, it’s important to practise. Here are some drills that will help you to master this sound:

ara – are – ari – aro – aru

era – ere – eri – ero – eru

ira – ire – iri – iro – iru

ora – ore – ori – oro – oru

ura – ure – uri – uro – uru

Once you have these, you can start practising with real words in Spanish, like:

caroexpensive

eraI was

giroturn

huertovegetable garden

Pay attention to the letter combinations in the sounds and words we’ve seen so far, as this will help you to recognise when to make the simple R sound, as opposed to the strong R. When the R comes between two vowels (for example in caro) or at the end of a syllable (for example in huerto, the sound will be a simple R, rather than a strong R. We also pronounce a simple R when an R appears after a consonant, unless it’s an L, S or N (e.g brazo – “arm”).

The strong R – roll with it!Now that we know where to place the tip of our tongue, we are going to keep it there, relax the tongue and exhale air strongly. With time and practice, the tip will move creating that double R sound. One shortcut is to try to say PR, placing your tongue in the right spot above your teeth. Then, try extending the R sound and saying prrr and brrr.

It can be tricky at first, but ¡no te preocupes! Practise as much as possible and soon you’ll have mastered the sound!

When you are able to say prrr and brrr, it’s time to practise with other drills. Try working your way through the following sounds:

ra – re – ri – ro – ru

arra – arre – arri – arro – arruerra – erre – erri – erro – erruira – irre – irri – irro – irruorra – orre – orri – orro – orruurra – urre – urri – urro – urru

pra – pre – pri – pro – prubra – bre – bri – bro – brucra – cre – cri – cro – crutra – tre – tri – tro – trufra – fre – fri – fro – frudra – dre – dri – dro – drugra – gre – gri – gro – gru

As you may have noticed, this sound appears in Spanish when you have two Rs between vowels (e.g. perro – “dog”) or a single R at the beginning of a word (e.g. rápido – “fast”). We pronounce a rolled R when we find an L, S, or N before the R (e.g. alrededor – “around” or enriquecer – “enrich”). Note that when an R comes after any other consonant, we pronounce a simple R, rather than a rolled R.

Let’s practise!One challenging word to practise is carretera, “road”, which contains both sounds – the simple and double R. A tip is to split it up and practise saying carre- and -tera as if they were two separate words.

Here are some trabalenguas, “tongue twisters”, to challenge yourself. You can hear Anabel pronounce these in the podcast episode.   Like tongue twisters in any language, these are nonsense phrases! Still, in case you’re wondering, we’ve included the English translations:

Tres tristes tigres tragan trigo en un trigal.Three sad tigers swallow wheat in a wheat field.

El carril del tren es rápido, caro y raro.The train line is fast, expensive and rare.

El perro de Pedro rasca a la rata.Pedro’s dog scratches the rat.

Enrico enriquece el rico arroz.Enrico enhances the delicious rice.

Keep your Rs up!If you found this post interesting, make sure to listen to the full episode with Mark and Anabel on The Coffee Break Spanish Show. In this series of chats between our language experts, we look at a range of topics for Spanish learners, so make sure to subscribe to our podcast feed and our channel on YouTube.

Remember to be patient and keep on practising – ¡Recuerda ser paciente y practicar!

Happy Coffee Breaking!

Listen to the podcastThe post How to pronounce the R in Spanish appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Word order in German can seem unusual, especially when there is more than one verb in a sentence. However, you’ll soon find that there are some straightforward rules to follow and constructing sentences with confidence will be well within your grasp.

The Coffee Break German Show is a podcast series of bite-sized, friendly conversations in which we demystify tricky German language topics. In the latest episode, Mark and Thomas discuss some rules to follow when using more than one verb in a sentence.

This short but thorough conversation clarifies how to form multi-verb sentences with certainty.

Continue reading to find out more and why not listen to the podcast as you go?

The basics of word orderLet’s look at the basics to get a clear starting point. As you may already know, the verb in a German sentence occupies the second position.

The verb may follow the subject of the sentence or an adverb of time. When after an adverb, the subject is moved into third position.

What happens with two verbs?When there are two verbs in a sentence, one is conjugated and the other may be in the infinitive form or be a past participle.

What do we do in this case? The conjugated, auxiliary verb takes the second position. Just as its name suggests, an auxiliary verb helps out by forming part of a tense with another main verb. The main verb goes to the end of the clause or sentence.

Let’s look at this situation in more depth.

Types of auxiliary verbsThe first type of auxiliary verb Mark and Thomas mention is werden. It works together with a main verb, in the infinitive, to form the future tense.

The other auxiliary verbs they mention are haben and sein. These are conjugated in the present tense and work together with a past participle of a main verb to form the perfect tense.

The last type of auxiliary verbs Mark and Thomas look at in this podcast are modal verbs. They, too, are conjugated and placed in second position with the infinitive being placed at the end of the sentence or clause.

Examples with two verbs in a sentenceHere is an example of the future tense:

Wir werden morgen mit dem Boot nach Korsika fahren.Tomorrow, we will travel to Corsica by boat.

This construction uses the conjugated present tense of werden in second position and the infinitive form of the main verb, fahren.

In the podcast, Mark mentions all the information given between the two verbs. There’s the time phrase, morgen. Then there’s a mode of transport, mit dem Boot. Next, there’s a location, nach Korsika, before the main verb. This is a good reminder of the word order of other parts of a sentence, i.e. time, manner, place. However, that’s a whole other video in itself!

Our second example also shows two verbs in one sentence, but this time one is a modal verb in the present tense and the other is an infinitive.

Du sollst nach dem Essen deine Hände waschen.You should wash your hands after eating.

Sollst, the modal verb, is in the present tense, and the other, waschen, is in the infinitive. The modal verb is conjugated and takes second position, while the main verb is placed at the end of the sentence.

Our third example is in the perfect tense.

Mein Vater hat gestern Abend für uns gekocht.My father cooked for us last night.

The auxiliary verb here is the conjugated, present tense of haben, which is paired with the past participle of the main verb, gekocht, forming the perfect tense. The past participle is at the end of the sentence or clause.

It can seem as though there’s a lot between the auxiliary verb and the main verb at the end of the clause or sentence.

Thomas gives a top tip: if you are reading in German, first look at the end of the clause or sentence to see the main verb. This helps you find out what the sentence is about.

Negation of a sentence with two verbsWhere do we place nicht if we want to make the sentence negative?

The nicht goes directly before the main verb at the end. This way it negates the whole sentence, not just one part of it. For example:

Sie werden dieses Spiel nicht gewinnen.You (formal) will not win this game. / They will not win this game.

This sentence is in the future tense, using werden as the auxiliary verb. (By the way, gewinnen means “to win”, despite looking like a past participle since the infinitive begins with ge-. The past participle of gewinnen is gewonnen.) As you can see, the nicht is right before the infinitive, making the sentence negative.

Beginning with an adverbCommonly, sentences begin with something other than the subject of the sentence. For example, an adverb of time can begin a sentence or clause, as we see in the example below.

Letztes Jahr sind sie mit dem Auto in den Urlaub gefahren.Last year, they travelled on holiday by car.

The important thing to remember in this situation is that the conjugated verb, sind, still has to be in the second position, after the adverb of time, letztes Jahr. It is the subject of the sentence, sie, that moves into third position when something else comes before the first verb. The main verb, gefahren, still remains in last position at the end of the clause or sentence.

Subordinate clausesThe last construction Mark and Thomas look at is when there are two verbs in a subordinate clause, rather than a main clause. Let’s look at a final example:

Wenn du morgen arbeiten musst, dann können wir auch übermorgen schwimmen gehen.If you have to work tomorrow, then we can go swimming the day after tomorrow.

A nice way to remember which is the subordinate clause is to think of it as the one that cannot stand alone and make sense on its own. In this example, it begins with wenn. Wenn is a subordinating conjunction and sends the verb to the end. This turns the rules we’ve learned so far on their head, as the conjugated verb, musst, is sent to the end of that clause, immediately after the main verb, arbeiten.

The other part of the sentence is a main clause and the verbs appear in the “normal” way – können is in second position and gehen is at the very end of the clause and sentence.

All in order?Here’s a visual summary of how word order works in sentences with two verbs.

Be conscious of word order the next time you read something in German. Gradually, you will become more familiar with the rules, and correct word order will feel increasingly natural when you’re speaking German.

Happy Coffee Breaking!

Listen to the podcastThe post Unravelling word order in German multi-verb sentences appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

When you speak Italian, formality is more than just a grammatical nuance – it’s a cultural code that reflects our relationships and social contexts.

This can be difficult at times, but don’t worry! Francesca and Mark share some tips – whether you want to talk to a friend, a relative, a doctor, or even the president of Italy.

Continue reading to find out more, and why not enjoy the podcast episode as you go?

Formality in ItalianFormality, in the context of the Italian language, hinges on the choice between tu and Lei – the two ways of addressing someone as “you”. This affects not just pronouns but verb conjugations as well, and choosing between tu and Lei involves recognising the nature of the situation and whether it is most appropriate to sound informal or formal.

In terms of which form of the verb to use:

tu is used in the second person singular form of the verb, for example tu canti (“you (informal) sing”), tu apri (“you (informal) open”)

Lei is used in the third person singular form of the verb, for example Lei canta (“you (formal) sing”), Lei apre (“you (formal) open”)

You might notice that Lei shares its written form with the third person singular pronoun lei (“she”), however it starts with a capital letter.

The plural youThe plural form of address is voi for both informal and formal contexts. For example:

Bambini, volete del gelato?Children, would you like some ice cream?

Come posso aiutarvi, signori?How can I help you, gentlemen?

A very formal plural form of address, Loro, is usually reserved for extremely formal situations, such as high-end establishments like luxury hotels.

Loro sono i signori Verdi?Are you Mr and Mrs Verdi?

Loro voglio accomodarsi?Would you like to take a seat?

Decoding the scenarios1. StrangersImagine you’re meeting someone for the first time or you’re asking someone for information. In this case, the safer option is to use the formal form of address, Lei, unless the person is noticeably younger than you. Let’s say you want to catch their attention – you would say:

Scusi!Excuse me! (formal)

Scusa!Excuse me! (informal) 2. Professional settingsAt workplaces or when addressing superiors, such as your boss, adopting the formal Lei is the norm. Similarly, in academic settings like schools and universities, people tend to use formal language when communicating with teachers and professors. 3. Familiar territoryAmong friends and people you know well, the informal tu is the way to go. It conveys a sense of intimacy and familiarity.

Titles as indicators of formalityFormality often comes hand in hand with titles. Adding titles can be a clear sign of formality, for example:

Signore / SignoraSir / Madam or Mr / Ms

Professore / ProfessoressaProfessor

Dottore / DottoressaDoctor

These titles show respect and set the tone for a formal conversation.

When to transition to ‘tu’Sometimes, negotiating formality becomes an explicit conversation. The following phrases are all ways of transitioning to a more familiar or relaxed tone of conversation.

diamoci del tulet’s use the tu form with each other (literally, “let’s give each other the tu form”)

dammi del tuuse the tu form with me (literally, “give me the tu form”)

non darmi del Leidon’t use the Lei form with me (literally, “don’t give me the Lei form”)

Choosing between tu and Lei is a personal decision that, once made, tends to be stuck to within a conversation or even relationship (unless a transition like this happens).

Note that, while nowadays it is possible to notice a shift towards informality, the majority of Italians still prefer to use both tu and Lei, depending on the situation.

Regional variantsSometimes geography plays a role in the choice of forms of address. In southern Italy, the tendency to replace Lei with voi is noticeable, echoing the French vous. For example:

Signor Turri, volete un caffè?Mr Turri, would you like a coffee?

È tutto, signore e signori!The choice between tu and Lei in Italian is more than just grammatical – it is also about social customs. Understanding these subtleties enables you to navigate various situations, whether chatting with friends, addressing your boss, or exploring the charming streets of Italy.

If you found this post interesting, make sure to listen to the full episode with Mark and Francesca on The Coffee Break Italian Show. This is the series in which we look at a range of topics for Italian learners, so make sure to subscribe to our podcast feed or our channel on YouTube.

If you have conversations in Italian, the choice between tu and Lei is bound to come up sooner, rather than later. The best tip is not to stress about it. People will understand you are a learner, and the advice in this blog will give you a firm starting block.

Happy Coffee Breaking!

Listen to the podcastThe post Converse in Italian like a native: choosing ‘tu’ or ‘Lei’ appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

French pronunciation can be both fascinating and tricky, especially when it comes to vowel sounds like ou and u.

These two sounds might seem similar at first, but being able to distinguish between them will greatly help to improve your French pronunciation and comprehension, as well as your spelling.

In this article, we are going to look at the tips they give us to be able to produce these sounds accurately, and we will also provide some words and exercises to practise.

Continue reading to find out more.

How to say ‘ou’Max gives his tips for pronouncing ou:

Lips slightly forwardBegin by pushing your lips slightly forward.

Round your mouthKeep your mouth in a rounded shape.

Tongue placementPlace your tongue towards the back of your mouth, but don’t let it touch your teeth.

Here are some examples of words that have this sound:

nouswe / us

vousyou (formal / plural)

bonjourhello

How to say ‘u’Max’s tips for pronouncing u are:

Lips slightly forwardLike ou, push your lips slightly forward.

Round your mouthMaintain the rounded shape of your mouth.

Tongue placementUnlike ou, this time let your tongue gently touch your bottom teeth while making the sound.

Some examples of words that have this sound:

tuyou (informal singular)

j’ai luI read / I have read

j’ai vuI saw / I have seen

j’ai buI drank / I have drunk

Let’s practise!Now that you know the basics, let’s practise to improve your pronunciation. In the podcast episode, Max tells us four top tips for you to get a good grasp of this pronunciation:

Repeat the soundsStart by saying ou and u separately, repeating each sound five times. Pay close attention to your lip and tongue positions.
Spelling mattersGet familiar with how these sounds are spelled in French. This is one example of where French spelling makes perfect sense – you’ll always find ou and u representing these sounds. The pronunciation of these two sounds is the same even if there is an accent in the word, for example où (“where”) and dû (the past participle of devoir). The only small additional detail to watch out for is one word that sounds exactly like u: eu, the past participle of avoir. This is used in compound tenses like the passé composé, such as in j’ai eu (“I have had”).
Use them in sentencesTry incorporating these sounds into everyday phrases and sentences. For example, try saying:

nourriturefood

tout va bieneverything is going well

tu vas bienyou are well

Tu l’as lu ?Have you read it?

Manges-tu du mangetout ?Do you eat mangetout / snow peas?

This will help you practise using these sounds naturally. 4. Spot the differenceTo really grasp the nuances, work with minimal pairs – these are words that differ by just one sound. Here are some examples to practise with:

hutte / août
Hutte means “hut”, while août means “August”.

du / doux
Du means “of the” / “some” / “from the” / “any”, while doux means “sweet”.

puce / pouce
Puce means “flea” / “computer chip”, while pouce means “thumb”.

bulle / boule
Bulle means “bubble”, while boule means “ball”.

tu le jures / tout le jour
Tu le jures means “you swear it”, while tout le jour means “all day”.

la mûre / l’amourLa mûre means “the blackberry”, while l’amour means “love”.

A visual summaryIn conclusionMastering the pronunciation of ou and u in French is a journey that gets easier with practice. By understanding the basics of lip and tongue positions, using these sounds in sentences, and practising with minimal pairs, you’ll soon find yourself speaking French with more confidence.

So, embrace the charm of French pronunciation, one vowel sound at a time.

Bonne chance and happy Coffee Breaking!

Listen to the podcastThe post Mastering French vowel sounds: ‘ou’ and ‘u’ made easy appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In episode 15 of Coffee Break Gaelic, we’re going on holiday! We’ll learn some new vocabulary to talk about the landscape which will give us the tools to decipher the meaning of some Scottish placenames.

The post CBGa 1.15 | Talking about holidays – Vocabulary for landscape appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

The topic of lesson 15 of Coffee Break Portuguese is numbers. Join Rafael and Ava as they count up to the thousands in Portuguese, and learn the days of the week, the months of the year, as well as some helpful phrases which use numbers and dates. We learned the numbers up to 10 in lesson 6 of our course, so if you haven’t already listened to that episode, you can find it in the Podcasts section of our website. Vamos lá!

The post CBP 1.15 | Numbers, days and months – Counting from 1 to 1000+ in Portuguese appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

We reach the final chapter of our story and we find out how the breakthrough in the relationship between Carlos and Marta goes beyond their emotional bond. New words to listen out for include: descabellado, enfrascados and apurar.

The post Capítulo 20 – Un nuevo inicio appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In this week’s episode of Coffee Break Gaelic, we’re expanding on our previous lesson and learning how to talk about where we are going using place names.

The post CBGa 1.14 | How to talk about destinations in Scottish Gaelic appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Join teacher Rafael and learner Ava for lesson 14 of Coffee Break Portuguese. Today, we are learning transactional language that you can use in a hotel scenario, including how to make a reservation and ask about the facilities. We’ll hear a dialogue between two Portuguese speakers and we’ll also learn a little more about one particular country where Portuguese is spoken in today’s Cafezinho com Catarina.

The post CBP 1.14 | Arriving at the hotel – How to book a hotel room in Portuguese appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Carlos and Marta continue their conversation and admit the mistakes that they have both made in the past. However, Carlos worries about Marta’s reaction to his news. Listen out for new language which include: volver a la infancia, algunos cabos sueltos and nunca es tarde si la dicha es buena.

The post Capítulo 19 – La verdadera herencia appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Susanna and Mark are back with another lesson of Coffee Break Gaelic. Now that we’ve learned how to talk about places around town, we’re going to learn how to ask “where are you going?” along with various answers to this question.

The post CBGa 1.13 | How to ask “Where are you going?” in Gaelic appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Bem-vindos a Coffee Break Portuguese lesson 13! In this lesson we are expanding on what we learned in lesson 12, in which we were talking about how to order in a restaurant. We’ll be taking this a step further and talking about how to express likes and dislikes, and say what you can and can’t ... Read more

The post CBP 1.13 | More about food and eating out – Key restaurant vocabulary in Portuguese appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Carlos and Marta meet up in the square where they spent time during her childhood. They have a very honest conversation about the path that has led them both to this point. New phrases like nimiedades, encajar el golpe and ni en pintura are included in this latest episode.

The post Capítulo 18 – Padre e hija appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In this final main lesson we hear about how the family wrapped up their holiday on the Swedish west coast. We learn new vocabulary and new phrases, and have a look at the difference prepositions can make to the same verb.

The post CBSw TD 1.10 | Sol och bad på Tylösand appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Welcome back to another episode of Coffee Break Gaelic with teacher Susanna and learner Mark. In episode 11 we learned how to talk about places in the town. We’re going to take this topic a step further this week and learn how to ask “where is?” We’ll also be introducing some definite articles.

The post CBGa 1.12 | Where is? – Asking where things are in Gaelic appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Olá! In this episode of Coffee Break Portuguese we’re learning vocabulary and phrases that will come in useful if you’re going to a restaurant. We’ll be learning how to ask for a table and how to order a meal, as well as the words for some specific dishes from the Portuguese-speaking world.

The post CBP 1.12 | Ordering a meal in a restaurant – How to order food in Portuguese appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Carlos returns to the same bench in the same square he used to wait for Marta after school when she was a child. Will his game and these memories convince Marta of his plan? Find out more about Carlos in this latest chapter while listening for new phrases like llenar de elogios, tirar la toalla ... Read more

The post Capítulo 17 – Más de una vida esperando appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In the penultimate lesson of our Travel Diaries we follow Mattias and family further south along the Swedish west coast to the city of Halmstad. As the family runs into a minor crisis situation we take the opportunity to delve into lots of new phrases and grammar. We explore the difference between varsin, varsitt and ... Read more

The post CBSw TD 1.09 | En spännande dag i Halmstad appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

We’re back with another episode of Coffee Break Gaelic. In this lesson, you’ll be learning some useful vocabulary to talk about places in the town in Gaelic.

The post CBGa 1.11 | Places in town – Town vocabulary in Gaelic appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

We’re back with episode 11 of Coffee Break Portuguese! In this lesson, Rafael and Ava are talking about the transactional language that you’ll need to know to order drinks in a café. We’ll also be joined by Catarina in today’s Cafezinho com Catarina, in which we’ll find out more about coffee-drinking habits in the Portuguese-speaking ... Read more

The post CBP 1.11 | Ordering drinks in a café – How to order a coffee in Portuguese appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Marta opens the briefcase using the key from the last puzzle and finds something very special that her father has been working on. Will this finally change everything? Join Marta in this emotional chapter and listen out for the new phrases: dar en la nariz and de Pascuas a Ramos.

The post Capítulo 16 – Lo verdaderamente importante appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Episode 8 of our Swedish Travel Diaries is packed with lots of grammar and new vocabulary. We follow the family to the little island of Vinga where one of Sweden’s most influential troubadours grew up. While we explore Vinga we also learn new phrases and expressions.

The post CBSw Travel Diaries 1.08 | Vinga – kompositörens lilla ö appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Join teacher Susanna and learner Mark in Episode 10 of our series for beginners in Gaelic. It’s time to put your learning to the test and review everything we’ve learned in episodes 1-9 so far.

The post CBGa 1.10 | End-of-unit review — The basics in Gaelic from Lessons 1–9 appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In this episode we start to see things more from Carlos’ point of view which helps us understand his character and motives a bit better. Listen out for new phrases like la edad del pavo and dar el brazo a torcer.

The post Capítulo 15 – El principio de todo appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Following our visit to the amusement park, Liseberg, in the last episode, we now get to hear more about what the family does in the city of Göteborg. We focus on the past and perfect tenses, encounter some new phrasal verbs, and look at familiar vocabulary in new contexts.

The post CBSw Travel Diaries 1.07 | Längs Göteborgs soliga gator appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

We’re here with the final episode of Coffee Break Italian Season 3! In the last chapter of “Il tesoro di Montespelonca” Professor Doppi’s motives are revealed: will he keep the treasure to himself or will it share it with the children? You will be able to really put yourself to the test with some advanced ... Read more

The post CBI 3.40 | Il tesoro di Montespelonca | Tutto è bene, quel che finisce bene! appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Welcome to the final episode of Coffee Break German Season 3. In this episode we conclude our story series “Ein Zwilling studiert selten allein” by listening to Marian tell Lucie his news and then the two share a big hug. This last episode is packed full of grammar topics which have been covered in the ... Read more

The post CBG 3.40 | Ein Zwilling studiert selten allein | Ende gut, alles gut appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

We have reached lesson 10 of Coffee Break Portuguese! In this review lesson we go over what we learned in the first nine lessons of the season. We talk through the key points we’ve covered so far, then practise by listening to a dialogue. We hope you enjoy seeing how much you’ve learned over the ... Read more

The post CBP 1.10 | End-of-unit review – The basics in Portuguese from Lessons 1–9 appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

We’re back with a new episode of Coffee Break Gaelic! In this episode we’re focusing on the topic of weather. By the end of the lesson, you’ll be able to describe the weather in Gaelic in both the present tense and the future tense.

The post CBGa 1.09 | How to talk about the weather in Scottish Gaelic appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In Chapter 14 we have another dialogue between Marta and her mother Pilar. While Marta continues playing her father’s game, we hear many interesting expressions like olerse la tostada and ser tal para cuál along with new verbs such as entrometerse.

The post Capítulo 14 – El mejor escondite appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In this episode we follow the family to the amusement park Liseberg in Gothenburg. During this rainy day we get the chance to practise the perfect tense and really put our understanding of phrasal verbs to the test.

The post CBSw Travel Diaries 1.06 | Kläder efter väder på Liseberg appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

We’re back with the penultimate episode of Coffee Break Italian Season 3! In this chapter of our story series “Il tesoro di Montespelonca” after making it to the cave, Alessandro and his friends decide to confront the person they believe is stealing the treasure hidden. Meanwhile, a terrible storm is flooding the cave. Will our ... Read more

The post CBI 3.39 | Il tesoro di Montespelonca | Pericolo scampato! appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

We’re back with the penultimate episode of Coffee Break German Season 3! In this instalment of our story series “Ein Zwilling studiert selten allein” Marian receives another email about his future. In this episode listen out for a different way to emphasise adjectives in German and the apt idiom über den Berg sein.

The post CBG 3.39 | Ein Zwilling studiert selten allein | Bangen und stille Freude appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

We’ve reached lesson nine of Coffee Break Portuguese – the series that will teach you Portuguese right from the beginning. In this lesson we’re talking about something which is very important to us here at Coffee Break Languages … and that is language! We’ll be learning some helpful phrases that you can use to express that ... Read more

The post CBP 1.09 | Talking about language – Useful phrases in Portuguese appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

We’re back with teacher Susanna and learner Mark for another episode of Coffee Break Gaelic. In this episode you’ll learn how to cope with not understanding things in Gaelic and how to ask the question “what does that mean?”.

The post CBGa 1.08 | How to say “I don’t understand” in Scottish Gaelic appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In this episode, Marta concentrates on solving the puzzle she abandoned many years ago while Pilar observes her and seems to know more than she is letting on… what could she and Carlos be hiding? As usual, the episode is packed with new and interesting words like callejón and phrases like darse por vencido and ... Read more

The post Capítulo 13 – ¿Qué es lo más importante? appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In this lesson we explore the small town Skärhamn on the Swedish west coast where we take the opportunity to delve into slightly more complex grammar. We look at how certain words can carry different meanings depending on the context and how other words can be used to subtly to convey different feelings. Of course, ... Read more

The post CBSw Travel Diaries 1.05 | Småstaden Skärhamn appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Welcome back to a new episode of Coffee Break Italian Season 3 and another instalment of our story series “Il tesoro di Montespelonca”! In this chapter, Alessandro shares with his friends what he has learned about le Torrette thanks to nonna Nina. Will they finally find the entrance to the legendary cave? Francesca and Mark ... Read more

The post CBI 3.38 | Il tesoro di Montespelonca | Ma lui cosa fa qui? appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

We’re back with a new episode of Coffee Break German Season 3 and therefore another instalment of our story series “Ein Zwilling studiert selten allein”! In this episode, the twins are preoccupied with preparations for their respective future studies; Lucie has even already found friends and met her future roommate online on the forum for ... Read more

The post CBG 3.38 | Ein Zwilling studiert selten allein | Künftige Mitbewohner:innen appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

We’re back with another episode to help you learn Portuguese on your coffee break. In our eighth lesson we’re delving further into the topic of places in town. Join Rafael and Ava to learn some more words and phrases that you should now if you’re visiting a new Portuguese-speaking town or city, and learn how ... Read more

The post CBP 1.08 | More places in town – How to ask for directions in Portuguese appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Join teacher Susanna, learner Mark and Cultural Correspondent Rae in this latest episode of Coffee Break Gaelic our series for beginners of Gaelic. In this lesson you’ll learn the words for different languages in Gaelic and how to talk about which languages you speak. You’ll also find out more about Gaelic in Nova Scotia.

The post CBGa 1.07 | Talking about language — Useful phrases in Gaelic appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In this episode we go with Marta back to her childhood; to her room, to her memories and to the last puzzle she ever received from her father. Can she find what she is looking for? Listen out for the new verbs corroer and rebuscar, and can you work out what ver algo con otros ... Read more

The post Capítulo 12 – El último rompecabezas appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Welcome to the next instalment of the Coffee Break Swedish Travel Diaries! Day four of the trip takes us to the swimming spot, Bleket. The weather is shifting, which causes the mood of some family members to shift too. As we dive into salty water, we learn new vocabulary and grammar, before rounding off the ... Read more

The post CBSw Travel Diaries 1.04 | Badplatsen Bleket appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

We’re back with another episode of Coffee Break Italian Season 3 and another instalment of our story series “Il tesoro di Montespelonca“. After the events of the previous episode, Alessandro is still angry with his friends and decides to visit his nonna for lunch in hopes of finally getting to the bottom of the mystery! ... Read more

The post CBI 3.37 | Il tesoro di Montespelonca | La leggenda delle Torrette. appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Welcome back to another episode of Coffee Break German Season 3 and in this episode we have a further instalment of our story series “Ein Zwilling studiert selten allein”! In this part of the story, we hear a conversation between father and son: keeping his best interests in mind, observant father Michael talks to Marian ... Read more

The post CBG 3.37 | Ein Zwilling studiert selten allein | Väterlicher Rat appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Hej hej! My name is Lovisa and I joined the Coffee Break team in September 2020. As a native Swedish speaker and someone who loves learning languages, I’m absolutely thrilled to have the opportunity to help others learn Swedish and to be part of and contribute to the lovely Coffee Break community! What is your ... Read more

The post Meet the team: Lovisa appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Olá! Welcome to another episode of Coffee Break Portuguese. Our topic for today is places in town. Rafael and Ava will cover some useful words and phrases to help you find your way around a town or city and talk about how to ask for directions. This lesson is an introduction to the topic and we’ll be taking it further in lesson 8.

The post CBP 1.07 | Asking where things are – City vocabulary in Portuguese appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Welcome back to another episode of Coffee Break Gaelic. In this lesson you’ll learn some new vocabulary to talk about your family. We’ll also cover the numbers from zero to ten and the days of the week.

The post CBGa 1.06 | Numbers 1–10 — How to count from 1–10 in Gaelic appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In Chapter 10, Pilar called Marta following a visit from an estate agent arranged by Carlos some time ago. Before Marta had the chance to uncover any information about her father, Pilar hung up the phone on her. Listen to this week’s episode as Marta heads to back to her childhood home to find out ... Read more

The post Capítulo 11 – ¿Y ahora qué? appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In this lesson, the family leaves Marstrand to travel to nearby island Klädesholmen. We get to hear stories about Mattias’s childhood as he takes us up and down the streets lined by white wooden houses on this rocky island full of rose bushes, sunshine, and sailboats. We learn some new vocabulary and revise verb tenses along the way!

The post CBSw Travel Diaries 1.03 | Krabbfiske och bastubad på Klädesholmen appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Welcome back to another episode of Coffee Break Italian Season 3 and a further instalment of our story series “Il tesoro di Montespelonca”! In this chapter Alessandro and his friends finally make it to Le Torrette but are disappointed to find only grass and thorn bushes when they arrive. The three friends disagree on their next steps and Alessandro decides to continue to investigate on his own. Listen out for our Cosina: meglio soli che male accompagnati!

The post CBI 3.36 | Il tesoro di Montespelonca | D’ora in poi me la caverò da solo! appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

We’re back with a new episode of Coffee Break German Season 3 and another instalment of our story series “Ein Zwilling studiert selten allein”! In this part of the story we find out about Marian’s email from UCLA and how family and friends react to the news. In this episode, among other things, you will find a wide range of tenses being used from pluperfect, perfect, imperfect, present and future all in just a few sentences. Furthermore you can find some new vocabulary describing the emotions the twins are feeling such as schlechtes Gewissen, ablenken and verlockend.

The post CBG 3.36 | Ein Zwilling studiert selten allein | Ein Wechselbad der Gefühle appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Join Rafael and Ava in the latest episode of Coffee Break Portuguese, in which we’re learning how to count from 1–10, how to ask for and give telephone numbers, and how to give more information about your family using numbers. We’ll also be joined by Catarina for more listening practice and some learning about Portuguese names in today’s Cafezinho com Catarina. Estão prontos? Vamos lá!

The post CBP 1.06 | Numbers 1–10 – How to count from 1–10 in Portuguese appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Susanna and Mark are back for another episode of Coffee Break Gaelic. In this lesson, you’ll learn how to introduce different members of your family and how to use emphatic pronouns such as esan and ise. You’ll also hear about the meaning of some Gaelic surnames from our Cultural Correspondent Rae.

The post CBGa 1.05 | Introducing your family — Words for family members in Gaelic appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Hi, I’m Erin and I am the Social Media Coordinator here at Coffee Break Languages. I first worked with Coffee Break as an intern in 2017 when I was involved in the development of Coffee Break Chinese Season 1. After graduating from the University of Glasgow with a degree in Linguistics and Spanish, I joined the team once again and have now worked full time with Coffee Break for over a year. I spent many of my student years sharing my language-learning journey on social media, so it feels like a full circle moment to continue sharing my passion for languages in this way with our wonderful learners!

What is your role in Coffee Break?I plan, produce, film, edit and schedule content across all of our social media platforms. I also work on Coffee Break Chinese, writing and developing new course materials and interacting with our community of Chinese learners. Furthermore, I support our Spanish learning community by answering questions on the Coffee Break Spanish Masterclass.

What experience have you had speaking and learning other languages?I learned Spanish in high school and I was lucky enough to take part in a Spanish exchange programme with a Spanish girl from Villa Real called María. I loved the thrill of navigating the language barrier in order to communicate with María and I gained a deep satisfaction from learning a phrase and using it practically to find out more about her. For me, as soon as language became about communication and getting to know a person or a part of the world better, it became the most rewarding activity.

I began to develop a deep curiosity for other languages and cultures and my interest in Mandarin was ignited at the Chinese supermarket in Glasgow of all places! I remember going there several times with my parents and feeling a sense of awe at seeing all the packaging for mundane things like rice, juice and bread covered in these beautiful Chinese characters. I then asked for some Chinese lessons for my birthday and took a couple of beginner’s classes at age 16. My head teacher found out about my interest and helped me to apply for a two-week trip to China organised by the Confucius Institute for Scotland’s Schools. I then applied for a year-long scholarship in Tianjin, China, with the same organisation and I was delighted to be accepted. I moved to China at 18 years old and studied Chinese in a highly international environment surrounded by speakers of Russian, Korean, Japanese and Italian, to name but a few. At university I was fortunate to be able take courses in Russian and Portuguese, and study abroad in Huelva, Spain for one year. I hope to continue learning languages – working with so many talented polyglots is definitely a great motivator!

What are your favourite memories of working with Coffee Break?Our office is based in a Scottish beach town called Ayr. During the summer we sometimes have “beach meetings” and walk along to make the most of the sun (which is rare in Scotland!) and the lovely location, whilst being productive at the same time. On one occasion we went to the local ice cream shop and walked along in the sun with our ice cream cones. That was certainly a great day at work!

Where would your ideal coffee break be and with whom?My ideal coffee break would be around a fire on a beach (in Ireland, preferably) with my whole extended family after a BBQ, just after the sun has gone down and the beach is getting cold – that’s when the hot drinks taste best. Of course, marshmallows and a sing-song would also have to be involved!

What’s your best language learning tip?Don’t take yourself too seriously. As a non-native speaker, you are never going to be mistake-free, no matter how “fluent” you are. The best language learners make mistakes constantly because they know that is the only way to learn. I would advise you to get really, really comfortable with making mistakes and sometimes, let’s face it, embarrassing yourself! The end goal of language learning is communication, not perfect fluency, so keep that in mind when you are using your language skills for the first time. One of my favourite quotes is by Amy Chua in Battle Hymn of the Tiger Mother, where she says: “Do you know what a foreign accent is? It’s a sign of bravery.” Your willingness to put yourself out there is very brave, so don’t give yourself a hard time for mistakes, just keeping using the language and improvements will come with practice.

Quickfire round

Favourite language: Mandarin. For me it is the process of language learning that I find fun. The Chinese language continues to fascinate me and I feel like I will never stop learning.
Favourite word/phrase: I love any phrase or word in Chinese where I get to use the 儿 ér pronunciation from Beijing. For example, 快点儿 kuài diǎn’er (faster). Not only do I enjoy how it sounds, but I learned Chinese in Tianjin, in the north of China, close to Beijing, so this accent reminds me of the people I met there.
Favourite film: Todo sobre mi madre (All about my mother)
Favourite destination: Tuscany

Do you have a message for the Coffee Break Community?Thank you for being such a supportive, loyal community. I love interacting with you all online, and one of the best parts of my job is responding to lovely feedback and questions from enthusiastic learners. Keep being you!

The post Meet the team: Erin appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

The adventures of the family continue! In this episode we follow them as they take the ferry over to the island of Marstrandsön – an island full of sunshine, history, old fortresses, ghosts, and seagulls. This lesson builds on a lot of the grammar we are already familiar with and we encounter verbs in new tenses. We also see some new and useful constructions, and learn more about some of Sweden’s most infamous criminals.

The post CBSw Travel Diaries 1.02 | En dag på Marstrandsön appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

We’re back with another episode of Coffee Break Italian Season 3 and our fifth instalment of “Il tesoro di Montespelonca“! In this part of the story Alessandro and his friends visit the village’s local historian, Professor Doppi, to find out more about the legend of the cave. He says that, according to some old documents, there could be an actual cave below the mountain but it has never been explored as the passage seems to be blocked. He also gives them a big book containing a chapter on ‘Le Torrette’, two ancient towers on the mountain near the village. Apparently, these towers indicated the way towards a hidden path to the cave used by bandits, but the path to this day has not been found…

The post CBI 3.35 | Il tesoro di Montespelonca | Chiediamo al professor Doppi! appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

What is your role in Coffee Break?I am an Italian Content Developer and a Publishing Associate. I work on episodes of Coffee Break Italian, write social media posts, support in the writing and editing of notes on the Academy and film videos for Coffee Break TV. I also keep an eye on the book market and I make sure that we have everything we need to publish books, like our 50 Coffee Breaks series. There’s a lot of researching involved in my job, which makes it very exciting!

What experience have you had speaking and learning other languages?I’ve been learning multiple languages since I was in primary school. I started with English and Spanish, then I moved to French when I started my undergraduate course at university. During my postgraduate, I had the opportunity to spend some time in Portugal and learn some Portuguese.

I speak Italian and English on a daily basis and I try to keep up with my French and Spanish by talking to my colleagues, listening to music or watching TV shows and films in the two languages. I would like to learn German in the future and I have already started listening to Coffee Break German Season 1.

What are your favourite memories of working with Coffee Break Languages?When I was working as an intern a few years ago, Catriona surprised me with a delicious chocolate cake for my birthday. I didn’t tell anyone that it was my birthday that day and when I got into work I found a birthday cake in front of me! It was such a nice surprise and the cake was so yummy. I appreciate the fact that we take the time to celebrate each other here at Coffee Break Languages.

Where would your ideal coffee break be, and with whom?There’s a little café on top of a mountain, near a small village called Pintura di Bolognola, in Marche, Italy. From there you can see the sea beyond the valleys of my region. My ideal coffee break would be there with my grandmother Lina.

What’s your best language-learning tip?Make your language-learning a daily habit! Try to expose yourself to the language you’re learning on a daily basis. You can do this by listening to a song, watching a video on YouTube, or reading a news story. It’s better to practise your new language 5 minutes every day rather than 2 hours once a week. If you practice your language every day, you will make small and constant progress, and after a while you will see how far you’ve come with your learning.

Quick-fire round Favourite language: Italian (of course!), but I love all romance languages. * Favourite word/phrase in the language: Daje! (Come on!) * Favourite film: Les amours imaginaires by Xavier Dolan * TV show: Great British Bake Off * Book: Un amore by Dino Buzzati * Favourite destination:* Marche when I feel homesick and Portugal and Spain for a fun holiday

Do you have a message for the Coffee Break Community?

Learning a language is fun but it’s also hard work. Be kind to yourself and celebrate your successes. Don’t be discouraged when you make a mistake. Instead, use it to improve and to move forward. Just keep going and have fun on your language learning journey!

The post Meet the team: Maurizio appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

We’re back with a new episode of Coffee Break German Season 3 and another instalment of “Ein Zwilling studiert selten allein”! In this segment of the story Lucie and Marian are at home, enjoying the sun and the peace after the exciting celebration that was the prom. But suddenly, Lucie receives a long awaited e-mail! In this episode, among other things you will find a wide range of vocabulary used to describe the emotions and emotional responses of people. This is also a great opportunity to see the difference between “werden” and “bekommen” in German.

The post CBG 3.35 | Ein Zwilling studiert selten allein | Emails aus Kalifornien appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

We’ve reached episode 5 of Coffee Break Portuguese! In this lesson Rafael and Ava are covering another useful topic for when you’re travelling in the Portuguese-speaking world or meeting someone who speaks Portuguese – how to introduce your family. We’ll be learning some of the words for different family members, as well as how to say what they are called.

The post CBP 1.05 | Introducing your family – Words for family members in Portuguese appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Join teacher Susanna and learner Mark in the fourth lesson of Coffee Break Gaelic. In this episode, we’ll cover city names and Gaelic pronouns, and you’ll be able to talk about where you live. We’ll also hear from our Cultural Correspondent Rae who’ll tell us more about the Gaelic language and where it is spoken.

The post CBGa 1.04 | Where you live — How to talk about where you live in Gaelic appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

¡Hola! My name is Concha and I am part of the Coffee Break Spanish team. I have worked as a Spanish teacher for almost eight years (time flies!) and I am very happy to be part of the Coffee Break Spanish team.

What is your role in Coffee Break?My role involves a wide variety of tasks. You will see me in CBTV videos, giving feedback in the Spanish Masterclass and creating content for social media (Facebook, Twitter and Instagram).

What experience have you had speaking and learning other languages?I am a language lover, so I have studied a little bit of many languages. I first started with English back in primary school, and I have to say, I wasn’t very good at it! In high school it was compulsory to do two years of French, and I loved it. I am currently an advanced learner of Coffee Break French. I have also learned some Italian, Modern Greek and Basque when I lived in San Sebastian for a couple of years. My goal is to be able to speak all the official languages in my country and my desire is to never ever stop studying languages.

What are your favourite memories of working with Coffee Break?Every day at the office is good fun. Recording videos can sometimes be tricky and sharing that experience with my colleagues is what I enjoy the most. Last summer we had a summer get together with all the team and it was wonderful. We work very hard every day and Mark and Catriona rewarded us with a very nice day full of food, music, games and laughs.

Where would your ideal coffee break be and with whom?Easy! By the beach, watching the sunrise. Preferably in Cádiz, in Los Caños de Meca, my favourite beach. The perfect companion would be my sister because we have the same kind of humour so laughs are guaranteed.

What’s your best language learning tip?Be patient and consistent. I know… that’s what everyone says, but it’s true for me. Even if it’s doing a little bit each day or week, consistency is key. Patience is also an important aspect of the learning process, especially when you can’t remember the word or you keep forgetting about that grammar rule. Keep going!

Also, have fun and enjoy the process. Enjoy your achievements and but enjoy making mistakes as well.

Quickfire round• Favourite language: French. It’s quite the challenge for a Spanish speaker. If I ever get to pronounce it right, I’ll be happy!
• Favourite word/phrase in Spanish: Ea, the most versatile word for an Andalusian like myself. It doesn’t mean anything in itself but, depending on the context, it can mean so many things…
• Favourite book: Tierra, a book by Eloy Moreno. It’s such a page turner. I remember I read it in two days.
• Singer: Jack Johnson. Listening to him feels like home to me.
• Favourite destination: So many… Out of all the places I have been I would choose Gijón, a small city in Asturias, in the North of Spain. Although I am from the South of Spain, I have always liked the rain, that’s why I moved to Glasgow. Scotland can be too cold sometimes, so the North of Spain in my sweet middle spot. As for a holiday destination I would choose The Canary Islands. Or any other island with warm tropical weather and amazing nature!

Do you have a message for the Coffee Break Community?Never stop learning languages! It is a beautiful journey.

The post Meet the team: Concha appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Welcome to the very first episode of the Coffee Break Swedish Travel Diaries! In Episode 1 we are introduced to a family of four as they drive down from the city of Uppsala to spend their summer holidays on the West Coast of Sweden. As we get to know them and follow their initial drive down to the coast we review some key grammar, including tenses and compound words, and are introduced to both new vocabulary and grammar points.

The post CBSw Travel Diaries 1.01 | Resan till Koön appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Welcome back to Coffee Break Italian Season 3. In episode 34 we are listening to the fourth segment of our story series ‘Il tesoro di Montespelonca‘! Alessandro and his three friends visit Nina, Alessandro’s Nonna, who tells them about thelegend ofan underground cave going through the mountain near her wheat fields. Allegedly, hens would sometimes disappear when people took them to the market, and they would then reappear on the other side of the mountain, as if by magic. Alessandro wonders if Stella could be hiding in this legendary cave but when he returns home heis surprised to see his dog, found by a farmer in his own field, right on the other side of the mountain!

The post CBI 3.34 | Il tesoro di Montespelonca | Bentornata a casa, Stella! appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Welcome back to a new episode of Coffee Break German Season 3. In this episode we are listening to the fourth part of our story series ‘Ein Zwilling studiert selten allein‘! In this segment of the story the whole family are attending the “Abiball” to celebrate the end of the twins’ school career. It is a fabulous evening filled with speeches, laughter, music, dance and Lucie and Marian are enjoying their time with friends, family and former teachers. Listen out for some new vocabulary used to describe the exciting evening such as: in raschem Tempo, überaus gutaussehend and schnattern.

The post CBG 3.34 | Ein Zwilling studiert selten allein | Der Abiball appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Servus! My name is Thomas and I am a German Curriculum Developer at Radio Lingua. My role is mainly to create and develop content for the different German courses, but I also show up in videos from time to time.

What is your role in Coffee Break?I mostly create and record content for the different German learning formats, whether that is Coffee Break German, the Club or shorts for social media. I really enjoy the variety this role brings in terms of writing resources and being able to focus on different aspects of the language. This role also includes the audio and video recording in the studio, which requires very different skills, but I enjoy just as much. Especially because it involves working together with a lot of different members of the Radio Lingua Team, either in front or behind the microphone.

What experience have you had speaking and learning other languages?My first experience with learning languages was at school. I learned English for 9 years and Latin for 3. To be honest, I really didn’t enjoy languages in school and I was never particularly good at them either. My real interest for English started when I was 16 while watching films in English, translating song lyrics and most of all, traveling through Europe. I kept improving my English during my years at university and I also attend a Spanish course before spending a year in Seville as an exchange student. There, I met my Scottish wife and moved to Scotland a few years later which took my understanding of English, and indeed the local accents, to the next level. Since then, I have started a Gaelic course, tried to improve my Spanish skills and started raising a bilingual son.

What are your favourite memories of working with Coffee Break?When I first worked with Mark, we recorded in a small studio behind his living room and there was a very small team. I really liked his approach to learning and teaching languages and was amazed at the business he managed to build. I loved coming up with the first season of Coffee Break German together and laugh fondly at the awkwardness of my first recordings and listening back to them.

Since I have only recently joined Radio Lingua again, I am looking forward to making new memories with a fantastic, diverse, enthusiastic and much bigger team now.

Where would your ideal coffee break be and with whom?It would definitely be back in Seville in Spain, at the small café in front of the university. Sun in the sky, a café con hielo and chatting with the friends I made during my exchange year, finding out what everybody has been up to over the last 10 years.

What’s your best language learning tip?My first real motivation for learning languages came from doing things I enjoyed anyway, but in a foreign language. For me that meant starting to read fantasy books and watching films in English, or changing the language of my computer games to English. I think practising the language through something that you enjoy not only gives you a lot of exposure, increases understanding and builds your vocabulary, but also shows you the relevance and lets you use it in a practical way. Depending on your level you could even start with simplified language, for example from children’s books or switching on the subtitles for a film. However, over time your hobby or interest will be extended by a completely new culture, whether that is Spanish DIY videos, Italian poetry, Polish fantasy authors or German folk music!

The other tip, however not always possible, would be to move to a country where the language is spoken for a period of time.

Quick-fire round

• Favourite language: Overall German, even though it’s my own language. I love how complex it is and that I still learn new grammar rules after 34 years. I also love the different dialects, especially in parts of Austria, and generally find it to be a beautiful language to listen to, even if others may think it sounds a bit harsh.

• Favourite word/phrase: zach which is an Austrian colloquial word that just sounds exactly like what it describes, being anything from “tough, chewy, difficult, stubborn” but also “hardy, strong, endurant”.

• Favourite film: I really liked the last “Dune” film but as an all time favourite, it would probably be “The Lord of the Rings” trilogy.

• Favourite TV show: Currently “The Witcher”

• Favourite destination: Mountains, all kinds of them. I love the Alps, the Scottish Highlands, the Sierra Nevada and its white villages and basically every mountain range I have been to in the world.

• Favourite Bands: Alt-J, Kettcar

Do you have a message for the Coffee Break community?Firstly, a massive Danke to the whole community. It is amazing to see how your support, contributions and loyalty helped Radio Lingua to develop, add new languages and courses and grow its team within the last 10 years. I am incredibly excited to be part of it again and create new and exciting German content for all our learners.

The post Meet the team: Thomas appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Ready to learn some more Portuguese on your coffee break? In this fourth lesson, we’ll be learning how to ask someone where they live and how to talk about where you live. We’ll also be taking some of our knowledge from previous episodes a step further by learning how to use the verb ser (“to be”) to talk about where other people are from, as well as how to form negative phrases.

The post CBP 1.04 | Where you live — How to talk about where you live in Portuguese appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

The Coffee Break Swedish Travel Diaries will be starting next Thursday 27th April! In this short introductory episode we share some details about what you can expect from the series. You’ll be following the adventures of a Swedish family as they take a road trip down the west coast of Sweden, from Marstrand down to Halmstad. Throughout the lessons you will have the opportunity to practise your Swedish, increase your understanding and build your vocabulary through travel.

We’ll also have an online course for the Travel Diaries which will offer additional materials like lesson notes, a video version of the lesson and bonus audio materials. Further information coming soon!

The post Introducing the Coffee Break Swedish Travel Diaries appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Welcome back to the next episode of Coffee Break Gaelic! In this episode you will learn how to talk about where you are from. We’ll also cover the names for different countries in Gaelic and take a closer look at the verb “to be”.

The post CBGa 1.03 | Where you’re from — Countries in Gaelic appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Salut ! My name is Léa and I joined Coffee Break in September 2021 as the French Social Media Assistant. I come from Ile-de-France, France and I am currently based in Glasgow, UK.

What is your role in Coffee Break?My role as Social Media Assistant is to write Facebook posts for the Coffee Break French page and answer questions and comments from our community. I also take part in the content creation for the Coffee Break Club – this means that I write reading and listening activities as well as exercises for learners to practise their French in the Club!

What experience have you had speaking and learning other languages?French is my mother tongue and I started learning English at school at 11 years old. During middle school, I chose Spanish as my second language and grew more and more passionate about both English and Spanish. I was lucky to be surrounded by friends who shared the same interest as me and we quickly improved by speaking English together or reading English books. After high school, I decided that I wanted to keep learning about languages while studying astronomy, so I moved to the UK to attend university. So far, my favourite aspect of studying in Scotland has been meeting and getting to know people from all around the world and exchanging information about our different cultures.

What are your favourite memories of working with Coffee Break?There has been many great memories working with Coffee Break! Although I only joined recently, I feel so lucky to be part of such a great team. My favourite memories so far have all been around Christmas time, as the office is always decorated with fairy lights and a Christmas tree. It’s a very nice environment to work in!

Where would your ideal coffee break be and with whom?My ideal coffee break would be in a wooden cabin in a snowy landscape around a fireplace with my family, after a day out hiking in nature.

What’s your best language-learning tip?I think that the best way to learn a new language is consistency – doing some learning every day and mixing hobbies with the language learning to make it fun (watching movies, reading books, …). I find that it’s also very useful to interact with native speakers either through written chat or calls whenever possible!

Quickfire round• Favourite language: Swedish
• Favourite word/phrase in French: Éphémère– which means short-lived
• Favourite TV show: Lupin
• Favourite French book: La Fortune des Rougons by Émile Zola
• Favourite French Singer: Pomme
• Favourite destination: the Scottish Highlands

Do you have a message for the Coffee Break Community?

Learning is a lifelong process! It will never be too late for you to start learning a new hobby/language. I hope that you will find all the future amazing Coffee Break launches as exciting as I do and thank you so much for your support so far!

The post Meet the team: Léa appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In Chapter 10 of La penúltima voluntad, Pilar searches for Carlos and calls Marta looking for answers before finding out that Carlos has been plotting a secret plan. Throughout the episode we hear some Galician words such as fochicar and estragar as well as some interesting Spanish expressions like: ser muy suyo/a and llevar por la calle de la amargura.

The post Capítulo 10 – ¡Esto pasa de castaño oscuro! appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In this episode of Coffee Break Italian Season 3 we listen to the third instalment of our story series ‘Il tesoro di Montespelonca‘! In this part of the story the residents of Montespelonca gather for a dinner in the square followed by a night walk to enjoy the stars. Alessandro and his friends tell a little lie and decide to look for the wolf instead but as they are searching they hear a terrifying noise! In this episode, among other things, you can observe how adjectives change their meaning depending on whether they are placed before or after nouns. There are also some nice set phrases like: in lungo e in largo and a gambe levate.

The post CBI 3.33 | Il tesoro di Montespelonca | La paura fa novanta appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In episode 33 of Coffee Break German Season 3, we listen to the third instalment of our story series ‘Ein Zwilling studiert selten allein‘! After enjoying a delicious meal with their family to celebrate Marian and Lucie’s exam results, they sit down with their father Michael to further discuss preparations for moving to California. In this episode, among other things, you can observe how the infinitive is used in subordinate clauses (with and without “um”) and review the use of reflexive verbs. Listen out for some new and useful vocabulary such as: zigmal, erheben and sich etwas entgehen lassen.

The post CBG 3.33 | Ein Zwilling studiert selten allein | Vorfreude und Vorbereitungen appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Salut ! I’m Max, I’ve been working for Radio Lingua since October 2021 as a French Curriculum Developer. I come from Grenoble, in the beautiful French Alps but I’ve been living in Glasgow since 2014. I love languages and I love learning and teaching. I am a teacher of French as foreign language.

What is your role in Coffee Break?I create French content in various formats and for different projects. I am writing texts, producing audio recordings and recording videos too. I am also providing feedback for our Masterclass and I’m involved in some other projects yet to be revealed!

What experience have you had speaking and learning other languages?I’ve been learning English since I was 8 throughout the school system and I have a Bachelor’s degree in English. After seven years in Scotland, I’m still learning new words and phrases every day! I also studied Spanish for a long time, and I’ve been teaching it for a few years too. I’m currently learning Portuguese and I’ve been picking up some words and phrases in Polish from my friends too.

What is your favourite thing about working with Coffee Break?My favourite aspect of the job is the constant variety of tasks. Writing content from scratch, filming videos, providing feedback, recording podcasts, I find it very refreshing and challenging to work on different things all the time. I also love the atmosphere in the office and the in-depth discussions about specific language points in many languages!

Where would your ideal coffee break be and with whom?Anywhere sunny! Maybe in the south of France, in June or September. I would love to share a coffee and a conversation with… anyone I’ve never met! Meet someone new and listen to their story!

What’s your best language learning tip?This may sound a bit odd, but one thing I always do when learning a language, and recommend doing, is to speak out loud and describe what you are doing when you are alone. When you are cooking or cleaning, for example! It is a great way to identify exactly what you need to learn next (vocabulary, grammar etc…).

Other than that, I believe consistency is key! A little bit of learning every day goes a long way! And of course, don’t worry about making mistakes, it’s part of the learning process. Everybody makes mistakes, even in their own mother tongue!

Quickfire round• Favourite language: French, of course!

• Favourite word/phrase in French: C’est la vie !

• Favourite film: Je vais bien ne t’en fais pas. A beautiful movie about all kinds of love, and the lengths one may go to keep their loved ones happy.

Favourite singer: Jacques Brel

Favourite destination : Le Grau-du-Roi. From ages 5 to 18, I spent all my summers in this lovely town along the Mediterranean.

Do you have a message for the Coffee Break Community?Learning a language is a wonderful journey on many levels and at any stage of the learning process. It gives you confidence, self-esteem and can open your eyes as to how you can perceive the world from a different perspective. I have never met anyone who learned a second or third language and regretted it! N’hésitez pas, foncez !

The post Meet the team: Max appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Join teacher Rafael and learner Ava in this third episode of Coffee Break Portuguese. This time, we’ll be focusing on talking about where you’re from and learning some words for different nationalities.

The post CBP 1.03 | Where you’re from — Countries and nationalities in Portuguese appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Join teacher Susanna and learner Mark for Episode 2 of Coffee Break Gaelic. In this lesson, you’ll learn greetings for different times of day, how to introduce yourself and how to ask the question “what is your name?”. In this episode you’ll also meet our Cultural Correspondent Rae, who will tell you how to address people in Gaelic.

The post CBGa 1.02 | Introducing yourself – How to say “my name is…” in Gaelic appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Bonjour ! My name’s Jack and I’m the Audio Visual Production Coordinator at Radio Lingua. I joined the company full-time in October 2021 after doing undergraduate degrees in Economics at the University of Aberdeen and Filmmaking and Screenwriting at the University of the West of Scotland. Although I was born in Scotland, I grew up in Belgium and Luxembourg where I went to the European School of Luxembourg, so I am fluent in both English and French I even know a little bit of Spanish from studying it at school and university too.

What is your role in Coffee Break? The main part of my job involves editing our videos and podcasts so I spend most of my time at work editing, receiving feedback and then making corrections before sending it off for uploading. I also spend 1-2 days per week working on The Club and other video content in our Ayr office, where I do everything from adjusting cameras and lighting to sound checking and vision mixing on our state-of-the-art mixing board. Finally, I also occasionally help out with the creation of Coffee Break French content.

What experience have you had speaking and learning other languages?Growing up in Belgium and then in Luxembourg, French was the language I would use day-to-day, while speaking English at home, so I essentially grew up bilingual. About half of my classes were also taught in French while I was at the European School of Luxembourg and it was also mandatory to do a 3rd language for at least 3 years during high school. So I studied French and used it in casual conversation everyday, and studied Spanish as a third language. I then studied Spanish for a year while I was at the University of Aberdeen and I have friends from Spain and France who I keep in regular contact with and I always relish any opportunity to speak French or Spanish when I meet a native speaker.

What are your favourite memories of working with Coffee Break?As I edit a lot of our content, I get to see the “bloopers” that the audience doesn’t, so it’s always funny to see and hear some of the flubs and goofy faces our presenters make when they’re a little flustered. One of my first days in the office was filming Club content with Pierre-Benoît and I can assure you, he is just as flamboyant off-camera as he is on it!

Where would your ideal coffee break be, and with whom?If I could pick one person to share a cup of tea with (I’m actually not a coffee drinker, don’t tell Mark), it would probably have to be one of my favourite filmmakers. Maybe someone like Denis Villeneuve who I could talk French to as well, although Quebecois is it’s own unique language if you ask me!

Quickfire round• Favourite languages: French, Spanish

• Favourite word/phrase in French: Nom de Dieu !

• Favourite film / TV show: Tinker Tailor Soldier Spy, The Mighty Boosh

• Favourite destination: My two favourite places that I’ve visited (outside of Scotland) are Holland and Quebec, but I’ve also always wanted to visit New Zealand and recently have been looking into a holiday in Newfoundland or Patagonia in Argentina.

Do you have a message for the Coffee Break Community?One great way I’ve found to help me practise my French and Spanish is watching football or rugby matches with the commentary in that language. If you understand the sport, then you can understand what the commentators are talking about in context and learn new words and phrases as a result.

The post Meet the team: Jack appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Following her latest clue, Marta finds herself at the Teatro Clásico and is taken aback by what is waiting for her there. While listening to this chapter, pay close attention to the interesting expressions which come up, including: tener delito, moririse de ganas de, costar trabajo and al borde de. We also learn about corrales de comedia, open-air theatres in Spain during the 16th century. Listen to the episode to find out more!

The post Capítulo 9 – Una entrevista con sorpresa appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

We’re back with a new episode of Coffee Break Italian Season 3 and another instalment of our story series “Il tesoro di Montespelonca“! In this episode Alessandro is worried about his lost dog, Stella, and takes it upon himself to ask around the village for any information. He soon learns that someone has heard about a wolf going around and Alessandro is seriously concerned for Stella’s welfare. In this episode, among other things, you can learn some new vocabulary, like: sbadigliare, disprezzare and sbiancare!

The post CBI 3.32 | Il tesoro di Montespelonca | Qualcosa di strano nell’aria appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

We’re back with the next instalment of our story “Ein Zwilling studiert selten allein“! In this episode Marian is preparing to give a speech at school graduation, while Lucie has jumped ahead in planning her university accommodation. The more confident twin offers encouragement to her doubtful brother. In this episode, among other things, you can see how verbs are used and conjugated in the present tense.

The post CBG 3.32 | Ein Zwilling studiert selten allein | Zweifel und Zeugnisvergabe appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

We’re back with Lesson 2 of Coffee Break Portuguese! This time we’ll learn some more greetings that you can use at different times of the day, how to ask what someone’s name is, and how to introduce yourself. Rafael and Ava also talk about how to address people formally and informally across different areas of the Portuguese-speaking world.

The post CBP 1.02 | Introducing yourself — How to say “my name is…” in Portuguese appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Ready to learn Gaelic on your coffee break? Welcome to our first episode of Coffee Break Gaelic, in this episode teacher Susanna and learner Mark will introduce some simple greetings. You’ll also learn how to ask “how are you?” and some different ways of answering this question.

The post CBGa 1.01 | Meeting people – How to ask “how are you” in Gaelic appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Welcome back to the next instalment of La Penúltima Voluntad! In this chapter, Marta takes a trip down memory lane as she makes her way to the ice-cream shop that she used to visit with her parents. While looking for her next clue, Marta uncovers some important information. Be sure to listen out for some interesting nouns in this episode, including: tarrina, remodelación and altibajos as well as the expressions: dar cabia a and viento en popa.

The post Capítulo 8 – Quique y sus helados appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In this episode of Coffee Break Italian Season 3 we are introducing our new story series ‘Il tesoro di Montespelonca’! Throughout the story we will put into practice all of the grammar and structures covered in the first 30 episodes of Season 3. It is set in Montespelonca, a lovely village in the centre of Italy and we follow Alessandro, an eleven year old boy, who lives there with his family and dog, Stella. The village is busy for the yearly Sagra della Lenticchia (the Lentil Festival) and all seems going well until Alessandro realises that Stella has run away. Despite looking for her everywhere, she cannot be found and Alessandro is seriously worried!

The post CBI 3.31 | Il tesoro di Montespelonca | Dov’è Stella? appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Welcome back to Coffee Break German Season 3! In this episode we are introduced to our new story – Ein Zwilling studiert selten allein! In the first instalment twins Marian and Lucie have received their school leaving results and are celebrating with friends. We hope your enjoy this 10 part story that reviews all the language covered in the previous 30 lessons.

The post CBG 3.31 | Ein Zwilling studiert selten allein | Endlich geschafft! appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Welcome to this first episode of Coffee Break Portuguese! Join teacher Rafael and learner Ava to start learning Portuguese right from the beginning. In our first lesson we’ll be learning key words and phrases like “hello”, “goodbye” and “thank you”. We’ll also learn how to ask “how are you?” and some possible ways to answer this. So, if you’re ready, let’s go! Vamos lá!

The post CBP 1.01 | Meeting people — How to ask “how are you?” in Portuguese appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In this short introductory episode of Coffee Break Portuguese, teacher Rafael and learner Ava explain what’s to come in this series for beginners in Portuguese. We hear more about the types of topics that will be covered to help us when travelling to a place where Portuguese is spoken. We also get to know more about Rafael, Ava and Catarina and their language-learning backgrounds before learning about the term ‘Cafezinho’ and how this will be incorporated into our lessons.

The post CBP 1.00 – Introducing Coffee Break Portuguese appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In Chapter 7 of La penúltima voluntad, we join Marta just as she receives a phone call from her husband, Jorge. Throughout the episode, we get to know a bit more about Marta’s personal life while hearing some interesting Argentinian expressions, including: estar hecho percha, copado, bárbaro and bancar.

The post Capítulo 7 – La preocupación de Jorge appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Welcome back to another episode of Coffee Break Italian Season 3! In this episode we are learning about modified nouns and verbs, for example maritino, casetta and salterellare. Have you heard of these before? We then listen to a dialogue between architect Pizzi and signora De Marinis about renovation work that is underway in her house and you will hear plenty of examples of modified nouns and verbs throughout.

The post CBI 3.30 | Modified nouns, adjectives and verbs | I consigli dell’architetto appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

It’s time for the next instalment of La penúltima voluntad! After finding a riddle on the floor in the museum, Marta begins the scavenger hunt organised by her father. But where does the first clue lead to? While listening to this episode, take note of the range of nouns, including: acertijo, pista and comisura. We also hear some interesting expressions such as: caer en la cuenta de algo and cruzar por la cabeza.

The post Capítulo 6 – Un recuerdo entrañable appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Join Mark and Andrea to review all of the key points covered throughout episodes 21 to 29. From the passive, to ordinal numbers, the subjunctive and more, this episode is essential to cement your understanding of these tricky grammar points!

The post CBG 3.30 | Review episode 3.21 – 3.30 appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Cet épisode, le huitième, est le dernier disponible gratuitement en podcast.

Pierre-Benoît vous y raconte l’histoire d’Aurélien, agent immobilier, et ses stratagèmes loufoques pour faire échouer un partenariat. Comme de coutume, Max vous fournit les définitions des mots qu’il a choisis pour que Pierre-Benoît écrive son histoire ainsi que, bien sûr, l’explication de l’expression idiomatique.

Pour découvrir le dossier complet de ressources, qui inclut la version vidéo avec sous-titres en français, mais aussi les notes de développement linguistique, une liste de vocabulaire de l’épisode du jour et d’autres ressources, cliquez ici. C’est ici également que vous trouverez les deux derniers épisodes de notre cours Il était une fois.

Once upon a time… there was Aurélien the estate agent.

This episode number 8 is the final one available as part of the free podcast.

Pierre-Benoît tells the story of Aurélien, a real estate agent, and his quirky ploys to sabotage a partnership. As always, Max provides you with the different definitions of the words he has chosen for Pierre-Benoît to write his story, as well as, of course, the explanation of the idiomatic expression.

To discover the complete notes pack, which includes the video version of this episode with subtitles, but also the linguistic development notes, a list of the vocabulary used in today’s episode and more resources, click here. This is also where you will find the two remaining episodes of our course Il était une fois.

The post Il était une fois – Épisode 8 appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Welcome to the newest chapter of La penúltima voluntad! In this episode Marta decides to go to the museum and remembers all the places she used visit on her way there. She reminisces on some happy memories with Carlos, but the day takes a turn when she makes a discovery in the museum. Listen out for some interesting vocabulary such as: augurio, rodeo and percatarse de.

The post Capítulo 5 – El comienzo del juego appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In the extra episode, we listen to a conversation between Thomas and Mark about visiting Niagara Falls.

The post CBE 4.10 | Extra | A waterfall coincidence appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In this new episode of Coffee Break Italian Season 3 we are learning about pronominal and phraseological verbs! We then go on to listen to a dialogue between an anxious exchange student and their reassuring professor. As always, listen out for verbs like farcela and mettercela tutta and our cosina: qui pro quo.

The post CBI 3.29 | Pronominal and phraseological verbs| Te la stai cavando alla grande! appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In this episode of Coffee Break German Mark and Andrea are continuing to focus on the subjunctive, more specifically they are discussing how to make hypothetical statements, like conditionals and wishes. We’ll learn to use the subjunctive with wenn/falls, with inversion, and take a look at the subjunctive in the past to express impossible conditionals and wishes. As usual, we hear some examples in context by listening to a dialogue of a family debating their next holiday!

The post CBG 3.29 | Subjunctive 2 – hypothesis | Das wäre super! appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In this episode, we hear from Ryan in Canada. He talks to us about Niagara Falls, and we focus on phrasal verbs and expressions with the word ‘go’.

The post CBE 4.10 | Niagara Falls | Language focus: phrasal verbs with ‘go’ appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Il était une fois… Marie et le magasin de perruques.

Dans l’épisode 7, découvrez les aventures (et mésaventures !) de Marie dans le magasin de perruques où elle travaille. Max, qui nous raconte l’histoire, doit utiliser l’ensemble des mots choisis par son acolyte Pierre-Benoît, ainsi que l’expression idiomatique, comme d’habitude. Suite aux explications de Pierre-Benoît des différents sens de chaque mot, Max se lance dans la narration.

Pour découvrir les définitions de chaque mot, ainsi que cette histoire où Marie doit gérer un client voleur, écoutez la version gratuite du podcast, qui vous permettra de tester vos compétences de compréhension orale et découvrir ou redécouvrir des structures grammaticales parfois complexes et du vocabulaire très riche.

Once upon a time… there was Marie and the wig shop.

In episode 7, discover the adventures (and misadventures!) of Marie in the wig shop where she works. As usual, Max, who is narrating today’s story, has to include all the words chosen by his co-host Pierre-Benoît, as well as the idiomatic expression. Following Pierre-Benoît’s explanations of the definitions of each word, Max gets into the storytelling part of the episode.

To discover all the definitions, along with the story in which Marie has to deal with a wig thief, listen to the free podcast version of the episode, which will allow you to test your oral comprehension skills and discover or rediscover some tricky grammar structures and rich vocabulary.

The post Il était une fois – Épisode 7 appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In the extra episode, we listen to a conversation between Maurizio and Josie about the Lord of the Rings films.

The post CBE 4.09 | Extra | Have you seen the Lord of the Rings? appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In this episode, we meet Zoe from New Zealand. She talks to us about the landscape of the country, and we focus on extreme adjectives.

The post CBE 4.09 | New Zealand’s landscapes | Language focus: extreme adjectives appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Il était une fois… Marcel le marin.

Dans l’épisode de cette semaine, l’épisode 6, suivez les aventures de Marcel le marin dans l’histoire racontée par Pierre-Benoît, qui doit utiliser les neuf mots et l’expression idiomatique sélectionnés par Max.

Après les explications des différentes significations de chaque mot, Pierre-Benoît commence à nous parler de Marcel et de comment il fait face à la tempête au beau milieu de laquelle il se retrouve. Pour découvrir comment il gère cette situation, écoutez l’épisode et profitez de l’histoire, tout en testant vos capacités de compréhension et en découvrant du vocabulaire nouveau et des structures grammaticales intéressantes.

Once upon a time… there was Marcel the sailor.

In this week’s episode, episode 6, follow the adventures of Marcel the sailor in the story narrated by Pierre-Benoît, who has to use the nine words and one idiom selected by Max.

After Max explains the different meanings of each word, Pierre-Benoît starts telling us about Marcel and how he deals with the storm he is caught up in. To find out how he copes with it, listen to the episode and enjoy the story, all while testing your comprehension skills and discovering interesting vocabulary and grammar structures.

The post Il était une fois – Épisode 6 appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

It’s time for another chapter of La penúltima voluntad! In this episode, we are introduced to Pilar, from whom Marta tries to find out some information about Carlos. Marta is concerned about her father’s behaviour and worries something may be wrong with Carlos after receiving her inheritance. Listen out for some interesting nouns such as rifirrafe and paradero as well as the Galician word ruliño/a.

The post Capítulo 4 – Pilar y sus propuestas appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In this extra episode, we listen to a conversation between Francesca and Mark about some bad experiences in airports. There are lots of examples of the past perfect and past simple tenses in this conversation, so listen carefully!

The post CBE 4.08 | Extra | Airport Adventures appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Welcome back to a new episode of Coffee Break Italian! In this episode Mark and Francesca go through all you need to know about the gerund. We then listen to a dialogue between two colleagues Tiziana and Carlo, who are discussing how a more environmentally friendly lifestyle could have a positive impact on the future of the planet. Listen out for some interesting vocabulary on the topic of the environment such as: sprecare, riciclaggio and ambientalista.

The post CBI 3.28 | The gerund | Insieme per l’ambiente appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Welcome back to another episode of Coffee Break German Season 3! In this episode we are continuing our learning of the subjunctive. We review what we already know and then go on to learn how to make suggestions and give advice in German. Our dialogue for this episode is based on a letter to an agony aunt from a concerned mother, this will give you the opportunity to hear plenty of examples of the subjunctive in context. As always listen out for some interesting vocabulary such as: Rat (m), hart mitand vorschlagen.

The post CBG 3.28 | The subjunctive – giving advice | Ich sollte mich nicht so aufregen appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In this episode, we hear from Kate in the USA. She talks to us about the Founding Fathers of the United States, and we focus on the past perfect and past simple tenses.

The post CBE 4.08 | The Founding Fathers | Language focus: the past perfect and past simple tenses appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Il était une fois… un docteur qui s’appelait Yves.

Cette semaine, c’est au tour de Max de relever le défi d’écrire une histoire. Comme toujours, il doit inclure les neufs mots et l’expression idiomatique que Pierre-Benoît a choisis pour lui. Au fur et à mesure que Max raconte l’histoire d’un imposteur démasqué, vous aurez la chance de vous entraîner à la compréhension orale, d’apprendre du vocabulaire nouveau et d’entendre des points de grammaire intéressants en contexte. Le tout en profitant de l’histoire.

Once upon time… there was a doctor called Yves.

This week, it’s Max’s turn to take on a storytelling challenge. As always, he must include nine specific words and one idiomatic expression that Pierre-Benoît has chosen for him. As Max tells the story of an impostor’s exposure, you’ll get the chance to practise your listening comprehension, learn new vocabulary and hear interesting grammar points in context, all while enjoying the story itself.

The post Il était une fois – Épisode 5 appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In this extra episode, we listen to a conversation between James and Josie about interesting kings and queens.

The post CBE 4.07 | Extra | Kings and queens appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In this episode, we hear from Susan in England. She talks to us about King Henry VIII, and we learn about relative pronouns.

The post CBE 4.07 | King Henry VIII | Language focus: relative pronouns appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Il était une fois… un jeune pharaon.

Un pharaon… fidèle… déchiffrer… Quelle sorte d’histoire inventeriez-vous en utilisant ces trois mots ? Ceux-ci font partie des mots mystérieux que Max a choisis pour Pierre-Benoît dans l’épisode d’aujourd’hui. Pierre-Benoît doit les inclure, sans oublier les six autres mots et la toute aussi importante expression idiomatique, dans une histoire et tenter de l’écrire le temps que Max explique la définition de chaque mot.

Alors pour en savoir plus sur l’histoire du jeune pharaon et du lion que Pierre-Benoît a inventée de toutes pièces, écoutez notre podcast tout en pratiquant votre compréhension et découvrez tout le nouveau vocabulaire et les nouvelles structures qui s’y trouvent.

Once upon a time… there was a young pharaoh.

A pharaoh… loyal… decipher… What story would you come up with using these words? These are just three of the mystery words that Max has chosen for Pierre-Benoît today. Pierre-Benoît must include them – along with another six and the all-important idiomatic expression – in a short story, written in the time it takes Max to explain the meaning of each word. How will Pierre-Benoît’s story of the young pharaoh and the lion turn out? Listen to find out, all the while practising your listening comprehension and gaining exposure to new vocabulary and structures.

The post Il était une fois – Épisode 4 appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In Chapter 3 of La penúltima voluntad, Marta wonders what’s inside the envelope that Carlos has given her. She has some ideas about what it might contain but her main concern is who will take over her father’s company in future. Will she find the answers she’s looking for? Listen to the episode to find out and take note of the following verbs: albergar, evocar and burlarse de.

The post Capítulo 3 – ¡Menuda herencia! appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In this extra episode, we listen to a conversation between Mark and Thomas about their plans for the weekend. The conversation contains lots of examples of the first conditional, so listen carefully!

The post CBE 4.06 | Extra | Weekend conditionals appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In this episode of Coffee Break English, we hear from Marcia in the Caribbean. She tells us about an important festival in Barbados, and we focus on the first conditional.

The post CBE 4.06 | The Crop Over Festival | Language focus: the first conditional appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In this episode of Coffee Break Italian Season 3 we are learning about passive structures! You may have heard of this grammar point being mentioned in previous Coffee Break Italian series but in this episode we are finally analysing it in detail. You will then hear many examples in the context of a dialogue about a neighbourhood party. Be sure to listen out for our ancora una cosina: tra il dire e il fare c’è di mezzo il mare!

The post CBI 3.27 | Passive structures | La festa di quartiere appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

We are back with a new episode of Coffee Break German Season 3! In this episode we are introducing the subjunctive, a big milestone for German learners! Specifically we are learning how to express wishes and dreams with the subjunctive. We hear some examples of it in the context of a diary entry and as always, listen out for some interesting vocabulary mentioned throughout the episode.

The post CBG 3.27 | The Subjunctive – wishes and dreams | Könnte ich doch besser tanzen appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Welcome to the second chapter of La penúltima voluntad, our podcast series for advanced learners of Spanish. In this chapter, we hear the conversation between Marta and Carlos. Throughout this dialogue, in which Carols justifies his behaviour, we learn about their relationship and get to know Carlos’ character and personality. Take note of the idiomatic expression: tanto monta, monta tanto and listen out for several triggers of the subjunctive, such as ni que and pedir que.

The post Capítulo 2 – Tengamos la fiesta en paz appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

C’est parti pour un spécial « Fêtes de fin d’année ! »

Il était une fois… un petit village pendant les fêtes de fin d’année.

Pour ce troisième épisode de la série, Pierre-Benoît et Max sont vraiment d’humeur festive. Cette fois-ci, c’est au tour de Pierre-Benoît de choisir neuf mots ainsi qu’une expression idiomatique que Max doit ensuite inclure dans son histoire, sauf qu’à cette occasion, tous ces mots ont également un caractère festif ! Découvrez donc toute cette nouvelle liste de vocabulaire ainsi que les aventures des jumeaux Jules et Julie, les personnages que Max a créés pour vous, dans cet épisode spécial « Fêtes de fin d’année ! »

Holiday season special!

Once upon a time… there was a little village during the festive season.

Pierre-Benoît and Max are in the festive spirit for the third episode of our series. As usual, Pierre-Benoît has chosen nine words and one idiomatic expression which Max must incorporate into his original short story, but this time there is a festive theme to all of the chosen words! Listen to build your festive vocabulary and to hear about the adventures of the protagonists of Max’s story – the twins, Jules and Julie – during the festive season.

The post Il était une fois – Épisode 3 appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In this extra episode, we listen to a conversation between Josie and James, who is from England, about if they prefer living in the city or the countryside.

The post CBE 4.05 | Extra | City or Countryside? appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In this episode, we hear from Matthew in Australia. He tells us about living in the outback, and we focus on negative adjective prefixes.

The post CBE 4.05 | The Outback | Language focus: negative adjective prefixes appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Il était une fois… un petit lapin.

Le moment est venu de découvrir le deuxième épisode de notre toute nouvelle série de podcasts pour les étudiants d’un niveau avancé en français. Cette semaine, les rôles sont inversés et c’est au tour de Max de choisir neuf mots mystères et une expression idiomatique pour Pierre-Benoît. Pierre-Benoît va relever le défi d’écrire une courte histoire avec un temps limité puisqu’il ne disposera que du temps dont Max aura besoin pour expliquer toutes les définitions.

Écoutez pour savoir ce qui va se passer dans l’histoire de Pierre-Benoît, Le petit lapin et le gros taureau, tout en tendant l’oreille pour découvrir du vocabulaire nouveau ainsi que des structures intéressantes en français. Cela constitue un excellent entraînement à la compréhension orale.

The moment has arrived for the second episode of our brand-new audio and video podcast series for advanced learners of French. This week, the roles have been reversed and it is now Max’s turn to choose nine mystery words and one idiomatic expression for Pierre-Benoît. Pierre-Benoît will then be taking on the challenge of writing a short story in the time it takes Max to explain the meanings of his words and phrase.

Listen to find out what happens in Pierre-Benoît’s story of the little rabbit and the big bull, all while hearing new vocabulary, interesting structures and practising your listening comprehension.

The post Il était une fois – Épisode 2 appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In the extra episode, we listen to a conversation between Mark and Francesca, who is from Italy, about things which scare them!

The post CBE 4.04 | Extra | What Are You Scared Of? appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In this episode of Coffee Break Italian Season 3 we are focusing on all of the possible ways to form a hypothetical clause (or ‘if’ clause) in Italian. We listen to a dialogue between two friends Michele and Giada, who are discussing the prospect of Michele losing his job and how a lottery win would ease his troubles. Listen out for our ancora una cosina: chi non risica, non rosica!

The post CBI 3.26 | Hypothetical clauses | Sognare non costa niente appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In this episode of Coffee Break German Season 3 we are focusing on another range of connectors such as:entweder… oder, sowohl…. als auch, sowie, sondern, weder…..noch. In this episode’s dialogue, we hear characters Sabine and Thomas as they discuss living somewhere new. Listen out for some vocabulary used throughout the dialogue like: auf dem Land (n), Vorort (m) and Verkehrsverbindung (f).

The post CBG 3.26 | Connectors | Entweder das Eine oder das Andere appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

We’re so excited to announce the latest developments from Coffee Break Languages. If you missed our live event, you can watch the replay here.

So, what did we announce in this biggest launch ever?

Coffee Break Swedish Travel DiariesFollowing our Travel Diaries series in French, Spanish, German and Italian, we’re delighted to announce that Coffee Break Swedish will be returning in the new year with a 10-lesson course. We’ll follow the adventures of Mattias and his family as they travel down the west coast of Sweden. Click here for a sneak preview and to keep up with our developments.

Coffee Break Chinese CharactersFollowing on from Coffee Break Chinese Season 1, we’re working on a new course which will help you learn to recognise Chinese characters with a view to moving on to more advanced content. Click here to be kept up to date with our developments.

Coffee Break Communication ClassesPractise your speaking in small groups with a Coffee Break tutor! These six-week courses will be launching in 2023 and we’ll provide more information in the new year.

Il était une foisOur new French audio and video course for advanced learners takes the form of a game show. Max and Pierre-Benoît challenge each other to write a story against the clock, and the course provides a transcript, video with subtitles and language development resources. Watch the demo video here.

Coffee Break Spanish Season 5 – La penúltima voluntadAdvanced learners can start following the story of Marta who has just been asked to attend the reading of her father’s will. In the 20 chapters of the story you’ll build your confidence in advanced French. Click here for more information.

Coffee Break GaelicWe’ll be launching a new course in Gaelic in 2023. Learn the basics of Scottish Gaelic with Susanna and Mark. This course will feature 40 lessons and will follow the structure of our previous Coffee Break courses. Find out more here.

Coffee Break PortugueseAnother new member of the Coffee Break family is our new course in Portuguese. You’ll learn to communicate with Portuguese speakers from around the world in our course, starting January 2023. Get a sneak preview and find out more here.

Coffee Break TVAnd as if all that wasn’t enough, we’re delighted to announce an entirely new way to access your language learning…

Introducing Coffee Break TV: this new web platform and app will be the home for our new video resources, and we’ll be launching the first of these on Wednesday, the Coffee Break Club. Think of this as Netflix for Language Learners. We simply ask:

What do you want to learn today?
Which type of activity do you want to use?
How long is your coffee break?

There’s something for everyone in the Coffee Break Club, available on Coffee Break TV from Wednesday 7th December. Join us live for the launch and get a preview of the types of content you can look forward to in the Club. There’s also a special introductory price, so make sure you tune in!

We hope you’re as excited as we are about these announcements and that you’ll have all the more opportunity to build your language skills on your Coffee Break!

The post New podcasts, new courses, a new platform and a new app! appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In this episode, we hear from Ryan in Canada. He tells us about an interesting experience in Toronto, and we focus on verbs ‘have to’ and ‘don’t have to’.

The post CBE 4.04 | The CN Tower Edgewalk | Language focus: ‘have to’ and ‘don’t have to’ appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Marta de los Llanos receives a phone call from the family lawyer asking her to attend the reading of her father’s will. But no one had even told her that her father had passed away! Marta travels to the capital to go to her parents’ house and see her mother, Pilar. There, she discovers what her father has left her, but she is shocked to see what she finds in his office.

This is the first chapter of La penúltima voluntad, our new podcast series for advanced learners of Spanish. In each of the 20 episodes, which will be published fortnightly, we’ll listen to a new chapter of the novel and Coffee Break Spanish hosts Mark and Anabel will discuss the latest developments in our story. Throughout the series you will be able to build your vocabulary, develop your understanding of grammar and put your comprehension skills to the test, while following an engaging story.

The post Capítulo 1 – Un susto de muerte appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Il était une fois… Jérôme, un vendeur de chaussettes.

Dans ce premier épisode de notre nouvelle série, Pierre-Benoît a choisi neuf mots mystères et une expression idiomatique pour Max. Pendant que Pierre-Benoît nous explique la définition de chacun des mots choisis, Max doit écrire une histoire courte sans oublier d’utiliser tout le vocabulaire.

Écoutez le podcast gratuit de l’épisode pour vous permettre de pratiquer votre compréhension orale, d’entendre les explications des 10 mots choisis par Pierre-Benoît pour Max et finalement d’apprécier tout ce que Max raconte à propos de Jérôme, le vendeur de chaussettes.
–
In the first episode of our brand-new series, Pierre-Benoît has chosen nine mystery words and one idiomatic expression for Max. In the time it takes Pierre-Benoît to talk us through the meanings of his chosen words and phrase, Max must come up with a short story including all 10 of them.

Listen to the free podcast episode to practise your listening comprehension, hear Pierre-Benoît’s explanations of today’s 10 words and phrase, and enjoy Max’s story about Jérôme, the sock vender.

The post Il était une fois épisode 1 appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In the extra episode, we listen to a conversation between Josie and Maurizio about visiting Mount Vesuvius.

The post CBE 4.03 | Extra | Visiting Vesuvius appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In this episode, we hear from Kate in the USA. She talks about a volcanic crater in Hawaiʻi, and we focus on pairs of adjectives and prepositions.

The post CBE 4.03 | Halema’uma’u crater | Language focus: adjectives and prepositions appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In the extra episode, we listen to a conversation between Mark and Thomas, who is from Germany, about visiting zoos and safari parks.

The post CBE 4.02 | Extra | A safari park adventure appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

We are back with another episode of Coffee Break Italian Season 3! In this episode we are focusing specifically on the perfect and pluperfect subjunctive. We then go on to listen to a dialogue based on a job interview: be sure to listen out for some key vocabulary which may come in useful for you ... Read more

The post CBI 3.25 | Perfect and pluperfect subjunctive | In bocca al lupo per il colloquio! appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Welcome to a new episode of Coffee Break German Season 3! In this episode we are introducing the gerund, as well as using the gerund as an adjective. We also learn a bit about Zurich from a travel article and listen out for some vocabulary from the article such as: Hauptstadt (f), Alpenstaat (m) and ... Read more

The post CBG 3.25 | The Gerund as an Adjective | Ob sengende Hitze oder klirrende Kälte appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In this episode, we hear from Riaan in South Africa. He tells us about the Big Five, and we focus on the expression used to.

The post CBE 4.02 | The Big Five | Language focus: used to appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In our very first extra episode of Coffee Break English Season 4, Josie talks to Maurizio, who is from Italy, about his experiences wearing a kilt.

The post CBE 4.01 | Extra | Have You Ever Worn a Kilt? appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Welcome to a brand new season of Coffee Break English! In this first episode of Season 4, we hear from Gregor in Scotland. He tells us about the kilt, and we focus on phrasal verbs and expressions with the word ‘try’.

The post CBE 4.01 | The Kilt | Language focus: phrasal verbs with ‘try’ appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Welcome back to a new episode of Coffee Break Italian Season 3! In this episode we continue our learning of the subjunctive by focusing on the imperfect subjunctive. We hear some examples of it in context through a dialogue between two friends who are attending a property viewing! Be sure to listen out for key ... Read more

The post CBI 3.24 | Imperfect subjunctive | Casa dolce casa appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

We are back with a new episode of Coffee Break German Season 3! In this episode we are learning about using the past participle as an adjective. You may already know the rules of adjectives in German and this knowledge will help to enhance your understanding of this new topic. We listen to a recipe ... Read more

The post CBG 3.24 | The Past Participle as an Adjective | Nehmen Sie den gekühlten Teig aus dem Kühlschrank appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

We are back with another episode of Coffee Break Italian Season 3! In this episode we are consolidating our learning of the present subjunctive which was covered in the previous episode. We listen to a dialogue between a client and a bank clerk on the topic of credit cards. Listen out for some useful vocabulary ... Read more

The post CBI 3.23 | Consolidation of present subjunctive | Il cliente ha sempre ragione! appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

We’re back with another episode of Coffee Break German Season 3 and we are revisiting the topic of ordinal numbers! Although this is a topic you may already be familiar with from the beginning of your learning experience, today we are focusing on something new by looking at capitalisation. We will also look at superlatives ... Read more

The post CBG 3.23 | Ordinal Numbers | Die erste Destination ist Atlanta appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Welcome to the latest episode of Coffee Break Italian! In this episode we are focusing on the structure of the present subjunctive and we will look at both regular and irregular forms. We will also listen to its use in context through a shopping dialogue. Listen out for the expression: a caval donato non si ... Read more

The post CBI 3.22 | Present subjunctive | Il regalo perfetto appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Welcome to the latest episode of Coffee Break German! In this episode we revisit the topic of separable verbs, but today we focus on them with vorbei, weiter, zurück and weg. We listen to a dialogue between two people lost in a city, who ask a local for directions. Listen out for some key vocabulary ... Read more

The post CBG 3.22 | Separable Verbs | Wann kommt der nächste bus vorbei? appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Welcome back to another episode of Coffee Break Italian! In this episode we are introducing a new topic – the long awaited subjunctive! We then hear a dialogue based on the ups and downs of the workplace. Listen out for some key words and phrases throughout the episode such as: lancio, impegni, avere a cuore ... Read more

The post CBI 3.21 | Introduction to subjunctive | Dai, diamoci da fare! appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Welcome back to another episode of Coffee Break German! In this episode we are learning about the passive which is created with werden and the past participle. We then listen to a dialogue of a tour guide escorting his visitors around a distillery and he explains the process of making whisky! Listen out for some ... Read more

The post CBG 3.21 | The Passive | So wird der Whisky gebrannt appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

We have reached the tenth and final episode of the Coffee Break Italian Magazine Season 2! We’re stepping back in time as we’re discussing two Renaissance events which take place in the region of Marche in May. Join Mark and Francesca one last time in this series as they explore masculine words ending in -a and qualche (some) and ogni ... Read more

The post CBI Mag 2.10 | Corsa alla Spada e Palio di Camerino: un tuffo nel passato appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In the final episode of this season of the Coffee Break German Magazine, we hear a text about the well-known and successful German actor and director, Til Schweiger. As we hear about his life and international career, we review some important grammar points such as the imperfect irregular tense and scheint zu sein. As always, ... Read more

The post CBG Mag 2.10 | Til Schweiger appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

We have reached the tenth and final episode in this series of the Coffee Break Spanish Magazine and we’re rounding off the season by talking about one of the most cultivated cereals in the world – corn! Through the text featured in this episode, we find out where the term ‘corn’ comes from and its ... Read more

The post CBS Mag 4.10 | Maíz appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

We have reached the final episode of the Coffee Break French Magazine Season 2 and we’re going out with a bang as we’re discussing one of the most widely celebrated holidays in France – Bastille Day! As we discover how le quatorze juillet is celebrated in Paris, we learn some interesting expressions like grasse matinée, avoir ... Read more

The post CBF Mag 2.10 | Vive la France : le quatorze juillet à Paris appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Welcome back to the Coffee Break Italian Magazine! This time, we’re talking about the origins of a well-known romantic tradition – La Serenata. While listening to a text about this ancient tradition, we learn about the following grammar points: basta che + subjunctive, the ce n’è structure, and how to use il proprio / la propria as an alternative to il suo/ la sua. As ... Read more

The post CBI Mag 2.09 | La Serenata: una dedica musicale appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

We’re discussing a film in this episode of the Coffee Break German Magazine: ‘The Life of Others’ by Florian Henckel von Donnersmarck. Set in 1984, the film portrays life in the German Democratic Republic, in East Berlin, and follows a couple being spied on by a member of the Stasi. We hear more about the film ... Read more

The post CBG Mag 2.09 | Das Leben der Anderen appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Welcome to the latest episode of Coffee Break Italian! In this episode we will be focusing on the passato remoto (past historic), on it’s formation and it’s use. We will then listen to a story from Carlotta’s grandfather about his family migrating from Italy to New York. Listen out for some key vocabulary such as ... Read more

The post CBI 3.20 | Preterite | Storie di emigrazione appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

We’re halfway through Season 3 of Coffee Break German, so it’s time for a review episode! Join Mark and Andrea as they look back on some of the things we have learned in episodes 11 – 19; from prepositions with the Genitive to the future tense, qualifiers and reflexive verbs with the Dative – this ... Read more

The post CBG 3.20 | Review episode 3.11 to 3.19 appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In the penultimate episode in this series of the Coffee Break Spanish Magazine, we’re taking a virtual trip to one of the oldest cities in Europe – Cádiz. Marina shares an interesting text about the history of this city in the south of Spain before Mark and Anabel discuss some useful language points. Some of ... Read more

The post CBS Mag 4.09 | Siglos de historia en Cádiz appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In this episode of the Coffee Break French Magazine we hear a text about Marie-Antoinette, the last Queen of France before the French Revolution. Join Mark and Pierre-Benoît as they discuss the language featured in the text and listen out for the following expressions: se rappeler qqch, tenter de faire qqch and faire des reproches ... Read more

The post CBF Mag 2.09 | La dernière reine de l’Ancien Régime appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In this episode of the Coffee Break Italian Magazine, we’re talking about the Sibillini Mountains – a mountain chain in central Italy which includes a beautiful natural park. Join Mark and Francesca as they discuss a text highlighting what these impressive mountains have to offer while talking about some key vocabulary and grammar points including: ... Read more

The post CBI Mag 2.08 | I Monti Azzurri – I Sibillini appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

The topic of this Coffee Break German Magazine episode is hot air balloons – specifically the annual hot air balloon competitions which take place in the Alps during the month of January. As we learn about these fascinating competitions, we encounter some interesting vocabulary including the words: bunt, egal ob… oder… and lenken. Mark and ... Read more

The post CBG Mag 2.08 | Heißluftballonrennen im Januar appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

The latest episode of Coffee Break Italian we’re introducing a new past tense – the trapassato prossimo, also referred to as the “pluperfect”. Listen out for some handy phrases including: essere a pezzi, a proposito and ci sto! Don’t miss our ancora una cosina at the end of the episode.

The post CBI 3.19 | Pluperfect indicative | La mamma è sempre la mamma appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Welcome to another episode of Coffee Break German! In Lesson 19 Mark and Andrea discuss adverbs which connect clauses: daher, deswegen, deshalb, darum, also, folglich, demzufolge and somit. We then listen to three separate voicemails in which we hear causative adverbs in context. Listen out for these useful words and phrases: etwas hinterlassen, die Rückrufnummer, ... Read more

The post CBG 3.19 | Causative Adverbs | Also los nach dem Pieps appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In this episode of the Coffee Break Spanish Magazine we’re talking about grape harvesting in Argentina! We learn how to create adverbs ending in -mente, and familiarise ourselves with the structure: continuar + gerund. We also hear a variety of verbs including alabar and constar de before Mark and Marina discuss la Guinda del pastel.

The post CBS Mag 4.08 | Fiesta de la Vendimia en Argentina appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In this episode of the Coffee Break French Magazine, we’re transporting you to the city of Geneva. While hearing about what this wonderful Swiss city has to offer, we cover some interesting grammar points such as the agreement of tel(le) que and the use of être assis(e) à + infinitive. Sophie joins Mark at the end of the ... Read more

The post CBF Mag 2.08 | Entre les montres de luxe et le lac Léman appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

The topic of this Coffee Break Italian Magazine episode is the life and work of Italy’s greatest poet and ‘father’ of the Italian language: Dante Alighieri. We review various grammar points in this episode, including: the historical present, relative superlative adjectives, the passive with venire and si passivante. Be sure to listen until the end of the episode to hear ... Read more

The post CBI Mag 2.07 | Dante: il padre della lingua italiana appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In the latest instalment of the Coffee Break German Magazine, we’re heading on a road trip in the Austrian Alps! Throughout the text featured in this episode, we explore the Großglockner Hochalpenstraße – a scenic mountain road and one of Austria’s main attractions – while taking note of the interesting language points, including: adjectives, the ... Read more

The post CBG Mag 2.07 | Großglockner Hochalpenstraße – ein österreichischer Roadtrip appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In this episode of Coffee Break Italian we’re covering the topic of irregular plurals both in terms of nouns and adjectives. In the dialogue featured in this lesson, Elisa meets her friend and tells her about her recent summer holiday in Turkey. She mentions the topics of food, methods of transport and a cycling injury. ... Read more

The post CBI 3.18 | Irregular plurals | Vacanze in Turchia appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Welcome to another lesson of Coffee Break German! This time, we are introducing reflexive verbs with reflexive pronouns in the dative. We hear these learning points in context during a discussion between characters Tim and Anna. Some words and phrases to listen out for include: sich die Nacht um die Ohren schlagen, sich etwas aus … machen and ... Read more

The post CBG 3.18 | Reflexive verbs with the Dative | Das werde ich mir merken appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Welcome to another episode of the Coffee Break Spanish Magazine! This time, we discuss a text about a canoeing festival which takes place in Asturias every year. While hearing about the festival throughout the text, Mark and Anabel, discuss the grammar points which appear and explain the key vocabulary. We learn about the difference between ... Read more

The post CBS Mag 4.07 | Deporte y diversión en Asturias appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

The topic of this episode of the Coffee Break French Magazine is French painter and founder of impressionist painting, Claude Monet. As we hear about his life and work throughout the text, Mark and Pierre-Benoît focus on the language used before Sophie joins Mark to discuss some interesting quotations by Pissarro. We also hear examples ... Read more

The post CBF Mag 2.07 | La France derrière le regard impressionniste appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Pandoro o Panettone? That is the question Mark and Francesca are discussing in this episode of the Coffee Break Italian Magazine! While listening to a text about these traditional Italian Christmas cakes, take note of any new words or phrases you hear, such as tanto che, dibattito infiammato and brevettare. We also learn about the passive structures with venire instead of essere; nonostante + ... Read more

The post CBI Mag 2.06 | Pandoro o Panettone? Questo è il dilemma! appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

We hope you’re hungry as this episode of the Coffee Break German Magazine is all about a traditional North German dish made of potatoes, beef, pickles and beetroot. This used to be a sailor’s dish but today it’s found all over Northern Europe, and there are lots of different variations. This episode will give you ... Read more

The post CBG Mag 2.06 | Labskaus appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In this episode of Coffee Break German Season 3 we are discussing the new topic of qualifying adverbs: sehr, ziemlich, außerordentlich, völlig. We also listen to a conversation between school students Manuela, Tina and Tobias, who are discussing the latest developments at school and what they think of them. Some vocabulary to look out for ... Read more

The post CBG 3.17 | Qualifiers | Ich finde ihn ganz nett appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Welcome back to another episode of Coffee Break Italian Season 3! In this episode we cover the topic of molto, troppo, poco, tanto used as adjectives and adverbs. We continue listening to the dialogue of Nicola and the guided tour of Puglia, which has now reached the destination of Alberobello, famous for its Trulli and ... Read more

The post CBI 3.17 | Molto, troppo, poco, tanto used as adjectives or adverbs | Alberobello e i suoi Trulli appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In this episode of the Coffee Break Spanish Magazine, Mark and Anabel discuss a text about the life and work of a very famous novelist who was born in Chile – Isabel Allende. While learning more about Isabel Allende throughout the text, we discuss some interesting language points including regular and irregular participles and the ... Read more

The post CBS Mag 4.06 | Isabel Allende appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Mais d’où viennent les frites ? That is the question Mark and Pierre-Benoît are addressing in this episode of the Coffee Break French Magazine! We hope you’re hungry as we hear a range of useful food-related words and expressions in this episode, such as manger sur le pouce, avoir la frite and ne pas avoir ... Read more

The post CBF Mag 2.06 | Mais d’où viennent les frites ? appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

We’re halfway through the Coffee Break German Magazine Season 3! In Episode 5 we listen to a text about the Habsburg dynasty and its legacy. We hear lots of new vocabulary and grammar points which Mark and Andrea explain along the way. Be sure to listen until the end to learn about a proverb which ... Read more

The post CBG Mag 2.05 | Die Habsburger appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In this episode of the Coffee Break Italian Magazine we’re exploring a very special temple built inside a natural cave in the region of Marche. After hearing a text about this impressive piece or architecture, Mark and Francesca explain a variety of language points including: how to express nuances of colours; the present participle, and ... Read more

The post CBI Mag 2.05 | Tempio del Valadier: un tempio scavato nella roccia appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

We’re focusing on a brand new topic in this episode of Coffee Break German Season 3: temporal prepositions. Join Mark and Andrea as they discuss temporal prepositions, such as seit, ab, and von… bis, before hearing them in context during a dialogue in which Herr Kühne has a job interview with Frau Dr. Hofmann. Vocabulary ... Read more

The post CBG 3.16 | Temporal prepositions | Sie arbeitet seit zwei Jahren in München appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Welcome back to another episode of Coffee Break Italian Season 3! The topic of this episode is indefinite adjectives and pronouns – words used to express indefinite quantities without any specific reference to quantities, people, things, or places. Throughout the lesson, Mark and Francesca focus on the most widely used indefinite adjectives and pronouns in ... Read more

The post CBI 3.16 | Indefinite adjectives and pronouns | Scopriamo la Puglia con Nicola appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Welcome back to the Coffee Break Spanish Magazine! In this episode, Mark and Anabel go through a text about human towers or castells in Catalan. We break down the range of words and phrases in the text, including: tanto… que…, tras and cualquier. Take note of the Catalan words featured this episode and be sure ... Read more

The post CBS Mag 4.05 | Torres humanas appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In this episode of the Coffee Break French Magazine we’re heading to the cinema! After hearing a text about French cinema, Mark and Pierre-Benoît break down the language, focusing on some useful vocabulary for talking about films, such as: réalisateur, le septième art and trucages. Listen out for examples of the subjunctive, the gerund and ... Read more

The post CBF Mag 2.05 | L’ancêtre du cinéma français appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Welcome to another episode of the Coffee Break German Magazine! This time, our hosts, Mark and Andrea, focus on a text about the Hanse (a trade/military network of cities between the 12th and 17th century) and the Hanseatic cities of Germany. We discuss the cities which were part of the Hanseatic league and how this ... Read more

The post CBG Mag 2.04 | Hansestädte appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

We’re back with another episode of the Coffee Break Italian Magazine! This time, our text is all about the first female Italian astronaut, Samantha Cristoforetti! Join Mark and Francesca as they learn about her impressive life and work while discussing some interesting grammar points including: dopo + passive past infinitive; how the word ben is ... Read more

The post CBI Mag 2.04 | Samantha Cristoforetti: un’italiana alla Stazione Spaziale Internazionale appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Welcome back to Coffee Break German Season 3! In this episode, we are reviewing relative clauses before looking at relative clauses in the genitive. We then see this grammar point in context during a conversation between Helene and Florian who are looking at old school photographs. Listen out for some school-related vocabulary such as: Schulzeit, ... Read more

The post CBG 3.15 | Relative pronouns in the genitive | Das Mädchen, dessen Haare bis zum Boden reichen appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Welcome back to Coffee Break Italian Season 3! In this episode we continue our journey through the conditional. Following on from the previous episode where we introduced this new mood and explained its functions; we are now focusing on the conditional perfect. We hear this grammar point in context during a conversation between husband and ... Read more

The post CBI 3.15 | Conditional perfect | Notizie dal telegiornale appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

We’re taking a virtual trip to Latin America as we’re visiting the Amazon jungle in this episode of the Coffee Break Spanish Magazine! Join Mark and Anabel and learn some interesting facts about this amazing place while listening out for the use of the negative imperative; adjectives like indígena and frondoso; and verbs such as ... Read more

The post CBS Mag 4.04 | La selva amazónica appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

This week, we’re taking a virtual trip to the French-speaking area of Canada: Québec! Throughout the lesson we share some of the top attractions in this beautiful province of Canada. Along the way, we hear examples of direct object pronouns, the pronoun y and examples of the future tense of the verbs avoir and être. Listen ... Read more

The post CBF Mag 2.04 | Vingt-quatre heures dans la province du Québec appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

We’re back with another episode of the Coffee Break German Magazine! We’re talking football this week, specifically the highest professional German football league. As we learn how the league works, we focus on some interesting language points including adjective declination and superlatives before rounding off the episode with the following proverb: Da liegt der Hund ... Read more

The post CBG Mag 2.03 | Die Deutsche Bundesliga appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Welcome to another episode of the Coffee Break Italian Magazine! In this episode Mark and Francesca discuss how the 1st of May, also known as ‘Labour Day’ or ‘May Day’, is celebrated in Italy. After listening to a text about this celebration we take a closer look at the language covered, including the use of ... Read more

The post CBI Mag 2.03 | La Festa del Primo Maggio appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In this episode of Coffee Break German, Mark and Andrea focus on connectors which connect words, word groups or clauses. We hear many examples of connectors linking clauses before hearing a dialogue between characters Ben and Marianne in a coffee shop. Listen carefully for some useful vocabulary throughout this episode, including words and phrases such ... Read more

The post CBG 3.14 | Temporal connectors | Solange die Kinder noch gern zelten… appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In this final extra episode of Coffee Break English Season 3, we listen to a conversation between Josie and Mark containing lots of superlative adjectives.

The post CBE 3.10 | Extra | A superlative conversation appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Welcome to another episode of Coffee Break Italian Season 3! This time we’re introducing a new type of verb: the conditional mood. Join Mark and Francesca as they explain how and when to use the conditional in order to be more polite; to give advice; and to say that something would happen or occur if ... Read more

The post CBI 3.14 | Introduction to the conditional | Dottore, non mi sento bene! appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Our Coffee Break Spanish Magazine hosts, Mark and Anabel, are back for another episode! This time we hear a text about a Basque celebration which takes place in Bilbao. Throughout the text, we come across some interesting language points, including the expression por todo lo alto; the verbs asomarse and quemar; and the structure of hay ... Read more

The post CBS Mag 4.03 | Días de fiesta en Bilbao appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

We have reached the end of Coffee Break English Season 3! In this final episode of the series we hear from Matthew in Australia. He tells us all about Uluru, and we focus on superlative adjectives.

The post CBE 3.10 | Uluru | Language focus: superlatives appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In this episode of the Coffee Break French Magazine, we hear a text about the very well known French fashion designer…that’s right it’s Coco Chanel! Our hosts, Mark and Pierre-Benoît discuss a range of fashion-related words and phrases as well as examples of the following grammar points: reflexive verbs in the perfect tense; the imperfect ... Read more

The post CBF Mag 2.03 | La petite robe noire appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

The post CBG Mag 2.02 | Glacier-Express appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In the extra episode of Coffee break English, Mark and Josie talk about films they have watched recently.

The post CBE 3.09 | Extra | Film recommendations appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Welcome back to the Coffee Break German Magazine! In this episode we hear a text about the most famous train route in the German-speaking region: the Glacier-Express! We learn about this 8-hour trip which runs between Zermatt and St. Moritz, offering breathtaking views along the way. We encounter many interesting pieces of vocabulary throughout the ... Read more

The post CBG Mag 2.02 | Glacier-Express appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In this week’s episode of the Coffee Break Italian Magazine we’re heading to Castelluccio di Norcia, a village between the regions of Marche and Umbria in Central Italy. As we hear a text about this village, Mark and Francesca discuss the interesting language points along the way. We look at verbs requiring the addition of ... Read more

The post CBI Mag 2.02 | Castelluccio di Norcia: la perla dell’Umbria appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Welcome to another episode of Coffee Break English! This time, we hear from Kate in the USA who talks to us about Hollywood. We also focus on the words everything, ‘something’, ‘everything’, ‘nothing’, and ‘anything’.

The post CBE 3.09 | Hollywood | Language focus: Something, everything, nothing and anything appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In this episode of Coffee Break German we’re focusing on the use of the future tense. We learn how to express plans, promises and assumptions in the future. That’s not all, we also introduce adverbs which can be used to suggest that we are making an assumption. We then hear what we’ve learned in context ... Read more

The post CBG 3.13 | The future tense | Er wird dir schon zuhören appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In the extra episode of Coffee Break English, we listen to a conversation between Josie and Mark about what they did last weekend. Pay attention to the irregular past tenses as you listen!

The post CBE 3.08 | Extra | What did you do last weekend? appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In this episode of Coffee Break Italian, Mark and Francesca introduce a new grammar point: the very useful si impersonale or “impersonal si”. We learn how the word si can be used as a generic subject in order to avoid specific reference to a person or group of people. We also learn how to form this impersonal structure with different tenses, provided the ... Read more

The post CBI 3.13 | Impersonal si | Viva la pausa caffè! appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Welcome to another episode of the Coffee Break Spanish Magazine! This time Mark and Anabel go through a text about bachata, a popular type of Latin music, and discuss its origin and influences. Along the way, they provide explanations about a range of grammar and vocabulary points including: how to use se trata de and ... Read more

The post CBS Mag 4.02 | Ritmos latinos: la bachata appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Welcome back to another episode of Coffee Break English! This time, we hear from Susan in England who talks to us about a very famous British person – David Attenborough. Throughout the episode we also focus on irregular past tense verbs.

The post CBE 3.08 | David Attenborough | Language focus: irregular past tenses appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Join Mark and Pierre-Benoît for Episode 2 of our Coffee Break French Magazine Season 2! After introducing the episode, we hear about the French apéritif tradition and analyse the language featured throughout this text. Some interesting expressions to listen out for include: quel(le) que soit (whatever), être le bienvenu (to be welcome) and faire plaisir ... Read more

The post CBF Mag 2.02 | L’apéro, c’est sacré ! appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Welcome to a brand new series of the Coffee Break German Magazine! In this first episode of Season 2, our hosts, Mark and Andrea discuss The German Shepherd Dog. We learn about the origins of this type of dog and how German Shepherds can act as police dogs, rescue dogs, and therapy dogs while also also ... Read more

The post CBG Mag 2.01 | Der Deutsche Schäferhund appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In this extra episode of Coffee Break English, Mark and Josie talk about their experiences snorkelling and scuba diving.

The post CBE 3.07 Extra | Snorkelling and scuba diving appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Welcome to Season 2 of the Coffee Break Italian Magazine! Join our hosts Mark, Francesca and Silvia as they explore a range of cultural topics and grammar points to help you improve your language skills. In this episode we’re talking about the famous 20th century Italian writer, Italo Svevo. We explore the language used in ... Read more

The post CBI Mag 2.01 | Italo Svevo: uno scrittore dalla doppia identità appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In this episode, we hear from Matthew in Australia. He tells us about an interesting place in Australia, and we focus on how to pronounce the sounds i and ee.

The post CBE 3.07 | Ningaloo Reef | Language focus: ‘i’ and ‘ee’ pronunciation appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

We’re back with another episode of Coffee Break German! This time, Mark and Andrea review adjectival endings before introducing adjectival endings in the genitive. We hear this new grammar point in context during a conversation between Tanja and Katharina who are going clothes shopping.

The post CBG 3.12 | Adjectival endings in the genitive | Früchte des italienischen Sommers appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In this extra episode of Coffee Break English, we listen to a conversation between Josie and Mark about useful inventions.

The post CBE 3.06 Extra | Useful inventions appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

We’re back with another episode of Coffee Break Italian! This time, Mark and Francesca are looking at the formal imperative and its negative and irregular form. We see this grammar point in context with a dialogue between a Scottish tourist and a local who provides directions to the Museum of Modern Art. Listen out for some useful ... Read more

The post CBI 3.12 | Formal and irregular imperative | Alla scoperta della città appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Welcome to Season 4 of the Coffee Break Spanish Magazine! We’re joining our hosts, Mark, Anabel, Marina and Sebastián, as they present cultural topics and grammar study in an enjoyable way, allowing you to build your vocabulary and increase your range of expression. In this first episode of the series, Mark and Anabel discuss a ... Read more

The post CBS Mag 4.01 | Pedro Almodóvar appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In this episode of Coffee Break English, Monica in Scotland tells us about a famous Scottish inventor. We also focus on phrasal verbs with the word ‘up’.

The post CBE 3.06 | The invention of the telephone | Language focus: phrasal verbs with ‘up’ appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Welcome to the very first episode of the Coffee Break French Magazine Season 2! Join our hosts Mark and Pierre-Benoît as they introduce the series and take a virtual trip to the city of Toulouse, also known as La ville rose. Throughout the reading text about this beautiful city, Mark and Pierre-Benoît discuss the language ... Read more

The post CBF Mag 2.01 | La ville rose appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In this extra episode of Coffee Break English, Mark and Josie discuss their future predictions. Pay attention to how they express the future as you listen!

The post CBE 3.05 | Extra | Future predictions appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In this episode of Coffee Break English, we hear from Ryan in Canada. He tells us about the future of North American space travel, and we learn about how to talk about the future using ‘will’ and ‘be going to’.

The post CBE 3.05 | NASA | Language focus: how to talk about the future appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Welcome to the final lesson from Season 1 of Coffee Break Swedish! This week we take some time to reflect on what Mark and Catriona have learned during their travels in Sweden, giving us an excellent opportunity to practise both the past and perfect tenses. We learn some new phrases and also review some key ... Read more

The post CBSw 1.40 | Det har varit jättekul! appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

It’s time for the final chapter of La Vérité éclate toujours ! In this episode, we say farewell to our cast of characters, as they say farewell to one another too. Guillaume and Liliane return to Switzerland, while James, Claire, Yvette and Louise all find themselves together in Max’s hospital room. They discuss the incredible ... Read more

The post Chapitre 40 – Tout est bien qui finit bien ! appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

We hope you’re hungry as Josie and Mark are talking about their favourite dishes to cook in this extra episode of Coffee Break English.

The post CBE 3.04 | Extra | Favourite recipes appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In this episode of Coffee Break English, we hear from Marcia in the Caribbean. She talks about a traditional Jamaican way of cooking, and we focus on the modal verbs ‘might’, ‘may’, ‘could’ and ‘can’.

The post CBE 3.04 | Jamaican jerk cooking | Language focus: modal verbs of possibility appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In this special episode, Mark provides an update on all things Coffee Break Spanish including the return of the Coffee Break Spanish Magazine in late April 2022; the launch of the Coffee Break books, available from June in your local bookshop and from online retailers; and the Coffee Break Spanish Club, where you can get ... Read more

The post Coffee Break Spanish News – 4th April 2022 appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In this special episode, Mark provides an update on all things Coffee Break French including the return of the Coffee Break French Magazine in late April 2022; the launch of the Coffee Break books, available from June in your local bookshop and from online retailers; and the Coffee Break French Club, where you can get ... Read more

The post Coffee Break French News – 4th April 2022 appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In this special episode, Mark provides an update on all things Coffee Break Italian including the return of the Coffee Break Italian Magazine in late April 2022; the launch of the Coffee Break books, available from June in your local bookshop and from online retailers; and the Coffee Break Italian Club, where you can get ... Read more

The post Coffee Break Italian News – 4th April 2022 appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In this special episode, Mark provides an update on all things Coffee Break German including the return of the Coffee Break German Magazine in late April 2022; the launch of the Coffee Break books, available from June in your local bookshop and from online retailers; and the Coffee Break German Club, where you can get ... Read more

The post Coffee Break German News – 4th April 2022 appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Welcome to another episode of Coffee Break English! This time, we listen to a conversation between Josie and Mark about famous pop stars.

The post CBE 3.03 | Extra | Pop icons appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In this episode, Kate from the USA talks about a very famous American singer – Elvis Presley. We also focus on using the gerund or infinitive after certain verbs.

The post CBE 3.03 | Elvis Presley | Language focus: gerund and infinitives appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In this dialogue chapter we finally get to hear the voice of a familiar character and, at long last, Yvette meets her father properly. We also witness Max and James’ reunion as they discuss the recent events. Throughout this dialogue chapter we hear many examples of informal, spoken French. Some interesting words and expressions to ... Read more

The post Chapitre 39 – Tout ça c’est grâce à vous ! appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Welcome to the second last lesson of this series of Coffee Break Swedish! As we are nearing the end of this season we are looking at more colloquial Swedish and what typical smalltalk may sound like. We do so in the setting of Lovisa’s sister Linnea’s birthday party. Låt oss börja!

The post CBSw 1.39 | Grattis på födelsedagen! appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In this lesson, we’re continuing with a topic which had been avoided up until Season 3 of Coffee Break German – the genitive! While it is possible to avoid using the genitive, when used correctly, it makes you sound like a true native speaker. Join hosts Mark and Andrea as they explore some prepositions with the genitive: wegen, infolge, gemäß, dank, außerhalb/innerhalb, ... Read more

The post CBG 3.11 | The genitive with prepositions | Laut Aussagen es Fanclubs, wird Mark P. Pianist appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In the extra episode of Coffee Break English, our hosts Josie and Mark talk about their experiences visiting Australia.

The post CBE 3.02 Extra | Visiting Australia appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In this week’s lesson of Coffee Break Italian Season 3 we’re looking at the following forms of the imperative: tu and voi forms; the negative imperative; irregular forms; and the imperative with pronouns. We also hear a dialogue between two colleagues, Carlo and Michela, who are back at work after their Christmas holidays.

The post CBI 3.11 | Introduction to the imperative | Anno nuovo, vita nuova! appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In this episode, we hear from Matthew in Australia. He talks about an important part of indigenous Australian culture, and we focus on when to use the present perfect tense for unfinished actions.

The post CBE 3.02 | Dreamtime | Language focus: the present perfect tense appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In this season of Coffee Break English we’re bringing you an extra episode related to the content covered in our main episode on a Tuesday. In today’s extra episode, Josie and Mark are asking each other some quiz questions. Listen out for the comparatives!

The post CBE 3.01 Extra | A Comparatives Quiz appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In this episode, we hear from Kate in the USA. She tells us about the history of the cheeseburger, one of the world’s most popular foods. We also focus on the comparative adjectives.

The post CBE 3.01 | The Cheeseburger | Language focus: comparatives appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In this chapter we’re in the police station, as James, Claire and Yvette give their witness statements and go through all the evidence they have against Roger. We revisit some interesting words and expressions that we’ve seen in previous chapters, such as: tenir la route, boucler and sévir. And, as always, we encounter some new ... Read more

The post Chapitre 38 – La seule chose qui comptait vraiment c’était Max ! appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

This week we’re following Mark as he visits a pharmacy, looking for something to help with his sunburn. This is a lesson packed with lots of new language points, but we also review some more familiar grammar rules and phrases from earlier in the course. Låt oss börja!

The post CBSw 1.38 | Jag skulle behöva köpa solkräm appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

We’ve reached Lesson 10 so it’s time to review everything we’ve learned so far in Season 3 of Coffee Break German! Throughout this lesson we’ll be reviewing the topics which Mark and Andrea covered in Lessons 1 – 9, from the Perfect and Imperfect Tense to the Genitive, Connectors and more. There are some exercises ... Read more

The post CBG 3.10 | Review episode appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

We have reached Lesson 10 of Coffee Break Italian Season 3! In this review lesson we look at all of the pronouns covered in Lessons 1 -9: subject pronouns, reflexive pronouns, direct and indirect object pronouns and combined pronouns. We also hear from Silvia, a young girl who has written a journal entry all about ... Read more

The post CBI 3.10 | Review of all pronouns | Caro diario… appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In this dialogue chapter, we hear the voices of James, Claire and Yvette. We join them on their way back from Louise’s and just when they start to relax, an unfamiliar four-by-four with tinted windows pulls up outside their hotel. Throughout this chapter we hear lots of informal, spoken language. Colloquial words & expressions we ... Read more

The post Chapitre 37 – J’ai eu la trouille de ma vie ! appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In this lesson, Mark and Catriona are continuing their travels in Sweden and Lovisa brings them to the town of Askersund, just south of Örebro. We take a look at three separate conversations in three different settings as we explore Askersund. We also introduce some new words and phrases and look at different ways native ... Read more

The post CBSw 1.37 | Följ med till kassan appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In this lesson of Coffee Break German our hosts, Mark and Andrea, look at the infinitive structure with um zu which allows us to say “in order to”. We then hear this structure in the context of a conversation between characters Mike and Sandra who discuss Mike’s upcoming trip through Switzerland.

The post CBG 3.09 | The Infinitive with um zu | Was soll ich tun, um durchs Land zu reisen? appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In this lesson, Coffee Break Italian hosts, Mark and Francesca, introduce the last remaining category of personal pronouns to be discussed in this series: disjunctive pronouns. We then listen to a dialogue centred around the use of disjunctive pronouns. In the previous episodes, direct, indirect and combined pronouns were looked at quite extensively and you ... Read more

The post CBI 3.09 | Disjunctive pronouns | Amicizia e musica appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In this chapter of La Vérité éclate toujours we discover the identity of the armed men and women who burst into the hospital. Finally, everyone is reunited and all that’s left to do is to go and see Max and tell him about everything that has happened. Some interesting constructions to look out for in ... Read more

The post Chapitre 36 – Il leva le poing en signe de victoire appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In Lesson 36 of Coffee Break Swedish Mark and his wife continue their travels in Örebro and we join them on a trip to the tourist office where they find out which tourist attractions they can visit. We revisit some vocabulary we haven’t used in a while and take a closer look at some subtleties ... Read more

The post CBSw 1.36 | Vad finns det att göra och se här? appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

This lesson of Coffee Break German is about “connectors”. These are words that join clauses or phrases in a sentence. Join Mark and Andrea as they look at a variety of different connectors and see how they function in a sentence while learning their meanings. We also have the chance to see connectors in the ... Read more

The post CBG 3.08 | Connectors | Ohne zu meckern appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Welcome back to Coffee Break Italian Season 3! In this lesson, Mark and Francesca bring together direct and indirect object pronouns, and discuss what happens when both pronouns are used in one sentence at the same time. Before looking at this new grammar point, we remind ourselves what direct and indirect objects are and then ... Read more

The post CBI 3.08 | Combined pronouns | Una macchina nuova di zecca appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In this lesson of Coffee Break Swedish we take a trip into town and follow Mark as he is on the lookout for a few different items. We learn some new words and phrases, take a look at adjectives, and also introduce the past tense. Låt oss börja!

The post CBSw 1.35 | Säljer ni vykort? appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Following the turn of events in our previous chapter, we see the aftermath, as the police arrive and start taking statements from witnesses and from James. However, they soon discover that the drama isn’t over yet! Some interesting expressions to look out for include: l’ironie du sort and la fin des haricots as well as ... Read more

The post Chapitre 35 – James sentit son sang bouillir dans ses veines appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In Lesson 7 of Coffee Break German Season 3, we are looking at the infinitive structure with zu but without um. Throughout the lesson we identify some verbs and expressions that require this structure. We also hear some useful vocabulary, including: sammeln aufbauen and vorhaben.

The post CBG 3.07 | The infinitive with zu | Ich habe gehofft, früher hier zu sein appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Throughout this lesson of Coffee Break Italian, Mark and Francesca teach us about indirect object pronouns and we follow a dialogue of three friends discussing what present to get for two of their friends’ birthdays. Listen out for some useful vocabulary including the words: cravatta and indimenticabile.

The post CBI 3.07 | Indirect object pronouns | Due compleanni davvero speciali appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Welcome back to our crime drama series for advanced learners of French! Put your listening comprehension skills to the test with this fast-moving, action-packed chapter in which we join Roger, James and Guillaume in the car that they are test driving. Some interesting expressions to listen out for along the way include: hors de ses ... Read more

The post Chapitre 34 – Les choses se précipitaient appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

This lesson of Coffee Break Swedish is all about breakfast. We follow Mark and Catriona during their first morning at the hotel in Örebro and look at both familiar and new vocabulary. We also introduce some Swedish slang. Låt oss börja!

The post CBSw 1.34 | Ska ni äta frukost? appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Welcome back to Coffee Break German Season 3! Join Mark and Andrea in Lesson 6 as they introduce the genitive case which conveys belonging and possession. In our story this week, we follow flatmates Jana and Karin as they tidy their apartment and discuss whose belongings are lying around! Listen out for examples of the ... Read more

The post CBG 3.06 | The genitive case | Wessen Socken sind das? appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

We’re back with a brand new Coffee Break Italian lesson! Join Mark and Francesca in this episode as they continue discussing the topic of adjectives. While the focus of Lesson 5 was on comparative adjectives, this time we are learning about superlative adjectives, both in their relative and absolute forms. We also hear a dialogue ... Read more

The post CBI 3.06 | Superlative adjectives | Aiuto! Cosa mi metto? appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

This lesson is all about checking into a hotel! We follow Mark and his wife Catriona on their travels in Sweden and encounter some familiar phrases and some completely new ones. Strap yourself in and get ready for some more conversations with native speakers. Låt oss börja!

The post CBSw 1.33 | Ha det trevligt här hos oss! appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

It’s time for Chapter 33 of La Vérité éclate toujours! In this instalment we hear the next stage of James and Guillaume’s Plan B which doesn’t unfold as smoothly as they’d hoped. Listen out for some nice expressions at the very beginning of the chapter: la goutte d’eau qui fait déborder le vase and la coupe ... Read more

The post Chapitre 33 – Il n’y avait plus un instant à perdre ! appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Following on from the previous lesson of Coffee Break German Season 3, Mark and Andrea continue to look at the imperfect tense, this time, focusing on irregular verbs. The imperfect tense is used when writing or telling a story in the past so we take a look at a letter where we see many irregular imperfect ... Read more

The post CBG 3.05 | Irregular verbs in the imperfect tense | Ich aß täglich ein Eis appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

The latest lesson from Coffee Break Italian Season 3 is all about comparative adjectives. Join Mark and Francesca to learn about regular and irregular comparatives and the use of che and di when introducing comparisons. We also hear some useful phrases including all’ultimo minuto and spendere un occhio della testa.

The post CBI 3.05 | Comparative adjectives | Le vacanze… che fatica! appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Welcome to the latest instalment of La Vérité éclate toujours ! In this dialogue chapter, we hear Roger’s voice for the first time during a conversation with James and Guillaume. Listen carefully for the following colloquial expressions: en prendre plein les mirettes and travailler pour des clopinettes as well as some useful idiomatic expressions.

The post Chapitre 32 – La Namérie est à moi ! appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In this lesson of Coffee Break Swedish we continue our adventures in Sweden and Mark is challenged to find out how to travel from the airport to Örebro. We hear a conversation between him and the person at the information desk while introducing some new vocabulary and constructions. Låt oss börja!

The post CBSw 1.32 | Jag vill åka till Örebro appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Lesson 4 of Coffee Break German Season 3 is all about the imperfect tense. Throughout the lesson Mark and Andrea focus on the conjugation of regular verbs and then listen to a diary entry where we hear examples of the tense in context.

The post CBG 3.04 | The imperfect tense | Wir arbeiteten pausenlos appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Mark and Francesca are talking about the futuro anteriore (future perfect) in Lesson 4 of Coffee Break Italian Season 3. We also revise all of the adjectives covered in the season so far and hear a dialogue following on from what we heard in Lesson 3.

The post CBI 3.04 | The future perfect and review of adjectives | Ti sentirai come a casa! appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

We are back after a short break and over the course of the next ten lessons we will be taking our Swedish to the next level and really putting what we have learned into practice. We will follow Mark and his wife Catriona as they take a virtual trip to Sweden, allowing Mark to put ... Read more

The post CBSw 1.31 | Välkomna till Sverige! appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Welcome to the first chapter of the fourth and final part of La Vérité éclate toujours, our crime drama series for advanced French learners. In this episode, James and Guillaume attend their meeting with Roger Martin who is as unpleasant and rude as they expected, but James manages to stay in the character of David ... Read more

The post Chapitre 31 – Il était d’un naturel époustouflant appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In Lesson 3 from Coffee Break German Season 3, Mark and Andrea discuss the use of pronouns welche and diese before listening to a dialogue in which a tour guide shows a group of tourists around the city of Zurich. Be sure to take note of the use of the pronouns welche/welcher/welches and diese/dieser/dieses throughout ... Read more

The post CBG 3.03 | Using the pronouns welche and diese | Mit welchem Schiff fahren wir? appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Join hosts Mark and Francesca in Lesson 3 of Coffee Break Italian Season 3 as they discuss the simple future. We talk about the structure of the tense and how it is formed and used in Italian. We also hear a dialogue between a father and daughter who are discussing aspects about their lives in ... Read more

The post CBI 3.03 | Simple future | Ci trasferiamo in Australia! appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In this second episode from Season 3 of Coffee Break German, Mark and Andrea review the rules for the articles der, die and das. We also hear a dialogue between Gundula and Karl as they discuss an art exhibition before going on to have drink at a local Kneipe. If you’d like to take advantage ... Read more

The post CBG 3.02 | The Gender of German nouns | Was für eine Gelegenheit! appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Welcome to another episode from Season 3 of Coffee Break Italian! This time, Mark and Francesca discuss direct object pronouns with compound tenses and the use of agreements with the past participle. We also hear a dialogue in which three friends, Mirko, Diego, and Daniela discuss the details of a party they are organising. If ... Read more

The post CBI 3.02 | Direct object pronouns with compound tenses | Pronti per la festa appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In the tenth and final episode of Coffee Break English Season 2, we meet Marcia, who takes us to Pig Beach in the Bahamas. We learn about the different uses of the verb get, and we focus on some phrasal verbs with get.

The post CBE 2.10 | Swimming with the pigs: Pig Beach | Language focus: how to use ‘get’ appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Today, we hear from Ryan in Canada, who tells us about a famous Canadian – Chris Hadfield. As we learn about his life and achievements, we also focus on the past simple and past continuous tenses.

The post CBE 2.09 | Canadian spaceman: Chris Hadfield | Languages focus: past tenses appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In this first episode of Coffee Break GermanSeason 3, Andrea and Mark review the German Perfect Tense. We’ll take a look back at how the Perfect Tense is formed, and then we’ll find out how some irregular verbs are conjugated in the tense. To put this grammar point into practice, we also listen to a ... Read more

The post CBG 3.01 | A Review of the Perfect Tense | Wir haben uns schon lange nicht mehr gesehen appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In this first episode of Coffee Break Italian Season 3, Francesca and Mark explain how Direct Object Pronouns work with simple verbs in the present tense. You’ll hear an explanation of the grammar point, then listen to a dialogue in which John, a Scottish student of Italian, is in Siena to improve his language skills. ... Read more

The post CBI 3.01 | Direct object pronouns – Una vacanza studio a Siena appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In this episode we’re back in the UK with Susan, who talks about fish and chips. As we discuss this classic British dish, we also focus on the pronunciation of verbs ending in ed.

The post CBE 2.08 | A classic British dish: Fish and Chips | Language focus: how to pronounce ‘ed’ verbs appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Welcome back to another episode of Coffee Break English! This time, we hear from Matthew in Australia. He tells us about a mystery on Pukapuka island, and we focus on using articles.

The post CBE 2.07 | What’s happening on Pukapuka Island? | Language focus: when to use ‘the’ and ‘a’ appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In Chapter 30 of La Vérité éclate toujours, James draws up a “Plan B” and Guillaume, Claire and Yvette all listen carefully as he talks them through it. The next day, James and Guillaume set off for their meeting with Roger Martin and realise there’s no turning back now. Join Mark and Pierre-Benoît as they ... Read more

The post Chapitre 30 – Il n’était donc plus question de faire demi-tour appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

This week we’re with Kate, in the USA. She talks about an important day in her country – Independence Day, and we learn some phrasal verbs with take.

The post CBE 2.06 | Celebrating freedom: US Independence Day | Language focus: phrasal verbs appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In this episode we’re in Scotland, and we’re talking about the Loch Ness Monster. Join Coffee Break English hosts Mark and Josie in this episode to find out about this mysterious creature. The language focus for this lesson is all about the verbs look, see and watch.

The post CBE 2.05 | Have you seen Nessie? The Loch Ness Monster | Language focus: ‘look’, ‘see’ and ‘watch’ appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In Chapter 29 of La Vérité éclate toujours, James and Guillaume return from their meeting at Martin Industries before receiving an invitation to meet Roger Martin himself. Join Mark and Pierre-Benoît in this dialogue chapter where we come across lots of colloquial words and expressions including griller quelqu’un and se gausser.

The post Chapitre 29 – Roger Martin était déjà dans le collimateur appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In this episode, we meet Steven from Ireland, and he tells us about an important Irish festival – St Patrick’s Day. While learning about this important day, we focus on using the present perfect with ‘for’ and ‘since’.

The post CBE 2.04 | Let’s celebrate! St Patrick’s Day | Language focus: the present perfect appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In this week’s episode of Coffee Break English, we’re in Australia with Matthew. He talks about Steve Irwin, the famous wildlife expert, and we learn about relative pronouns.

The post CBE 2.03 | Crikey! Steve Irwin | Language focus: ‘who’, ‘which’ and ‘where’ appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In the latest instalment of La Vérité éclate toujours, our crime drama series for advanced French learners, James and Guillaume get back into the characters of Managing Director and Finance Director of Munro Mining, and attend a meeting with Martin Industries’ legal team. By the time they leave, they are one step closer to meeting ... Read more

The post Chapitre 28 – Il n’aurait jamais dû jouer avec le feu ! appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In the latest episode of Coffee Break English, we meet Riaan from South Africa, who tells us all about Table Mountain. While discovering this natural landmark, we focus on dependent prepositions with verbs.

The post CBE 2.02 | Let’s go to South Africa: Table Mountain | Language focus: dependent prepositions appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Welcome to Season 2 of our Coffee Break English course! In this episode, we hear from Kate in the USA. She tells us the story behind the Statue of Liberty, one of New York’s most famous monuments. We also focus on the passive voice in the present simple and past simple.

The post CBE 2.01 | A symbol of friendship: The Statue of Liberty | Language focus: the passive voice appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In Chapter 27 of La Vérité éclate toujours, James, Guillaume, Yvette and Claire discuss the next stage in their plan: the meeting with Martin Industries’ legal team. Listen our for examples of the subjunctive and many interesting phrases such as: ce n’est pas donné à tout le monde and en venir à faire quelque chose.

The post Chapitre 27 – On se rapprochait du moment fatidique appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Welcome to the last episode of our mini culture series before we jump back into the main lessons! In this episode, we’re finally challenged to understand a text written entirely in Swedish. Apart from practicing our reading and listening comprehension, we’ll encounter a few new words, and take a deep dive into pronunciation. Låt oss ... Read more

The post Kulturhörnan 10 – ABBA på svenska – Coffee Break Swedish Culture appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

It’s time for Chapter 26 of La Vérité éclate toujours – our crime drama series for advanced learners of French! James puts himself back into the role of David Munro in a phone conversation with Céline Frappier, in order to move on to the next stage in their plan. In this dialogue chapter we hear ... Read more

The post Chapitre 26 – Il n’ya pas moyen de faire marche arrière… appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Welcome back to Kulturhörnan, our mini Swedish culture series. This time, we’re having a look at a common tradition which takes place in August in Sweden – crayfish parties! We’ll be looking at a text containing more Swedish than ever before to really test our understanding and see how much we know. We also introduce ... Read more

The post Kulturhörnan 09 – Kräftskiva – Coffee Break Swedish Culture appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In the latest instalment of La Vérité éclate toujours, James and Guillaume arrive at the headquarters of Martin Industries and meet one of Roger’s colleagues to discuss plans for Martin Industries and James’s fake company, to work together. As James and Guillaume leave, even the calm and collected Guillaume is left feeling shaken by what ... Read more

The post Chapitre 25 – Le tout fut bouclé ! appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In this week’s episode of Kulturhörnan, we’re looking at another Swedish summer tradition – en svensk sommartradition. We’re learning all about how summer and music go hand in hand in Sweden while putting our Swedish to the test like never before.

The post Kulturhörnan 08 – Allsång – Coffee Break Swedish Culture appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

James, Claire, Yvette and Guillaume prepare for the next stage of their plan in Chapter 24 of La Vérité éclate toujours, our crime series for advanced learners of French. Coffee Break French hosts Mark and Pierre-Benoît break down the language featured in this latest instalment and discuss a range of new vocabulary and expressions such ... Read more

The post Chapitre 24 – Il se sentait prêt et d’attaque appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In Episode 7 of our Swedish culture mini-series, Kulturhörnan – “culture corner” – we’re learning about writer Astrid Lingdgren, best known for her children’s book series featuring Pippi Longstocking. Join Mark and Lovisa as they share a text about this famous Swedish writer and introduce new phrases, revise some more familiar vocabulary, and mention some ... Read more

The post Kulturhörnan 07 – Pippi Långstrump – Coffee Break Swedish culture appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

James, Claire and Yvette discuss the details of their plan as they make their way back to Paris before taking the first step and finally getting in touch with Roger Martin. Some interesting expressions to listen out for in this chapter include: être à l’affût de quelque chose, mordre à l’hameçon and en guise de.

The post Chapitre 23 – Le poisson avait bien mordu à l’hameçon ! appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

We’re back with our Swedish culture mini-series, Kulturhörnan – “culture corner” – and in this episode we’re talking about Midsummer while putting our Swedish language skills into practice. Join the Coffee Break Swedish team and learn about the traditions behind this fun-filled annual celebration.

The post Kulturhörnan 06 – Midsommartraditioner – Coffee Break Swedish Culture appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Welcome to the tenth and final episode from Season 2 of the Coffee Break German Travel Diaries! For the final stop of our trip, we’re in Austria’s capital – Vienna – which offers many spectacular sights. The best part of the trip is still to come as Karl’s big surprise is finally revealed to Birgit! ... Read more

The post CBG Travel Diaries 2.10 | Der große Tag in Wien appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

We’ve reached the end of our Coffee Break Spanish Travel Diaries Season 2! Our last stop is the capital of Chile – Santiago – where there’s lots to see and do. We join Ainhoa, Luisa and Esteban as they round off their trip with a visit to some must-see attractions including Pablo Neruda’s house. After ... Read more

The post CBS Travel Diaries 2.10 | Santiago de Chile appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

This week Matthew tells us about a popular sport in Australia – surfing! He talks about the people who surf and the surfing lifestyle, and we learn some common English phrasal verbs.

The post CBE 1.10 | Let’s go surfing – Australia’s favourite sport and phrasal verbs appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

It’s time for the latest instalment of our crime drama series for advanced French learners! In this dialogue chapter we hear the voices of James, Claire and Yvette as they discuss their plan of action to get closer to Max’s attacker or attackers. Expect to hear lots of colloquial expressions and vocabulary, such as the ... Read more

The post Chapitre 22 – C’est la seule façon de m’infiltrer dans le milieu appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

It’s the penultimate episode of the Coffee Break German Travel Diaries Season 2! As the ship docks in Melk, a small Austrian town on the Danube, Karl and Birgit marvel at the Melk monastery after a relaxing breakfast before tucking into goulash later in the day. Back onboard, plans are all in place and Karl ... Read more

The post CBG Travel Diaires 2.09 | Köstliche Gerichte aus der Region appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In the penultimate episode of the series, Ainhoa, Luisa and Esteban arrive in Chile and make the most of the last few days of their trip visiting the coastal city of La Serena, tasting local specialities and visiting the peaceful Japanese Gardens. Discover what the city has to offer through Ainhoa’s diary entry and find out ... Read more

The post CBS Travel Diaries 2.09 | Entrada en Chile appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

This week Susan talks about the most popular drink in the UK – tea! She tells us about the history of tea in the UK, and some British tea traditions. We also focus on using the gerund and infinitive forms after certain verbs.

The post CBE 1.09 | It’s tea time – Britain’s favourite drink and gerund and infinitive forms appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

We’ve reached Lesson 30 of our Coffee Break Swedish course for beginners. This time, we’re putting our learning into practice with an identity quiz as we try to guess the identify of a mystery person described by Swedish teacher, Hanna. Join Mark and Hanna in this lesson and revise how to describe what someone looks ... Read more

The post CBSw 1.30 | Vem är jag? appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Welcome back to another episode of the Coffee Break German Travel Diaries Season 2! This time, we’re in Passau on the German-Austrian border – a romantic city on the Danube – surrounded by green hills and colourful houses. Karl manages to hide his nerves as well as a secret purchase while he and Birgit enjoy ... Read more

The post CBG Travel Diaries 2.08 | Ein Ruhetag in der Dreiflüssestadt appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In Episode 8 of the Coffee Break Spanish Travel Diaries Season 2, we’re in Sucre, the constitutional capital of Bolivia, also known as La ciudad blanca for its white buildings. Join Coffee Break Spanish hosts Mark and Marina as they explain some of the language used in this episode, including the useful phrases contar con ... Read more

The post CBS Travel Diaries 2.08 | Sucre: la ciudad blanca appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

This week Ryan talks about a popular Canadian sport, ice hockey! He tells us about his experiences playing hockey, and how it has helped to bring his family together. We also focus on the difference between the present perfect and the past simple for past actions.

The post CBE 1.08 | We won a match! – Ryan’s ice hockey experiences and the present perfect tense appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

We have reached Part 3 of our drama, La Vérité éclate toujours, for advanced learners of French. In each episode of the story, published fortnightly, we’ll be following a chapter of La Vérité éclate toujours, specially written to help you build your knowledge of French and extend your range of expression. In the episodes, teacher Mark and narrator Pierre-Benoît ... Read more

The post Chapitre 21 – Cela comportait de gros risques ! appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In this episode, Regensburg lives up to its name weather wise but the rain doesn’t stop Karl and Birgit from making the most of their day trip as they explore museums and churches before heading to the magnificent Thurn und Taxis Castle. Karl finally shares details of his big surprise – Das Geheimnis ist gelüftet! ... Read more

The post CBG Travel Diaries 2.07 | Ein Regentag in Regensburg appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Ainhoa, Luisa and Esteban have arrived in Cochabamba, the gastronomic capital of Bolivia! The trio are kept busy with lots of sightseeing as they visit the Plaza 14 de Septiembre and the Paseo de la Independencia. Join Mark and Marina as they discuss the language featured in this episode and listen out for the use ... Read more

The post CBS Travel Diaries 2.07 | Comida en Cochabamba appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

This week Catriona tells us about a traditional Scottish dish – haggis! We learn all about its ingredients and history, and why some people don’t like it. We also focus on talking about past events using the present perfect tense.

The post CBE 1.07 | Have you eaten haggis? – A traditional Scottish dish and the present perfect tense appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In this lesson, we learn how to make a phone call in Swedish and take a look at what a conversation over the phone may look like in three different scenarios. How do you call to ask for someone? What do you say if you realise you’ve dialled the wrong number? How do you make ... Read more

The post CBSw 1.29 | Kan jag få prata med Per? appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

It’s time to discover a brand new city in Episode 6 of the Coffee Break German Travel Diaries, Season 2. This time, we’re joining Karl and Birgit in Nuremberg! The couple’s newfound friends join them as they sample some local beer while avoiding the rain after their bus tour and castle visit – all before ... Read more

The post CBG Travel Diaries 2.06 | Von der Kaiserburg sieht man die ganze Stadt! appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

We’re joining Ainhoa, Luisa and Esteban in La Paz for Episode 6 of the Coffee Break Spanish Travel Diaries Season 2. While exploring the city and tasting local cuisine, hosts Mark and Marina delve into the language featured in this week’s diary entry and discuss the preterite continuous tense. Our premium version includes lesson notes ... Read more

The post CBS Travel Diaries 2.06 | La Paz appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

This week Kate tells us all about a famous place in the USA – the Grand Canyon! We learn lots of information about this beautiful place, and we hear some rules and advice for visiting, using the modal verbs ‘must’, ‘mustn’t’, ‘should’ and ‘shouldn’t’.

The post CBE 1.06 | You should visit the Grand Canyon – A famous American landmark and modal verbs appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Welcome back to Season 2 of the Coffee Break German Travel Diaries! We’re halfway through our virtual trip and this time, we’re joining Karl and Birgit at a UNESCO World Heritage Site. Discover the spectacular architecture and half-timbered houses in Bamberg and enjoy a trip on the river in a different kind of boat – ... Read more

The post CBG Travel Diaries 2.05 | Mittelalterliches Flair appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

It’s finally May and you know what that means… The Eurovision Song Contest is here! The most eccentric singing competition returns to our screens and the Coffee Break Languages team could not be more excited. If you’re subscribed to our YouTube channel, you’ll know that music and languages are our greatest passions and Eurovision combines ... Read more

The post A Multilingual Eurovision Roundup appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In this episode of the Coffee Break Spanish Travel Diaries Season 2, we join Ainhoa, Luisa and Esteban on the next stop of their trip – Lago Titicaca, one of South America’s largest lakes. As the trio explore Taquile Island, our hosts, Mark and Marina, delve into the language used in Ainhoa’s diary entry, pointing ... Read more

The post CBS Travel Diaries 2.05 | Titicaca y las islas flotantes appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Welcome back to Coffee Break English! In this episode, Matthew tells us all about an animal from his country – the kangaroo! We learn lots of interesting facts about this famous Australian animal, and we learn when to use the quantifiers ‘a lot of’, ‘much’, and ‘many’.

The post CBE 1.05 | How many kangaroos? – Australia’s national animal and quantifiers appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In this lesson of Coffee Break Swedish we’re covering the topic of work. Join our Swedish language expert, Hanna as she teaches learner Mark how to ask someone about their job and how to use the two verbs for ‘to work’ in Swedish.

The post CBSw 1.28 | Vad jobbar du med? appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In the latest instalment of the Coffee Break German Travel Diaries Season 2, we discover another river – the Main – and a new romantic setting in the cobbled streets of Würzburg in Bavaria. The couple discover what the city has to offer and Karl’s plan takes shape after a trip to the wine cellar. ... Read more

The post CBG Travel Diaries 2.04 | Romantische Gassen mit Pflasterstein appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

It’s time for another episode of the Coffee Break Spanish Travel Diaries, Season 2! After a long journey, Ainhoa, Luisa and Esteban finally make it to Machu Picchu and take in the breathtaking scenery around them. As always, our hosts Mark and Marina are on hand to break down the language featured in Ainhoa’s latest diary ... Read more

The post CBS Travel Diaries 2.04 | Viaje a Machu Picchu appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

This week, Kate tells us all about what life is like in Colorado Springs, in the USA. Throughout the lesson we learn lots of vocabulary related to cities, and we look at how to form and use adverbs of manner.

The post CBE 1.04 | What’s your city like? – Colorado Springs and adverbs of manner appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In the latest episode from Season 2 of the Coffee Break German Travel Diaries, Karl and Birgit are waking up in Koblenz, a beautiful city in Rhineland-Palatinate. The couple join their new friends on a cable car trip, high above the Rhine, to The Ehrenbreitstein Fortress before rounding off the day with dinner on deck. ... Read more

The post CBG Travel Diaries 2.03 | Ausblick am Deutschen Eck appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Welcome back to another episode from Season 2 of the Coffee Break Spanish Travel Diaries! This time, we’re visiting Sacsayhuamán for a guided tour to learn about the Incas before heading back to the city centre of Cuzco for more sightseeing, souvenir shopping and beer tasting. Join Mark and Marina as they discuss the interesting ... Read more

The post CBS Travel Diaries 2.03 | Sacsayhuamán appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In episode 3 we’re talking about music. In fact, we’re talking about one of the most famous bands in history: the Beatles.

The post CBE 1.03 | Beatlemania – The Beatles and the past simple tense appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In Lesson 27 of Coffee Break Swedish, we’re learning the alphabet! Join native Swedish speaker Hanna as she teaches learner Mark how to pronounce every letter of the Swedish alphabet confidently and correctly. By the end of this lesson you’ll be able to spell in Swedish and answer the question: Hur stavas det?

The post CBSw 1.27 | Hur stavas det? appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

We’re back with the second episode of the Coffee Break German Travel Diaries, Season 2. This time, Karl and Birgit see the sites of Cologne and enjoy a view of the city from a modern high-rise building – Ein Blick aus der Höhe! Join hosts Mark and Andrea in this episode and learn some useful ... Read more

The post CBG Travel Diaries 2.02 | Da würde ich so gerne hoch! appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In this second episode from Season 2 of the Coffee Break Spanish Travel Diaries, we’re discovering what the city of Cuzco has to offer. We visit the famous piedra de 12 ángulos before stopping off at the Mercado de San Pedro for a food tour. Along the way, we hear many interesting grammar points, including ... Read more

The post CBS Travel Diaries 2.02 | Curiosidades en Cuzco appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

This week Kate tells us about which films she likes, and doesn’t like! We learn lots of vocabulary related to films, and we practice using the past simple tense of the verb ‘be’.

The post CBE 1.02 | That film was scary! Talking about films in the past tense appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

¿Vemos una peli? Choosing a film to watch in the language you’re learning can be quite an overwhelming task. Certain foreign-language films may not be as well-known in your country as English-language films, so it’s often hard to know where to even start your search. To help you narrow down your list, we’ve come up ... Read more

The post 5 Films for Spanish Learners appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Films are an important language-learning tool: they present us with alternative points of view from which to admire stories set in other countries. Watching a film means immersing yourself in a different language and culture without having to take a plane, from the comfort of your own sofa. It can be challenging at times but, ... Read more

The post 5 Films for Italian Learners appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Welcome to Season 2 of the Coffee Break German Travel Diaries! This time, we’re joining Karl, Birgit and friends as they take a river cruise from Amsterdam to Budapest, through Germany and Austria to celebrate their 50th wedding anniversary. Throughout the journey, they’ll sail on 3 rivers through 4 countries and see many cities while ... Read more

The post CBG Travel Diaries 2.01 | Das beste Geschenk, dass man sich wünschen kann appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

We’re back with a second season of the Coffee Break Spanish Travel Diaries for intermediate learners of Spanish. Throughout this 10-episode series, we join Ainhoa, her friend Luisa and her brother Esteban from Spain as they travel through western South America on an adventure after finishing college. In the very first episode of the series, ... Read more

The post CBS Travel Diaries 2.01 | Llegada a Lima appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Welcome to our new series which will help you improve your English. Episode 1 of Coffee Break English is about holidays, and our correspondent Catriona is on holiday in Italy. She compares Italy with her home town of Manchester in the UK. Join Coffee Break English teachers Josie and Mark who will help you understand ... Read more

The post CBE 1.01 | Rain in England, sun in Italy – Catriona’s holiday and the present tenses appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Welcome back to another lesson of Coffee Break Swedish! This time, Hanna and Mark are taking a dive into some more technical aspects of the Swedish language and look at how to ask the question “why” using the word varför. We also explore the different ways in which the word order can change when we ... Read more

The post CBSw 1.26 | Varför lär du dig svenska? appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

It’s the 10th and final episode of the Coffee Break Italian Travel Diaries Season 2 and Simone and Anna are rounding off their trip with a visit to the city of Trento before enjoying one last traditional lunch with canederli, polenta, cheese, apple pie and bombardino. In between the food-related vocabulary featured in our final travel ... Read more

The post CBI Travel Diaries 2.10 | Grazie di tutto, Trentino-Alto Adige! appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In the 10th and final episode from Season 2 of the Coffee Break French Travel Diaries, Charlotte, Théo and Lucas savour their last day in France before travelling back to Geneva. Join Mark and Pierre-Benoît for one last time as they discuss the interesting language points included in Charlotte’s final travel diary entry. We cover ... Read more

The post CBF Travel Diaries 2.10 | Tours-Paris-Genève appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In the penultimate episode of the series, Simone and Anna are on the move again as they are hiking up Marmolada – the highest mountain of the Dolomites. Mark and Francesca pick up on many interesting grammar points along the way and discuss: dopo + past infinitive, stare + gerund, and the pronoun ci, both ... Read more

The post CBI Travel Diaries 2.09 | Tempesta sulla Marmolada appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

It’s time for the next instalment of the Coffee Break French Travel Diaries Season 2! University friends Charlotte, Théo and Lucas make the most of their time in the Loire Valley with a visit to the impressive Château de Chambord and Château de Villandry before a bike ride along the Loire River – the longest ... Read more

The post CBF Travel Diaries 2.09 | Comme des rois appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Welcome back to another lesson of Coffee Break Swedish with teacher Hanna and learner Mark. In Lesson 25 we learn to talk about likes and dislikes so that we can discuss our favourite hobbies with our Swedish speaking friends. By the end of the lesson you will be able to express what you like doing ... Read more

The post CBSw 1.25 | Jag tycker om kaffe appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In the latest episode of the Coffee Break Italian Travel Diaries Season 2, Simone and Anna are in Cortina, one of the most popular ski destinations in the Dolomites, where they enjoy a trip to the spa. Join Mark and Francesca as they discuss the language featured in this episode, from relative pronouns and indirect ... Read more

The post CBI Travel Diaries 2.08 | Il meritato riposo a Cortina d’Ampezzo appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Welcome to another episode from Season 2 of the Coffee Break French Travel Diaries! This time, Charlotte, Théo and Lucas are back on the road as they’re en route to Tours. On arrival they explore what the university town has to offer and sample some local dishes including the famous rillettes de Tours. Listen out ... Read more

The post CBF Travel Diaries 2.08 | Lèche-vitrine à Tours appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

It’s time for Chapter 20 of La Vérité éclate toujours where we join James, Claire and Yvette as they drive to the university where Claire searches for information which she used for her research on la Namérie and its natural resources, while doing her doctorate. Their trip leads them to a valuable discovery which takes them one step ... Read more

The post Chapitre 20 – Un autre morceau du puzzle venait d’être trouvé appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Welcome back to Season 2 the Coffee Break Italian Travel Diaries! Having spent the night in the mountain retreat, Simone and Anna make their way down from the Le Tre Cime and encounter a deer on their way. Throughout Simone’s diary entry, we hear a range of useful verbs including affrontare and scivolare, as well ... Read more

The post CBI Travel Diaries 2.07 | Un trekking intenso verso valle appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In Episode 7 of the Coffee Break French Travel Diaries Season 2, Charlotte, Théo and Lucas reach one of the most popular tourist attractions in France, the Mont Saint-Michel. As they set off to explore the magical island, Théo and Lucas reveal a surprise for Charlotte. Can you guess what it could be? Listen to ... Read more

The post CBF Travel Diaries 2.07 | Retour aux sources appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In Lesson 24 of Coffee Break Swedish, we’re moving on to a brand new topic as we’re talking about descriptions so we can describe how people look. This topic gives teacher Hanna the perfect opportunity to teach learner Mark about adjective agreements in Swedish. We also learn some key vocabulary for items of clothing. Don’t ... Read more

The post CBSw 1.24 | Hur ser han ut? appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In Episode 6 from Season 2 of the Coffee Break Italian Travel Diaries, Simone and Anna finally make it to the Tre Cime di Lavaredo and make the most of the view before having lunch in a mountain retreat while enjoying a bombardino. There’s much more food-related vocabulary in this episode as well as some ... Read more

The post CBI Travel Diaries 2.06 | Tre Cime di Lavaredo – Finalmente in vetta! appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

It’s time for another episode from Season 2 of the Coffee Break French Travel Diaries! Charlotte, Théo and Lucas spend their final day in Normandy visiting the Abbaye aux Hommes before wandering around the around streets of the city centre, stopping to sample some Norman specialities along the way. Mark and Pierre Benoît take note of ... Read more

The post CBF Travel Diaries 2.06 | Une journée typiquement normande appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In the latest episode of La Vérité éclate toujours, Yvette, James and Claire put their heads together as they try to make sense of their latest finding. As they attempt to piece elements of the story together, James wonders what the future has in store for them. Amongst the details revealed in this Chapter, we ... Read more

The post Chapitre 19 – Un silence de mort régnait dans la pièce appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

We’re halfway through our trip to the mountains in northern Italy, and this time, we join Anna and Simone for some ice skating on Lago di Dobbiaco after an unexpected detour changes their plan for the day. All’idea di, tanto che and per sicurezza are just some of the useful phrases which Mark and Francesca discuss ... Read more

The post CBI Travel Diaries 2.05 | Un imprevisto al lago di Dobbiaco appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Welcome back to Season 2 of the Coffee Break French Travel Diaries! In Episode 5, Charlotte, Théo and Lucas have an emotional day at the Normandy landing beaches. While listening to the details of their trip from Charlotte’s diary entry, pay attention to the use of the word dont and the conjugation of accueillir in ... Read more

The post CBF Travel Diaries 2.05 | Hommage aux plages appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Welcome back to another lesson of Coffee Break Swedish! We’re taking the topic of health a step further this week as Hanna and Mark equip us with everything we need to know for a trip to the doctor or pharmacy in a Swedish-speaking area. In doing so, we learn more about the tricky topic of ... Read more

The post CBSw 1.23 | Jag behöver värktabletter appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

We’re back with another episode from Season 2 of the Coffee Break Italian Travel Diaries! This time, Simone and Anna are visiting the village of Ortisei where they go sledging and enjoy a traditional dinner with canederli. Listen out for a range of adjectives mentioned in this diary entry, including accogliente, fiabesco and innevato. As always, Coffee ... Read more

The post CBI Travel Diaries 2.04 | Un villaggio da favola: Ortisei appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Join us for the next instalment from Season 2 of the Coffee Break French Travel Diaries in which we follow the adventures of university friends, Charlotte, Théo and Lucas, as they explore historical locations in northwestern France. In this episode, the trio have an early rise for a day of fishing before heading back on ... Read more

The post CBF Travel Diaries 2.04 | Atelier de pêche appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

¡Bienvenido a Coffee Break English! En este episodio, aprenderemos a hablar del tiempo metereológico y a usar el presente continuo. ¡Únete a Mark y Maria y aprende vocabulario nuevo!

The post CBE 1.20 | The weather appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

It’s time for another Chapter of La Vérité éclate toujours, our crime drama for advanced learners of French. In Chapter 18, James, Yvette and Claire are in shock having just opened the box to reveal diamonds and they are trying to figure out how they fit into what they know so far. James and Claire spend ... Read more

The post Chapitre 18 – Elle avait très, très peur pour eux tous appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

It’s time for another episode of the Coffee Break Italian Travel Diaries, and this time, Simone and Anna head to Bolzano, the capital of Italy’s northernmost region of South Tyrol. Here, they explore the market and taste polenta for the first time, before taking the cable car to the mountains to enjoy the view of ... Read more

The post CBI Travel Diaries 2.03 | Terza tappa: la fredda Bolzano appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

We’re back with another episode from Season 2 of the Coffee Break French Travel Diaries. After a delicious breakfast at their BnB, Charlotte, Théo and Lucas visit the Musée des Beaux-Arts before getting back in the car and heading to the enchanting city of Honfleur. In this week’s travel diary entry, we hear some indirect object ... Read more

The post CBF Travel Diaries 2.03 | Impressionnisme et impressionnés appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

¡Bienvenido a Coffee Break English! En este episodio, Susan de Londres nos hablará del desayuno inglés tradicional. Mark y Maria nos enseñarán vocabulario de la comida y nos enseñarán a usar some y any. ¡Únete a ellos!

The post CBE 1.19 | Breakfast time! appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In Lesson 22 of Coffee Break Swedish, we explore the words used for different body parts and learn how to describe any aches or pains we may feel in those body parts so that we can cope with a trip to the doctor or pharmacy. As health issues are at the forefront of everyone’s mind ... Read more

The post CBSw 1.22 | Jag har ont i huvudet appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Welcome back to another episode of the Coffee Break Italian Travel Diaries. This week, Simone and Anna are taking a break from skiing to visit the medieval castle above the town of Thun where they have a frightful encounter with a ghost! Listen out for the useful grammar points which Mark and Francesca discuss in ... Read more

The post CBI Travel Diaries 2.02 | Il fantasma di Castel Thun appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

It’s time for the second episode in Season 2 of our virtual travel series, the Coffee Break French Travel Diaries. Charlotte, Théo and Lucas make their way to Rouen, the historic capital of Normandy, and begin to discover everything the Medieval city has to offer. In this episode, we encounter some interesting expressions such as ... Read more

The post CBF Travel Diaries 2.02 | Voyage dans le temps à Rouen appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

¡Hola y bienvenido a Coffee Break English! En este episodio, escucharemos a dos amigos hablando de su tiempo libre. Únete a Mark y Maria para aprender a usar verbos como ‘like’ y ‘hate’, y a usar ‘can’. También aprenderás vocabulario útil para hablar de tus aficiones.

The post CBE 1.18 | My hobbies appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In the latest instalment of La Vérité éclate toujours, we hear a dialogue between James, Yvette, Claire and a brand new character. James, Yvette and Claire take some time to calm down after their narrow escape at the bank before planning their next move and making their way to Geneva. After getting settled in a safe location, ... Read more

The post Chapitre 17 – On ne sait pas à qui on a affaire … appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Welcome to Season 2 of the Coffee Break Italian Travel Diaries for intermediate learners. In this 10-episode series, we follow the adventures of Simone and his wife Anna as they enjoy una settimana bianca (a white week of winter activities) in the Trentino-Alto Adige region. In Episode 1, Simone and Anna make the most of their ... Read more

The post CBI Travel Diaries 2.01 | Madonna di Campiglio: finalmente in vacanza! appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Welcome to Season 2 of our Coffee Break French Travel Diaries! This time, we’re following the adventures of Swiss student Charlotte and her friends Lucas and Théo as they take a trip through historic locations in northwestern France. In each episode, teachers Mark and Pierre-Benoît discuss Charlotte’s travel diary and look at interesting vocabulary and ... Read more

The post CBF Travel Diaries 2.01 | Paris: un jour, une nuit appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

¡Bienvenidos a Coffee Break English! Únete a Mark y Maria para aprender vocabulario útil para describir tu casa. En esta ocasión, Isabel de Edimburgo nos hablará de su casa. ¡También aprenderemos a usar there is y there are en inglés!

The post CBE 1.17 | My house appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Hanna and Mark back after our short break and in this week’s lesson we are covering a topic which everyone loves talking about – the weather! Hanna teaches us how to describe the weather in Swedish, both in the present tense and in the future tense. We also get to look at some sentences describing ... Read more

The post CBSw 1.21 | Vad är det för väder? appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

¡Hola a todos y bienvenidos a otro episodio de Coffee Break English! En este episodio, escucharemos a Ryan, de Canadá, que habla de su gran familia. Únete a Mark y Maria para aprender a usar los determinantes posesivos en inglés, y para aprender más vocabulario útil para describir los miembros de la familia.

The post CBE 1.16 | My family appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

We’re back with a brand new episode of La Vérité éclate toujours! As James, Yvette and Claire arrive in Zurich, Claire suggests they visit the bank in an attempt to look for clues in her ex-husband’s safety-deposit box. Everything is going smoothly as Claire succeeds in accessing the box, when all of a sudden she ... Read more

The post Chapitre 16 – On a eu chaud ! appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Hello and welcome to our latest episode of Coffee Break English! En esta ocasión, escucharemos a dos personas hablar de su trabajo. Aprenderemos vocabulario relacionado con el trabajo, y para aprender a usar el presente simple en preguntas.

The post CBE 1.15 | I like my job appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

It’s the fifth and final episode of Kulturhörnan – “culture corner”, and we’re rounding off the series by welcoming a special guest, Irena Dahl, who is an ambassador for the Sami language and culture. In the episode Irena teaches Mark some Northern Sami and explains more about this fascinating culture. We also learn some new ... Read more

The post Kulturhörnan 05 – Samisk kultur i Sverige – Coffee Break Swedish Culture appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Hello and welcome to the latest episode of Coffee Break English! En esta lección, aprendemos a hablar de un día típico en inglés. Aprenderemos vocabulario para describir actividades diarias, y escucharemos muchos ejemplos del presente simple en las formas afirmativa y negativa. También aprenderemos a decir la hora.

The post CBE 1.14 | A typical day appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

We’re back with another episode of our mini Swedish culture series, Kulturhörnan – “culture corner”, and this time we’re learning about one of the most influential Swedes, Alfred Nobel. Join Mark and Lovisa as they discuss his life and work, as well as some nyårslöften (New Year’s Resolutions).

The post Kulturhörnan 04 – Nobelpriset – Coffee Break Swedish Culture appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In the latest episode of our advanced course for French learners, La Vérité éclate toujours, James, Yvette and Claire are on the move as they’re en route to Zurich to follow the only lead in their investigation so far. While James has so many unanswered questions spinning around his head throughout the journey, Claire provides further details ... Read more

The post Chapitre 15 – Toutes ces questions s’accélérènt dans sa tête appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

James, Yvette and Claire are in disbelief as they discover the name of Claire’s ex-husband in one of the documents on Max’s USB stick. In an attempt to figure out how everything could be connected, they further examine the contents of the document, and make another discovery that leads them to the next stage of ... Read more

The post Chapitre 14 – C’est la seule piste que nous ayons ! appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

While 2020 has probably not been the year we expected or planned, there has been one thing which many of us have had to do over the past 12 months more than ever before: we’ve adapted. Simple things like communicating with the people closest to us have become more complicated, and many of you have ... Read more

The post A year of language learning appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In the latest episode of our our mini Swedish culture series, Kulturhörnan – “culture corner”, we learn about a typical Swedish Christmas celebration, ett svenskt julfirande. Join Mark and Lovisa as they talk about they type of food which is normally eaten and the gifts that are exchanged during this celebration.

The post Kulturhörnan 03 – Julafton – Coffee Break Swedish Culture appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Having got to know each other a littler better, James, Claire and Yvette turn their attention to the investigation at hand. After a restless night’s sleep, they begin to examine the files on the USB stick. Claire is shocked to see a name on the first file they open. As ever, the episode is full ... Read more

The post Chapitre 13 – James cliqua sur le premier fichier appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Hello everyone and welcome to a new episode of Coffee Break English! En este episodio, escuchamos a dos amigos que juegan a ¿Quién soy? Aprendemos muchos adjetivos para describir la apariencia, y vemos el verbo tener en presente simple.

The post CBE 1.13 | Who am I? appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Our normal Coffee Break Swedish lessons will return in the new year, but in the meantime it’s the perfect time to find out a little more about Swedish culture with our mini-series, Kulturhörnan – “culture corner”. In this episode, Lovisa tells us about a very popular tradition that takes place on 13th December all across ... Read more

The post Kulturhörnan 02 – Lucia – Coffee Break Swedish Culture appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In this episode of Coffee Break Italian To Go, Francesca asks the question, qual è la tua città italiana preferita? (What is your favourite Italian city?). You can use the answers of our interviewees to help you answer this question in Italian. Listen to the full audio podcast below: In the first part of the video, ... Read more

The post CBI To Go 2.10 | Qual è la tua città italiana preferita? – What is your favourite Italian city? appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In this episode of Coffee Break French To Go, Pierre-Benoît asks the question, quelle est ta ville française préférée ? (What is your favourite French city?). You can use the answers of our interviewees to help you answer this question in French. Access the podcast version below in which Mark is back in the studio ... Read more

The post CBF To Go 2.10 | Quelle est ta ville française préférée ? – What is your favourite French city? appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

¡Bienvenido a otro episodio de Coffee Break English! Únete al profesor Mark y a la estudiante María, quien es una principiante, y aprende inglés con ellos en este nuevo curso. ¡Solo necesitarás una pausa para el café!

The post CBE 1.12 | Matthew’s family appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Our normal Coffee Break Swedish lessons will return in the new year, but in the meantime it’s the perfect time to find out a little more about Swedish culture with our mini-series, Kulturhörnan – “culture corner”. In this episode Lovisa tells Mark about the tradition of placing an Adventsljsstake in your window in the run-up ... Read more

The post Kulturhörnan 01 – Aventsljusstaken – Coffee Break Swedish Culture appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In the latest episode of La Vérité éclate toujours, Claire tells her story to James. She explains her past relationship with Max and the series of events which have led to her bringing up Yvette on her own. In this episode we’ll see some really interesting adjectives which describe certain people in Claire’s life including ... Read more

The post Chapitre 12 – Claire soupira et commença à parler appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In this episode of Coffee Break Italian To Go, Francesca asks the question, qual è la cosa più strana che hai mai mangiato? (What is the strangest thing you have ever eaten?). You can use the answers of our interviewees to help you answer this question in Italian. Listen to the full audio podcast below: In ... Read more

The post CBI To Go 2.09 | Qual è la cosa più strana che hai mai mangiato? – What is the strangest thing you have ever eaten? appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In this episode of Coffee Break French To Go, Pierre-Benoît asks the question, as-tu déjà mangé quelque chose de bizarre ? (Have you ever eaten anything strange?). You can use the answers of our interviewees to help you answer this question in French. Access the podcast version below in which Mark is back in the ... Read more

The post CBF To Go 2.09 | As-tu déjà mangé quelque chose de bizarre ? – Have you ever eaten anything strange? appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

¡Estamos de vuelta con otra lección de Coffee Break English! En este episodio, escuchamos un diálogo entre dos personas y a través de la lección aprenderás los días de la semana y el abecedario en inglés.

The post CBE 1.11 | Days of the week and the Alphabet appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In this episode of Coffee Break Italian To Go, Francesca asks the question, se potessi andare in qualsiasi posto del mondo, dove andresti? (If you could go anywhere in the world, where would you go?). You can use the answers of our interviewees to help you answer this question in Italian. Access the podcast version ... Read more

The post CBI To Go 2.08 | Se potessi andare in qualsiasi posto del mondo, dove andresti? – If you could go anywhere in the world, where would you go? appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In this episode of Coffee Break French To Go, Pierre-Benoît asks the question, quelle serait ta destination idéale ? (What would your ideal destination be?). You can use the answers of our interviewees to help you answer this question in French. Access the podcast version below in which Mark is back in the studio helping you ... Read more

The post CBF To Go 2.08 | Quelle serait ta destination idéale ? – What would your ideal destination be? appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

We have reached the first chapter in Part 2 of our drama, La Vérité éclate toujours, for advanced learners of French. So far, in Part 1, we have learned that James is on a mission to find out what happened to his best friend Max who is in a critical condition in hospital. Upon meeting Max’s daughter Yvette, he ... Read more

The post Chapitre 11 – Ils avaient les nerfs à fleur de peau appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In this episode of Coffee Break Italian To Go, Francesca asks the question, cosa ti fa arrabbiare? (What makes you angry?). You can use the answers of our interviewees to help you answer this question in Italian. Access the podcast version below in which Mark is back in the studio helping you understand all the responses. ... Read more

The post CBI To Go 2.07 | Cosa ti fa arrabbiare? – What makes you angry? appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In this episode of Coffee Break French To Go, Pierre-Benoît asks the question, qu’est-ce qui t’embête le plus ? (What annoys you the most?). You can use the answers of our interviewees to help you answer this question in French. Access the podcast version below in which Mark is back in the studio helping you ... Read more

The post CBF To Go 2.07 | Qu’est-ce qui t’embête le plus ? – What annoys you the most? appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In this special episode marking the end of the first half of our Coffee Break Swedish course for beginners, we’re putting everything we’ve learned so far to the test with teacher Hanna and learner Mark. We’re also joined by native speaker Lovisa who features in an extended conversation with Hanna. Listen to the episode to ... Read more

The post CBSw 1.20 | Får jag fråga en sak? appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In this episode of Coffee Break Italian To Go, Francesca asks the question, preferisci l’estate o l’inverno? (Do you prefer summer or winter?). You can use the answers of our interviewees to help you answer this question in Italian. Access the podcast version below in which Mark is back in the studio helping you understand all ... Read more

The post CBI To Go 2.06 | Preferisci l’estate o l’inverno? – Do you prefer summer or winter? appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In this episode of Coffee Break French To Go, Pierre-Benoît asks the question, préféres-tu l’été ou l’hiver ? (Do you prefer summer or winter?). You can use the answers of our interviewees to help you answer this question in French. Access the podcast version below in which Mark is back in the studio helping you ... Read more

The post CBF To Go 2.06 | Préféres-tu l’été ou l’hiver ? – Do you prefer summer or winter? appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In this episode of Coffee Break Italian To Go, Francesca asks the question, pensi che sia importante studiare le lingue straniere? (Do you think that studying foreign languages is important?). You can use the answers of our interviewees to help you answer this question in Italian. Access the podcast version below in which Mark is ... Read more

The post CBI To Go 2.05 | Pensi che sia importante studiare le lingue straniere? – Do you think that studying foreign languages is important? appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In this episode of Coffee Break French To Go, Pierre-Benoît asks the question, pour toi, est-il important d’apprendre une langue étrangère ? (Is learning a foreign language important to you?). You can use the answers of our interviewees to help you answer this question in French. Access the podcast version below in which Mark is ... Read more

The post CBF To Go 2.05 | Pour toi, est-il important d’apprendre une langue étrangère ? – Is learning a foreign language important to you? appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Do you know how to tell the time in Swedish? We’re covering this very important topic in Episode 19 of Coffee Break Swedish. Native speaker Hanna teaches learner Mark how to talk about different times of the day and breaks down various ways of expressing the time in Swedish. Be sure to revise your numbers ... Read more

The post CBSw 1.19 | Hur mycket är klockan? appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In this episode of Coffee Break Italian To Go, Francesca asks the question, cos’hai fatto ieri? (What did you do yesterday?). You can use the answers of our interviewees to help you answer this question in Italian. Access the podcast version below in which Mark is back in the studio helping you understand all the responses. ... Read more

The post CBI To Go 2.04 | Cos’hai fatto ieri? – What did you do yesterday? appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Join us in the final episode for this series of the Coffee Break German Travel Diaries. Karin and her family are back in the camper van, driving the last few kilometres of their memorable 450km trip. As they make it to their last stop in Lindau, Karin reflects on the time she has spent travelling ... Read more

The post Abschluss am Bodensee – Coffee Break German Travel Diaries Episode 10 appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

We have reached the 10th and final episode in this series of the Coffee Break Spanish Travel Diaries. We hope that you’ve enjoyed discovering some beautiful locations in the north of Spain from the comfort of your own home. Join Victoria and Abel for the final instalment of the series, as they arrive at the ... Read more

The post Última parada – Coffee Break Spanish Travel Diaries Episode 10 appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In this episode of Coffee Break French To Go, Pierre-Benoît asks the question, qu’as-tu fait hier ? (What did you do yesterday?). You can use the answers of our interviewees to help you answer this question in French. In the first part of the video, watch the interviews without subtitles and try to understand. Access ... Read more

The post CBF To Go 2.04 | Qu’as-tu fait hier ? – What did you do yesterday? appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In this episode of Coffee Break Italian To Go, Francesca asks the question, qual è la tua parola italiana preferita? (What is your favourite Italian word?). You can use the answers of our interviewees to help you answer this question in Italian. In the first part of the video, watch the interviews without subtitles and try ... Read more

The post CBI To Go 2.03 | Qual è la tua parola italiana preferita? – What is your favourite Italian word? appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Welcome back to the Coffee Break German Travel Diaries, our 10-episode series in which we’re following Karin and her family as they travel through the Alpenstraße with their camper van. This leg of the family’s trip brings them to Neuschwanstein, a fairy tale castle atop a steep hill and a picture perfect setting for this ... Read more

The post Märchenhafte Schlösser – Coffee Break German Travel Diaries Episode 9 appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In this episode of Coffee Break French To Go, Pierre-Benoît asks the question, quel est ton mot français préféré ? (What is your favourite French word?). You can use the answers of our interviewees to help you answer this question in French. Access the podcast version below in which Mark is back in the studio ... Read more

The post CBF To Go 2.03 | Quel est ton mot français préféré ? What is your favourite French word? appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

After their car troubles, Victoria and Abel have to make the decision to spend more time in Lugo than planned, seeing the symbolic sights of the city, like the impressive Muralla Romana and La Cárcel Antigua – an ancient prison. They round off their visit by enjoying some pulpo a la gallega (Galician octopus). As Mark ... Read more

The post Llegada a Lugo – Coffee Break Spanish Travel Diaries Episode 9 appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Join teacher Hanna and leaner Mark in the latest episode of Coffee Break Swedish for beginners. Last time we spoke about getting around the town, and in this lesson we’re continuing with the theme of transport as we’re learning more about travelling by tåg (train). By the end of the lesson you’ll know all of ... Read more

The post CBSw 1.18 | Tåget avgår kl 18:23 appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Coffee Break Spanish was launched on 18th October 2006 so we’re celebrating our 14th birthday today, and we’ve marked the day with a live broadcast updating the Coffee Break Community with our latest podcasts, video courses and live lessons. We’ve published the schedule for our live lessons from October until December 2020. Click on the ... Read more

The post Live Lessons Update – and celebrating our 14th birthday appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In Episode 8 of the Coffee Break German Travel Diaries, Karin and the family enjoy a lazy start to the day after the excitement of the Zugspitze. We join them for a damp, but calm walk in the lush, green forest under the Baumkronen. As always, Coffee Break German hosts Mark and Andrea will be ... Read more

The post Ein regnerischer Waldspaziergang – Coffee Break German Travel Diaries Episode 8 appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In this episode of Coffee Break Italian To Go, Francesca asks the question, com’è la tua giornata tipica? (What is your daily routine?). You can use the answers of our interviewees to help you answer this question in Italian. Access the podcast version below in which Mark is back in the studio helping you understand ... Read more

The post CBI To Go 2.02 | Com’è la tua giornata tipica? – What is your daily routine? appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Join us for the latest episode of the Coffee Break Spanish Travel Diaries podcast in which our protagonists, Victoria and Abel, set off for the city of Lugo, via the beautiful parish of Covadonga. All is going well until disaster strikes for the couple after⁠ their car gets a puncture and they are left stranded ... Read more

The post Cambio de planes – Coffee Break Spanish Travel Diaries Episode 8 appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In this episode of Coffee Break French To Go, Pierre-Benoît asks the question, c’est quoi une journée typique pour toi ? (What is a typical day for you?). You can use the answers of our interviewees to help you answer this question in French. Access the podcast version below in which Mark is back in the ... Read more

The post CBF To Go 2.02 | C’est quoi une journée typique pour toi ? What is a typical day for you? appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In this episode of Coffee Break Italian To Go, Francesca asks the question, per te è importante viaggiare? (Is travelling important to you?). You can use the answers of our interviewees to help you answer this question in Italian. Access the podcast version below in which Mark is back in the studio helping you understand ... Read more

The post CBI To Go 2.01 | Per te è importante viaggiare? – Is travelling important to you? appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

The adventures of Karin and her family continue! In Episode 7 of our Coffee Break German Travel Diaries series we hear about Karin and her family’s wonderful day up the Zugspitze, the highest mountain in Germany at 2962m above sea level. As always, Mark and Andrea discuss the interesting language used in Karin’s travel diary ... Read more

The post Auf der Spitze der Zugspitze – Coffee Break German Travel Diaries Episode 7 appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In this episode of Coffee Break French To Go, Pierre-Benoît asks the question, pour toi, est-il important de voyager ? Is travel important to you? You can use the answers of our interviewees to help you answer this question in French. Access the podcast version below in which Mark is back in the studio helping ... Read more

The post CBF To Go 2.01 | Pour toi, est-il important de voyager ? – Is travel important to you? appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In this week’s episode of the Coffee Break Spanish Travel Diaries, Victoria and Able leave the village of Lastres as they head to the Asturian cities of Gijón and Áviles where they visit the football stadium. As they explore their new surroundings, Mark and Anabel discuss many different aspects of the language used in Victoria’s ... Read more

The post De Gijón a Avilés – Coffee Break Spanish Travel Diaries Episode 7 appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In this week’s episode of Coffee Break Swedish we’re learning how to get about the town. Teacher Hanna explains the different ways to get around in Stockholm and teaches us how to buy a ticket. We’ll also be learning some new greetings so that we can say ‘hello’ in Swedish in different ways.

The post CBSw 1.17 | Jag vill hyra en cykel appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In the latest instalment of La Vérité éclate toujours, we hear another dialogue between James and Yvette before they decide to look at the contents of the USB stick and James clique sur l’icône de la vidéo. What will they discover? There’s only one way to find out! We hear a variety of colloquial structures and ... Read more

The post Chapitre 10 – James clique sur l’icône de la vidéo… appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Join Karin and her family in Episode 6 of the Coffee Break German Travel Diaries as they spend a picturesque day in Garmisch-Partenkirchenm, one of the most popular German skiing areas. Although skiing isn’t on the cards for the family, they still have a fantastic, fun-filled day and even make some new friends. As Mark ... Read more

The post Ein Sommertag in Garmisch – Coffee Break German Travel Diaries Episode 6 appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Join Victoria and Abel in Episode 6 of The Coffee Break Spanish Travel Diaries as they embark on the next leg of their trip around the north of Spain. This time, they head off from San Vicente de la Barquera in Cantabria as they make their way to the village of Lastres in Asturias and ... Read more

The post La costa norte – Coffee Break Spanish Travel Diaries Episode 6 appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Every 30th September, the podcasting world comes together to celebrate podcasting on International Podcast Day. We’re celebrating today by saying thank you to the Coffee Break community in this special podcast episode. International Podcast Day aims to raise awareness about podcasts and gives podcast creators and listeners a chance to celebrate the medium and the podcast ... Read more

The post A special thank you to Coffee Break podcast listeners on International Podcast Day appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

We’re halfway through our journey along the Deutsche Alpenstraße and this week, we’re joining Karin and her family as they climb to the top of the mountain, Der Herzogstand and enjoy the cable car on the way back down before lunch. As hosts Mark and Andrea discuss Karin’s travel diary entry, they identify and review ... Read more

The post Wetter gut, alles gut – Coffee Break German Travel Diaries Episode 5 appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

We’ve reached the halfway point of our trip around the north of Spain with Victoria and Abel. In Episode 5 we’re making the most of our final day in Santander before heading to our next stop in the Cantabria region of northern Spain. It’s known for its medieval towers, Renaissance palaces, and the Romanesque Santa ... Read more

The post Santander y Santillana del Mar – Coffee Break Spanish Travel Diaries Episode 5 appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In the latest episode of Coffee Break Swedish we’re going shopping! We’ll develop a range of new structures which will help us increase our confidence and mastery of Swedish. We’ll also learn how to use the language in a variety of situations where we need to buy things while in a Swedish-speaking area.

The post CBSw 1.16 | Har ni dalahästar appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

It’s time for Chapter 9 of La Vérité éclate toujours and this week, we hear how James reacts when he discovers the identity of Yvette and the reason behind her visit. Will he reveal the secret he’s been keeping to himself? Listen to the episode to find out and pay attention to further examples of ... Read more

The post Chapitre 9 – Le moment propice était arrivé appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In this week’s episode of the Coffee Break German Travel Diaries, Karin and her family approach the Austrian border. They explore the new area and take in the nature around them before having some family fun on the Sommerrodelnbahn (summer toboggan on metal tracks). Listen out for an example of the pluperfect tense as well ... Read more

The post Der Weg ist das Ziel – Coffee Break German Travel Diaries Episode 4 appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

It’s time for another episode of the Coffee Break Spanish Travel Diaries where we’re following Victoria and Abel on their journey around the north of Spain. This week, we’re leaving Bilbao behind and heading to the capital city of the Cantabria region of Spain – Santander! Victoria and Abel try some delicious fish at the ... Read more

The post Llegamos a Cantabria – Coffee Break Spanish Travel Diaries Episode 4 appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Join the Coffee Break Spanish team behind the scenes as they filmed Season 2 of Coffee Break Spanish To Go in the beautiful Spanish city of Salamanca. This video was filmed before lockdown. Coffee Break Spanish teacher Mark studied in Salamanca many years ago, and this was the first time he had returned in over ... Read more

The post Behind the scenes with Coffee Break Spanish in Salamanca appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Join Karin, Johannes, Alex, and Janina in this week’s episode of the Coffee Break German Travel Diaries as they continue their journey through the mountains, taking in the spectacular scenery along the way. In Episode 3, we’re exploring the Wendelstein and the Wasserfall Tatzelwurm before relaxing by the Lagerfeuer (campfire) on the banks of the ... Read more

The post Von See zu See – Coffee Break German Travel Diaries Episode 3 appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

The Coffee Break Spanish Travel Diaries continue as this week, Victoria and Abel explore the Basque city of Bilbao, home to a branch of the famous Guggenheim Museum. Despite the stormy weather leaving them calados hasta los huesos, they make the most of their trip and enjoy some delicious local food. ¡Vamos a Bilbao! Travel ... Read more

The post La lluvia de Bilbao – Coffee Break Spanish Travel Diaries Episode 3 appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In this week’s marathon lesson, Hanna teaches us all of the numbers we need to know (from 11-1000) so that we can confidently pay for things and deal with dates and appointments. Not only that, we’ll also learn the words for days of the week and months of the year so don’t miss this important ... Read more

The post CBSw 1.15 | Nittonhundrasjuttiofyra appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

It’s time for the next instalment of La Vérité éclate toujours and this week, there’s a huge rebondissement (plot twist) as we discover the identity of the mystery visiter. Chapter 8 is based on a dialogue between James and new character, Yvette, so we hear some everyday, informal French in this week’s episode. Listen out ... Read more

The post Chapitre 8 – Vous êtes la fille de Max ! appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

We’re back for the second episode of the Coffee Break German Travel Diaries! This time, we’re accompanying Karin and her family on a hiking trip to explore the breathtaking Chiemgauer Alpen (Chiemgau Alps) before heading back on the road to drive towards the beautiful freshwater lake, Chiemsee. Listen out for lots of new vocabulary including ... Read more

The post Chiemgauer Alpenidylle – Coffee Break German Travel Diaries Episode 2 appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Are you ready for the next stop on Victoria and Abel’s honeymoon adventure in the north of Spain? In this week’s episode, we’re in the town of Guernica doing some sightseeing before making our way to the next stop, Bilbao, to sample some tasty Spanish dishes! Of course, Mark and Anabel discuss the language used ... Read more

The post El pueblo de Guernica – Coffee Break Spanish Travel Diaries Episode 2 appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Welcome to this brand new series from Coffee Break German for intermediate learners. Following in the footsteps of our recent French and Italian Travel Diaries, we’re now heading to Germany for the Coffee Break German Travel Diaries! Join Karin and her family on their road trip through the Alpenstraße with their Wohnmobil (camper van). In ... Read more

The post Los geht’s! – Coffee Break German Travel Diaries Episode 1 appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Welcome to this brand new series from Coffee Break Spanish for intermediate learners! Following on from our French and Italian Travel Diaries released earlier this summer, we’re now heading to the north of Spain to follow the adventures of Victoria and Abel on their luna de miel – their honeymoon. Join Mark and Anabel in Episode 1 ... Read more

The post ¡Empezamos en San Sebastián! – Coffee Break Spanish Travel Diaries Episode 1 appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Now that we’ve mastered the art of ordering in a Swedish restaurant, we’re introducing a new theme in this week’s episode of Coffee Break Swedish. Join native speaker, Hanna as she teaches Mark the key words and phrases to use when checking into a hotel or hostel in Sweden.

The post CBSw 1.14 | Jag har bokat ett rum appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

The plot thickens in the latest instalment of La Vérité éclate toujours! In Chapter 7, James is questioned further by the police before an unexpected visitor appears at his hotel. Listen to the episode to find out more – c’est parti ! Welcome to our new podcast for advanced French learners. In each episode of ... Read more

The post Chapitre 7 – Tout à coup on frappa à la porte appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In our tenth and final episode in this series of Coffee Break Conversations, we are joined by a familiar face in the Coffee Break community – Coffee Break French host, Pierre Benoît! Mark joins Pierre-Benoît in his hometown of Sainte-Marie-sur-Mer, to get to know more about his language-learning story and how he has used languages ... Read more

The post A Coffee Break Conversation with Pierre-Benoît from Coffee Break French appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In the latest episode of Coffee Break Conversations we’re speaking to another Coffee Breaker! Rakesh, from the Indian city of Pune, is in the process of mastering French with Coffee Break. He tells us how he stays motivated and immerses himself in the language despite the fact that he doesn’t get the chance to interact ... Read more

The post A Coffee Break Conversation with French learner Rakesh appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

After James suspects he was being followed when leaving the hospital, he carefully reflects on his every move since arriving in Paris, in an attempt to work out who this mysterious person may be. His friend’s life is at stake and for the first time in his career as a journalist, he feels powerless – ... Read more

The post Chapitre 6 – Il se sentit perdu, désemparé, désespéré … appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

We’re heading to a Swedish restaurant this week to put everything we’ve been learning over the past few weeks into practise. By the end of this episode we’ll be able to order confidently when dining out in Sweden. Emma, our Cultural Correspondent, also tells us all about husmanskost – traditional home-cooked Swedish food. Smaklig måltid!

The post CBSw 1.13 | Har ni något ledigt bord? appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

Our virtual journey through Tuscany is coming to an end! Join Giulia and Paolo in the tenth and final episode of this series of the Coffee Break Italian Travel Diaries as they round off their trip by the sea in the beautiful coastal town of Piombino. Listen to the episode to hear what they get ... Read more

The post Ultima fermata: Piombino – Coffee Break Italian Travel Diaries Episode 10 appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

In this episode of Coffee Break German To Go, Julia asks the question Welche ist deine (deutsche) Lieblingsstadt? (informal) or Welche ist Ihre (deutsche) Lieblingsstadt? (formal). You can use the answers of our interviewees to help you answer this question in German. In the first part of the video, watch the interviews without subtitles and try ... Read more

The post CBG To Go 2.10 | Welche ist deine (deutsche) Lieblingsstadt? – What is your favourite (German) city? appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

View Details

As Lara and Noah reach the end of their trip around the south of France, they make the most of the rest of their time in the alpine village of Aime-la-Plagne before heading back to Paris. In the tenth and final episode of this series of the Coffee Break French Travel Diaries, we encounter the ... Read more

The post Terminer en beauté – Coffee Break French Travel Diaries Episode 10 appeared first on Coffee Break Languages.

Coffee Break Languages: Recent Episodes

None